Cambridge: Maths

11
YEAR
MATHEMATICS STANDARD
CambridgeMATHS
STAGE 6
GK POWERS
Covers the
November 2017
Syllabus Update
Mathematics Standard Year 11 ISBN 978-1-108-43463-8 © Powers 2018 Cambridge University Press
Photocopying is restricted under law and this material must not be transferred to another party.
Table of Contents
University Printing House, Cambridge CB2 8BS, United Kingdom
One Liberty Plaza, 20th Floor, New York, NY 10006, USA
477 Williamstown Road, Port Melbourne, VIC 3207, Australia
314–321, 3rd Floor, Plot 3, Splendor Forum, Jasola District Centre, New Delhi – 110025, India
79 Anson Road, #06–04/06, Singapore 079906
Cambridge University Press is part of the University of Cambridge.
It furthers the University’s mission by disseminating knowledge in the pursuit
of education, learning and research at the highest international levels of excellence.
www.cambridge.org
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9781108434638
© Powers Family Trust 2018
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception
and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without the written
permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published 2018
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Cover and text designed by Sardine Design
Typeset by diacriTech
Printed in China by C & C Offset Printing Co. Ltd.
A Cataloguing-in-Publication entry is available from the catalogue
of the National Library of Australia at www.nla.gov.au
ISBN 978-1-108-43463-8 Paperback
Additional resources for this publication at www.cambridge.edu.au/GO
Reproduction and Communication for educational purposes
The Australian Copyright Act 1968 (the Act) allows a maximum of
one chapter or 10% of the pages of this publication, whichever is the greater,
to be reproduced and/or communicated by any educational institution
for its educational purposes provided that the educational institution
(or the body that administers it) has given a remuneration notice to
Copyright Agency Limited (CAL) under the Act.
For details of the CAL licence for educational institutions contact:
Copyright Agency Limited
Level 15, 233 Castlereagh Street
Sydney NSW 2000
Telephone: (02) 9394 7600
Facsimile: (02) 9394 7601
Email: info@copyright.com.au
Reproduction and Communication for other purposes
Except as permitted under the Act (for example a fair dealing for the
purposes of study, research, criticism or review) no part of this publication
may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, communicated or
transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission.
All inquiries should be made to the publisher at the address above.
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or
accuracy of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to in
this publication and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is,
or will remain, accurate or appropriate. Information regarding prices, travel
timetables and other factual information given in this work is correct at
the time of first printing but Cambridge University Press does not guarantee
the accuracy of such information thereafter.
Contents
About the author vii

Introduction and overview viii
Acknowledgements xii
1 Preliminary preparation 1 Syllabus prerequisite

1A Simplifying algebraic expressions 2
1B Index laws 5
1C Expanding algebraic expressions 11
1D Pythagoras’ theorem 15
1E Perimeter 18
1F Area 23
1G Simple interest 29
1H Compound interest 33
1I Frequency tables 37
1J Mean, median and mode 40
Scale factors in similar figures Appendix p.453
Chapter summary 43
Multiple-choice questions 44
Short-answer questions 45
Extended-response questions 46
2 Earning and managing money 47 F1.2

2A Salary and wages ◊ 48 Essential content for the Year 12
2B Annual leave loading and bonuses 52 Standard 1 course is indicated by
2C Overtime and special allowances ◊ 55 the ◊ symbol
2D Commission ◊ 60
2E Piecework, royalties and income from government ◊ 63
2F Allowable tax deductions ◊ 67
2G Taxable income ◊ 70
2H Gross pay, net pay and deductions ◊ 74
2I Calculating tax ◊ 79
Chapter summary 85
3 Formulae and equations 89 MS–A1

3A Substitution ◊ 90
3B Distance, speed and time 93
iii
3C Linear equations ◊ 99
3D Solving equations after substitution 105
3E Changing the subject of the formula 109
3F Blood alcohol content 114
3G Medication 119
Chapter summary 123
4 Measurement and energy 127 M1.1, M1.3

4A Units of measurement ◊ 128
4B Measurement errors ◊ 133
4C Standard form and significant figures 137
4D Food and nutrition 142
4E Energy consumption 146
Chapter summary 151
Extended-response question 154
5 Relative frequency and probability 155 MS–S2

5A Language of probability ◊ 156
5B Definition of probability ◊ 161
5C Tables and tree diagrams 165
5D Range of probabilities 170
5E Complementary events 173
5F Relative frequency ◊ 176
5G Expected frequency 182
5H Blood types 186
Chapter summary 189
6 Perimeter, area and volume 193 M1.2

6A Area of circles and sectors ◊ 194
6B Area of composite shapes ◊ 199
6C Trapezoidal rule 205
6D Surface area of right prisms 209
6E Surface area of cylinders and spheres 213
6F Surface area of pyramids and cones 217
6G Volume of right prisms 222
6H Volume of cylinders and spheres 226
6I Volume of pyramids and cones 230
iv
6J Surface area and volume of composite solids 234
6K Capacity 238
Chapter summary 241
Practice Paper 1 245
7 Classifying and representing data 251 S1.1

7A Data collection ◊ 252
7B Classification of data ◊ 257
7C Dot plots and stem-and-leaf plots ◊ 262
7D Grouped frequency tables ◊ 266
7E Cumulative frequency ◊ 269
7F Frequency and cumulative frequency graphs ◊ 272
7G Pareto charts 277
7H Motor vehicle statistics 281
7I Water usage 285
Chapter summary 289
8 Linear relationships 293 MS–A2

8A Graphing linear functions ◊ 294
8B Gradient and intercept ◊ 298
8C Gradient–intercept formula 302
8D Linear models ◊ 306
8E Direct variation 311
Chapter summary 315
9 Interest and depreciation 319 F1.1

9A Simple interest ◊ 320
9B Simple interest graphs 326
9C Percentage increase or decrease 329
9D Calculating GST 332
9E Straight-line depreciation ◊ 336
Chapter summary 339
10 Exploring and describing data 343 S1.2
10A Measures of central tendency ◊ 344
10B Measures of spread ◊ 349
10C Outliers 355
10D Describing distributions ◊ 358
10E Comparing distributions ◊ 362
10F Parallel box-and-whisker plots 366
Chapter summary 371
11 Working with time 375 MS–M2

11A Units of time 376
11B Timetables 381
11C Latitude and longitude 387
11D Time zones 392
11E Time difference and local time ◊ 397
Chapter summary 401
12 Budgeting and household expenses 405 F1.3

12A Household bills ◊ 406
12B Purchasing a car ◊ 410
12C Car insurance ◊ 414
12D Stamp duty ◊ 417
12E Running and maintenance costs ◊ 420
12F Personal budget ◊ 425
Chapter summary 429
Formulae and data sheet 439

Glossary 443
Appendix: Scale factors in similar figures 453
Answers 461
vi
About the author
Greg Powers is currently the Head of Mathematics at Cabramatta High School

and the coordinator of the Mathematics Head Teacher Western Network. He is
an experienced classroom teacher, having taught for over 30 years in a range
of different schools. Greg has been a senior marker for the HSC, educational
consultant for the Metropolitan South West Region and presented at numerous
MANSW inservices. He has also enjoyed several curriculum roles with the
Department of Education and Training. Greg is an experienced author who
has written numerous texts on mathematics and technology.
vii
Introduction and overview
Cambridge MATHS Mathematics Standard Year 11 provides complete and close coverage of the
NSW Stage 6 Mathematics Standard Year 11 syllabus to be implemented from 2018 including the
November 2017 syllabus update. This course is a common preparation for both the HSC Standard 1 and
HSC Standard 2 courses undertaken in Year 12.
Now part of the CambridgeMATHS series, this resource is part of a continuum from Year 7 through to 12.
The series includes advice on pathways from Stage 5 to Stage 6. The Year 11 resource gives access
to selected Stage 5 CambridgeMATHS/HOTmaths lessons for revision of prior knowledge.
The four components of Mathematics Standard Year 11 — the print book, downloadable PDF textbook, online
Interactive Textbook and Online Teaching Resource — contain a huge range of resources available to schools
in a single package at a convenient low price. There are no extra subscriptions or per-student charges to pay.
Interactive Textbook powered by the HOTmaths platform – included with the print book or
available separately (shown on the page opposite)
The Interactive Textbook is an online HTML version of the print textbook powered by the HOTmaths
platform, completely designed and reformatted for on-screen use, with easy navigation. Its features include:
1 100 of the examples have video versions to encourage independent learning.
2 All exercises including chapter reviews have the option of being done interactively on line. Working
and answers, whether typed or handwritten, and drawings, can be saved and submitted to the teacher
electronically. Answers displayed on screen if selected and worked solutions (if enabled by the
teacher) open in pop-up windows.
3 Marks for each question are recorded and can be adjusted by the teacher.
4 The full suite of the HOTmaths learning management system and communication tools are included in
the platform, with similar interfaces and controls.
5 Worked solutions are included and can be enabled or disabled in the student accounts by the teacher.
6 Interactive widgets and activities based on embedded Desmos windows demonstrate key concepts
and enable students to visualise the mathematics.
7 Desmos scientific and graphics calculator windows are also included.
8 Revision of prior knowledge using selected HOTmaths Year 10 lessons is included.
9 Every section in a chapter has a Quick Quiz of automatically marked multiple choice questions for
students to test their progress.
10 Definitions pop up for key terms in the text, and are also provided in a dictionary.
11 Each chapter has a Study Guide – a concise summary in PowerPoint slides that can be used for
revision and preparation for assessment.
12 Literacy worksheets can be accessed via the Interactive Textbook, with answers in the Online
Teaching Suite, providing activities to help with mathematical terminology.
13 Spreadsheet questions with accompanying spreadsheet files.
Downloadable PDF textbook (shown on the page opposite)
14 The convenience of a downloadable PDF textbook has been retained for times when users cannot go online.
viii
INTERACTIVE TEXTBOOK POWERED BY THE HOTmaths PLATFORM
Numbers refer to the descriptions on the opposite page. HOTmaths platform features are updated regularly.
10 Pop-up definitions 9 Quick quizzes
7 Desmos
calculator
windows
6 Interactive
1 Video Desmos
worked widgets
examples
2 Answers
displayed on
screen
12 Printable
Literacy
work sheet
2 Interactive
exercises with
typing/hand- 11 Study Guides
writing/drawing 13 Spread sheet
5 Worked solutions
entry showing question and (if enabled by teacher) 8 Revision of prior
working files 4 Tasks sent by teacher 10 Dictionary knowledge
PDF TEXTBOOK
DOWNLOADABLE
14 Included with
Interactive Textbook Search
functions
Note-taking
ix
Online Teaching Suite powered by the HOTmaths platform (shown on the page opposite)
The Online Teaching Suite is automatically enabled with a teacher account and appears in the teacher’s
copy of the Interactive Textbook. All the assets and resources are in one place for easy access. Many of
them are opened by clicking on icons in the pages of the Interactive Textbook. The features include:
15 Editable teaching programs with registers, a scope and sequence document and curriculum grid.
16 Topic test worksheets A and B – based on the knowledge, skills and understanding gained in each chapter,
and Revision Quiz worksheets provide HSC-standard questions for further revision for each topic, with
worked solutions. NESA requirements for problem-solving investigative tasks will also be addressed.
17 A HOTmaths-style test generator provides additional multiple choice questions, as well as digital
versions of the multiple choice questions in the test worksheets
18 The HOTmaths learning management system with class and student reports and communication tools
is included.
19 Teacher’s lesson notes – pop-up text boxes containing lesson notes and additional examples that can be
used in class, also available as editable Power Point slides which can be given to students as tutorials.
Content features of the textbook

Working mathematically is integrated into each exercise using three levels.
• Level 1 – questions to develop understanding, fluency and communication. These questions are basic and
straightforward in style to ensure early success. Level 1 caters for a student working at bands 1 to 3.
Students going on to do HSC Standard 1 should do Level 1 questions, and Level 2 at the teacher’s discretion.
• Level 2 – questions to develop problem solving, reasoning and justification. These questions extend
and broaden students understanding of the concepts of the section. Level 2 caters for a student
working at bands 4 to 5.
• Level 3 – questions to challenge the knowledge and understanding of the top students. Level 3 caters
for a student working at band 6.
Other features:
20 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation can be used at the end of year 10 or the beginning of Year 11 to prepare
for the course and ensure that basic skills are covered. It could also be used for review during the course.
21 The Year 11 textbook is divided into smaller manageable topics to assist teaching.
22 Syllabus topic focus and outcomes are listed at the beginning of each chapter.
23 Each section and exercise begins at the top of the page to make them easy to find and access.
24 Exercises are differentiated into three levels to allow teachers to assess students abilities and to cater
for those likely to do Standard 1 or 2 at HSC.
25 Each exercise develops student’s skills to work mathematically at their level.
26 Step-by-step worked examples with precise explanations (and video versions for most of them)
encourage independent learning, and are linked to exercises.
27 Important concepts are formatted in boxes for easy reference.
28 Spreadsheet activities are integrated throughout the text, with accompanying Excel files in the
Interactive Textbook.
29 Chapter reviews contain a chapter summary and multiple-choice, short-answer and extended-response
questions.
30 A comprehensive glossary and HSC formula sheet are included.
31 There are two complete HSC practice papers.
x
ONLINE TEACHING SUITE POWERED BY THE HOTmaths PLATFORM
Numbers refer to the descriptions on the opposite page. HOTmaths platfrom features are updated regularly
16 Printable
test and
19 Teacher’s quiz sheets
lesson notes
(Indicated by T icon in
teacher’s interactive 15 Teaching
textbook) programs
18 Class reports
17 Test 18 Student
generator results
Teacher’s copy
18 Tasks sent to
of interactive
students
textbook
PRINT TEXTBOOK
24 Exercises
21 Smaller 29 Chapter
manageable Review
topics
30 Glossary
to assist
teaching Answers
31 HSC
practice
Icons indicate papers
digital assets
26 Step-by- 26 Questions
step worked linked to
examples examples
with precise
explanations
xi
Acknowledgements
The author and publisher wish to thank the following sources for permission to reproduce material:
Cover: © Getty Images / Mike Schirf.
Images: © Getty Images / marco wong, Chapter 1 Opener / Allvision, 1B (1) / SolStock, 1B (2) / Maksim
Ozerov, 1E (1) / Dina Belenko Photography, 7F (1) / Bob Wickham, 1G (1) / Xesai, 1G (2) / Daniel Sambraus,
1H (1) / BrianAJackson, 1H (2) / Robert Daly, 1I (1) / Paul Bradley, 1I (2) / Daniel Hurst Photography, 3A (1) /
Alphotographic, 3B (1) / Ljupco, 3B (2) / NilsBV, 3B (3) / kokka, 3B (4) / Westend61, 3B (6) / Adam Crowley,
3C (1) / Tatina Kolesnikova, 3C (2) / Dragon images, 3C (3) / Paul Bradbury, 3C (4) / Jeff Kro, 3D (1) / Carlos
Clarivan / SPL, 3D (2) / MathieuRivrin, 3D (3) / Compassionate Eye Foundation / David Oxberry / OJO Images
Ltd. 3E (1) / Wavebreakmedia, 3E (3) / Chris Ryan, 3E (3) / KatarzynaBialasiewicz, 3F (1) / Ashlynne Lobdell,
3F (2) / NighAndDayImages, 3F (3) / Peter Cade, 3G (1) / Bloomberg, 3G (2) / Frank and Helena, 3G 93) /
Christopenr Bissell, 3G (4) / volkansengor, 4A (1) / Dmytro Shestakov, 4A (2) / Aerometres, 4A (3) / gerenme,
4B (1) / Georgijevic, 4B (2) / scanrai, 4B (3) / Dave Fleetham, 4C (2) / ClaudioVentrella, 4C (3) / Mark Garlick,
4C (4) / Gurzzza, 4D (1) / Sanamadh, 4D (2) / Peter Dazeley, 4E (1) / jefffarsai, Chapter 4 Opener / Bestsie Van
Der Meer, 7A (1) / The Age, 7A (2) / Andre Chin, 7A (3) / Melissa Renwick, 7B (2) / Ian Walton, 7B (3) / Morsa
Images, 7C(1) / Kelvin Murray, 7D (2) / s-c-s, 7D (3) / TkKurikawa, 7D (4) / Cameron Spencer, 7E (1) / Tom
Cockrem, 7F (1) / Miguel Pereira, 7F (2) / Przemyslaw Fall, 7F (3) / Martin Novak, 7H (1) / Alex Hibbert, 7H
(2) / Eric Van Den Bruelle, 7H (3) / Jonathan Ampersand Esper, 7I (1) / Adrienne Bresahan, Chapter 5 Opener /
Cf Lagi, 8B (1) / John W Banagan, 8B (2) / Ezra Balley, 8C (1) / izzetugutmen, 8D (1) / Claver Carrol, 8D (2) /
IlexImage, 8D (3) / Ken Welsh, 8D (4) / PeopleImages, 8D (5) / travellinglight, 8E (1) / MacFormat Magazine,
8E (3) / Peter Dazeley, 9A (1) / SolStock, 9A (2) / Sonsam, 9A (3) / Ridofranz, 9A (4) / Camilo Morales, 9A
(5) / freestylephoto, 9C (1) / ThamKC, 9D (1) / monkeybusinessimages, 9D (2) / Bloomberg, 9D (3) / Rohappy,
9D (4) / Martin Philbey, 9E (1) / Peter Cade, 9E (2) / Andres Brookes, Chapter 7 Opener / DebbiSmirnoff, 6A
(1) / Bloomberg, 6A (2) / Jessica Taylor, 6A (3) / Alan Novell, 6C (1) / Andy Ryan, 6D (1) / Gizelka, 6E (1) /
Lleerogers, 6E (2) / Atomic Imagery, 6E (3) / camacho9999, 6H (1) / Jeff J Mitchell, 6I (1) / chamelonseye, 6J (1)
/ Dave Reede, 6J (2) / Douglas Johns, 6J (3) / Antenna 7B (1) / Scott Olson, 6K (1) / ballyscanlon, 6K (2) / Jose
A. Berant Bacete, Chapter 8 Opener / Tom Merton, 10A (1) / Darren Tierney, 10A (2) / Dahlina Rahman, 10A (3)
/ Gary Burchell, 10A (4) / Bjorn Lample, 10B (1) / Glyn Kirk, 10B (2) / Sean Gallup, 10B (3) / Kolba, 10B (4)
/ Fat Camera, 10C (1) / Heritage Images, 10D (1) / alvarez, 10E (1) / JohnnyGreig, 10E (2) / Mayte Torres, 10F
(1) / skynesher, 10F (2) / Klaus Vedfel, 10F (3) / Tom Merton, 10F (4) / sturti, 10F (5) / Drazen Lovric, 2A (1)
/ FotoSpeedy, 2B (1) / XiXinXing, 2B (2) / Toss Beckley, 2C (1) / Patrick Syder Images, 2C (2) / NadejdaReid,
2C (3) / NadejaReid, 2C (3) / jcarillet, 2c (4) / Asanka Brendon Ratnayake, 2C (5) / Wesntend61, 8E (2) / Paul
Bradbury, 2D (1) / fotostorm, 2D (2) / Daisy-Daisy, 2E (1) / sturt, 2E (2) / Chris Ryan, 2F (1) / Peter Cade, 2F
(2) / Fairfax, 2G (1) / utah778, 2G (2) / Matt Lincolm, 2G (3) / Carol Wiley, 2G (4) / SMH, Johnny Greig, 2H
(1) / Richard Drury, 2H (2) / Tim Robbins, 2H (3) / Ezra Balley, 2H (4) / DaLiu, 2I (1) / sturti, 2I (2) / Bridget
Webber, 5A (1) / Robyn Mac, 5A (2) / FangXiaNuo, 5A (3) / Patrick Hamilton, 5A (2) / asafta,, 5B (2) / bjeayes,
5B (2) / CaronB, 5B (3) / Chrisds, 5C (1) / Zheka-Boss, 5C (2) / baji1998, 5D (1) / Nicola Tree, 5D (2) / Dorling
Kindersley, 5E (1) / Mark Kolbe, 5E (2) / Michael Steel, 5F (1) / Mayte Torres, 5F (2) / Dave Greenwood, 5F (3) /
Mick Ryan, 5F (1) / Mich Ryan, 5g (1) / pbombaert, 5G (2) / monkeybusinessimages, 5H (1) / PeopleImages, 5H
(2) / LdF, 11A (1) / jedzura, 11A (3) / B2M Productions, 11A (4) / Viktoria Nigmatulina, 11A (5) / lukaves, 11C
(1) / vasos, 11C (2) / maja/a.collectionRF, 11D (1) / Airphoto Australia, 11E (1) / Bob Thomas, 11E (2) / Robert
Lang, 11E (3) / martin-dm, 12B (1) / Peter Dazeley, 12B (2) / uah778, 12C (1) / Aquir, 12D (1) / hidesey, 12D (2)
/ Track5, 12E (1) / Bloomberg, 12E (2) / spectrelabs, 12E (3) / Kikka White, 12E (4); Creative Commons CC0 1.0
Universal Public Domain Dedication, 5B (1).
xii
1 Preliminary
preparation
Syllabus prerequisite: Preliminary preparation
This topic provides the basic knowledge, skills and understandings required in Year 11.
Outcomes
• Simplify an algebraic expression.
• Establish and apply index laws in algebraic form.
• Multiply and divide algebraic terms.
• Find unknown sides using Pythagoras’ theorem.
• Calculate the perimeter of simple figures.
• Calculate the area of composite shapes.
• Calculate simple interest.
• Calculate the future value, compound interest and present value.
• Create frequency tables to organise data.
• Calculate the median and mean.
Digital Resources for this chapter

In the Interactive Textbook:
• Videos • Literacy worksheet • Quick Quiz • Solutions (enabled
• Widgets • Spreadsheets • Study guide by teacher)
In the Online Teaching Suite:

• Teaching Program • Tests • Review Quiz • Teaching Notes
Knowledge check
In the Interactive Textbook you can take a test of prior knowledge required for
this chapter, and depending on your score you may be directed to revision from
the previous years’ work.
2 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1A
1A Simplifying algebraic expressions

A pronumeral (letter) represents a number. It may stand for an unknown value or series of values
that change. For example, in the equation x + 5 = 8, x is a pronumeral that represents a value. Its
value can be determined because we know 3 + 5 = 8, so x = 3. Terms that have exactly the same
pronumerals such as 2a and 5a are called like terms. Only like terms can be added and subtracted.
It involves adding and subtracting the coefficients. Adding and subtracting like terms simplifies the
algebraic expression. It is often called collecting the like terms.
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING LIKE TERMS
1 Find the like terms or the terms that have exactly the same pronumerals.
2 Only like terms can be added or subtracted, unlike terms cannot.
3 Add or subtract the coefficients or numbers before the pronumeral of the like terms.
Example 1: Adding and subtracting like terms 1A
Simplify 5 x 2 + 6 x − 3 x 2 − x.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Group the like terms together. 5x 2 + 6 x − 3x 2 − x = 5x 2 − 3x 2 + 6 x − x
2 Add and subtract coefficients of like terms. = 2 x 2 + 5x
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING ALGEBRAIC FRACTIONS
An algebraic fraction contains pronumerals.

1 Find a common denominator (preferably the lowest) if denominators are different.
2 Express each fraction as an equivalent fraction with the common denominator.
3 Simplify the numerator by adding or subtracting the like terms.
Example 2: Adding and subtracting algebraic fractions 1A
Write 2a − a as a single fraction.

3 6
S OLUTI O N:
2a − a
1 The lowest common denominator of 3 and 6 is 6. 3 6
2 Write the equivalent fractions by multiplying top
= 2a × 2 − a = 4 a − a
and bottom of the first fraction by 2 (3 × 2 = 6). 3×2 6 6 6
3 Subtract the like terms in the numerator and simplify. = 3a = a
6 2
1A Simplifying algebraic expressions 3
Exercise 1A LEVEL 1
1 Simplify by collecting like terms.

a 6g + 2g b 5 x + 12 x c 8d − 7d
2 2
d 5x − x e c 2 + 8c 2 f 2r 3 − 5r 3
g − m + ( −2m) h 21t + ( −13t ) i 9 v 2 − (−3v 2 )
Example 1 2 Simplify by collecting like terms.
a 3w + 2 + 4 w b 2q + 3q − 8 c 1 + 4 a + 11a
2 2
d 5x + 4 y − 2 x e 4 b 2 + 6a − 5a f n 3 + 2m − 4 n 3
g 3 x 2 + 2 y − 15 x 2 − 3 y h 5a 2 + b + 3a 2 − 2b i 5z 2 + y − z 2 + 8 y

a 7u 2 − 4u 4 − u 2 + 9 b 6q 3 + q 2 − 4 q 2 + q 3 c 5b + 9b 2 − 5b − 8b 2
d 2 x 2 + 6 x 3 − 3x 3 − x 2 e p2 + 3 p + p2 − p f w + w 2 − 3w + w 2
g 3c + c 2 + 2 + c h 5 − k2 + k3 − 2 i 4 y − 5 − 3y − 2 y2
Example 2 4 Express each as a single fraction.
y
a 5+ b 3−x c 2w + 4 d 8 − 5t
7 7 4 4 5 5 9 9
5 Add or subtract these algebraic fractions.
3y 2 y
a m+m b − c 2 x + 3x d 3b − b
5 5 7 7 3 3 11 11
e d + 2d f 7n − 2n g 7b + 4 b h 5w − 4 w
3 3 13 13 2 2 6 6
7y y
a x+x b − c 4m + m d r −r
2 4 8 4 2 10 2 8
e 5x + x f 11b − 2b g h + h h
2p p
−
14 2 6 3 20 10 4 12
y 3y y
a 2k + k − k b 5x − x + 5x c − + d 5c − c + 4c
3 4 12 6 8 24 2 10 5 6 2 3
LEVEL 2
8 Copy and add like terms where

possible to complete the table. + x2 3x2 − 2x x2 + x
3x2
6x
x2 − 2x
−2x
4 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1A
9 The perimeter of a rectangle is the distance around the outside of the rectangle. The rectangle
below has a length of x 2 and a breadth of 2 x. Write an expression for the perimeter of this
rectangle by collecting like terms.
2x
x2
10 Ava went shopping. She spent $4 y 2 on a jacket, $3 y on a pair of shoes, and $2 y 2 on a skirt. If
she had $500, write an expression in simplified form for how many dollars she has left.
11 A pentagon has four sides of length x 2 + y and one side of length x + 2 y . The pentagon is
shown below. Write an expression in simplified form for the perimeter of this pentagon by
collecting like terms.
x2 + y x2 + y
x2 + y x2 + y
x + 2y

a k+k b 5b − b c 3r + 4r d 6r − 3r
3 4 6 8 2 3 7 10
e 3n + n f 5d − d g 4a + a h
3y y
−
5 6 12 8 15 10 4 11
LEVEL 3

a m+m+m b 4x + x − x c 9m − m + 2m d h+h−h
6 2 4 5 2 4 10 6 3 3 4 7

y b 5− x c 8m + m 2y
a 3+ 2 7 d y−
7 9
e 4y +
2y − 1 f 3x − x + 2 g 2a + 1 + 3a + 2 h 5 w + 1 − 6w + 2
3 4 2 3 4 5
1B Index laws 5
1B Index laws
Index form or index notation is used to
write expressions in a shorter way, such as
a × a = a 2. When a number or pronumeral
is expressed in index form, the index or
power represents the number of times the
multiplication occurs. That is,
a n = a × a × a × … × a × a (n factors)
Index laws shown below are rules for
working with algebraic terms expressed in
index form.
INDEX LAWS
1 a m × a n = a m+n – Multiplying terms in index form (same base), add the indices.
2 a m ÷ a n = a m−n – Dividing terms in index form (same base), subtract the indices.
m
or a n = a m − n
a
3 (a m ) n = a mn – A term in index form raised to a power, multiply the indices.
4 a0 = 1 – A term in index form raised to the power of zero is one.
Multiplying and dividing using the index laws

Algebraic terms are multiplied and divided to form a single algebraic expression. This requires the
algebraic expression to be expressed in expanded form. If the algebraic terms contain fractions, it
is easier to first cancel any common factors in the numerator and denominator. The coefficients are
then multiplied and divided, and finally the pronumerals are multiplied and divided. The index laws
shown above are often applied to make the calculations easier.
MULTIPLYING AND DIVIDING ALGEBRAIC TERMS
1 Write in expanded form.

2 If the algebraic term is a fraction, cancel any common factors.
3 Multiply and divide the coefficients.
4 Multiply and divide the pronumerals. Use the index laws if required.
5 Write the coefficient before the pronumerals.
6 Write the pronumerals in alphabetical order and express in index form.
6 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1B
Example 3: Multiplying algebraic terms using the index laws 1B
Simplify the following.

a 5y 2 × 4 y3 b ab 3 × (−2a 5 b)
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in expanded form. a 5y 2 × 4 y3
= 5 × y2 × 4 × y3
2 Multiply the coefficients (5 × 4 = 20). = 5 × 4 × y2 × y3
3 Multiply the pronumerals using the index = 20 y 5
laws ( y 2 × y 3 = y 5 ).
4 Express answer using index notation.
5 Write in expanded form. b ab 3 × (−2a 5 b)
6 Multiply the coefficients (1 × −2 = −2). = a × b 3 × −2 × a 5 × b
7 Multiply the pronumerals using the index
laws (a × a 5 = a 6 , b 3 × b = b 4 ). = −2 × a × a 5 × b 3 × b
8 Write the pronumerals in alphabetical order.
9 Express answer using index notation. = −2a 6 b 4
Example 4: Dividing algebraic terms using index laws 1B

a 10 d 12 ÷ 5d 3 b 21m 2 n
7m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in expanded form. a 10 d 12 ÷ 5d 3 = 10 ÷ 5 × d 12 ÷ d 3
2 Divide the coefficients (10 ÷ 5 = 2). = 2 × d 12 ÷ d 3
3 Divide the pronumerals using the index = 2d 12− 3
laws (d 12 ÷ d 3 = d 9 ).
4 Express answer using index notation. = 2d 9
2
5 Write in expanded form. b 21m n = 21 × m × m × n
7m 7×m
6 Divide the coefficients (21 ÷ 7 = 3). 7 × 3 × m × m1 × n
= 1
71 × m 1
7 Cancel the pronumeral (m) in both = 3×m×n
the numerator and denominator
(m 2 ÷ m = m).
8 Write the coefficient before the = 3mn
pronumerals.
9 Write the pronumerals in alphabetical
order.
1B Index laws 7
Example 5: Applying the index laws 1B

a 2x 0 + 5 b (6 pq 3 ) 2
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in expanded form. a 2x 0 + 5 = 2 × x 0 + 5
2 Replace x 0 with 1 (a 0 = 1). = 2 ×1+ 5
3 Evaluate. =7
4 Write in expanded form. b (6 pq ) = (6 × p1 × q 3 ) 2
3 2
5 Raise each term to the power of 2. Use the = 62 × p2 × q6

index law (a m ) n = a mn to simplify each = 36 p 2 q 6
algebraic expression.
6 Write the pronumerals in alphabetical order.
Example 6: Simplifying algebraic terms with fractions 1B

4 4 xy 5
Simplify x 2 ×
6y 10
S OLUTI O N:
5 5
1 Write fractions in expanded form. x 4 × 4 xy = x 4 × 4 × x × y
2 Determine any common factors in the 6y2 10 6 × y2 10
numerator and the denominator. x 4 2 1 ×2 1 × x × y 5
= ×
3 Cancel out the common factors (2 is 21 × 3 × y 2 21 × 5
a common factor of 4 and 6, 2 is a
common factor of 4 and 10).
4 Cancel the pronumeral ( y 2 ) in both the x 4 x × y53
= ×
numerator and denominator as it is a 3× y 2 5
common factor ( y 5 ÷ y 2 = y 3 ).
5 Multiply the numerators together x 4 × x × y3
=
( x 4 × x = x 5). 3×5
6 Multiply the denominators together. x × y3 x 5 × y3
5
= =
7 Express answer using index form. 3×5 15
5 3
x y
8 Write the coefficient before the = (or 1 x 5 y 3 )
pronumerals. However it is acceptable 15 15
x 5 y3
to leave answer as .
15
Exercise 1B LEVEL 1
1 Multiply these algebraic terms.

a 5w × 3 b 6 × 4p c 4×6f ×5
d x × 8y e 3m × ( −3n) f −7r × 5k × 3
g 2h × 6 g × 3 h 7n × n × 3 i 30 a × 5a
Example 3 2 Simplify each of the following using the index laws.
a m3 × m4 b y6 × 3y2 c 2z 3 × 4 z 2
d 24 y 2 × 2 y 2 e 3a 2 × 2a 5 f 4 w10 × 2 w 5
g 2st 3 × 7s 5t 4 h − pq 2 × (−5 p 2 q 3 ) i 6c 5 d 2 × (−2c 3 d 8 )
3 Find the product of these terms.

a 5a 2 , a 3 and 2a 4
b x 4 , 3 x 7 and ( −4 x )
c 6 y 3 , 2 y 2 and 3 y 4
d mn 2 , m 2 n 4 and mn
e (−7ab 2 ), (−2ab 3 ) and a 2
f 2cde, c 2 d 4 and 4 d 3e
Example 4a 4 Divide these algebraic terms.

a 16 w ÷ 4 b 18c 2 ÷ 2 c 24 s 2 ÷ (−3)
d 44 b ÷ 11b e ( −20 gh) ÷ 4 g f 15 xy 2 ÷ 5 xy
g 4a 3 ÷ 4a 2 h 24 m 2 ÷ 12m i (−28 z 3 ) ÷ 7 z
5 Simplify each of the following using the index laws.

a y7 ÷ y2 b 12b 8 ÷ b 2 c 15 x 5 ÷ (−5 x 4 )
d 20 m 7 ÷ 10 m 3 e 30t 12 ÷ (−10t 3 ) f (−15b 6 ) ÷ 15b 2
g 6d 15 ÷ 9d 2 h 16q 4 ÷ 12q 2 i 21e 5 ÷ 14e 3
6 Simplify.
a 3w 5 × 4 w ÷ 2 w 2 b 10 y 5 ÷ 2 y 3 × y8 c x 6 × 9 x ÷ 3x 4
d 7a 6 × (−2a) ÷ a 3 e (−20 c10 ) × 4c 5 ÷ 10c f 7e 3 × 2e 2 × −4e
Example 4b 7 Simplify these algebraic terms.
a 14 a b 20t c 16 z
7 5 2z
6
d
( −5ab)
e 14 n 2 (−4 x 10 y)
30 f
14 n (−24 x 3 )
6 y7 5 3x 4 y
g h 14 d 2 e i
(−48 y 3 ) 2e 6x 2 y3
1B Index laws 9
Example 5b 8 Remove the grouping symbol and express each answer in simplest form.
a ( x 4 )3 b (s 3 ) 2 c (−3 y) 2
d (4 n 3 ) 3 e (− a 4 b 2 ) 5 f (5r 2 t ) 4
g (a 2 b) 3 × (a 3 b 4 ) 2 h (−6ef 7 ) 4 × (e 2 f ) 3 i (6ab 2 ) 3 × (2a 4 b 6 ) 2
Example 5a 9 Express in simplest index form.

a y0 b 20 c 5 × a0
d 3m 0 + 4 e ab 0 f c0b0
g −5 × 2 x 0 h (2 p 3 ) 0 i 7e 0 × f 0

a 8q 2 × 2q 3 b 4u 6 × (−2u) c a 4 × 3a × 8a 3
d 28 x 8 ÷ 4 x 4 e 34 m10 ÷ 17m 3 f 4 d 10 ÷ (−4 d 2 )
g (5g 4 ) 3 h (c 5 d 2 ) 4 i (−2 x 3 y) 6
j 5n 0 × 4 k (−9a 5 ) 0 l a 0 × 3b 0
11 Copy and multiply the algebraic terms to complete the table.
× x2 ( −3 x 4 ) 4 xy 3
2x2
( −5 x 3 y 5 )
7 x 5 y8
12 Copy and divide the algebraic terms to complete the table.
÷ ( −2 a 2 ) ab 2 3 a 2 b2
6 a4
( −3 a 5 b 2 )
12 a 6 b4
Example 6 13 Simplify.
8y
a × 4y b 6d × 2d c 5w × 2 w
3 5 9
d 5 x × 12 e 2 × 3a f 5w × 2 w
4 x a 6 7 9
g 10 a × 3b h m × 6mn i d× c
b 4 9n 15 e 3d
LEVEL 2

a 12m12 × 3m 3 ÷ 9m 2 b 4 x 5 ÷ 2 x × (−7 x 7 ) c 9 y 6 × (15 y 6 ÷ 3 y 2 )
8x 3 y2
15 Express in simplest form.
16 x 2 y 3
16 The plane shape below is a rectangle with a length of 3 x 2 and a breadth of 5 x . Write an
2
expression in simplest form for the area of this rectangle.
5x
2
3x2
17 Simplify.
3 3 6
a 4 x × 6x b 5a 3 × 3a c 7v × 2v 2
3 6 8
3 7
4 y 4 15 x 6 e 4 n × 2m4 f 6e 3 × 22e 4
d × 3
3x 2 y 8n m 11 f 9f3
2 6 7 2
g 20 a5 × 5b h m × 3m n i d 4 × c 2e
b 4 15n 9 e 4 7d
LEVEL 3
18 Simplify.
2 3 2 3 2 3
a 15h × 3k b 21v × 5u c 18a × 6b × a
3k 4 15uv 7 12b 9a 2
3 2 3(m + 1) 3 7 y4 5( y − 2)
d 9m × 26mn e × 4m f ×
3m n 8m 2(m + 1) 10( y − 2) 21y 6
19 Simplify these algebraic expressions.

5 3y3z 5 4 16 p 5 4 3 3
a 18 x 3 × b 2m 2 n 3 × c 28a × 5b c2
3 yz 6 xy 4m p 8mn 3 10 bc 7ab
3 2 8 w 5 × (−6 wu 2 ) 7 12
d 6d × c × 18c e f 16c5 × 24ed
9c 2 12d 2 w 5u × u 5 12c d × 2e 3 d 6
1C Expanding algebraic expressions

Grouping symbols in algebraic expressions indicate the order of operations.
The two most commonly used grouping symbols are parentheses () and brackets []. They are
removed by using order of operations or the distributive law. This is illustrated below.
Using order of operations Using distributive law
2 × (3 + 1) = 2 × 4 2 × (3 + 1) = 2 × 3 + 2 × 1
= 8 = 6+2
= 8
To expand an algebraic expression using the distributive law, multiply the numbers or terms inside
the grouping symbols by the number or term outside the grouping symbols. The resulting algebraic
expression is simplified by collecting the like terms.
EXPANDING ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS
1 Multiply the number or term outside the grouping symbol by the

a first term inside the grouping symbol
b second term inside the grouping symbol.
2 Simplify and collect like terms if required.
a ( b + c) = a × b + a × c a ( b − c) = a × b − a × c
= ab + ac = ab − ac
Make sure you remember to multiply all the terms inside the grouping symbol by the number or
term outside the grouping symbols.
Notice that in the numerical example of the distributive law at the top of the page,
2 × (3 + 1) = 2 × 3 + 2 × 1 is the same as a(b + c) = a × b + a × c, with a = 2, b = 3 and c = 1.
Example 7: Expanding algebraic expressions 1C
Expand 5(2 y − 3).
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in expanded form. 5(2 y − 3) = 5 × (2 y − 3)
2 Multiply the first term inside the parenthesis (2 y) by 5 × (2 y − 3) = 5 × 2 y + 5 × (−3)
the number outside the parenthesis (5). = 10 y − 15
3 Multiply the second term inside the parenthesis ( −3)
by the number outside the parenthesis (5).
4 Write in simplest form.
12 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1C
Example 8: Expanding algebraic expressions 1C
Expand −(m − 5).
S OLUTI O N:
1 Multiply the first term inside the parenthesis (m) −(m − 5) = −1 × (m − 5)
by the number outside the parenthesis ( −1). = −1 × m − 1 × −5
2 Multiply the second term inside the parenthesis
( −5) by the number outside the parenthesis ( −1).
3 Write in simplest form. = −m + 5
Example 9: Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions 1C
Remove the grouping symbols for 2(3 x + 4) + 3( x − 1) and simplify if possible.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the expanded form 2(3 x + 4) + 3( x − 1)
2 Multiply the first term inside the parenthesis (3 x ) = 2 × (3 x + 4) + 3 × ( x − 1)
by the number outside the parenthesis (2). = 2 × 3 x + 2 × 4 + 3( x − 1)
3 Multiply the second term inside the parenthesis = 6 x + 8 + 3( x − 1)
(+4) by the number outside the parenthesis (2).
4 Repeat the first two steps for the second = 6 x + 8 + 3 × x + 3 × −1
parenthesis. = 6 x + 8 + 3x − 3
5 Simplify by collecting the like terms. = 9x + 5
Example 10: Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions 1C
Expand y(5 y + 1) − y( y − 6) and simplify if possible.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in expanded form y(5 y + 1) − y( y − 6)
2 Multiply the first term inside the parenthesis (5 y) = y × (5 y + 1) − y × ( y − 6)
by the term outside the parenthesis ( y). = y × 5 y + y × 1 − y( y − 6)
3 Multiply the second term inside the parenthesis = 5 y 2 + y − y × y − y × −6
(+1) by the term outside the parenthesis ( y).
4 Repeat the first two steps for the second = 5y2 + y − y2 + 6 y
parenthesis.
5 Simplify by collecting the like terms. = 4 y2 + 7 y
Exercise 1C LEVEL 1
1 Ryan was required to remove the grouping symbols. This was his solution.
3(3 x − 2) = 9 x − 2
Where is the error in Ryan’s working?
Example 7 2 Expand each of the following.

a 3(a + 2) b 2(d + 1) c 7(b − 2)
d 2(3 x + 4) e 2(5 x − 7) f 4(9b + 1)
g 4(5 + 2t ) h 6(1 − 2 w) i 5(3 + 9d )
j 8(5e − 2d ) k 5(4 a + 9b) l 7(2h + 8 g)
Example 8 3 Expand each of the following.

a −4( x + 3) b −3( y + 5) c −(b + 8)
d −7( k − 2) e −6( w − 1) f −2( x − 13)
g −2(4 + 2q) h −5(3 − 4r ) i −7(8 − 2s)
4 Expand each of the following.

a y( y + 1) b v( v + 4) c n(n + 10)
d x (2 x − 3) e e(3e + 5) f d (6d − 2)
g z (7e + 3 f ) h a(2b − 3c) i c( d + 4 e)
5 Remove the grouping symbols and simplify if possible.

a 2( g + 1) + 4 g b 7(s + 2) + s c 3( y − 9) − 2 y
d 5 x − 4( x − 2) e 6 z + 2( z − 1) f 3q − 7(q − 5)
6 Remove the grouping symbols and simplify if possible.

a 4( x − 1) + 2 x + 5 b 7(3 y − 2) + 4 y − 2 c 2(5b + 2) − b − 8
d 4r + 17 + 5(r − 3) e 2n − 8 + 3(n + 2) f 5q + 2 − (q + 9)

a 4( y + 3) b 2(c + 1) c 5(a − 3)
d −3(4 + 3e 2 ) e 4(1 − 2b 2 ) f −6(3 + 4 g 2 )

a k ( k + 3) b b(2b − 6) c y(5 − 3 y)
d x (4 x − 1) e − a ( b + 4 c) f p(5q − 3r )
14 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1C
LEVEL 2
Example 9 9 Simplify the following.
a 2( x + 1) + 5( x − 1) b 3( y + 2) + 2( y + 1)
c 5(a + 2) + 3(a + 4) d 8(c − 3) + 5(c + 3)
e 6(s + 6) + 2(2s − 1) f 5(h + 7) + 2(2h − 7)
g 4(3 x − 1) − 2( x − 2) h 9( z + 5) − 7( z − 2)
i 5(2c − 4) − 3(c + 7) j 5(5g − 1) − 4( g − 2)
k 7(2u − 3) − (u − 3) l −(4 d − 1) − 3(d − 3)
10 Taylah was required to remove the grouping symbols and simplify. This was her solution.
6(3 x − 2) − 2( x + 3) = 18 x − 12 − 2 x + 6
= 16 x − 6
Where is the error in Taylah’s working?
Example 10 11 Remove the grouping symbols and simplify if possible.
a x ( x − 5) + x ( x + 2) b b(b + 3) + b(b + 1)
c y( y − 3) + y( y + 8) d g(2 g + 3) − g( g + 3)
e v( v − 7) + v (6 v + 4) f b(5b − 1) − b(2 + 4 b)
g 2u(u − 2) + u(u + 9) h 4 n(n − 6) − n(n + 1)
i 3d (d + 7) + d (2d + 5) j e(e + 2) − 7e(e − 9)
k 6 k ( k − 3) + k ( k + 3) l t (5 − 3t ) + 7t (2 − t )
12 Expand and simplify the algebraic expression 2ab(ab − 3) − ab(ab − 1).
LEVEL 3
13 Simplify the following.

a x 2 (2 x + 3) − 2( x + 1) b a 2 (a + 2) − 4(a + 3)
c y 2 (5 y + 2) − 3( y + 7) d b(b + 7) − b 2 (3b + 2)
e z (3z − 1) + z 2 ( z − 5) f e(7 − e) − e 2 (2e + 6)
g x ( x 2 + 7) − x ( x 2 + 2) h a(2a 2 − 1) + a(a 2 + 4)
i v(2 − v 2 ) − v(1 − v 2 ) j a 2 (a + b) − b(a + b)
k x 2 ( x 2 + y) − x ( x + 3 y) l y 2 ( y + 4 z ) − y( z 2 + 1)
14 Remove grouping symbols.

a m 2 (5m 4 + 1) b 2 x 4 ( x 2 − 3 x + 4) c − a 4 (2 + 3a 4 − a 8 )
15 Expand and simplify the following algebraic expressions.

a 5a 4 (4 a 2 − 2) + a 3 (a 3 + 7) b 4 x 2 (3 x 3 − 2) − 3 x 2 ( x 3 + 9) c (n + 4r )n 2 − (7n + r )n 2
16 Simplify the following algebraic expressions by cancelling factors.

7b 3 (b + 4) 5r 6 × 3(r − 1) 6(a − 3) 6b 5
a × 12b2 b 2 c 6 ×
3(b + 4) 14 b 2(r − 1) 10r 24 b 12(a − 3)
1D Pythagoras’ theorem
Pythagoras’ theorem links the sides of a right-angled triangle. In a
Hypotenuse
right-angled triangle the side opposite the right angle is called the (longest side)
hypotenuse. The hypotenuse is always the longest side.
PYTHAGORAS’ THEOREM
Pythagoras’ theorem states that the square of the hypotenuse is

equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides. h a
b
2 2 2
(Hypotenuse) = (side) + (other side) h = a + b2
2 2
Pythagoras’ theorem is used to find a missing side of a right-angled triangle if two of the sides are
given. It can also be used to prove that a triangle is right angled.
Example 11: Finding the length of the hypotenuse 1D
Find the length of the hypotenuse, correct to two decimal places.

h cm
5 cm
S OLUTI O N: 9 cm
1 Write Pythagoras’ theorem. h2 = a2 + b2

2 Substitute the length of the sides. = 52 + 9 2
3 Calculate the value of h 2 . h = 52 + 9 2
4 Take the square root to find h. h = 106
5 Express answer correct to two decimal places. ≈ 10.30 cm
Example 12: Finding the length of a shorter side 1D
What is the value of x correct to one decimal place? x mm
12 mm 5 mm
S OLUTI O N:
2 Substitute the length of the sides. 12 2 = x 2 + 52
3 Make x 2 the subject. x2 = 12 2 − 52
4 Take the square root to find x. x = 12 2 − 52
5 Express answer correct to one decimal place. ≈ 10.9 mm
16 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1D
Exercise 1D LEVEL 1
Example 11 1 Find the length of the hypotenuse, correct to one decimal place.
a b 5 cm c
h cm
6 cm
12 cm 24 mm h mm
8 cm h cm
10 mm
d e f 54 cm
h cm
2.5 cm
h mm 20 mm
63.2 cm h cm
4.2 cm
10 mm
Example 12 2 Find the value of x, correct to two decimal places.

a b 15 cm c
15 cm
x cm
12 cm
x cm 21 cm x mm
13 mm
6 mm
d e 2.3 cm f
x cm 14.1 cm
x cm
24 mm 32 mm 9.5 cm
4.8 cm
x mm
LEVEL 2
3 Calculate the length of the side marked with the pronumeral. (Answer to the nearest
millimetre.)
a y mm b c 16 mm
30 mm
42 mm 63 mm x mm
35 mm 28 mm
a mm
d 10 mm e 33 mm f
m mm
8 mm
d mm
52 mm
27 mm b mm 12 mm
4 Find the length of the diagonal of a rectangle with

dimensions 7.5 metres by 5.0 metres. Give the answer 5.0 m
correct to one decimal place.
7.5 m
LEVEL 3
5 Find the value of the pronumerals, correct to two decimal places.

a b
90 cm 7 cm y cm x cm
72 cm
4 cm 6 cm
x cm
6 Calculate the length of the side marked with a pronumeral, correct to one decimal place.
a 7 cm b 25 cm
x cm 18 cm
6 cm 4 cm x cm
y cm 14 cm
18 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1E
1E Perimeter
Perimeter is the total length of the outside edges of a shape. It is the distance of the boundary.
Perimeter formulae
Name Shape Perimeter
a b
Triangle c P = a+b+c
a b
Quadrilateral c P = a+b+c+d
d
s
Square P = 4s
b
Rectangle P = 2(l + b)
l
r Circumference
Circle C = 2π r
C = πd
Example 13: Finding the perimeter of a rectangle 1E
Find the perimeter of the following rectangle.

3m
8m
S OLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a rectangle, so use the formula P = 2(l + b)
P = 2(l + b).
2 Substitute the values for l and b (l = 8 = 2 × (8 + 3)
and b = 3).
3 Evaluate. = 22 m
4 Write the answer in words. Perimeter of the rectangle is 22 m.
1E Perimeter 19
Example 14: Finding the perimeter of a triangle 1E
Find the perimeter of the triangle.

3.7 cm
Answer correct to one decimal place.
4.2 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Find the length of the hypotenuse or h.
3 Substitute the length of the sides. h 2 = 4.2 2 + 3.7 2
4 Evaluate the value of h. h = 4.2 2 + 3.7 2 ≈ 5.6 cm
5 Add the lengths of sides to find the P = 3.7 + 4.2 + 5.6
perimeter. = 13.5 cm
6 Express answer correct to one decimal place.
7 Write the answer in words. Perimeter of the triangle is 13.5 cm.
Example 15: Finding the circumference of a circle 1E
Find the perimeter of a circle with a radius of 9 mm.

Answer correct to two decimal places.
9 mm
S OLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a circle, so use the formula
C = 2π r . C = 2π r
2 Substitute the value for r (r = 9). = 2×π ×9
3 Evaluate. ≈ 56.55 mm
4 Write the answer in words. Perimeter of the circle is 56.55 mm.
Example 16: Finding the perimeter of a semicircle 1E
Find the perimeter of a semicircle with a diameter of 4 m.

4m
S OLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a semicircle, so use the C = πd
2
formula C = π d ÷ 2.
2 Substitute the value for d (d = 4) to find the = π ×4
2
curved distance.
3 Evaluate. ≈ 6.28 m
4 Add the curved distance to the diameter. P = 6.28 + 4
5 Evaluate. = 10.28 m
6 Write the answer in words. Perimeter is 10.28 m.
Perimeter of composite shapes

A composite shape is made up of two or more plane shapes. The perimeter of a composite shape is
calculated by adding the lengths that make up the boundary of the shape.
PERIMETER OF A COMPOSITE SHAPE
1 Sides with the same markings are of equal length.

2 Unknown side lengths are determined by using the given lengths of the other sides.
3 Pythagoras’ theorem is used to find unknown side lengths involving a right triangle.
4 Lengths that are part of a circle are found using C = 2π r .
5 Add the Lengths that make up the boundary of the shape to calculate the perimeter.
Example 17: Finding the perimeter of composite shapes 1E
Find the perimeter of each of these shapes.

a 2 cm b
5m
6 cm
5 cm 5m
8 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Find the unknown side lengths using a 2 cm
the measurements given in the question. 6 cm 8 − 2 = 6 cm
6 + 5 = 11 cm
5 cm
8 cm
2 Add the lengths of all the edges to find P = 2 + 6 + 6 + 5 + 8 + 11
the perimeter. = 38 cm
3 Evaluate.
4 Write the answer in words. Perimeter is 38 cm.
5 Use the formula C = 2π r ÷ 4 for the b C = 2π r

4
curved length.
6 Substitute the value for r (r = 5). = 2 × π × 5 ≈ 7.85 m
4
7 Evaluate.
8 Add the curved length to other edges. P = 7.85 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
9 Evaluate. = 27.85 m
10 Write the answer in words. Perimeter is 27.85 m.
1E Perimeter 21
Exercise 1E LEVEL 1
Example 13 1 Find the perimeter of each quadrilateral. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
7.2 m
9.5 m
20 m
5.4 cm 13.4 m
2 Find the perimeter of a square with a side length of 12.3 m. Answer correct to one decimal
place.
Example 14 3 Find the perimeter of each right triangle. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c 7 mm
8m
15 m
5 cm 8.5 mm
2 cm
4 Find the perimeter of a right triangle with a base of 10.25 cm and a height of 15.15 cm. Answer
correct to two decimal places.
5 Find the perimeter of each circle. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
3m
2 cm 14 mm
6 Find the circumference of each circle. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a Radius of 4 cm b Radius of 19 m
c Radius of 34 mm d Diameter of 50 mm
e Diameter of 22 m f Diameter of 6 cm
LEVEL 2
Example 16 7 Find the perimeter of each semicircle. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
5m 2.1 m
16 m
8 Find the perimeter of each shape. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a b c
3 mm 5 cm
7m
Example 17 9 Find the perimeter of each composite shape. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a 6m b c 8 cm
2m
4m
8m 1m
4m 2m
10 m 2m
10 cm
d 1m e f
4m
6m 4m
3m 4m 5m
6m
LEVEL 3
10 An annulus is a shape, like a doughnut or a tyre, between two

circles with the same centre. Find the perimeter of an annulus if 3 cm 6 cm
the inner diameter is 3 cm and the outer diameter is 6 cm. Answer
correct to the nearest centimetre.
11 A rectangle ABCD has length AB = 12 cm and a width of BC = 6 cm.

A E B
a Find the value of x. x cm
b Calculate the perimeter of quadrilateral AECF. D C
F
1F Area 23
1F Area
The area of a shape is the amount of surface enclosed by
the boundaries of the shape. It is the number of squares
that fit inside the shape. When calculating area, the
answer will be in square units.
100 mm 2 = 1 cm 2 10 000 cm 2 = 1 m 2
10 000 m 2 = 1 ha 1000 000 m 2 = 1 km 2
To calculate the area of the most common shapes, we use

a formula. These formulae are listed below.
Area formulae
Name Shape Area
h
Triangle A = 1 bh
2
b
Square s A = s2
b
Rectangle A = lb
l
h
Parallelogram A = bh
b
a
Trapezium h A = 1 (a + b)h
2
b
y
Rhombus x A = 1 xy
2
r
Circle A = πr2
24 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1F
Example 18: Finding the area of a triangle 1F
Find the area of the triangle.

5.5 m
8.1 m
S OLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a triangle, so use the formula A = 1 bh. A = 1 bh

2 2
2 Substitute the values for b and h (b = 8.1 and h = 5.5). 1
= × 8.1 × 5.5
2
3 Evaluate. = 22.275 m 2
4 Write the answer using the correct units. The area of the triangle
22.275 m2.
Example 19: Finding the area of a trapezium 1F

2.9 cm
Find the area of the quadrilateral.
3 cm
S OLUTI O N: 5.1 cm
1 The shape is a trapezium, so use the formula
A = 1 (a + b)h
2
A = 1 (a + b)h
2
2 Substitute the values for a, b and h. = 1 (2.9 + 5.1)3
2
3 Evaluate. = 12 cm 2
4 Write the answer using the correct units. The area of the shape is 12 cm 2.
Example 20: Finding the area of a parallelogram 1F
Find the area of the following quadrilateral.

4 mm
SOLUTI O N: 6.5 mm
1 The shape is a parallelogram, so use the A = bh
formula A = bh.
2 Substitute the values for b and h (b = 6.5 and = 6.5 × 4
h = 4).
3 Evaluate. = 26 mm 2
4 Write the answer using the correct units. The area of the shape is 26 mm 2 .
1F Area 25
Example 21: Finding the area of a circle 1F
Find the area of a circle with a radius of 5 metres.

Give your answer correct to one decimal place. 5m
SOLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a circle, so use the formula
A = π r 2. A = πr2
2 Substitute the value for r (r = 5). = π × 52
3 Evaluate correct to one decimal place. ≈ 78.5 m 2
4 Write the answer using the correct units. The area of the circle is 78.5 m 2.
Area of composite shapes

A composite shape is made up of two or more plane shapes. The area of a composite shape is
calculated by adding or subtracting the areas of simple shapes.
AREA OF COMPOSITE SHAPES
• Composite shapes are made up of more than one simple shape.

• Area of a composite shape can be found by adding or subtracting the areas of simple shapes.
Example 22: Finding the area of a composite shape 1F
Find the area of the composite shape. Answer correct to 12 cm

one decimal place.
10 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Divide the shape into a rectangle and a semicircle.
2 Use the formula A = lb for the rectangle. A = lb
3 Substitute = 12 × 10
4 Evaluate. = 120 cm 2
5 Use the formula A = 1 π r 2 for the A = 1 πr2
2 2
semicircle.
6 Substitute = 1 × π × 52
2
7 Evaluate. ≈ 39.3 cm 2
8 Add the area of the rectangle to the semicircle. A = 120 + 39.3
9 Evaluate. = 159.3 cm 2
10 Write the answer using the correct units. The area of the shape is 159.3 cm 2.
Exercise 1F LEVEL 1
Example 18 1 Find the area of each triangle. Answer correct to one decimal place where necessary.
a 23 m b c 6 mm
13 m
4 cm 6.5 mm
2 cm
d e f
13 mm
7.6 m
15.5 mm 9.5 m
19 m 8.5 m
2 Find the area of each shape. Answer correct to one decimal place where necessary.
Example 19 a b c
9m
6.4 m
6.1 cm 11.2 m
22 m
Example 20 d e 4m f 3.8 cm
7 mm 7m
4 cm
10 mm
6.7 cm
3 Find the area of a triangle with a base of 8.25 cm and a height of 10.15 cm. Answer correct to
the nearest square centimetre.
4 Find the area of a square with a side length of 105.1 m. Answer correct to the nearest
square metre.
Example 21 5 Find the area of a circle with a radius of 7 cm. Answer correct to the nearest square
centimetre.
1F Area 27
LEVEL 2
6 Find the area of each shape. Answer correct to one decimal place where necessary.
a b c
2.3 km 9.1 cm
5 km Diagonals are
9.1 cm 4.4 mm and 6.8 mm
d 5.7 cm e f
6 mm 8 mm 17 m 8m
4.8 cm
4.1 cm
12.5 mm
15 m
9.8 cm
7 Jasmine is planning to build a circular pond. The radius of the pond is 1.5 m. What is the area
of the pond, correct to the nearest square metre?
8 A 25 m swimming pool increases in depth from 1.3 m at the shallow end to 2.6 m at the deep
end. Calculate the area of one side wall of the pool. Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
25 m
1.3 m
2.6 m
9 Philip wants to tile a rectangular area measuring 2.5 m by 3 m in his backyard. The tiles he
wishes to use are 50 cm by 50 cm. How many tiles will he need? Give your answer as a whole
number.
10 Find the area of each composite shape.

a b 4 cm
c
6 cm 15 cm
3 cm
30 cm 32 cm 4 cm
8 cm 20 cm
11 An annulus consists of two circles with the same centre.

Find the area of an annulus if the inner diameter is 6 cm
and the outer diameter is 10 cm. Answer correct to the 6 cm 10 cm
nearest square centimetre.
12 A metal parallelogram has two identical squares removed from

its shape. The two squares have a side length of 2 cm. Find the
5 cm 7 cm
shaded area. Answer correct to the nearest square centimetre.
10 cm
13 A lawn is to be laid around a rectangular garden bed.
a What is the amount of lawn required?
13 m
b Find the cost of the new lawn if the required turf 20 m
19 m
costs $20 per square metre.
25 m
LEVEL 3
Example 22 14 A light fitting has the shape of half of a sphere mounted on an

upside-down cone. Its cross–section is shown opposite.
a What is the radius of the semicircle?
16 cm 14 cm
b What is the height of the triangle?
c Calculate the area of the cross-section. Answer correct 10 cm
to one decimal place.
15 What is the area of a quadrant if it has a radius of 8 mm? Answer

16 Decking for a house consists of a square and a triangle. The square xm

has a side length of 8 metres and the triangle is isosceles. 8m
a Use Pythagoras’ theorem to find the value of x.
xm
b Calculate the area of the shaded region.
8m
17 A metal worker cut circles with a diameter of 2 cm from a rectangular sheet of tin 4 cm by 8 cm.
a What is the area of the rectangular sheet?
b How many circles can be cut from the rectangular sheet?
c What is the area of the remaining metal after the circles have been removed from the
rectangular sheet? Answer correct to two decimal places.
1G Simple interest
Interest is the amount paid for borrowing money or the amount earned for lending money or
investing. There are different ways of calculating interest. Simple interest (or flat interest) is a
fixed percentage of the amount invested or borrowed and is calculated on the original amount. For
example, if we invest $100 in a bank account that pays interest at the rate of 5% per annum (per
year) we would receive $5 each year. That is,
Interest = $100 × 5 = $5
100
This amount of interest would be paid each year. Simple interest is always calculated on the initial
amount, or the principal.
An investment in the context of interest is money that you put into a bank, or other financial
institution, in return for interest payments. It is like a loan that you make to the bank.
FORMULA FOR CALCULATING SIMPLE INTEREST
I = Prn
I – Interest (simple or flat) earned for the use of money, paid by borrowers to lenders
P – Principal is the initial amount of money borrowed, lent or invested
r – Rate of simple interest per time period expressed as a decimal, e.g. 5% = 0.05
n – Number of time periods (days, weeks, months or years)
Example 23: Finding simple interest 1G
Calculate the amount of simple interest paid on an

investment of $12 000 at 10% simple interest per annum
for 3 years.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the simple interest formula. I = Prn
2 Substitute P = 12 000, r = 0.10 and n = 3 = 12 000 × 0.10 × 3
into the formula.
3 Evaluate. = $3600
4 Write the answer in words. Simple interest is $3600.
30 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1G
Amount owed or future value

The interest is added to the principal to determine the amount owed on a loan or the future value of
an investment.
FORMULA FOR AMOUNT OWED OR FUTURE VALUE
A= P+I
A – Amount owed or future value
I – Interest (simple or flat) earned
P – Principal is the initial quantity of money borrowed, loaned or invested
Example 24: Calculating the amount owed 1G
Find the amount owed on a loan of $50 000 at 7% per annum simple interest at the end of two
years and six months.
S OLUTI O N:
2 Substitute P = 50 000, r = 0.07 and n = 2.5 into the formula. = 50 000 × 0.07 × 2.5
3 Evaluate. = $8750
4 Write the amount owed formula. A = P+I
5 Substitute P = 50 000 and I = 8750 into the formula. = 50 000 + 8750
6 Evaluate. = $58 750
7 Write the answer in words. Amount owed is $58 750.
Example 25: Calculating value of an investment 1G
Joel plans to make an investment of $200 000 at 7 1 2 %p.a.

simple interest for 2 years. What is the total value of his
investment at the end of 2 years?
S OLUTI O N:
2 Substitute P = 200 000, r = 0.075 and n = 2 = $200 000 × 0.075 × 2
into the formula.
3 Evaluate. = $30 000
4 Write the amount owed formula. A = P+I
5 Substitute P = 200 000 and I = 30 000 into = $200 000 + $30 000
the formula.
6 Evaluate. = $230 000
7 Write answer in words. Total value is $230 000.
Exercise 1G LEVEL 1
Example 23 1 Calculate the amount of simple interest for each of the following.
a Principal = $15 000, Interest rate = 13%p.a., Time period = 3 years
b Principal = $2000 , Interest rate = 6 12 %p.a., Time period = 7 years
c Principal = $200 000, Interest rate = 9 41 %p.a., Time period = 2 years
d Principal = $3600 , Interest rate = 9%p.a., Time period = 3 12 years
e Principal = $40 000, Interest rate = 7.25%p.a., Time period = 5 14 years
Example 24 2 Calculate the amount owed for each of the following.

a Principal = $500, Simple interest rate = 5%p.a., Time period = 4 years
b Principal = $900, Simple interest rate = 3%p.a., Time period = 7 years
c Principal = $4000, Simple interest rate = 8 12 %p.a., Time period = 3 years
d Principal = $6900, Simple interest rate = 10%p.a., Time period = 4 12 years
e Principal = $10 000, Simple interest rate = 6.75%p.a., Time period = 2 14 years
3 The simple interest rate is given as 4.8% per annum.

a What is the interest rate per quarter?
b What is the interest rate per month?
c What is the interest rate per six months?
d What is the interest rate per nine months?
4 Calculate the amount of simple interest for each of the following.

a Principal = $800, Interest rate = 12%p.a., Time period = 1month
b Principal = $1600, Interest rate = 18%p.a., Time period = 6 months
c Principal = $60 000, Interest rate = 9.6%p.a., Time period = 3months
d Principal = $20 000, Interest rate = 6%p.a., Time period = 9 months
5 Andrew takes a loan of $30 000 for a period of 6 years, at a simple interest rate of 14%
per annum. Find the amount owing at the end of 6 years.
6 A loan of $1800 is taken out at a simple interest rate of 15.5% per annum. How much interest is
owing after 3 months?
Example 25 7 A sum of $100 000 was invested in a fixed−term account for 4 years.
a Calculate the simple interest earned if the rate of interest is 5.5% per annum.
b Find the value of the investment at the end of 4 years.
8 Joshua invested $1200 at 8% per annum. What is the simple interest earned between
30 September and 1 January?
32 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1G
LEVEL 2
9 Sophie decides to buy a car for $28 000. She has saved $7000 for the deposit and takes out a
loan over two years for the balance. The flat rate of interest charged is 12% per annum. What is
the total amount of interest to be paid?
10 Domenico has borrowed $24 000 to buy furniture. He wishes to repay the loan over four years.
Calculate the simple interest on the following rates of interest.
a 8% per annum for the entire period
b 9% per annum after a 6-month interest-free period
c 10% per annum after a 12-month interest-free period
11 Create the spreadsheet shown.
01GQ11
a Cell D5 has a formula that calculates the simple interest. Enter this formula.
b The formula for cell E5 is ‘=A5 + D5’. Fill down the contents of E6 to E12 using this formula.
12 Isabelle buys a TV for $1400. She pays it off monthly over 2 years at an interest rate of 11.5%
per annum flat. How much per month will she pay?
13 Riley wants to earn $4000 a year in interest. How much must he invest if the simple interest
rate is 10%p.a.?
LEVEL 3
14 Samira invests $16 000 for 2 12 years. What is the minimum rate of simple interest needed for
her to earn $3000?
15 Gurrumul pays back $20 000 on a $15 000 loan at a flat interest rate of 10%. What is the term
of the loan?
16 Harry borrowed $300 000 at a flat rate of interest of 8.5% per annum. This rate was fixed for
2 years. He pays back the interest only over this period.
a How much interest is to be paid over the 2 years?
b After paying the fixed rate of interest for the first year, Harry finds the bank will decrease the
flat interest rate to 7.5% if he pays a charge of $1000. How much will he save by changing
to the lower interest rate for the last year?
1H Compound interest
Compound interest is calculated on the principal at the start, and then at each time period, on the
principal plus interest. It calculates interest on the interest. For example, if $100 is invested in a
savings account at a compound interest rate of 10% per annum:
First year − Interest = $100 × 0.10 × 1 = $10

Amount owed = $100 + $10 = $110
Second year − Interest = $110 × 0.10 × 1 = $11
Amount owed = $110 + $11 = $121
Third year − Interest = $121 × 0.10 × 1 = $12.10
Amount owed = $121 + $12.10 = $133.10
These calculations show that the interest earned increased each year. In the first year it was $10,
the second year $11 and the third year $12.10.
COMPOUND INTEREST FORMULA
A = P(1 + r ) n
A – Amount (final balance) or future value of the loan
P – Principal is the initial amount of money borrowed or present value of the loan
r – Rate of interest per compounding time period expressed as a decimal
n – Number of compounding time periods
Total compound interest earned or paid

The total compound interest is calculated by subtracting the principal
from the final balance i.e. the amount of money at the end.
INTEREST EARNED OR OWED
I = A−P
A – Amount of money or final balance
I – Interest (compound) earned or paid
P – Principal is the initial amount of money
34 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1H
Example 26: Finding the compound interest 1H
Paige invests $5000 over 5 years at a compound interest rate of 6.5%p.a. Calculate:
a the amount of the investment after 5 years, correct to the nearest cent
b the interest earned after 5 years, correct to the nearest cent.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the compound interest formula. a A = P (1 + r ) n
2 Substitute P = 5000, r = 0.065 and n = 5 = 5000(1 + 0.065) 5
into the formula.
3 Evaluate. = 6850.433317
≈ $6850.43
4 Write answer in words. Amount of investment interest earned is $6850.43.
5 Write the formula. b I = A− P
6 Substitute A = 6850.43 and P = 5000 = 6850.43 − 5000
into the formula.
7 Evaluate. = $1850.43
8 Write in words. Interest earned is $1850.43.
Example 27: Finding the compound interest 1H
James borrowed $50 000 for 4 years at 11%p.a. interest compounding monthly.
Calculate:
a the amount owed after 4 years, correct to the nearest cent
b the interest owed after 4 years, correct to the nearest cent.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the compound interest formula. a A = P (1 + r ) n
2 Calculate the number of time periods n = 4 × 12
(4 years × 12 months) and the interest rate r = 0.11 ÷ 12
per time period. 48
3 Substitute P = 50 000, r = 0.11 and n = 48
2
A = 50 000 1 + 0.11
12 ( )
into the formula. 12
4 Evaluate. ≈ $77 479.90
5 Write answer in words. Amount owed is $77 479.90.
6 Write the interest owed formula. b I = A−P
7 Substitute P = 50 000 and A = 77 479.90 = $77 479.90 − $50 000
into the formula.
8 Evaluate. = $27 479.90
9 Write in words. Interest owed is $27 479.90
Exercise 1H LEVEL 1
Example 26 1 Calculate the amount owed, to the nearest cent, for each of the following loans.
a Principal = $800, Compound interest rate = 4%p.a., Time period = 3 years
b Principal = $9000, Compound interest rate = 6 12 %p.a., Time period = 4 years
c Principal = $12 000, Compound interest rate = 11%p.a., Time period = 2 12 years
d Principal = $22 000, Compound interest rate = 5.5%p.a., Time period = 4 14 years
Example 27 2 Calculate the amount of compound interest to the nearest cent for each of the following.
a Principal = $25 000, Interest rate = 7%p.a., Time period = 5 years
b Principal = $300 000, Interest rate = 10 14 %p.a., Time period = 3 years
c Principal = $6500, Interest rate = 13%p.a., Time period = 1 12 years
d Principal = $80 000, Interest rate = 8.25%p.a., Time period = 3 14 years
3 Amy is investing $20 000. What sum

of money will she receive if she invests for
4 years at 8%p.a. compound interest? Answer
to the nearest cent.
4 Use the formula A = P(1 + r ) n to calculate the value of an investment of $10 000 over a period
of 2 years with an interest rate of 0.8% compounding monthly. Answer to the nearest cent.
5 Ryan invested $20 000 for 5 years at 12%p.a. interest compounding monthly. What is the
amount of interest earned in the first year? Answer to the nearest cent.
6 Find the amount of money in a bank account after 6 years if an initial amount of $4000 earns
8%p.a. compound interest, paid quarterly. Answer to the nearest cent.
7 Christopher invested $13 500 over 7 years at 6.2%p.a. interest compounding quarterly.
Calculate:
a the value of the investment after 7 years to the nearest cent.
b the compound interest earned to the nearest cent.
36 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1H
LEVEL 2
8 What sum of money would Bailey need to invest to accumulate a total of $50 000 at the end of
4 years at 6%p.a. compound interest? Answer to the nearest cent.
9 Calculate the amount that must be invested at 9.3%p.a. interest compounding annually to have
$70 000 at the end of 3 years. Answer to the nearest cent.
10 What sum of money needs to be invested to accumulate to a total of $100 000 in 10 years at
7.25%p.a. compound interest? Answer to the nearest cent.
11 Create the spreadsheet below.

01HQ11
a Cell D5 has a formula that calculates the compound interest. Enter this formula.
b The formula for cell E5 is ‘= D5 − A5’. Fill down the contents of E6 to E12 using this
formula.
LEVEL 3
12 How much more interest is earned on a $40 000 investment if the interest at 6%p.a. is
compounded annually over 6 years, compared with the simple interest at 6%p.a. earned over
the same time?
13 Hamish has $50 000 to invest for two years. Which is the better investment and by how much?
Investment 1 Investment 2
Simple Compound
interest rate interest rate
4%p.a. 4%p.a.
1I Frequency tables
A frequency table is a listing of the outcomes and how often (its frequency) each outcome occurs. The
outcomes may also be called ‘scores’. The tally of the frequency and the final count are listed in separate
columns. When you create a frequency table from a set of data, you should include a tally column to
record your count of how often each score occurs. The tally column may be omitted in a frequency table
given to you that has already been created. A frequency table is also called a frequency distribution.
Score Tally Frequency
Lowest score 17 | 1 Lowest frequency
18 |||| | 6
19 |||| 5
20 |||| || 7 Highest frequency
Highest score 21 ||| 3
FREQUENCY TABLE
1 Scores or outcomes are listed in the first column in ascending order.

2 Tally column records the count of the number of times the score occurred (groups of 5s).
3 Frequency column is the total count of each outcome.
Example 28: Constructing a frequency table 1I
The temperatures for 39 days are shown below. Construct a frequency table.
19 20 18 23 27 25 26 27 28 27 25 24 24 19 25 22 21 28 26 26
22 20 25 20 22 24 24 22 21 24 25 26 25 27 21 23 23 22 25
SOLUTI O N:
1 Draw a table with three columns and Score Tally Frequency
label them score, tally and frequency. 18 | 1
2 List the temperatures in the score 19 || 2
column from the lowest (18) to the 20 ||| 3
highest (28).
21 ||| 3
3 Record a mark in the tally column for
22 |||| 5
each temperature.
4 Count the tally marks and write the total 23 ||| 3
in the frequency column. 24 |||| 5
5 Add the frequency column to find 25 |||| || 7
the total number of scores. This 26 |||| 4
should match the total number of 27 |||| 4
temperatures (39). 28 || 2
Total 39
38 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1I
Exercise 1I LEVEL 1
Note: include a tally column, where you are asked to create a frequency table in this exercise.
Example 28 1 The ages, in years, of players in a football Score Tally Frequency
team are recorded in a frequency table.
a Copy and complete the table. 20 |||
b What was the most common age? 21 |||| ||
c How many players are in the team?
22 6
23 ||||
24 2
2 The number of times a fire engine is called out

Number of Tally Frequency
on a given day was recorded in a frequency table.
calls
a Copy and complete the table.
b What was the most common number of calls? 0 7
c On how many days was the fire engine called 1 |||| |||| ||
out four times?
d On how many days was the fire engine called 2 8
out fewer than three times? 3 ||||
4 2
5 |
Example 28 3 The number of brothers and sisters for 30 students is

recorded below. Construct a frequency table for this data.
2 1 1 5 3 4 1 0 2 1 5 2 6 1 0
3 1 0 4 3 3 4 2 3 0 2 0 1 0 2
4 The shoe sizes of 20 seventeen year olds are recorded

below. Construct a frequency table.
11 7 8 10 12 10 8 7 8 11
9 9 8 10 9 8 9 8 7 8
Example 28 5 The assessment result for 30 students is recorded below. Construct a frequency table for this data.
96 97 97 95 92 94 97 98 91 97 95 91 96 97 94
92 92 98 94 93 93 94 95 93 92 91 98 96 92 91
LEVEL 2
6 A die was rolled and the results listed below.
1 1 5 2 2 5 1 3 6 1 4 3 1 5 5 4 6
3 3 4 2 1 1 6 5 4 2 6 6 1 4 4 1 6
4 1 6 5 2 4 6 2 4 2 2 3 6 4 2 4 1
a Construct a frequency table.

b How many times was the die rolled?
c How many results are higher than 2?
d What was the most common number rolled?
e Do you think the die is biased? Give a reason for your answer.
Example 28 7 David recorded the following times, in seconds, for the 50 m freestyle.
32 34 37 35 35 37 34 33 38 34 36 33 34 37 37 37 38
33 33 36 35 34 34 38 32 36 32 38 38 34 36 36 34 38
32 34 38 37 35 36 38 35 32 35 35 33 38 36 35 36 32

b How many times were recorded?
c How many times were below 35 seconds?
d What was the most common time for the
50 m freestyle?
e What percentage of times are 37 seconds
or more?
LEVEL 3
8 Count the number of letters in each word of the paragraph below.

A frequency table is a listing of the outcomes and how often (frequency) each outcome occurs.
The outcomes are often listed under a heading called ‘score’. The tally of the frequency and
the final count are listed in separate columns. Frequency tables are also called a frequency
distribution.
a Create a frequency table for the length of words used in the above paragraph.
b Using the frequency table, what is the most frequent word length in the English language?
c Comment on the fairness of the conclusion made in part b.
40 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1J
1J Mean, median and mode

Mean
The mean is a measure of the centre of a data distribution. It is calculated by summing all the scores
and dividing this by the number of scores. For example, consider the scores 1, 6, 3 and 2. The mean
1+ 6 + 3+ 2
is = 3 . The mean of a set of data is what most people call the ‘average’.
4
Median
The median is the middle score or value of a data distribution. To find the median, list all the scores in
increasing order and select the middle one. For example, the median of 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 is 5. When there is
an even number of scores, the median is the average of the two middle scores. For example, the median
of 1, 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 is found by sorting the six scores and finding the average of 4 and 5 or 4.5.
Mode
The mode is the score that occurs most often in a data distribution. It is the score with the highest
frequency. The mode is useful for categorical data that do not allow you to do numerical calculations, for
example, if the data collected is a colour. Modes may occur at the beginning or end of a range of values.
Mean Median Mode

Sum of scores 1 Arrange all the scores in 1 Determine the number of
Mean = increasing order. times each score occurs.
Number of scores
∑x 2 Median is the middle 2 Mode is the score that occurs
x=
n score. the greatest number of times.
Example 29: Calculating the mean, median and mode 1J
The table below shows the number of rainy days for the first six months.
J F M A M J
12 15 13 8 8 10
Find the mean, median and mode.
SOLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula for the mean. ∑x
x=
n
2 Sum all of the scores and divide by the number of scores.
= 12 + 15 + 13 + 8 + 8 + 10
6
3 Evaluate. = 11
4 Write the answer in words. Mean is 11
5 Write the scores in increasing order. 8, 8, 10, 12, 13, 15
6 Count the total number of scores. There are 6 scores.
7 Median is the average of the 3rd (score 10) and the 4th Median = 10 + 12 = 11
2
scores (score 12). Write the answer in words. Median is 11.
8 Mode is the score that occurs the most. Mode is 8.
1J Mean, median and mode 41
Exercise 1J LEVEL 1
1 Find the mean of each data set.

a 6, 9, 9, 15, 9, 3, 7, 9, 13, 10 b 22, 28, 22, 31, 43, 22
c 5, 5, 8, 12, 13, 3, 7, 9, 10 d 7, 5, 11, 3, 0, 1, 2, 9, 7
e 6, 5, 6, 17, 13, 6, 0, 9, 1 f 39, 35, 39, 41, 47, 49, 44
g 3, 5, 24, 19, 13, 13, 13, 9, 3, 8, 11 h 55, 24, 14, 18, 13, 3, 2, 2, 2, 7, 14
2 Find the mean of each data set. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a 13, 14, 15 b 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
c 5, 7, 8, 9, 13, 15 d 6, 8, 11, 13
e 6, 7, 10, 11, 13, 19 f 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 3
g 9, 9, 10, 10, 10, 11, 11, 11, 11 h 6, 6, 9, 9, 9, 10, 10, 10, 10
3 Twenty people measured their heart rate using a heart-rate monitor. The results were
64, 68, 64, 72, 75, 67, 91, 80, 77, 73, 68, 81, 73, 72, 60, 62, 74, 68, 55 and 62.
a What is the sum of these heart rates?
b Find the mean heart rate. Answer correct to two decimal
places.
c Another person with a heart rate of 63 is included in
this data. What is the new mean? Answer correct to two
decimal places.
4 There is an odd number of scores. Find the median of these

numbers.
a 3, 9, 10 b 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 15
c 23, 28, 29, 30, 34, 45, 46, 49, 50 d 1002,1010, 1100, 1120, 1160
e 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 9, 9 f 14, 15, 100, 101, 102
g 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 7, 8, 8, 8, 8 h 2, 7, 9, 10, 10, 14, 18
5 There is an even number of scores. Find the median of these numbers.

a 2, 5, 6, 8, 8, 9 b 12, 14, 18, 22
c 20, 20, 20, 21, 22, 24 d 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 14, 16, 18, 18, 18
e 100, 110, 130, 140 f 1, 1, 1, 1, 3, 3, 3, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6
g 10, 20, 22, 40, 60, 61, 70, 80 h 3, 5, 8, 10, 11, 14, 18, 19
6 The number of senior citizens entering a restaurant in the past 9 hours was
18, 17, 16, 17, 19, 13, 10, 16 and 15. What is the median?
7 Find the mode of each data set.

a 13, 9, 3, 24, 19, 3, 5, 13, 8, 11, 13 b 5, 8, 12, 13, 3, 7, 9, 5, 10
c 15, 7, 9, 13, 6, 9, 9, 3, 9, 10 d 47, 49, 39, 41, 39, 35, 44
42 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation 1J
LEVEL 2
8 Use the stem-and-leaf plot opposite to answer these questions. Stem Leaf
a How many scores are there? 0 78
b What is the lowest score? 1 2359
c What is the median? 2 126799
d Remove 42 from the data. What is the new median? 3 017
4 27
9 Use the dot plot opposite to answer these questions.

a What is the highest score? 4
b What is the lowest score? 3
2
c Calculate the median.
1
d How many scores would need to be added to make
0
the median 23? 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
e What is the median if a single score of 26 is included in the data?
10 The table opposite shows the ages of players in the local Age Frequency
football team. 13 3
a What is the age of the oldest player? 14 5
b What is the age of the youngest player?
15 5
c What is the range of ages?
16 2
d What is the median age?
11 Nine students were surveyed on the number of hours they slept last night. Their answers were
10, 8, 7, 7, 4, 7, 8, 9 and 11.
a Find the mean number of hours slept.
b Find the mode number of hours slept.
c A tenth student was then surveyed and the mean changed to 7.5. What was the number of
hours slept by the tenth student?
LEVEL 3
12 The mean height of five basketball players at the start of the game is 1.92 m. During the game
a player who is 1.80 m tall is injured and replaced by a player who is 1.98 m tall. What is the
mean height of the five players now? Answer correct to two decimal places.
13 A score was added to the set of scores: 15, 18, 20, 22, 24 and 26. The new mean is equal to 20.
What score was added?
Chapter 1 Summary 43
Key ideas and chapter summary
Summary
Simplifying 1 Find a common denominator if the denominators are different.
algebraic 2 Express each fraction with the common denominator
expressions
3 Simplify the numerator by adding or subtracting the like terms.
Index laws a m × a n = a m+n Multiplying terms in index form, add the indices.
m n m−n
a ÷a =a Dividing terms in index form, subtract the indices.
m n mn
(a ) = a Index form raised to a power, multiply the indices.
a 0 = 1 A term in index form raised to the power of zero is one.
Expanding 1 Multiply the term outside the grouping symbol by the first term then the
algebraic second term inside the grouping symbol.
expressions 2 Simplify and collect like terms if required.
Pythagoras’ (Hypotenuse) 2 = (side) 2 + (other side) 2

theorem
Perimeter Perimeter is the total length of the outside edges of a shape. It is the length
of the boundary.
Area Triangle A = 1 bh Square A = s2

2
Rectangle A = lb Parallelogram A = bh
Trapezium A = 1 (a + b)h Rhombus A = 1 xy

2 2
Simple interest I = Prn A= P+I
Compound interest A = P(1 + r ) n I = A− P
Frequency table 1 Scores are listed in ascending order.

2 Tally column records the number of times the score occurred.
3 Frequency column is a count of each outcome or score.
Mean Mean = Sum of scores

Number of scores
Median The median is the middle score or value.
Mode The mode is the score that occurs the most.
44 Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation
Multiple-choice questions
Review
1 Simplify 2a 2 b − 5ba 2 + 13ab .

A 7a 2 b B 10 a 2 b C 3a 2 b + 13ab D −3a 2 b + 13ab
2 Simplify 4 x 2 × 3 x 2.
A 7x B 7x 4 C 12 x 2 D 12 x 4
3 Expand −4(2 p + 3q).

A −8 p − 12q B −8 p + 12q C −8 p − 3q D −8 p + 3q
4 What is the length of the hypotenuse if the two other sides are 12 cm and 16 cm?
A 400 cm B 20 cm C 28 cm D 7.46 cm
5 What is the perimeter of a quadrant with a radius of 5mm?

A 3.9 mm B 7.9 mm C 13.9 mm D 17.9 mm
6 What is the area of a triangle with a base of 5m and a perpendicular height of 8 m?

A 13 m 2 B 20 m 2 C 40 m 2 D 80 m 2
7 What is the simple interest on $500 at 8%p.a. for 4 years?

A $40 B $160 C $660 D $1600
8 James borrows $3000 at 10%p.a. interest compounding annually. What is the amount owed
after 2 years? (Answer to the nearest dollar.)
A $3030 B $3060 C $3600 D $3630
9 The frequency table shows the results of

a test. What is the most common score?
A 3
4 || 3
B 4
5 |||| | 6
C 5
4 |||| 4
D 6
10 What is the median of 12, 20, 9, 4, 16, 11 and 13?

A 4 B 11 C 12 D 13
Chapter 1 Review 45
Short-answer questions
Review
a ab 3 + 5b 3 a b 14 x 2 − 2 x − 6 x 2 c 6m + 2m 2 − m + 7m

5y y
a 2 x + 5x b 7b + 2b c −
3 3 3 15 4 2
3 Simplify each of the following.

a 5m 4 × 3m b 36 y8 ÷ 3 y 2 c 24 v 4 ÷ 16 v 3
d 2n 0 + 5 e ( x 4 )3 f (4 x 2 y 3 ) 2
4 Remove grouping symbols and simplify if required.

a 2( x − y 2 ) b 6( w + 6m) c −4(6a 2 − 2b 2 )
d −(8a − 3b) e 3( y − 5) + 6( y + 6) f c 3 (c 2 + 4 d )
5 Find the value of x correct to two decimal places.

a b c
xm x mm
21 m 27 cm
47 cm
28 m 14 mm 21 mm
x cm
6 Find the perimeter of each shape. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
7m
5 cm
10 cm
9m
11 cm 4m
11 m
46
Review Chapter 1 Preliminary preparation
7 Find the area of each shape. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
6m 3.5 m
9m
10 m
11.2 cm
d e f
2m
5.6 cm 4 mm
3m
8.4 cm 7 mm
8 What is the simple interest on $1250 at a flat rate of 8%p.a. over 3 years?
9 Riley is investing $120 000 with a superannuation fund. How much will he receive if the money
is invested for 4 years at the following rules? (Answer to the nearest dollar).
a 3%p.a. compound interest b 6%p.a. compound interest
10 Arrange these scores in order and find the median.

a 18, 11, 5, 14, 11, 10, 11, 22, 6 b 37, 46, 43, 37, 58, 37
11 Find the mean of each data set.

a 11, 13, 9, 9, 12, 16, 17, 7, 14 b 14, 11, 12, 13, 18, 16, 22, 20, 18
Extended-response questions
12 Zoe wants to earn $9000 a year in interest. How much must she invest if the simple interest rate
is 14%p.a.? Answer to the nearest dollar.
13 The time (in hours) spent completing an

Class Frequency
assessment task is listed in the table.
a Copy and complete the table. 4–8 5
b How many students spent greater than 13 hours? 9–13
c What percentage of students spent less than 9 hours?
14 –18 8
19– 23 4
23
2 Earning and
managing money
Syllabus topic — F1.2 Earning and managing money
This topic will develop your skills in managing earnings, wages and taxation.
Outcomes
• Calculate payments from an annual salary.
• Calculate wages from an hourly rate.
• Calculate wages involving overtime rates and allowances.
• Calculate annual leave loading and bonuses.
• Calculate earnings based on commission, piecework and royalties.
• Identify allowable tax deductions for different scenarios.
• Calculate the taxable income.
• Calculate net pay after deductions are made from gross pay.
• Calculate the Medicare levy.
• Determine the PAYG tax payable or refund owing using current tax scales.


Knowledge check
48 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2A
2A Salary and wages
Comparing a salary to a wage

Most people are paid an annual salary or a weekly wage.
Salary Wage
Description A payment for a year’s work, which A payment for a week’s work, calculated
is then divided into equal monthly, on an hourly basis.
fortnightly or weekly payments.
Advantages • Permanent employment • Permanent employment
• Superannuation, sick and • Superannuation, sick and holiday pay
holiday pay • Overtime payments for extra work
Disadvantages • No overtime for extra work • Lower incentive to work hard each hour
• Hours are fixed • Hours are fixed
Examples People who are paid a salary include People who are paid a wage include shop
teachers and nurses. assistants, factory workers and mechanics.
CONVERTING A SALARY OR WAGE TO ANOTHER TIME PERIOD
Divide the annual salary by the number of time periods in a year.

Divide the weekly wage by the number of work days or hours in a week.
1 year = 52 weeks 1 year = 26 fortnights 1 year = 12 months
Example 1: Calculating from a salary 2A
Wei earns a salary of $65 208 per annum. He is paid fortnightly. How much does he receive each
fortnight? Assume there are 52 weeks in the year.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity to be found. Fortnightly pay = 65 208 ÷ 26
2 Divide salary by 26 fortnights in a year. = $2508.00
3 Evaluate and write the answer in words. Wei is paid $2508 per fortnight.
Example 2: Calculating a wage 2A
Jasmine is paid at a rate of $1098 for a 40-hour week. How much does Jasmine earn per hour?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity to be found. Wage per hour = 1098 ÷ 40
2 Divide amount by number of hours worked. = $27.45
3 Evaluate and answer correct to two decimal places. Jasmine earns $27.45 per hour.
2A Salary and wages 49
Exercise 2A LEVEL 1
Example 1 1 Layla earns a salary of $92 648. Write, to the nearest dollar, her salary as amounts per:
a week
b fortnight
c month.
2 The annual salary for four people is shown in the table below. Calculate their weekly and
fortnightly payments. (Answer correct to the nearest dollar.)
Name Salary Week Fortnight
a Aiko $57 640
b Blake $78 484
c Chloe $107 800
d David $44 240
3 What is Zachary’s fortnightly income if he earns a salary of $43 056?
4 Find the annual salary for the following people.

a Amber earns $580 per week.
b Jun earns $1520 per fortnight.
c Samuel earns $3268 per month.
d Ava earns $2418 per week.
5 Harrison is a civil engineer who earns a

salary of $1500 per week.
a How much does he receive per
fortnight?
b How much does he receive per year?
6 What is Yasmeen’s annual salary if her salary per fortnight is $1610?
7 Dylan receives a weekly salary payment of $1560. What is his annual salary?
8 Stephanie is paid $1898 per fortnight and Tahlia $3821 per month. Calculate each person’s
equivalent annual income. Who earns more per week and by how much?
9 Laura is paid $1235 per fortnight and Ebony $2459 per month. Who receives the higher annual
salary and by how much?
10 Tran is paid $1898 per week and Jake $8330 per month. Calculate each person’s equivalent
annual income. What is the difference between their annual salaries?
50 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2A
11 Arana works as a labourer and is paid $25.50 an hour. How much does he earn for working the
following hours?
a 35 hours b 37 hours
c 40 hours d 42 hours
12 Lily earns $29.75 an hour. If she works 6 hours each day during the week and 4 hours a day
during the weekend, find her weekly wage.
Example 2 13 Determine the wage for a 37-hour week for each of the following hourly rates.
a $12.00 b $9.50
c $23.20 d $13.83
14 Determine the income for a year (52 weeks) for each of the following hourly rates.
Assume 40 hours of work per week.
a $7.59 b $15.25
c $18.78 d $11.89
15 Suchitra works at the local supermarket. She gets paid $22.50 per hour. Her time card is
shown below. She is paid for her breaks, so they are not shown.
Day In Out
Monday 9:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m.
Tuesday 9:00 a.m. 6:00 p.m.
Wednesday 8:30 a.m. 5:30 p.m.
Thursday 9:00 a.m. 4:30 p.m.
Friday 9:00 a.m. 4:00 p.m.
a How many hours did Suchitra work this week?

b Find her weekly wage.
16 Grace earns $525 in a week. If her hourly rate of pay is $12.50, how many hours does
she work in the week?
17 Kim is a plumber who earned $477 for a day’s work. He is paid $53 per hour. How many hours
did Kim work on this day?
18 Na is a hairdresser who earns $24.20 per hour. She works an 8-hour day.
a How much does Na earn per day?
b How much does Na earn per week? Assume she works 5 days a week.
c How much does Na earn per fortnight?
d How much does Na earn per year? Assume 52 weeks in the year.
19 Alyssa is paid $36.90 per hour and Connor $320 per day. Alyssa works a 9-hour day.
Who earns more per day and by how much?
2A Salary and wages 51
LEVEL 2
20 Feng is retiring and will receive 7.6 times the average of his salary over the past three years. In
the past three years he was paid $84 640, $83 248 and $82 960. Find the amount of his payout.
21 Liam’s salary is currently $76 000. He will receive salary increases as follows: 5% increase
from 1 July and then a 5% increase from 1 January. What will be his new salary from 1 January?

02AQ22
a Cell E5 has a formula that multiplies cells C5 to D5. Enter this formula.
b Enter the hours worked for the following employees:
Liam – 20
Lily – 26
Tin – 38
Molly – 40
Noth – 37.5
Nathan – 42
Joshua – 38.5
c Fill down the contents of E5 to E12.
d Edit the hourly pay rate of Olivia Cini to $16.50. Observe the change in E5.
LEVEL 3
23 Isabelle earns $85 324 per annum. Isabelle calculated her weekly salary by dividing her annual
salary by 12 to determine her monthly payment and then divided this result by 4 to determine
her weekly payment. What answer did Isabelle get? What is the correct answer, and what is
wrong with Isabelle’s calculation?
24 Hika earns $8 per hour and Ebony earns $9 per hour. Last week they both earned at least $150.
What is the least number of hours that Hika could have worked last week?
52 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2B
2B Annual leave loading and bonuses

Annual leave loading
Annual leave loading is a payment calculated as a fixed percentage of the normal pay (usually
17.5%) over a fixed number of weeks. It is usually paid at the beginning of the annual holidays to
meet the increased expenses of a holiday.
Holiday loading = 17.5 × Normal weekly pay × Number of weeks leave
Example 3: Finding the annual leave loading 2B
Thomas works a 40-hour week at a rate of $18.50 per hour. He receives 17.5% of 4 weeks normal
pay as holiday loading. What is Thomas’s pay for the holiday?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (4 weeks pay) to be found. 4 weeks pay
2 Multiply pay rate by number of hours worked = (18.50 × 40 × 4)
per week by number of weeks (4).
3 Evaluate. = $2960
4 Write the quantity (loading) to be found. Loading = 17.5% of $2960
5 Multiply 0.175 (17.5%) by 4 weeks pay (2960). = 0.175 × 2960
6 Evaluate. = $518
7 Write the quantity (holiday pay) to be found. Holiday pay = $2960 + $518
8 Add the 4 weeks pay (2960) and the loading (518).
9 Evaluate. = $3478
10 Write your answer in words. Thomas’s holiday pay is $3478.
Bonus
A bonus is an extra payment or gift earned as reward for achieving a goal. It is paid in addition
to the normal income. Bonuses are an incentive for employees to work harder. For example, an
employee may receive a bonus of 5% of their annual salary, or a flat payment of $1000.
Example 4: Calculating a bonus 2B
Amber’s employer has decided to reward all employees with a bonus. The bonus awarded is
5% of their annual salary. What is Amber’s bonus if her annual salary is $68 560?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (bonus) to be found. Bonus = 5% of $68 560
2 Multiply bonus percentage (5%) by annual salary ($68560). = 0.05 × 68 560
3 Evaluate. = $3428
4 Write the answer in words. Amber receives a bonus of $3428.
2B Annual leave loading and bonuses 53
Exercise 2B LEVEL 1
Example 3 1 A business pays 17.5% holiday loading on 4 weeks normal pay. Calculate the amount of
holiday loading for these employees.
a Nicholas earns $6240 normal pay for 4 weeks.
b Kumar earns $5130 normal pay for 4 weeks.
c Samantha earns $5320 per fortnight.
d Hamza earns $2760 per fortnight.
e Bilal earns $1680 per week.
2 The local government pays its employees 17.5% holiday loading on 4 weeks normal pay.
Calculate the amount of holiday loading for these employees
a Paige earns an annual salary of $105 560. (Assume 52 weeks in a year.)
b Jack earns an annual salary of $58 760. (Assume 52 weeks in a year.)
c Riley earns $32 per hour and works a 35-hour week.
d A’ishah earns $41.50 per hour and works a 37-hour week.
3 Laura works a 37-hour week at a rate of $20.50 per hour. When she takes her 4 weeks
annual leave, she is paid a loading of 17.5%. What is Laura’s holiday pay when she takes
her leave?
4 Ethan is paid $660 per week. He receives a holiday leave loading of 17.5% for three weeks
holiday pay. What is his total holiday pay?
Example 4 5 A bonus is awarded as a percentage of a person’s annual salary. The percentage awarded
depends on the person’s achievements. Calculate the following bonuses.
a 6% of $48 360 b 3% of $96 540
c 2% of $103 290 d 4.5% of $65 420
e 2.5% of $88 580 f 1.25% of $164 400
6 Grace received a bonus of 12% of her weekly

wage. What was Grace’s bonus if her weekly
wage is $1850?
7 Patrick’s boss has decided to reward all

employees with a bonus. The bonus awarded
is 7.75% of their annual salary. What is Patrick’s
bonus if his annual salary is $74 980?
54 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2B
LEVEL 2
8 Chen receives 17.5% of 4 weeks normal pay as leave loading. If Chen’s leave loading was
$379.40, what was his normal weekly pay?

02BQ9
a The formula for cell E5 is ‘= IF(AND(C5 > 10, D5 > 50), 400, 0)’. It is the formula that
calculates a $400 bonus if the employer has more than 10 years of service and more than
50 hours of overtime. Fill down the contents of E6 to E10 using this formula.
b Edit the overtime amount for Sienna Humes to 52. Observe the changes in E7.
c Edit the years of service for Ava White to 10. Observe the changes in E10.
d Edit the overtime amount for Dylan Fraser to 60. Observe the changes in E6.
e Edit the years of service for Xay Sengmany to 20. Observe the changes in E9.
f Edit the overtime amount for Benjamin Huynh to 40. Observe the changes in E8.
LEVEL 3
10 Jim receives holiday loading of 17.5% of 4 weeks pay. His loading was $996.80.
a Find his normal weekly pay.
b Find his normal hourly pay rate if he usually works a 40 hour week.
11 Chloe’s annual salary is $72 800.

a Calculate her weekly wage.
b Holiday loading is calculated at 17.5% of four weeks pay.
Calculate Chloe’s holiday loading.
c Chloe’s employer is increasing her annual salary by 1%.
What is Chloe’s new annual salary?
d The increase in Chloe’s annual salary is compensation for
removing holiday loading. Explain why Chloe is worse off
financially with the 1% increase.
2C Overtime and special allowances 55
2C Overtime and special allowances

Overtime
Overtime rates apply when employees work beyond the normal working days. Payment for overtime
is usually more than the normal pay rate. For example, a person whose normal pay rate is
$10 an hour would receive $20 ($10 × 2) an hour if they where paid overtime at double time.
Another common rate is time-and-a-half. It is the normal pay rate multiplied by 1.5. Here
a person would receive $15 ($10 × 1.5) an hour.
OVERTIME RATES
Time-and-a-half rate – normal pay rate × 1.5

Double time rate – normal pay rate × 2
Example 5: Calculating wages involving overtime 2C
John works for a building construction company. Find John’s wage during a week in which he
works 40 hours at the normal rate of $16 an hour, 3 hours at time-and-a-half rates and 1 hour at
double time rates.
SOLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity to be found. Wage = (40 × 16) normal pay
2 Normal wage is 40 multiplied by $16.
3 Payment for time-and-a-half is 3 multiplied + (3 × 16 × 1.5) time-and-a-half pay
by $16 multiplied by 1.5.
4 Payment for double time is 1 multiplied by + (1 × 16 × 2) double time pay
$16 multiplied by 2. = $744.00
5 Evaluate and write your answer in words. John’s wage that week is $744.
Special allowances
Employees receive an allowance if
they work under difficult or dangerous
conditions such as wet weather, extreme
temperatures, confined spaces or isolated
areas. Allowances are also paid when an
employee has an expense related to their
type of work, such as work uniform, meals,
travel or tools.
56 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2C
Casual work
Casual work involves a set amount paid for each hour’s work. It can be paid weekly or fortnightly.
Advantages Disadvantages
• Working hours are flexible • No sick leave or holiday pay
• Pay rate is often higher • May lose job when not needed
• May not include superannuation
Example 6: Calculating casual pay 2C
Milan is employed on a casual basis for a fast-food company. His rate of pay is $15 per hour plus
time-and-half on Saturday and double time on Sunday.
Last week Milan worked from 10:30 a.m. until 2:30 p.m. on Thursday, from 9:30 a.m. until
2 p.m. on Saturday, and from 12 noon until 4 p.m. on Sunday. How much did Milan earn last week?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity to be found. Wage = (4 × 15) normal pay
2 Normal wage is 4 hours (Thursday
10:30 a.m. until 2:30 p.m.)
multiplied by $15.
3 Payment for time-and-a-half is + (4.5 × 15 × 1.5) time-and-a-half pay
4.5 hours (Saturday 9:30 a.m. until
2 p.m.) multiplied by $15
multiplied by 1.5.
4 Payment for double time is 4 hours + (4 × 15 × 2) double time pay
(Sunday 12 noon until 4 p.m.)
multiplied by $15 multiplied by 2.
5 Evaluate and write using correct = $281.25
units.
6 Write your answer in words. Milan’s wage is $281.25
Exercise 2C LEVEL 1
1 Calculate the payment for working 4 hours overtime at time-and-a half given the following
normal pay rates.
a $18.00 b $39.50 c $63.20 d $43.83
2 Calculate the payment for working 3 hours overtime at double time given the following normal
pay rates.
a $37.99 b $19.05 c $48.78 d $61.79
Example 5 3 Ibrahim earns $32.50 an hour as a driver.
He works 38 hours a week at normal time and
5 hours a week at double time. Find his weekly
wage. Answer correct to the nearest cent.
4 Mei is a casual employee who worked 8 hours at normal time and 2 hours at time-and-a-half.
Her normal rate of pay is $12.30 per hour. What is her pay for the hours she worked?
5 Oliver earns $23.80 an hour. He earns normal time during week days and time-and-a-half on
weekends. Last week he worked 34 hours during the week and 6 hours during the weekend.
Find his weekly wage.
6 George works in a take-away food store. He gets paid $18.60 per hour for a standard 35-hour
week. Additional hours are paid at double time. His time card is shown below.
DAY IN OUT
Monday 8:30 a.m. 4:30 p.m.

Tuesday 9:00 a.m. 6:00 p.m.
Wednesday 8:45 a.m. 5:45 p.m.
Thursday 9:00 a.m. 6:30 p.m.
Friday 10:00 a.m. 8:00 p.m.
a How many hours did George work this week?

b Find his weekly wage.
7 Dave works for 5 hours at double time. He earns $98.00. Find his normal hourly rate.
8 Ella works 3 hours at time-and-a-half and earns $72.00. Find her normal hourly rate.
58 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2C
9 Zahid is paid a set wage of $774.72 for a 36-hour week, plus time-and-a-half for overtime.
In one particular week he worked 43 hours. What were Zahid’s earnings that week?
10 Samantha is paid a set wage of $962.50 for a 35-hour week, plus double time for overtime.
In one particular week she worked 40 hours. What are Samantha’s earnings?
11 A window washer is paid $22.50 per hour

and a height allowance of $55 per day.
In one week he works 9 hours each
week day.
a Calculate the amount earned each
week day.
b Calculate his total weekly earnings for
five days of work.
12 Anna works in a factory and is paid $18.54 per hour. When she operates the oven, she is paid
temperature allowance of $4.22 per hour in addition to her normal rate. Find her weekly pay
when she works a total of 42 hours including 10 hours working the oven.
13 Scott is a painter who is paid a normal rate of $36.80 per hour plus a height allowance of $21
per day. In one week Scott works 9 hours per day for 5 days on a tall building. Calculate his
total earnings.
14 Kathy is a scientist who is working in a remote part of Australia. She earns a salary of $86840
plus a weekly allowance of $124.80 for working under extreme and isolated conditions.
Calculate Kathy’s fortnightly pay.
15 Chris is a soldier and is paid $27 per hour

plus an additional allowance of $12.50 per
hour for disarming explosives. What is his
total weekly pay if he works from 6 a.m. to
2 p.m. for 7 days a week on explosives?
16 A miner earns a wage of $46.20 per hour plus an allowance of $28.20 per hour for
working in cramped spaces. The miner worked a 10-hour day for 5 days in small shaft.
What was his weekly pay?
LEVEL 2
Example 6 17 Vien is employed on a casual basis. His rate of pay is shown below. Last week Vien worked
from 11:30 a.m. until 3:30 p.m. on Thursday, from 8:30 a.m. till 2:00 p.m. on Saturday, and
from 12 noon till 6:00 p.m. on Sunday. How much did Vien earn last week?
Rate of pay
Weekdays $18.60 per hour
Saturday Time-and-a-half
Sunday Double time
18 A mechanic’s industrial award allows for normal rates for the first 7 hours on any day.
It provides for overtime payment at the rate of time-and-a-half for the first 2 hours and
double time thereafter. Find a mechanic’s wage for a 12-hour day if the normal pay rate is
$42.50 an hour.
19 Kaimi’s timesheet is shown Day In Out Meal break

opposite. She gets paid $12.80
per hour during the week, time- Monday 8:30 a.m. 5:30 p.m. 1 hour
and-a-half for Saturdays and Tuesday 8:30 a.m. 3:00 p.m. 1 hour
double time for Sundays. Kaimi
Wednesday 8:30 a.m. 5:30 p.m. 1 hour
is not paid for meal breaks.
a How much did Kaimi earn at Thursday 8:30 a.m. 9:00 p.m. 3 hour
the normal rate of pay during Friday 3:00 p.m. 7:00 p.m. No break
this week? No break
Saturday 8:00 a.m. 4:00 p.m.
b How much did Kaimi earn
from working at penalty rates Sunday 10:00 a.m. 3:00 p.m. 30 minutes
during this week?
c What percentage of her pay did Kaimi earn by working at penalty rates?
LEVEL 3
20 Connor works a 35-hour week and is paid $18.25 per hour. Any overtime is paid at time-
and-a-half. Connor wants to work enough overtime to earn at least $800 each week. What is
the minimum number of hours of overtime that Connor will need to work?
21 Max works in a shop and earns $21.60 per hour at the normal rate. Each week he works
15 hours at the normal rate and 4 hours at time-and-a-half.
a Calculate Max’s weekly wage.
b Max aims to increase his weekly wage to $540 by working extra hours at the normal rate.
How many extra hours must Max work?
c Max’s rate of pay increased by 5%. What is his new hourly rate for normal hours?
d What will be Max’s new weekly wage, assuming he maintains the extra working hours?
60 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2D
2D Commission
Commission is usually a percentage of the value of the goods sold. People such as real estate agents
and salespersons are paid a commission.
• Higher sales increase the income • Income may vary each week
• May receive a small payment (retainer) • Competition for customers is usually
plus the commission high
COMMISSION
Commission = Percentage of the value of the goods sold
Example 7: Finding the commission 2D
Zoë sold a house for $650 000. Find the commission from the sale if her rate of commission
was 1.25%.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (commission) to be found. Commission = 1.25% of $650 000
2 Multiply 1.25% by $650 000. = 0.0125 × 650 000
3 Evaluate and write using correct units. = $8125
4 Write your answer in words. Commission earned is $8125.
Example 8: Finding the commission 2D
An electrical goods salesman is paid $570.50 a week plus 4% commission on all sales over
$5000 a week. Find his earnings in a week in which his sales amounted to $6800.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Commission on sales of over $5000 is Sales = 6800 – 5000
$1800. = 1800
2 Write the quantity (earnings) to be found.
3 Add weekly payment and commission of Earnings = 570.50 + (4% of $1800)
4% on $1800 = 570.50 + (0.04 × 1800)
4 Evaluate and write using correct units. = $642.50
5 Write the answer in words. Earnings were $642.50.
2D Commission 61
Exercise 2D LEVEL 1
Example 7 1 Tama earns a commission of 4% on the sale price. What is the commission on the
following sales?
a $8820
b $16 740
c $34 220
2 Michelle Tran is a real estate agent. She earns 2%

on all sales. Calculate Michelle’s commission on
these sales.
a $456 000
b $420 000
c $285 500
d $590 700
3 Olivia sold a car valued at $54 000. Calculate Olivia’s commission from the sale if her rate of
commission is 3%.
Example 8 4 Sophie earns a weekly retainer of $355 plus a commission of 10% on sales. What are Sophie’s
total earnings for each week if she made the following sales?
a $760
b $2870
c $12 850
5 Chris earns $240 per week plus 25% commission on sales. Calculate Chris’s weekly earnings if
he made sales of $2880.
6 Ora is a salesperson for a cosmetics company. She is paid $500 per week and a commission of
3% on sales in excess of $800.
a What does Ora earn in a week in which she makes sales of $1200?
b What does Ora earn in a week in which she makes sales of $600?
7 A real estate agent charges a commission of 5% for the first $20 000 of the sale price and
2.5% for the balance of the sale price. Copy and complete the following table.
Sale price 5%
% commission on $220 000 2.5% commission on balance
a $150 000
b $200 000
c $250 000
d $300 000
62 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2D
LEVEL 2
8 Jade is a real estate agent and is paid an annual salary of $18 000 plus a commission of 2.5% on
all sales. She is also paid a car allowance of $50 per week. What was Jade’s total yearly income
if she sold $1 200 000 worth of property?
9 The commission that a real estate agent charges for selling a property is based on the selling
price, as shown in the table.
What is the commission charged on properties Selling price Commission
with the following selling prices?
a $100 000 First $20 000 5%
b $150 000 Next $120 000 3%
c $200 000
Thereafter 1%
10 Harry is a salesperson. He earns a basic wage of $300 per week and receives commission on
all sales. Last week he sold $20 000 worth of goods and earned $700. What was Harry’s rate of
commission?
LEVEL 3
11 Caitlin and her assistant, Holly, sell perfume.

Caitlin earns 20% commission on her own
sales, as well as 5% commission on Holly’s
sales. What was Caitlin’s commission last
month when she made sales of $1800 and Holly
made sales of $2000?
12 A real estate agency charges a commission for selling a

Commission rates
property. The commission is based on the selling price
shown in the table. Bailey is paid $180 per week Up to $300 000 4%
by the real estate agent plus 5% of the commission $300 000 and over 5%
received by the real estate agency. This week, Bailey
sold one property for $290 000 and one for $600 000.
He sold no properties in the previous week.
a What is the commission paid to the real estate agency for the $290 000 sale?
b What is the commission paid to the real estate agency for both properties?
c Calculate Bailey’s pay for this week.
d What is Bailey’s average weekly income for the two-week period?
2E Piecework, royalties and income from government 63
2E Piecework, royalties and income from government

Piecework
Piecework is a fixed payment for work completed. People who are employed to complete a
particular task, such as an electrician installing lights, are earning piecework.
• Incentive to work hard. Income increases • No permanent employment
with more work completed • No sick leave or holiday pay
• Often flexible hours and work place • May not include superannuation
PIECEWORK
Piecework = Number of units of work × Amount paid per unit
Example 9: Calculating a piecework payment 2E
Noah is a tiler and charges $47 per square metre to lay tiles. How much will he earn for
laying tiles in a room whose area is 14 square metres?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (earnings) to be found. Earnings = 14 × $47
2 Multiply number of square metres (14) by the
charge ($47).
4 Write the answer in words. Noah earns $658.
Royalties
A royalty is a payment for the use of intellectual property such as a book or song. It is calculated
as a percentage of the revenue or profit received from its use. People such as creative artists and
authors receive a royalty.
• Incentive to work hard. Income • Income varies according to sales
increases with a better product • No superannuation, sick leave or holiday pay
• Flexible hours and work place
ROYALTY
Royalty = Percentage of the goods sold or profit received
64 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2E
Example 10: Calculating a royalty 2E
Hiroshi is an author and is paid a royalty of 12% of books sold. Find his royalties if there were
2480 books sold at $67.50 each.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (royalty) to be found. Royalty
2 Multiply 12% by the total sales or = 12% of (2480 × $67.50)
2480 × $67.50 = 0.12 × 2480 × 67.50
088
4 Write the answer in words. Hiroshi earns $20 088 in royalties.
Income from the government

Some people receive a pension, allowance or benefit from
the government. For example, the age pension is payable for
a person who has reached 65 years of age (male). The
requirements for receiving these incomes may change
according to the priorities of the current government.
Example 11: Calculating an income from the government 2E
Youth Allowance helps people studying, undertaking training or in an apprenticeship.

Status Allowance per fortnight
Under 18, at home $194.50
Under 18, away from home $355.40
18 and over, away from home $355.40
18 and over, at home $233.90
How much Youth Allowance does Ryan receive in a year if he is over 18 and living at home while
studying?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (allowance) to be found. Allowance = $233.90 per fortnight
2 Multiply allowance per fortnight ($233.90) by 26. = $233.90 × 26
4 Write the answer in words. Ryan receives $6081.40.
2E Piecework, royalties and income from government 65
Exercise 2E LEVEL 1
Example 9 1 A dry cleaner charges $9 to clean a dress. How much do they earn by dry cleaning:
a 250 dresses? b 430 dresses? c 320 dresses?
2 Sabika is an artist who makes $180 for each large portrait and $100 for each small portrait.
How much will she earn if she sells 13 large and 28 small portraits?
3 Angus works part-time by addressing envelopes at home and is paid $23 per 100 envelopes
completed, plus $40 to deliver them to the office. What is his pay for delivering 2000 addressed
envelopes?
4 Emilio earns a royalty of 24% on net sales from writing a fiction book. There were $18640 net
sales in the last financial year. What is Emilio’s royalty payment?
Example 10 5 Calculate the royalties on the following sales.
a 3590 books sold at $45.60 with a 8% royalty payment
b 18 432 DVDs sold at $20 with a 10% royalty payment
c 4805 computer games sold at $65.40 with a 5% royalty payment
Example 11 6 Austudy provides financial help for people aged 25 or older who are studying full-time.
Status Fortnightly payment

Single, no children $355.40
Single, with children $465.60
Partnered, with children $390.20
Partnered, no children $355.40
a How much does Madison receive in a year if she is single with a child and studying
full-time? Madison is 29 years old.
b How much does Oscar receive in a year if he is partnered with no children and studying
full-time? Oscar is 35 years old.
7 A childcare benefit is available to support parents in the workforce. The rate per fortnight is
shown below.
No. of children Fortnightly pay

1 $337.00
2 $704.34
3 $1099.26
Calculate the yearly payment for:

a one child b two children c three children
66 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2E
LEVEL 2
8 Tahlia receives $19.40 for delivering 200 brochures. She receives an additional $30 per day
when delivering in wet weather. How much does she receive for delivering:
a 600 brochures on a clear day?
b 1000 brochures on a clear day?
c 800 brochures on a wet day?
d 1400 brochures on a wet day?
9 Tiki works in a factory that makes key rings. Each key ring completed earns him $0.34.
Tiki also receives an additional $25 if he works on the weekend. How much does he earn for
making:
a 420 key rings on Friday?
b 460 key rings on Wednesday?
c 380 key rings on Saturday?
d 230 key rings on Sunday?
10 A doctor charges each patient $33.50 for a

consultation. She works for 6 hours a day
and usually sees 5 patients per hour.
a How much money does the doctor
receive each day?
b The doctor also has costs of $410 per day.
What is the profit for the day?
11 Austudy is reduced by 50 cents for every dollar between $62 and $250 of fortnightly income.
Tyler is 28 years of age, partnered and has one child. He is studying full-time but earning
$126 per fortnight in a part-time job. What will be Tyler’s fortnightly Austudy payment? Use
the Austudy table on the previous page.
LEVEL 3
12 Anthony writes crime novels. He has just received the half-yearly statement of sales of his
latest novel. He has been informed that 20 000 copies were printed and there are 8760 left in
stock. Anthony receives 15% of the retail price as royalties.
a How many copies of his latest novel were sold?
b What is Anthony’s royalty if the retail price of his latest novel is $24.95?
c What is Anthony’s royalty if the retail price of $24.95 was discounted by 10%?
13 The maximum Youth Allowance is reduced by $1 for every $4 that the youth’s parents’ income
is over $31400. By how much is Charlotte’s Youth Allowance reduced if her parents earn a
combined income of $34 728?
2F Allowable tax deductions 67
2F Allowable tax deductions

Allowable tax deductions are amounts allowed by the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) to
be deducted from gross income to calculate a lower taxable income. Details of allowable tax
deductions are given on the ATO website (www.ato.gov.au).
Allowable tax deductions include:
• work-related expenses – costs incurred while performing your job
• self-education expenses – costs of education related to your work
• travel expenses – costs of travel directly connected with your work
• car expenses – costs of using your car related to your work
• clothing expenses – costs of work clothing and laundry
• tools – cost of work tools
• gifts and donations – gifts made to an eligible organisation.
Example 12: Calculating allowable tax deductions 2F
Riley works as an information technology consultant. He is entitled to the following tax deductions:
• equipment costs of $1260 • union fees of $650
• car expenses of $1060 • charity donations of $250
• professional learning of $985 • tax agent fee of $212
What is Riley’s total allowable tax deduction?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (tax deduction) to be Tax deduction = 1260 + 1060 + 985
calculated. + 650 + 250 + 212
2 Add all the allowable tax deductions.
4 Write the answer in words. Riley has an allowable tax deduction of $4417.
Example 13: Calculating allowable tax deductions 2F
Ava has used her own car for a total of 7900 km on work-related travel this financial year.
Calculate her tax deduction if she is entitled to claim 70 cents per kilometre.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (tax deduction) to be Tax deduction = 7900 × 0.70
calculated.
2 Multiply the kilometres travelled by the
rate per kilometre.
4 Write the answer in words. Ava has an allowable tax deduction of $5530.
68 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2F
Exercise 2F LEVEL 1
1 Stephanie works as a waitress and is entitled to an allowance for the cost of her work clothing
and laundry. Her clothing expenses are listed below. Calculate the total cost for each item of
clothing and her allowable tax deduction for clothing.
Work clothing Quantity Unit cost Total cost
Blue shirt 3 $55.00 a
Black trouser 3 $110.00 b
Belt 1 $45.00 c
Tie 2 $34.00 d
Dry-cleaning 4 $32.00 e
Example 12 2 Zara is a childcare worker who is entitled to the following tax deductions:
• $420 for union fees • tax agent fee of $125
• charity donations of $160 • self-education fee of $840
• stationery costs of $46
What is Zara’s total tax deduction?
3 Chris is entitled to the following tax deductions: training courses of $1460, motor vehicle
expenses of $1420, stationery costs of $760, union fees of $480, charity donations of $310 and
accountant fee of $184. What is Chris’s total allowable tax deduction?
Example 13 4 Car expense deductions can be claimed using the cents per kilometre method. Under this
method, individuals can claim a tax deduction based on the number of business kilometres
travelled in the financial year. This is shown in the table below.
Maximum kilometres allowed per car Tax deduction rate
5000 66 cents per kilometre
a Calculate the allowable tax deduction if the following business kilometres were travelled.
i 3560 km ii 1280 km iii 4580 km
iv 2340 km v 3105 km vi 6000 km
b The car expenses tax deduction rate has decreased to 60 cents per kilometre. Calculate the
allowable tax deduction if the following business kilometres were travelled.
i 4350 km ii 1289 km iii 5500 km
iv 4000 km v 80 km vi 694 km
2F Allowable tax deductions 69
LEVEL 2
5 Harrison buys a new van costing $42 560 for his business. He is entitled to claim a tax
deduction of 12% of the cost of the vehicle if the motor vehicle travels more than 5000 business
kilometres in a year. What is Harrison’s allowable tax deduction for the van if he travelled
16 230 kilometres for business?
6 Joel is a wheat farmer. He has capital

equipment on the farm worth $240 000. The
ATO allows a tax deduction for the
depreciation of capital equipment based on
a percentage of the current value. What is
the tax deduction using the following rates
of depreciation?
a 10% p.a. b 20% p.a.
c 30% p.a. d 40% p.a.
7 Syed has an investment property that contains furnishings valued at $12 600. The furnishings
are an allowable tax deduction with a rate of depreciation of 15% p.a. How much can be
claimed for depreciation over the year?
8 Xiang is a teacher who bought a $2350 laptop for school use. The laptop is an allowable
deduction with a rate of depreciation of 33% p.a. of the current value. How much can be
claimed for depreciation in the:
a first year? b second year? c third year?
LEVEL 3
9 Dylan is the owner of a newsagency in a shopping centre. He pays rent of $860 per week, has
an electricity bill of $280 per quarter and a telephone bill of $110 per month. These expenses
are work related so he is entitled to a tax deduction. What is Dylan’s total allowable tax
deduction?
10 Chelsea has a small office in her home to run a business. The office in her home is 8% of the
area of the house. The tax office allows 8% of the household bills as a tax deduction if it is
a work-related expense. Calculate the allowable tax deduction for the financial year on the
following household bills.
a Electricity bill of $360 per quarter
b Telephone bill of $70 per month
c House insurance of $684 per year
d Rent of $440 per fortnight
70 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2G
2G Taxable income
Each year people who earn an income are required
to complete a tax return on a paper form or
digitally, online. A tax return states a person’s
income, the amount of tax paid and any allowable
tax deductions. Most taxpayers have PAYG
(pay as you go) tax deducted from their wage or
salary throughout the year. The PAYG tax can be
greater or less than the required amount of tax to
be paid.
Tax is calculated on the taxable income. The taxable income is the gross income minus any
allowable deductions. The gross income is the total amount of money earned from all sources. It
includes interest, profits from shares or any payment received throughout the year.
TAXABLE INCOME
Taxable income = Gross income – Allowable tax deductions
Example 14: Calculating taxable income 2G
Anthony is a businessman who earns

a gross salary of $93 250 per year. His
accountant completed his tax return and
calculated $2890 in allowable tax
deductions.
What is Anthony’s taxable income?
SOLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (taxable income) to be Taxable income = 93 250 – 2890
calculated. = $90 360
2 Subtract the deductions from the gross
income.
3 Evaluate and write using the correct units.
2G Taxable income 71
Emily is a journalist with a gross annual salary of $87 620 . She also made $5680 from her share
portfolio and received $7320 in royalties. If Emily has tax deduc tions totaling $6472, calculate
her taxable income.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Calculate the gross income by adding Gross income = 87 620 + 5680 + 7320
all income. = $100 620
2 Write the quantity (taxable income) to
be calculated.
3 Subtract the deductions from the gross Taxable income = 100 620 − 6472
income.
4 Evaluate. = $94 148
Nicole is a scientist who earns a gross weekly pay of

$1624. She has allowable tax deductions of $8 per
week for dry-cleaning, $60 for work-related travel per
year, $460 per year for union fees and she made
donations to charities of $620 throughout the year.
a What is Nicole’s gross yearly salary?
b What is Nicole’s total allowable tax deduction?
c Calculate Nicole’s taxable income.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (salary) to be calculated. a Salary = 1624 × 52
2 Multiply the weekly pay by 52.
3 Evaluate. = $84 448
4 Write the quantity (tax deduction) to be b Tax deduction = (8 × 52) + 60

calculated. + 460 + 620
5 Add all the allowable deductions.
6 Evaluate. = $1556
7 Write the quantity (taxable income) to be c Taxable income = 84 448 − 1556

calculated.
8 Subtract the deductions from the gross income.
9 Evaluate. = $82 892
72 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2G
Exercise 2G LEVEL 1
Example 14 1 Benjamin has a gross income of $84 000. What is Benjamin’s taxable income given the
following allowable tax deductions?
a $5120 b $9571 c $4720
d $24 104 e $8205 f $17 594
g $12 520 h $23 890 i $34 560
Example 15 2 Chris earns a gross salary of $67 840 per year. His tax deductions total $3462. Calculate Chris’s
taxable income.
3 Jessica earned a gross income of $75480 in the last financial year.

Allowable tax deductions Amount
Work-related expenses $1260
Self-education expenses $680
Travel expenses $940
Clothing expenses $320
a The table above is a summary of her allowable tax deductions. What is her total allowable
deduction?
b Calculate Jessica’s taxable income in the last financial year.
Example 16 4 Eliza earned $88 784 from her employer in the last financial year. She also earned bank interest
of $380. Eliza spent $240 on books, $520 on stationery and $380 on a printer, all of which are
needed for her work.
a What is Eliza’s gross income?
b What are Eliza’s total allowable tax deductions?
c Calculate Eliza’s taxable income.
5 Daniel is a police officer who earned a gross income of $63 620. He claimed a tax deduction for a
utility belt ($160), a pair of safety glasses ($390), bulletproof vest ($1240) and handcuffs ($420).
a What is Daniel’s total allowable tax deduction?
b Calculate Daniel’s taxable income.
2G Taxable income 73
LEVEL 2
6 Nicholas earns a gross weekly pay of $1120. He has tax deductions of $1460.
a What is Nicholas’s gross yearly salary?
b What is Nicholas’s taxable income?
7 Ulani is a real estate salesperson who earns a commission of 2% on all sales. During the year
Ulani sold real estate to the value of $3 232 100.
a What is Ulani’s gross annual income?
b Ulani has calculated her tax deductions to be $4320. What is her taxable income?
8 Isabelle works for a travel agency and earns a gross fortnightly pay of $2780. She pays PAYG
tax of $602 per fortnight and has tax deductions of $7 per week for dry-cleaning, $80 for
work-related travel per year and $380 per year for union fees.
a What is Isabelle’s gross yearly salary?

b How much tax is deducted each week?
c What is Isabelle’s total allowable tax deduction?
d Calculate Isabelle’s taxable income.
LEVEL 3
9 Ahmed is a tradesman who receives a yearly gross salary of $92 200. He also works part-time
at TAFE for a wage of $135 per week. Ahmed received $360 in share dividends.
a What is Ahmed’s gross annual income?
b Ahmed is entitled to tax deduction for travelling between his two places of employment.
Ahmed has calculated that he travelled 340 km and the allowable deduction is 66 c/km.
What is Ahmed’s travel expense?
c In addition to the above travel expenses Ahmed is entitled to the following tax deductions:
$530 for union fees, tax agent fee of $180, charity donations of $280 and equipment costs
of $750. Calculate Ahmed’s total allowable deduction.
d What is Ahmed’s taxable income?
74 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2H
2H Gross pay, net pay and deductions

Gross pay is the total of an employee’s pay, including all allowances, overtime pay, commissions
and bonuses. It is the amount of money before any deductions are made. The amount remaining
after deductions have been subtracted is called the net pay or ‘take-home pay’.
Deductions from pay are a regular amount of money subtracted from a person’s wage or salary, not
to be confused with tax deductions. People have many different deductions subtracted from their
gross pay such as:
• income tax – a charge that funds the government’s operations
• superannuation – an investment for retirement. An employer must contribute 9% of the
employee’s wages into a superannuation fund
• health insurance – private insurance to cover medical and dental costs
• union fee – payment for union membership.
GROSS PAY, NET PAY AND DEDUCTIONS
Net pay = Gross pay − Deductions
Example 17: Calculating net pay 2H
Laura is a nurse who receives a gross weekly wage of

$2345. She has the following deductions taken from
her pay:
• Income tax – $861
• Health fund payments – $48.25
• Superannuation – $67.95
What is Laura’s net pay?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (net pay) to be found. Net pay
2 Write the formula for net pay. = Gross pay − deductions
3 Substitute the values for gross pay = 2345 − (861 + 48.25 + 67.95)
and deductions.
5 Write the answer in words. Laura’s net pay is $1367.80.
2H Gross pay, net pay and deductions 75
Example 18: Reading information from a pay slip 2H
Oscar received the following pay slip. What amount is added or deducted this pay for:
a gross pay?
b net pay?
c superannuation?
d PAYG tax?
EAGLE ENTERPRISES
Employee: Oscar Vargas No: 006914
Hours Rate Amount This Pay Year to Date

Ordinary time 26.00 $25.00 $650.00
Annual holiday 0.0 $25.99 $ 0.0
Total gross earnings $ 650.00 $1300.00
PAYG tax $ 100.00 $ 200.00
Social club $ 2.00 $ 4.00
HECS repayments $ 13.00 $ 26.00
Superannuation $ 35.00 $ 70.00
Less post-tax deductions $ 50.00 $ 100.00
Net pay $ 450.00 $ 900.00
Direct credit to account:
00000000
Total payments $ 450.00 $ 900.00
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read the value for gross earnings. a Gross pay is $650.00.
2 Read the value for net pay. b Net pay is $450.00.
3 Read the value for superannuation. c Superannuation is $35.00.
4 Read the value for PAYG tax. d PAYG tax is $100.00.
Exercise 2H LEVEL 1
Example 17 1 Calculate the weekly net pay for these people.

a Isabella receives a gross pay of $1386 and has total deductions of $875.
b Kim-Ly receives a gross pay of $985 and has total deductions of $265.
c Christopher receives a gross pay of $715 and has total deductions of $222.
2 Calculate the weekly net earnings for these people.

a Daniel receives a gross weekly wage of $1056 and has deductions of $294.75 for
income tax, $28.80 for superannuation and $325.05 for loan repayments.
b Hannah receives a gross weekly wage of $3042 and has deductions of $1068 for
income tax, health fund payments for $50.85, superannuation for $53.55 and savings
for $450.
c Kapil receives a gross weekly wage of $2274. He has deductions of $768 for income
tax, $28.95 for health insurance, $49.02 for superannuation, $15.30 for life insurance
and $450 for loan repayments.
Example 18 3 Jack’s annual gross pay is

$48 750. The deductions are $9150
for income tax, $1462 for health
insurance and $5280 for
superannuation.
a What are Jack’s total
deductions?
b What is Jack’s annual net pay?
4 Calculate the weekly gross pay for these people.

a Aaron receives a net weekly pay of $1245 and has deductions of $374.15 for income tax,
$45.60 for superannuation and $25.20 for union membership.
b Nani receives a net weekly pay of $2645 and has deductions of $1068 for income tax,
$53.95 for health fund payments and $83.75 for superannuation.
c Ivan receives a net weekly pay of $2511. He has deductions of $913 for income tax, $31.95
for health insurance, $59.46 for superannuation, $18.20 for life insurance and $470 for loan
repayments.
5 Harry’s net pay is $57 908. His deductions are $12 580 for income tax, $2087 for health
insurance and $6910 for superannuation. What is Harry’s gross pay?
2H Gross pay, net pay and deductions 77
6 Joshua is on a working holiday picking fruit. He is paid per piece of fruit he picks. He picked
fruit on a farm as follows:
Monday – 170
Tuesday – 130
Wednesday – 145
Thursday – 210
Friday –190
a What is his gross salary at $0.55 per piece of fruit?
b What is his net salary if he has total deductions of $121?
7 Charlotte owns an investment property that is rented out for $320 per week. She pays the real
estate agent a fee of 3% for managing the property.
a How much does she pay the real estate agent each week?
b How much does Charlotte receive each week from the investment property?
c What is the net income received by Charlotte from this property over the year?
8 Nicholas receives a yearly gross salary of $74 568. He pays 18% of his weekly gross salary in
income tax. He contributes 9% of his weekly gross salary to his superannuation fund and has
$155 in miscellaneous deductions each week.
a What is his gross weekly pay?
b How much income tax is deducted each week?
c How much superannuation is he contributing each week?
d What is the total amount of deductions made each week?
e What is his net weekly pay each week?
9 Lakshmi receives a fortnightly pay of $2240. She pays 15% of her weekly gross salary in
income tax. She contributes 9% of her weekly gross salary to her superannuation fund and has
$95 in miscellaneous deductions each week.
a What is her gross weekly pay?
b How much income tax is deducted each week?
c How much superannuation is she contributing each week?
d What is the total amount of deductions made each week?
e What is her net weekly pay each week?
LEVEL 2
10 Charlie is a building worker who receives $48.50 per hour for a 38-hour week. In addition he
receives an allowance of $3.50 per hour for work on a multistorey development. Charlie is
currently working on six-storey apartment block. Each week he has deducted from his pay a
superannuation contribution of 9% of his gross pay and union fees of $28.45. Because he only
started working late in the financial year, he doesn’t yet have to pay tax.
a What is his gross weekly pay this week?
b How much superannuation is he contributing each week?
c What is his net weekly pay this week?
11 Amina receives a gross fortnightly salary of $2703 and has deductions of $891.75 for income
tax, $54.30 for health fund payments, $753 for car loan payments and $14.55 for union
subscription.
a What is Amina’s net income each fortnight?
b What percentage of her gross income is deducted for income tax? (Answer correct to one
decimal place.)
LEVEL 3
12 Liam received a gross fortnightly salary of $3795. His pay deductions were $937.20 for income
tax, $215.25 for superannuation, $21.45 for union fees and $201 for a home loan repayment.
a What is his net income each fortnight?
b What was his weekly net pay?
c What percentage of his gross income was deducted for income tax? (Answer correct to one
decimal place.)
d If Liam’s loan repayment increased by 10%, what would be his new fortnightly net pay?
13 Jane normally works 37 hours a week at $54 per

hour. In one particular week she worked 42 hours and
received overtime at the rate of time-and-a-half. Her
deductions for the week were income tax $602.20,
medical fund $49.60, superannuation $74.40 and
motor vehicle repayment $417.40.
a What was Jane’s gross weekly wage?
b What was her net income for the week?
c What percentage of her gross income is spent on
the motor vehicle repayment? Answer correct to
the nearest per cent.
2I Calculating tax 79
2I Calculating tax
The amount of taxation varies according
to the amount of money you earn. A tax
return must be lodged with the ATO each
year. It is statement of the income earned
and the tax paid during the financial year
from 1 July to 30 June. The ATO publishes
a tax pack to assist people in completing
their tax return. The Tax Pack provides
information about the current income tax
rates.
Personal income tax rates

The personal income tax rates are regularly changed to take into account government policy and
inflation. The tax rates for 2017–18 are listed in the table below. (Note: these may not be the current
tax rates.)
Taxable income Tax payable

0 – $18 200 Nil
$18 201– $37 000 Nil + 19 cents for each $1 over $18 200
$37 001– $87 000 $3572 + 32.5 cents for each $1 over $37 000
$87 001– $180 000 $19 822 + 37 cents for each $1 over $87 000
$180 001 and over $54 232 + 45 cents for each $1 over $180 000
The tax payable is dependent on the taxable income. If the taxable income is $18 200 or less then
there is no tax payable. The tax rates then increase progressively. It starts out at 19 cents for every
$1, for amounts between $18 201 and $37 000.The highest tax rate is 45 cents for every $1 over
$180 000. Most people have PAYG tax deducted from their wage or salary throughout the year. This
PAYG tax can be greater or less than the required amount of tax to be paid. If a person pays more
throughout the year than they are required to pay, they will receive a tax refund. If they pay less than
the required amount of tax throughout the year, they will have tax owing.
TAX REFUND TAX OWING
Tax refund = Tax paid − Tax payable Tax owing = Tax payable − Tax paid
80 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money 2I
Example 19: Calculating the tax payable 2I
Manjula has a taxable income of $25 000. How much tax will she have to pay? If Manjula has
paid $1650 in PAYG tax, what will be her refund?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Look at the income tax rates table on page 79. Tax payable = Nil + (25 000 − 18 200) × 0.19
2 Taxable income of $25 000 is between = $1292
$18 201 and $37 000 (row 2).
3 Read the information in the tax payable
column for this range (row 2).
4 Write an expression for tax payable.
The word ‘over’ implies ‘more than’.
5 Evaluate using correct units.
6 Write the answer in words. Manjula needs to pay $1292 in tax.
7 Find the tax refund by subtracting Tax refund = $1650 − $1292
the tax payable from the tax paid. = $358
8 Evaluate.
9 Write the answer in words. Manjula’s refund will be $358.
Example 20: Calculating a tax refund 2I
Joel has a taxable income of $200 000 and has paid $65 300 in tax instalments.
a Calculate the amount of tax payable by Joel. Use the tax rates on page 79.
b Will Joel receive a refund or will he have to pay more tax? Justify your answer.
c What percentage of his income is paid as tax? Answer correct to one decimal place.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Look at the income tax rates. a Tax = 54 232 + (200 000 − 180 000) × 0.45
2 Taxable income of $200 000 is between = $63232
$180 000 and over.
3 Write an expression for tax payable.
4 Evaluate and write answer in words. Joel is required to pay $63232 in tax.
5 Find the tax refund by subtracting the b Tax refund = $65300 − $63232
tax paid from the tax payable. = $2068
6 Evaluate. The ATO owes Joel $2068.
7 Write answer in words.
8 Express the tax paid as a fraction of the c Tax paid $63232
=
taxable income. Taxable income $200 000
9 Multiply the fraction by 100 to convert it 63232
Percentage = × 100
200 000
to a percentage.
= 31.616
10 Evaluate.
11 Write as a decimal to one decimal place. ≈ 31.6%
Medicare levy
Medicare levy is an additional charge to support Australia’s universal health care system. It ensures
that all Australians have access to free or low-cost medical and hospital care. The Medicare levy is
calculated at a rate of 2% of taxable income
MEDICARE LEVY
Additional charge for health services. It is calculated at 2% of the taxable income.
Example 21: Calculating the Medicare levy 2I
The Medicare levy is 2% of the taxable income. What is the Medicare levy if the taxable income is
$90 600?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the Medicare rate of the taxable income. Medicare levy = 2% of $90 600
2 Express as a decimal 0.02. = 0.02 × 90 600
3 Evaluate. = $1812
4 Write answer using correct units and in words. Medicare levy payable is $1812.
Exercise 2I LEVEL 1
1 The table below shows the personal income tax rates for 2017–18.
Taxable income Tax payable Tax bracket
0–$18 200 Nil A
$18 201– $37 000 Nil + 19 cents for each $1 over $18 200 B
$37 001–$87 000 $3572 + 32.5 cents for each $1 over $37 000 C
$87 001–$180 000 $19 822 + 37 cents for each $1 over $87 000 D
$180 001 and over $54 232 + 45 cents for each $1 over $180 000 E
Which tax bracket (A, B, C, D or E) from the table applies to these taxable incomes?
a $24 000 b $2500 c $75 000
d $122 500 e $230 000 f $80 000
g $37 001 h $180 000 i $4500
2 Calculate the tax payable on the following taxable incomes by completing the tax payable
expression.
a $21 000 Tax payable = Nil + (21 000 − 18 200) × 0.19 =
b $32 500 Tax payable = Nil + (32 500 − 18 200) × 0.19 =
c $75 000 Tax payable = 3572 + (75 000 − 37 000) × 0.325 =
d $122 600 Tax payable = 19822 + (122 600 − 87 000) × 0.37 =
e $230 000 Tax payable = 54 232 + (230 000 − 180 000) × 0.45 =
f $80 000 Tax payable = 3572 + (80 000 − 37 000) × 0.325 =
3 Ava’s taxable income was $28 000. The first $18 200 was tax-free and the balance was taxed at
a marginal rate of 19%. Calculate the amount of tax payable.
4 Tyler’s taxable income was $111 000. The tax payable on the first $87 000 is $19 822 and the
balance was taxed at a marginal rate of 37%. Calculate the amount of tax payable.
Example 19 5 Use the tax table in question 1 to calculate the tax payable on the following taxable incomes.
a $18 201
b $37 001
c $87 001
Example 21 6 The Medicare levy is 2% of the taxable income. What is the Medicare levy on the following
taxable incomes? Answer correct to the nearest cent.
a $23 000 b $88 541 c $40 600
d $46 906 e $67 800 f $200 592
g $170 300 h $15 790 i $90 640
LEVEL 2
Use the tax table on page 82 to answers questions 7 to 11.
7 What is the tax payable on the following taxable incomes?

a $20 890 b $73 966 c $37 814
d $115 900 e $196 430 f $53 410
Example 20 8 Calculate the tax refund or tax owing for the following.
a Taxable income of $94 850 with tax instalments paid of $24 678
b Taxable income of $19 864 with tax instalments paid of $220
9 Ebony’s gross income is $46 660 with allowable tax deductions of $4120.
a What is Ebony’s taxable income?
b Calculate the amount of tax due.
c Ebony has paid $95 per week in tax. How much does Ebony owe in tax?
10 Charlie’s gross income is $155 730. His allowable tax deductions are $8230.
a What is Charlie’s taxable income?
b Calculate the amount of tax due.
c Charlie has paid $860 per week in tax. How much tax has been paid for the year?
d Will Charlie receive a refund or will he have to pay more tax? Justify your answer.
11 Ruby is a dentist with a taxable income of $145 684.

a Find the tax payable on this amount.
b What percentage of her income is paid as tax? Answer correct to one decimal place.
12 Liam has a taxable income of $56 400. He is required to pay $9877 in tax plus a Medicare levy
of 2% of his taxable income.
a How much is Liam’s Medicare levy?
b Calculate the total amount of tax due, including the Medicare levy.
13 Mia works for a superannuation fund and received a taxable income of $124 800.
a Medicare levy is 2% of the taxable income. How much is Mia’s Medicare levy?
b Calculate the total amount of tax due, including the Medicare levy.
LEVEL 3

02IQ14
a Formulae have been entered into cells C13, C14, C15, C16, E14, E16 and E18. These
formulae are shown above. Enter all the formulae.
b Change the taxable income (cell C4) to the following amounts.
i $50 000 ii $10 000 iii $200 000
15 Emma received an income of $75 420 from her main job for the last financial year and paid
$18680 in tax instalments. In addition, Emma earned an income of $6890 from a part-time job
and paid tax of $2980.
a How much tax has Emma paid for the year?
b Calculate the amount of tax payable by Emma.
c Will Emma receive a refund or will she have to pay more tax? Justify your answer.
d What percentage of her income is paid as tax? Answer correct to one decimal place.
16 Alexander earns an income of $42 000. He also has $15 000 in a bank account that earns a flat
rate of interest at 8.5% p.a. Alexander has to pay tax on his total income.
a How much interest does Alexander earn from his bank account this year?
b Calculate the tax payable.
17 Oscar is a coach driver who paid a Medicare levy of $1193.40. What was Oscar’s taxable
income if the rate of the Medicare levy is 2% of the taxable income? Answer correct to the
nearest dollar.
Summary
Salary and wages Salary – payment for a year’s work, which is then divided into
equal monthly, fortnightly or weekly payments
Wage – payment for work that is calculated on an hourly basis
Annual leave loading and Annual leave loading – payment for going on holidays
bonuses Holiday loading = 17.5% × normal weekly pay × weeks leave
Bonus – extra payment or gift earned as a reward
Overtime and other Overtime – work beyond the normal working day
allowances Casual rate – set amount paid for each hour’s work
Time-and-a-half rate = normal rate × 1.5
Double time rate = normal rate × 2
Allowance – payment for difficult or dangerous conditions
Commission Commission – percentage of the value of the goods sold
Retainer – small payment in addition to the commission
Piecework, royalties and Piecework – payment for work completed
government Piecework = Number of units of work × Amount paid per unit
Royalty – percentage of the goods sold or profit received
Government income – pension, allowance or benefit
Allowable tax deductions Deductions allowed by the Australian Taxation Office; include
work-related, self-education, travel, car, clothing, tools and donations
Taxable income Tax – calculated on the taxable income
Gross income – the total amount of money earned
Taxable income = Gross income − Allowable tax deductions
Gross pay, net pay and Gross pay – total of the employee’s pay including allowances,
deductions overtime pay, commissions and bonuses
Deductions – regular amount of money subtracted from a person’s
wage or salary such as income tax
Net pay = Gross pay − Deductions
Calculating tax Personal income tax tables have an increasing rate of tax.
Tax refund = Tax paid − Tax payable
Tax owing = Tax payable − Tax paid
Medicare levy Additional charge for health services.
Medicare is calculated at 2% of the taxable income.
86 Chapter 2 Earning and managing money
Review
1 Alyssa receives a salary of $85 640 . How much does she receive each fortnight?
A $3293.84 B $3293.85 C $1646.92 D $1646.93
2 Hine works a 38-hour week at a rate of $26.00 per hour. She receives 17.5% of 4 weeks normal
pay as holiday loading. What is Hine’s holiday loading?
A $172.90 B $691.60 C $3952.00 D $4643.60
3 Christopher receives a normal hourly rate of $22.60. What is his pay when he works 8 hours at
normal rate and 3 hours at time-and-a-half?
A $180.80 B $248.60 C $282.50 D $316.40
4 Qiang works for $15.60 per hour. He works for 6 hours on Thursday and 8 hours on Friday. On
Saturday he is paid at time-and-half for his work. Last week Qiang earned $335.40 in total for
his work on these three days. How many hours did he work on Saturday?
A 5 hours B 6.5 hours C 7.5 hours D 11.25 hours
5 Taylah earns a weekly retainer of $425 plus a commission of 8% on sales. What was her
weekly earnings in a week in which she made sales of $8620?
A $34.00 B $459.00 C $689.60 D $1114.60
6 Alex is landscape gardener and entitled to the following tax deductions: union fees of
$484, donations of $720, equipment cost of $860, and car expenses of $1455. What is Alex’s
total allowable tax deduction?
A $484 B $860 C $1455 D $3519
7 Stephanie has an allowable tax deduction of $4690. What is her taxable income if her gross
annual salary is $43 720
A $39 030 B $43 720 C $48 410 D $90 620
8 Charlotte is a librarian who has a taxable income of $69 410. The tax payable on the first
$37 000 is $3572 and the balance was taxed at a rate of 32.5%. How much does Charlotte have
to pay in tax, to the nearest dollar?
A $3572 B $14 105 C $22 558 D $37 000
9 William has a taxable income of $53 684. What is his Medicare levy? (Assume the Medicare
levy is calculated at a rate of 2% of the taxable income.)
w A $107.37 B $1073.68 C $2684.20 D $52 610.32
Chapter 2 Review 87
Review
1 Jake earns $96 470.40 per annum and works on average 48 hours per week.
a What is his average weekly wage? b Calculate the Jake’s hourly rate of pay.
2 Carlo’s employer has decided to reward all employees with a bonus. The bonus awarded is
6.25% of their annual salary. What is Carlo’s bonus if his annual salary is $85 940?
3 The public service provides all employees with a 17.5% holiday loading on four weeks normal
wages. Lucy works a 37-hour week for the public service in Canberra. She is paid a normal
hourly rate of $32.40.
a How much will Lucy receive in holiday loading?
b Calculate the total amount of pay that Lucy will receive for her holidays
4 Alex works for a fast food company and is paid $13.50 per hour for a 35-hour week. He
gets time-and-a-half pay for overtime worked on weekdays and double time for working on
weekends. Last week he worked a normal 35-hour week plus 3 hours of overtime during the
week and 4 hours of overtime on the weekend. What was his wage last week?
5 Chelsea is a real estate agent and is paid the following commission on her sales: 3% on the first
$45 000, then 2% for the next $90 000 and 1.5% thereafter.
a What is Chelsea’s commission if she sells a property for $240 000?
b How much would the owner of the property receive from the sale?
6 Patrick is a comedian who makes $120 for a short performance and $260 for a long
performance. How much will he earn if he completes 11 short and 12 long performances?
7 Bailey is paid a royalty of 11.3% on the net sales of his book. The net sales of his book in the
last financial year were $278 420.
a What was Bailey’s royalty payment in the last financial year?
b Net sales this financial year are expected to decrease by 15%. What is the expected royalty
payment for this financial year?
8 The maximum Youth Allowance is reduced by $1 for every $4 that the youth’s parents
income is over $31 400. By how much is Hannah’s Youth Allowance reduced if her parents
earn a combined income of $35 624?
9 Ali works as a builder. His annual union fees are $278.20. Ali has his union fees deducted from
his weekly pay. What is Ali’s weekly union deduction?
10 Sienna owns a clothing store and is entitled to the following tax deductions: $570 for union
fees, tax agent fee of $375, charity donations of $390, information technology costs of $3910
and printing costs of $528. What is Sienna’s total tax deduction?
88
Review Chapter 2 Earning and managing money
11 What is the taxable income if the gross salary is $82 390 and the allowable tax deduction is $4870?
12 Ryan is a small business owner who bought a $3850 computer for business use. The computer
is an allowable tax deduction with a rate of depreciation of 33% p.a.
a How much can he claim for depreciation in the first year?
b What is the depreciated value of the computer after the first year?
13 James works for a model agency and earns a gross fortnightly pay of $3720. He pays PAYG
tax of $986 per fortnight and has tax deductions of $15 per week for dry-cleaning, and yearly
deductions of $1450 for work-related travel and $1000 for charities.
a What is James’s gross yearly salary?
b How much tax is deducted each week?
c What is James’s total allowable tax deduction?
d Calculate James’s taxable income.
14 Ruby has a taxable income of $134 830. Calculate the tax payable on this amount. Use the
personal income tax rates on page 79.
15 Cooper is a retail store manager. After he received a $2300 annual pay rise, his salary become
$73 450. How much of the $2300 pay rise was he required to pay in tax? Use the personal
income tax rates on page 79.
16 Eliza is a casual employee and is paid a weekday rate of $18 per hour, a Saturday rate of time-
and-a-half for Saturdays and a Sunday rate of double time.
This is her time card for last week.
Day In Out Unpaid break
Friday 8:00 a.m. 3:30 p.m. 30 minutes
Saturday 9:00 a.m. 5:00 p.m. 1 hour
Sunday 9:00 a.m. 3:00 p.m. 30 minutes
a Calculate Eliza’s gross pay for last week.

b Eliza’s employer withholds 20% of her weekly earnings as PAYG tax. Calculate Eliza’s
PAYG tax for last week.
17 Nathan has a taxable income is $106 770. He has paid $980 per fortnight in tax.
a How much tax has Nathan paid for the year?
b Calculate the amount of tax payable by Nathan. Use the tax rates on page 79.
c Will Nathan receive a refund or will he have to pay more tax? Justify your answer.
d What percentage of his income is paid as tax? Answer correct to one decimal place.
3 Formulae and
equations
Syllabus topic — MS-A1 Formulae and equations
This topic provides a solid foundation in algebraic skills such as finding solutions to a variety
of equations in work-related and everyday contexts. Students develop awareness of the
applicability of algebra in their approach to everyday life.
Outcomes
• Evaluate an algebraic expression after • Solve linear equations derived from
substitution. substituting values into a formula.
• Use the formula to calculate distance, • Calculate and interpret blood alcohol
speed and time. content (BAC).
• Use a formula to calculate stopping • Calculate required medication dosages for
distance. children and adults.
• Develop and solve linear equations.

• Videos • Literacy worksheet • Quick Quiz
• Solutions (enabled by teacher) • Widgets • Study guide

Knowledge check
90 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3A
3A Substitution
Substitution involves replacing pronumerals in an algebraic expression with numbers. The resulting
numerical expression is evaluated and expressed to the specified level of accuracy.
SUBSTITUTION OF VALUES
1 Write the algebraic expression.

2 Replace the variables in the expression with the numbers given in the question.
3 Evaluate using the calculator.
4 Write the answer to the specified level of accuracy and correct units if necessary.
Example 1: Substituting values into linear expressions 3A
Evaluate 3a − 4 b + c, given a = 2, b = 5 and c = −10 .
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the algebraic expression, and 3a − 4 b + c = 3 × 2 − 4 × 5 + −10
substitute the values for a, b and c. = 6 − 20 − 10
2 Evaluate. = −24
Example 2: Substituting values into non-linear expressions 3A
Evaluate the following, given a = 2.

a 3a3 b (2a + 5)
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the algebraic expression, and a 3a3 = 3 × 23
substitute the value for a. = 3×8
2 Evaluate. = 24
3 Write the algebraic expression, and b (2a + 5) = 2 × 2 + 5
substitute the value for a. = 9
4 Evaluate. = 3
Example 3: Substituting values into non-linear expressions 3A
Evaluate a2 + 5b3 − c, given a = 4, b = 2 and c = −1.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the algebraic expression, and a2 + 5b3 − c = 42 + 5 × 23 − (−1)
substitute the values for a, b and c. = 16 + 40 + 1
2 Evaluate. = 57
3A Substitution 91
Exercise 3A LEVEL 1
Example 1 1 Evaluate these expressions, given a = 3, b = 4 and c = 8.

a 5a + b b a + 4b c a−b+c
d a2 + b2 e 4 b × ( −2a) f 2ab
g abc h b2 ÷ c i 2ab
2 c
2 Find the value of 3a + 2b when:

a a = 5 and b = 5 b a = 6 and b = −4 c a = 0 and b = 0
d a = −7 and b = −2 e a = 2 and b = 1 f a = 2 and b = 1
3 2
Example 2a 3 Calculate the value of e2 − 3 when:

a e =1 b e=3 c e = 10
d e=2 e e = −1 f e = −2
g e= 1 h e = 3.1 i e=1
2 5
4 Determine the value of 2r 2 + r + 1 when:

a r=2 b r=5 c r = −7
d r = −0.2 e r=2 f r = −3
3 4
5 Calculate the value of mc2 when:

a m = 4 and c = 2 b m = 2 and c = 7 c m = −3 and c = −10
d m = 8 and c = 0.5 e m = −0.2 and c = 15 f m = 6.25 and c = −1.5
g m = 7 and c = 1 h m = − 3 and c = 0.75 i m = 7 and c = 0.3
10 5 8 9
Example 2b 6 Find 2a when:

b
a a = 6 and b = 3 b a = 50 and b = 4 c a = −1 and b = −0.5
d a = 18 and b = 4 e a = −0.25 and b = −0.5 f a = 8 and b = 0.25
g a = 1 and b = 8 h a = 7 and b = 4 i a = − 1 and b = −125
4 8 7 10
7 Determine the value of 3 6c + d when:

a c = 1 and d = 2 b c = 10 and d = 4
c c = 4 and d = 3 d c = 0.5 and d = −2
92 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3A
LEVEL 2
Example 3 8 Evaluate these expressions, given x = 7, y = −5 and z = 21.

a x2 + z2 + y b y3 − 4 x
c 4x + z − 1 d z + 4 y2
3 xy2 6 y2
e f
z 5zx
9 The area of an annulus is evaluated using π ( R2 − r 2 ) where R is the radius of the outer circle
and r the radius of the inner circle. Find the area of an annulus if R is 8 cm and r is 4 cm.
10 Determine the value of 23 p2q, given that p = 4 and q = 6 .
11 Evaluate 3 2 y + 3 , given that y = 12.
12 Evaluate 3 x 2 + y , given that x = 3 and y = 4. Answer correct to two decimal places.
13 Find the value of 2π l when l = 2.6 and g = 9.8. Give your answer correct to two decimal
g
places.
14 Find the value of u 2 + 2as when u = 6, a = 7 and s = 2 .
LEVEL 3
15 Find the value of 1 when f = 10 and c = 2. Give your answer correct to three decimal
2π fc
places.
16 Find the value of 3Rr when R = 8.2 and r = 4.9. Give your answer correct to two decimal
R+r
places.
yA
17 What is the value of when y = 9 and A = 15? Give your answer correct to the nearest
( y + 12)
whole number.
3B Distance, speed and time

Speed is a rate that compares the distance travelled
to the time taken. The speed of a car is measured
in kilometres per hour ( km/h ). The speedometer
in a car measures the instantaneous speed of the
car. A speedometer is not totally accurate but has
a tolerance of 5%. GPS devices are also capable
of showing speed readings. Most cars also have an
odometer to indicate the distance travelled by the
vehicle.
DISTANCE, SPEED AND TIME
Road sign on the right is used

S = D or T = D or D = S × T
T S to remember the formulae.
D – Distance D
Cover the required quantity to
determine the formula. S T
S – Speed
T – Time
Example 4: Finding the distance, speed and time 3B
a Find the distance travelled by a car whose average speed is 65 km/h if the journey lasts
5 hours. (Answer correct to the nearest kilometre.)
b How long will it take a vehicle to travel 150 km at a speed of 60 km/h?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. a D = S×T
2 Substitute 65 for S and 5 for T into the formula. = 65 × 5
3 Evaluate and express answer correct to = 325 km
the nearest kilometre.
4 Write the formula. b T = D
S
5 Substitute 150 for D and 60 for S into
the formula. = 150
60
6 Evaluate and give the correct unit. = 2.5 h
94 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3B
Stopping distance
The stopping distance is the distance a vehicle travels from the time a driver sees an event occurring
to the time the vehicle is brought to a stop. It is calculated by adding the reaction distance and the
braking distance. Reaction distance (or thinking distance) is the distance travelled by the vehicle
from the time that a hazard, such as a pedestrian stepping into the road, first occurs, to when the
driver first commences braking. The reaction time averages 0.75 seconds for a fit and alert driver.
The braking distance is affected by the road surface (wet, slippery, uneven or unsealed), the
slope of the road (uphill or downhill), the weight of the vehicle and the condition of the brakes
and tyres.
STOPPING DISTANCE
Stopping distance = Reaction distance + Braking distance

2
d = 5Vt + V (formula is an approximation using average conditions)
18 170
d – stopping distance in metres
V – velocity or speed of the motor vehicle in km/h
t – reaction time in seconds
Example 5: Calculating the stopping distance 3B
Trevor was driving at a speed of 45 km/h and he had a

reaction time of 0.75 seconds when a hazard occurred.
Calculate the stopping distance using the formula
2
d = 5Vt + V .
18 170
Answer correct to the nearest whole metre.
S OLUTI O N:
2
1 Write the stopping distance formula. d = 5Vt + V
2 Substitute V = 45 and t = 0.75 into the 18 170
= 5 × 45 × 0.75 + 45
2
formula.
18 170
3 Evaluate. = 21.28676471
4 Express the answer as required. ≈ 21 m
5 Write the answer in words. Stopping distance is 21 m.
Exercise 3B LEVEL 1
1 Find the average speed (in km/h) of a vehicle that travels:

a 180 km in 2 hours b 485 km in 5 hours
c 360 km in 4.5 hours d 21 km in 1 hour

4
e 240 km in 2 12 hours f 16 km in 20 minutes
Example 4a 2 Find the distance travelled by a car whose average speed is 56 km/h over the following journey
times. (Answer correct to the nearest kilometre.)
a 3 hours b 7 hours
c 2.6 hours d 1 14 hours
e 3 12 hours f 2 43 hours
Example 4b 3 How long will it take a vehicle to travel the following journeys? (Answer correct to the nearest
hour.)
a 160 km at a speed of 80 km/h b 150 km at a speed of 60 km/h
c 120 km at a speed of 48 km/h d 225 km at a speed of 45 km/h
e 240 km at a speed of 40 km/h f 556 km at a speed of 69.5 km/h
4 The Melbourne Formula 1 track is 5.303 km in length.

The track record is 1 minute and 24 seconds. What is
the average speed (km/h) for the lap record? Answer
5 Caitlin lives in Wollongong and travels to Sydney daily.

The car trip requires her to travel at different speeds. Most often she travels 30 kilometres at
60 km/h and 40 kilometres at 100 km/h.
a What is the total distance of the trip?
b How long (in hours) does the trip take?
c What is her average speed (in km/h) when travelling to Sydney? (Answer correct to two
decimal places.)
6 Mohammad drives his car to work 3 days a week. The length of the trip is 48 km. The trip took
43 minutes on Monday, 50 minutes on Tuesday and 42 minutes on Wednesday.
a Calculate the average time taken to travel to work.
b What is the average speed (in km/h) for the three trips?
7 The graph below shows the reaction distance and the braking distance.
Metres
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
50 km/h
Reaction
55 km/h
Braking
60 km/h
65 km/h
70 km/h
A car is travelling at 60 km/h.

a What is the reaction distance?
b What is the braking distance?
c What is the stopping distance?
8 What is the stopping distance for each of the following?

a Reaction distance of 25 metres and braking distance of 22 metres
b Reaction distance of 19 metres and braking distance of 30 metres
9 Michael is driving with a reaction time of 0.75 seconds. Calculate the stopping distance
2
(to the nearest metre) for each of the following speeds. Use the formula d = 5Vt + V .
18 170
a 30 km/h b 50 km/h c 70 km/h
d 90 km/h e 110 km/h f 130 km/h
10 Sarah was driving her car at 40 km/h through

a school zone (reaction time is 0.50 seconds).
A school student ran onto the road 12 metres
in front of her.
a Do you think Sarah was able to stop without
running over the child? Give a reason for
your answer.
b What would have happened if Sarah had
been driving her car at 60 km/h? Explain
your answer.
Example 5 11 Oliver travels to work on the freeway. His reaction time is 0.60 seconds. Oliver usually drives
at the speed limit of 110 km/h.
5Vt V 2
a What is the stopping distance on the freeway? Use the formula d = + .
18 170
b Determine a safe distance (to the nearest metre) between cars that are travelling at 110 km/h
on the freeway based on the NSW Roads and Maritime advice to keep three seconds behind
the car in front.
LEVEL 2
12 Find the average speed (in km/h) of a vehicle that travels the following journeys. (Answer
correct to the nearest whole number.)
a 500 km in 6 hours and 10 minutes b 64 km in 1 hour and 30 seconds
c 36 000 m in 45 minutes d 320 m in 10 seconds
13 Find the distance travelled by a car whose average speed is 68 km/h if the journey lasts the
following times. (Answer correct to the nearest kilometre.)
a 30 minutes b 2 minutes
c 1 hour and 20 minutes d 4 hours 10 seconds
14 How long will it take a vehicle to travel the following journeys? (Answer correct to the nearest
minute.)
a 450 km at a speed of 82 km/h b 50 km at a speed of 60 km/h
c 250 km at a speed of 49 km/h d 580 000 m at a speed of 62 km/h
e 24 000 m at a speed of 72 km/h f 100 km at a speed of 1 km/min
15 The land speed record is 20.4 km/min.

a Express this speed in km/h.
b How far does this vehicle travel in 5 minutes?
c How far does this vehicle travel in 1 second?
d How long would it take for this vehicle to travel from Sydney to Brisbane (982 km)?
Answer to the nearest minute.
16 The Bathurst 1000 motor race has a lap record of 2 minutes and 12.339 seconds. The length of
the lap is 6.213 km.
a What is the average speed (to nearest km/h) for the lap record?
b How long is the race if the winning car travels the 161 laps at the average speed for the lap
record? Answer to the nearest minute.
17 ‘If you double your speed you need to Reaction distance (m)
Speed (km/h)
double your reaction distance.’
a Use d = 5Vt to complete the table. 10
18
Assume a reaction time of 0.75 seconds. 20
b Do you agree with the above statement? 40
Give a reason for your answer.
80
18 ‘If you double your speed you need to

Speed (km/h) Braking distance (m)
quadruple your braking distance.’
2 10
a Use d = V to complete the table.
170
20
b Do you agree with the above statement?
Give a reason for your answer. 40
80
LEVEL 3
19 Tahnee is driving at a speed of 30 km/h.

2
a Write the formula d = 5Vt + V with t as the subject.
18 170
b Find the value of t when d = 10 metres. Answer correct to one decimal place.
c Find the value of t when d = 20 metres. Answer correct to one decimal place.
d Find the value of t when d = 30 metres. Answer correct to one decimal place.
20 Liam is driving at a speed of 60 km/h.

Reaction time (s) Reaction distance (m)
a Use the formula d = 5Vt to complete
18 0.50
the table.
b What effect does increasing the reaction 1.00
time have on the stopping distance? Use
1.50
the calculations in the table to justify
your answer.
3C Linear equations 99
3C Linear equations
An equation is a mathematical statement that says that
two things are equal. It has an equals sign, for example
x + 4 = 7. In linear equations all the variables are raised to
the power of 1. The process of finding the unknown value
for the variable is called solving the equation. When solving
an equation, look to perform the opposite operation:
• + is opposite to −
• × is opposite to ÷
When solving an equation, the equation must be kept
balanced on either side of the equals sign. The same
operation needs to be done on both sides of the equals sign to keep the balance. The goal when
solving an equation is to get the pronumeral by itself on one side of the equation.
SOLVING AN EQUATION
1 Look to perform the opposite operation (+ is opposite to −, × is opposite to ÷).

2 Add or subtract the same number to both sides of the equation.
3 Multiply or divide both sides of the equation by the same number.
4 To solve two-step or three-step equations, repeat the steps 1 to 3 as required. It is often easier
to first add or subtract the same number to both sides of the equation.
When a solution has been reached it can be checked. The solution of the equation must satisfy the
equation. Always check your solution by substituting your answer into the original equation. The
left-hand side of the equation must equal the right-hand side.
Example 6: Solving a two-step linear equation 3C
Solve the equation 3 x + 5 = −2.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the equation. 3 x + 5 = −2
2 The opposite operation to adding by 5 is subtracting
3 x + 5 − 5 = −2 − 5
by 5. Subtract 5 from both sides of the equation.
3x = −7
3 The opposite operation to multiplying by 3 is dividing
3x = −7
by 3. Divide both sides of the equation by 3. 3 3
4 Express as a mixed number ( −2 13 ) . x= −2 13
5 Check that the solution is correct by substituting
x = −2 13 into the original equation.
100 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3C
Example 7: Solving a linear equation with fractions 3C

y y
Solve the equation − = 2. Express your answer as a simple fraction.
3 7
S OLUTI O N:
y y
1 Write the equation. − = 2
3 7
( ) ( 3)
2 To simplify the fractions find the lowest common
denominator. The smallest number that is divisible
7
by 3 and 7 is 21.
21 × ( ) − ( )
y y
3 Multiply both sides of the equation (all the terms) by 21. × 21 = 2 × 21
3 7
4 Cancel out the common factors (21 divided by 7 − 3 = 42
3 is 7 and 21 divided by 7 is 3).
5 Write the equation without a fraction (7 y − 3 y = 42). 7 y − 3y = 42
6 Subtract the like terms ( 7 y − 3 y = 4 y ). =
4y = 42
7 The opposite operation to multiplying by 4 is dividing 4y 42
=
by 4. Divide both sides of the equation by 4. 4 4
8 Express as a mixed number in simplest form (10 12 ) . y = 10 12

9 Check that the solution is correct by substituting
y = 10 12 into the original equation.
Example 8: Solving a four-step linear equation 3C
Solve the equation b + 5 = 3b + 7.

2
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the equation. b + 5 = 3b + 7
2
2 To simplify the fraction find the lowest common
denominator. The only denominator is 2. ( b2 ) × 2 + 5 × 2 = 3b × 2 + 7 × 2
3 Multiply both sides of the equation (all the terms)
by 2.
4 Cancel out the common factor (2 divided by 2 is 1). b + 10 = 6b + 14
5 Write the equation without a fraction. −6 b −6 b
6 The opposite operation to adding by 6b is subtracting b + 10 = 6b + 14
by 6b. Subtract 6b from both sides of the equation. −10 −10
7 The opposite operation to adding 10 is subtracting 10. −5b + 10 = 14
Subtract 10 from both sides of the equation. −5b = 4
8 The opposite operation to multiplying by −5 is dividing −5b = 4
−5 −5
by −5. Divide both sides of the equation by −5.
9 Express as a fraction in simplest form. b = −4
5
10 Check that the solution is correct.
Exercise 3C LEVEL 1
1 Solve the following linear equations.

a a + 7 = 15 b y + 12 = 23 c x + 4 = 14
d 6 + g = 13 e 7+w = 3 f 11 + z = −2
g b−5= 4 h m−9 = 9 i c − 6 = 15
j 12 − q = 5 k 8−h = 2 l −3 = n − ( −2)

a 5n = 15 b 6 x = 30 c 3c = −12
d 2b = 15 e 4 m = −21 f −25 = 6b
y
g s =8 h =6 i a = −7
2 5 11
g
j 12 = k c = −3 l 3= k
2 −15 −3
3 Eliza was required to solve the following equation on the

blackboard. This was her solution.
6y + 5 = 7
6 y = 12
y = 2
a Where is the error in Eliza’s working?
b What is the correct solution to the equation?
c Check your solution by substituting your answer into
the equation.
Example 6 4 Solve the following linear equations. All solutions are integers.
a 5w + 4 = 29 b 2t + 6 = 12 c 7 x − 6 = 22
d 5 y − 10 = −15 e 9m − 2 = −11 f 12 = 3a − 9
g 5 + 2e = 13 h 4 + 3b = 7 i 32 = 17 − 3k
j 16 = 10 + 2w k 70 − 10 d = 80 l 98 = 38 − 10z
5 Solve the following linear equations. Express your answer as a simplest fraction.
a 3q + 6 = 19 b 4r + 2 = 27 c 2 x + 11 = 14
d 31 = 4 + 4a e 18 = 17 + 5m f 12 = 29 + 2k
g 2c − 7 = 6 h 5e − 1 = 15 i 6 p − 4 = 11
j 28 = 2r + 19 k 37 = 3w − 7 l 16 = 9c + 8
6 Solve these equations.

a 4 d = 1 23 b 3 y = 4 15 c 7a = 4 23
d x = 3 92 e b = 3 35 f n = 7 14
3 2 5

a 2z = 4 b 6c = 12 c 2m = 8
5 2 9
5y
d 7 = 9x e 14 = f 15 = 3a
5 6 4
8 Twenty is added to a number divided by four and the result is 27.

a Write an equation using a to represent the number.
b Solve the equation for a.

g y
a + 6 = 14 b 5+ = 17 c 3= c −7
2 3 5
d 8 = 1− x e 7 = 1 + 3b f 6 = 2w − 9
7 2 5

a 4(m + 3) = 20 b 3(t − 3) = 3 c 2(e + 10) = 12
d −2(3 x + 1) = 6 e −5(d − 3) = −15 f ( w + 5)7 = 28
g 1 (3 + 2a) = 2 h 1 (7 − 5g) = −4 i 1 (9 − 3r ) = −2
5 6 3

a a−4 =6 b 3z − 2 = 7 c 5 + 2r = 2
2 5 3
d 12 + 6 x = −1 e b+2 = 1 f 3w + 2 = 3
5 8 2 2 4
LEVEL 2
Example 8 12 Solve the following linear equations.

a 4 d + 4 = 3d + 9 b 5x + 3 = 4 x − 5 c 7a + 2 = 4 a − 10
d 10 y − 4 = 2 + 4 y e 8m + 2 = ( −17) + 3m f 7c − 4 = 7 + c
g 7 + s = 8s − ( −9) h 13 + 2 z = 6 z + 3 i 1 + 5b = 8 − 2b
j −5 + 2 x = −3 + 8 x k 4 − ( −2a) = 5a + 1 l 2w − 7 + 4 w = 8

y
a x + 3 = 2 x + 10 b 8 + w = 3w − 10 c 6y − 4 = −5
3 2 2
d e + 4 = 10 + 2e e 10 m + 2 = 1 + m f 7 = b − 5b + 2
5 2 3
g 2 = 5 + 2r − r h 4t + 3t − 5 = 0 i 5n = 2n − 6 + n
5 3 7
14 Maya bought three dresses when she went shopping, each costing the same price, $c. Maya
also paid $15 for parking. The total cost for the day was $261.
a Using c as the cost of one dress, write an equation showing the cost of the three dresses
and parking.
b Use the equation to find the cost of each dress.
15 If 15 is subtracted from two times a certain number, the result is five times the number. Find the
number.
Example 7 16 Solve these equations.

a v+v =7 b a + a = 10 c x+x =5
3 4 5 2 4 8
g g
d m−m =7 e b−b=2 f − =4
5 15 6 7 6 8
4y y
g − =6 h 4c − c = 3 i h − 2h = 4
2 3 3 4 2 5
3p p
j n = n −1 k = +4 l 5z = 2 z + 1
8 7 10 2 2 5

a 4 = 12 b −6 = 5 c 2 +1 = 6
x a y
d 7+ 4 = 3 e 5 − 8 = −2 f 4 + −2 = 0
d c m
a 3 =5 b 7= 8 c 4 −4 =0
b +1 1+ y y−2
d 2x = 3 e 8c = 1 f 11 = 3m
x +1 4c − 2 4+m
19 Six more than twice a certain number is two more than the number itself.
a Write an equation using x to represent the number.
b Solve the equation for x.
20 My uncle is 8 years older than I, and 6 years ago he was double my age.
a Write an equation using x to represent my age.
b Solve the equation for x.
LEVEL 3

a 3(d + 7) = −2(d − 9) b 4(r + 2) + 1 = 3(r − 3)
c 3(5 x − 1) − 6( x − 5) = 11 d 6(2a − 5) − 2(3 + a) = 20
e 4(4 m + 1) − (m − 5) = 3 f 3( y − 2) = 10 − 2(3 y − 1)

y +1
a a + 2 = 3a − 4 b 2m − 5 = m + 1 c − ( y − 1) = 2
3 2 4
d b+5 = b+8 e 3x + 2 = 2 x + 4 f 4c − 2 = 2c + 1
3 2 5 2 5 3
3p − 2 2p + 1
g n +1 + n +1 = 7 h k + 4 − 2 k − 3 = −3 i − =3
6 2 3 2 5 4
3D Solving equations after substitution

Formula
A formula is a mathematical relationship between two or more variables. For example:
• a2 = b2 + c2 is Pythagoras’ formula for relating the sides of a right-angled triangle; a, b and c are
the variables
• A = π r 2 is a formula for relating the area and radius of a circle. A and r are the variables.
By substituting all the known variables into a formula, we are able to find the value of an unknown
variable. If the unknown is not the subject of the equation, solve the equation.
USING A FORMULA
1 Write the formula.

2 Replace the variables in the formula with the numbers given in the question.
3 If the unknown is not the subject of the equation, solve the equation.
5 Write the answer to the specified level of accuracy and correct units if necessary.
Example 9: Substituting values 3D
A traffic cone has a volume of 4000 cubic

centimetres and a height of 40 centimetres.
Use the formula r = 3V to find the radius
πh
of the base of the cone. Answer correct to two
decimal places.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. r = 3V
πh
2 Substitute 4000 for V and 40 for h into the 3 × 4000

=
formula. π × 40
3 Evaluate. = 9.772050238
4 Express the answer correct to two decimal ≈ 9.77 cm
places using correct units.
106 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3D
Exercise 3D LEVEL 1
1 If A = 4π r 2 find the value of A (correct to one decimal place) when:

a r=3 b r =8 c r = 24
2 If A = π ab find the value of A (correct to two decimal places) when:

a a = 10, b = 5 b a = 22, b = 15 c a = 8, b = 3
3 If I = Prn find the value of I (correct to one decimal place) when:

a P = 10, r = 0.2, n = 3 b P = 45, r = 0.1, n = 4 c P = 84, r = 0.3, n = 2
4 If A = P (1 + r ) n find the value of A (correct to two decimal places) when:

a P = 9, r = 0.05, n = 5 b P = 6, r = 0.04, n = 3 c P = 8, r = 0.03, n = 8
5 Find the value of S (correct to one decimal place) in the formula S = V 0 − Dn , if:
a V 0 = 25, D = 2.5 and n = 2
b V 0 = 17.5, D = 5 and n = 3
6 Use the formula V = 4 π r 3 to find the value of V (correct to the nearest whole number) when:
3
a r=6 b r = 5.2 c r = 7.1
7 If z = x − x find the value of z when:

s
a x = 12, x = 8 and s = 2 b x = 24, x = 4.5 and s = 4
Example 9 8 The cost of hiring a rotary hoe is given by the rule C = 25t + 900 where C is the total cost in
dollars and t is the number of hours for which the rotary hoe is hired. Find the cost of hiring a
rotary hoe for:
a 6 hours b 8.5 hours c 24 hours
9 The formula used to convert temperature from degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius is
C = 5 ( F − 32). Use this formula to convert the following temperatures to degrees Celsius.
9
Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
a 60° F b 80° F c 100° F
10 The circumference of a circle is given by the formula C = 2π r where C is the circumference

and r is the radius. Evaluate the radius if the circumference is 26 cm. Answer correct to two
decimal places.
11 A satellite is travelling at a speed of 22 500 km/h.

Use the formula S = D to calculate the distance travelled by the satellite in:
T
a 24 hours b 1 week c 1 year (assuming exactly 52 weeks in a year)
12 Ohm’s law is used to calculate the current ( I ), potential difference (V ) and resistance ( R).
It is given by the formula I = V . Find the value of V , in volts, given that I = 0.5 amps and
R
R = 18 ohms.
13 Use the formula S = n (a + l ) to evaluate n when S = 720 and a = 21 and l = 3.

2
14 The area of a trapezium is calculated using the formula A = 1 (a + b)h where the parallel sides
2
are a and b, and height is h. Find the height of the trapezium when the area of the trapezium is
45cm2 and its parallel sides are 12 cm and 8 cm.
15 Use the formula d = 5t 2 to evaluate t when d = 300 . Answer correct to two decimal places.
16 Pythagoras’ theorem a2 = b2 + c2 relates the sides of a right-angled triangle. Determine the

value of b when c = 20 mm and a = 35mm . Answer in mm correct to two decimal places.
17 Use the formula P = 3r − sr 2 to evaluate s, given that P = 48 and r = −2 .
18 If m = 2n3 − 3, what is the value of n when m = 13?
19 If R = 1 + 1 , what is the value of R1, given that R = 1.15 and R 2 = 2.30 . Answer correct to
R1 R 2
two decimal places.
108 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3D
LEVEL 2
 (1 + r ) n − 1 
20 The future value of an annuity is given by the formula FV = M  . Find the future
 r
value ( FV ) when M = 2600, n = 8 and r = 0.075. Answer correct to the nearest cent.
 (1 + r ) n − 1 
21 The present value of an annuity is given by the formula PV = M  n . Find
 r × (1 + r ) 
the present value ( PV ), given M = 900, n = 7 and r = 0.061. Answer correct to the nearest
dollar.
22 Use the formula S = n [ 2a + (n − 1)d ] to evaluate a, given S = 112, n = 8 and d = 3.

2
23 The entrance to the Louvre is a square pyramid

with base length of x, volume V and perpendicular
height h. The base length is given by the formula
x = 3V . Find the value of h, given that V = 8200
h
and x = 35. Answer correct to the nearest whole
number.
24 Find the value of c in the formula c = a2 + b2 − 2ab cos C when a = 5, b = 6 and cos C = 0.8.
LEVEL 3
2(s − ut )
25 Use the formula t = to find the value of s, given u = 2, a = 5 and t = 15. Answer
a
26 Find the value of A in the formula r = 360 A when r = 2 and θ = 20. Answer correct to one
πθ
decimal place.
27 The radius r of a sphere with volume V is given by the formula r = 3V . What is the 3
4π
volume of a sphere of radius 4 cm? Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
3E Changing the subject of the formula

When an equation has a pronumeral with no numbers on the left-hand side of the equals sign, this
pronumeral is the subject of the equation.
CHANGING THE SUBJECT OF THE FORMULA
Move the pronumerals and numbers, other than the pronumeral you want as the subject, to the
right-hand side of the equation.
To move any term or number:
1 Look to perform the opposite operation (+ is opposite to −, × is opposite to ÷).
2 Add or subtract the same term or number to both sides of the equation.
Example 10: Changing the subject of the formula 3E
The total cost of a child’s birthday party is given

by the formula:
C = 40 n + 75
where C ( $ ) is the total cost and n is the number
of children attending.
Make n the subject of the equation.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. C = 40 n + 75
2 The opposite operation to adding 75 is
−75 −75
subtracting 75. Subtract 75 from both sides C = 40 n + 75
of the equation. C − 75 = 40 n
3 Rearrange the equation with the subject on
40 n = C − 75
the left-hand side.
4 The opposite operation to multiplying by 40 n = C − 75
40 40
40 is dividing by 40. Divide both sides of
the equation by 40. n = C − 75
40
110 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3E
Pythagoras’ theorem is given by the formula c2 = a2 + b2

where a, b and c are the sides of a right-angled triangle. a2+ b2 = c2
a Make a the subject of the formula.
b What is the length of a given c = 7 and b = 5?
c2
a2
b2
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. a c2 = a 2 + b 2
2 The opposite operation to adding b2 is subtracting b2 .
Subtract b2 from both sides of the equation. c2 − b 2 = a 2
3 Rearrange the equation to make a the subject. a 2 = c2 − b 2
4 The opposite operation to squaring is to take the a = c2 − b 2
square root.
5 Substitute the 7 for c and 5 for b into the formula. b a = c2 − b 2
= 72 − 52
= 24
6 Evaluate. = 4.89897949
7 Express the answer correct to one decimal place. ≈ 4.9
Make r the subject of the compound interest formula A = P (1 + r )n.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. A = P (1 + r )n
2 The opposite operation to multiplying by P is dividing by P. A = (1 + r )n
Divide both sides of the equation by P. P
3 The opposite operation of raising to the power of n is taking the
n A = n
(1 + r )n
P
nth root. Take the nth root of both sides of the equation.
= 1+ r
4 The opposite operation to adding 1 is subtracting 1. Subtract 1 n A = 1+ r
from both sides of the equation. P
5 Rearrange the equation with the subject on the left-hand side. r =

n A −1
P
Exercise 3E LEVEL 1
1 Make x the subject of the following formulae.

a y = x+3 b y = 5x c y= x–7
d y = 2x + 9 e y=4–x f y = –7 + 3 x
2 Make x the subject of the following formulae.

a y= x b y = x +1 c y = x −1
8 2 3
d y = 7− x e y = 5+ x f y = −2 − x
6 5 3
3 The distance a car travels is given by the formula d = st where s is the speed and t is the time.
a Make t the subject of the formula.
b Make s the subject of the formula.
c Use the formula to find the speed of a car that has travelled a distance of 112 km in a time of
1.75 hours.
4 The area of a rectangle A with a length l and breadth b is given by the formula A = lb.
a Make l the subject of the formula.
b Make b the subject of the formula.
c Find the breadth of a rectangle with an area of 16 cm2 and length of 2.5 cm.
d Find the length of a rectangle with an area of 42 mm2 and breadth of 16 mm.
5 The force F on an object with mass m and acceleration a is given by the formula F = ma.
a Make m the subject of the formula.
b Make a the subject of the formula.
c Use the formula to find the acceleration when m = 2.5 and F = 10.
d Use the formula to find the mass when a = 16 and F = 72.
112 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3E
Example 10 6 Make b the subject of the following formulae.

a a = b+c b a = 6b − c
c c=a−b d a = 2c + 6b
e c = −4 a + 7b f b + 3c = 8a
g a + 2b + c = 0 h 5b − a − c = 0
i 0 = a + 4c − 9b
7 The formula y = mx + b represents a straight line.

a Make b the subject of the formula.
b Make m the subject of the formula.
c Make x the subject of the formula.
d Find x when y = 24, b = 18 and m = 2.
e Find m when y = 12, b = 4 and x = 2.
8 The perimeter of a rectangle is given by the formula P = 2(l + b) where l is the length and b the
breadth.
a Make length the subject of the formula.
b What is the length if the perimeter of a rectangle is 68 m and the breadth is 9 m?
c Make breadth the subject of the formula.
9 A supervisor of a business uses the formula

w = 35(a + 1.5b + 2c) to calculate the wages
where a, b and c are hours worked.
a Make a the subject of the formula.
b Make b the subject of the formula.
c Make c the subject of the formula.
d If a = 40, b = 3 and w = 1925, what is
the value of c?
10 The area of an ellipse is A = π ab where a is the

length of the semi-major axis and b is the length of the semi-minor axis.
a Make b the subject of the formula.
b Calculate the length of the semi-minor axis if the area of the ellipse is 26 cm 2 and the length
of the semi-major axis is 4 cm. Answer correct to two decimal places.
Example 11 11 Make x the subject of the following formulae.

a y = x2 b y = 3x 2 + 4 c y = 5 − 4 x2
d y= x e y=7 x f y=2 x +7
LEVEL 2
12 Write the formula 4 m = 5n + 2 p2 with p as the subject.
13 The volume of a cylinder is evaluated using V = π r 2h where h is the height and r is the
radius.
a Write the formula with h as the subject.
b Write the formula with r as the subject.
c Calculate the radius of a cylinder if the volume of the cylinder is 54 cm3 and the height is
6 cm. Answer correct to two decimal places.
14 Rearrange the formula for the surface area of a sphere A = 4π r 2 to make r the subject.
15 The body mass index is B = m2 where m is the mass (kg) and h is the height (m).
h
a Make m the subject of the formula.
b Make h the subject of the formula.
c Find the height, correct to two decimal places, when:
i B = 20 and m = 66 kg
ii B = 30 and m = 102 kg
 (1 + r )n − 1 
16 Write the formula FV = M   with M as the subject.
 r
17 The time taken in seconds, T, for a pendulum of length (metres) L to make a single swing is T = L .
9.8
a Write the formula with L as the subject.
b What is the length of the pendulum if it takes 4 seconds for a single swing?
18 Make cosC the subject in the formula c2 = a2 + b2 – 2ab cos C .
LEVEL 3
Example 12 19 The volume of a sphere is given by the formula V = 4 π r 3 where r is the radius.
3
a Write the formula with r as the subject.
b What is the radius in metres of a spherical balloon with a volume of 8 m3? Answer in metres
20 Write the formula Z = R2 + (2π fL )2 with L as the subject.
n A − 1.
21 Make A the subject of the formula r =
P
114 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3F
3F Blood alcohol content

Blood alcohol content (BAC) is a measure of the amount of alcohol in your blood. The
measurement is the number of grams of alcohol in 100 millilitres of blood. For example, a BAC
0.05 means 0.05g or 50 mg of alcohol in every 100 mL of blood. BAC is influenced by the number
of standard drinks consumed in a given amount of time and a person’s mass. Other factors that
affect BAC include gender, fitness, health and liver function.
BLOOD ALCOHOL CONTENT (BAC)
Blood alcohol can be estimated using a BAC formula.

(10 N − 7.5 H ) (10 N − 7.5 H )
BAC Male = or BAC Female =
6.8 M 5.5 M
BAC – Blood alcohol content
N – Number of standard drinks consumed
H – Hours drinking
M – Mass in kilograms
Example 13: Calculating the BAC 3F
Josip is 82 kg and has consumed 7 standard drinks

in the past two hours. He was stopped by police for
a random breath test. What would be an estimate
of Josip’s BAC using the formula above? Answer
correct to three decimal places.
S OLUTI O N:
(10 N − 7.5 H )
1 Write the formula. BAC Male =
6.8 M
2 Substitute the 7 for N, 2 for H and 82 for (10 × 7 − 7.5 × 2)
=
M into the formula. (6.8 × 82)
3 Evaluate. = 0.098637
4 Express the answer correct to three decimal ≈ 0.099
places.
5 Write the answer in words. Josip’s BAC is estimated to be 0.099.
NSW has three blood alcohol limits: zero, 0.02 and 0.05. Zero BAC applies to all learner and
provisional licence holders. This means you cannot drink at all and then drive, as you will be over
the limit and likely to lose your licence. 0.02 applies to drivers of heavy vehicles, vehicles with
dangerous loads, and drivers of public vehicles such as buses and taxis. The BAC is measured with
a breathalyser or by analysing a sample of blood.
HOURS TO WAIT BEFORE DRIVING
The number of hours you should wait before driving can be estimated from your BAC by a
formula.
Number of hours = Blood alcohol content

0.015
Example 14: Using BAC tables and a formula to estimate hours to

wait before driving 3F
The table below shows the estimated BAC resulting from having 1 to 6 standard drinks, for five
different body weights ( kg ).
Body weight ( kg )
Drinks 45 55 65 75 85
1 0.008 0.007 0.006 0.005 0.004
2 0.041 0.033 0.028 0.025 0.022
3 0.074 0.060 0.051 0.044 0.039
4 0.106 0.087 0.074 0.064 0.056
5 0.139 0.114 0.096 0.083 0.074
6 0.172 0.140 0.119 0.103 0.091
Terry weighs 65 kg and consumes four standard drinks in an hour. Calculate the number of
hours to wait before driving. (Answer to the nearest hour.)
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. Number of hours = BAC
0.015
2 From the table, Terry’s BAC is 0.074.
Substitute 0.074 into the formula. = 0.074
0.015
3 Evaluate.
= 4.933 33
4 Write the answer correct to the nearest
≈ 5
hour.
5 Write the answer in words. Terry waits 5 hours to drive.
Exercise 3F LEVEL 1
1 Calculate the BAC for the following females. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a Sarah is 48 kg and has consumed 4 standard drinks in the past 2 hours.
b Sienna is 59 kg and has consumed 3 standard drinks in the past hour.
c Alyssa is 81 kg and has consumed 6 standard drinks in the past 2 hours.
d Kayla is 65 kg and has consumed 8 standard drinks in the past 6 hours.
e Tahlia is 71 kg and has consumed 13 standard drinks in the past 3 hours.
f Mia is 55 kg and has consumed 9 standard drinks in the past 5 hours.
Example 13 2 Calculate the BAC for the following males. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a Wei is 53 kg and has consumed 3 standard drinks in the past 3 hours.
b Riley is 64 kg and has consumed 5 standard drinks in the past hour.
c Thomas is 98 kg and has consumed 2 standard drinks in the past 2 hours.
d Zachary is 47 kg and has consumed 10 standard drinks in the past 5 hours.
e Charlie is 85 kg and has consumed 12 standard drinks in the past 4 hours.
f Jacob is 104 kg and has consumed 7 standard drinks in the past 6 hours.
3 James and Olivia are twins and both weigh 73 kg. At a party they each consume 6 standard
drinks in two hours.
a What is James’s BAC? Answer correct to two decimal places.

b What is Olivia’s BAC? Answer correct to two decimal places.
c How long does James need to wait before he drives home?
4 Calculate the time to wait before driving. Answer to the nearest minute.
a BAC of 0.056
b BAC of 0.123
c BAC of 0.087
d BAC of 0.153
e BAC of 0.092
f BAC of 0.172
Example 14 5 The table below shows the BAC after one hour for a range of drinks and body weights.
Body weight ( kg )
Drinks 45 55 65 75 85 95 105 115
1 0.008 0.007 0.006 0.005 0.004 0.004 0.004 0.003
2 0.041 0.033 0.028 0.025 0.022 0.019 0.018 0.016
3 0.074 0.060 0.051 0.044 0.039 0.035 0.032 0.029
4 0.106 0.087 0.074 0.064 0.056 0.050 0.046 0.042
5 0.139 0.114 0.096 0.083 0.074 0.066 0.060 0.054
6 0.172 0.140 0.119 0.103 0.091 0.081 0.074 0.067
Calculate the time to wait before driving. (Answer to the nearest minute.)
a Joshua weighs 85 kg and consumes 5 standard drinks in an hour.
b Mitchell weighs 115 kg and consumes 3 standard drinks in an hour.
c Harrison weighs 45 kg and consumes 6 standard drinks in an hour.
d Cooper weighs 65 kg and consumes 2 standard drinks in an hour.
e Zachary weighs 95 kg and consumes 4 standard drinks in an hour.
f Aarav weighs 75 kg and consumes 1 standard drink in an hour.
6 Use the above table to construct two separate column graphs for the following body weights.
Make the number of drinks the horizontal axis and the BAC the vertical axis.
a Body weight of 45 kg
b Body weight of 115 kg
7 The formula for calculating ‘standard drinks’ is S = V × A × 0.789 where S is the number
of standard drinks, V is the volume of drink in litres and A is the percentage of alcohol.
How many standard drinks are in each of the following drinks? Answer correct to one
decimal place.
a 345 mL bottle of full strength beer at 5.2% alcohol
b 750 mL bottle of champagne at 13.5% alcohol
c 150 mL glass of white wine at 12.5% alcohol
d Mixed drink with a 30 mL of brandy at 38% alcohol
e 360 mL can of light beer at 2.1% alcohol
LEVEL 2
8 Find the value of BAC using the formula Number of hours = BAC , given the number of hours
0.015
to wait before driving.
a Number of hours to wait before driving is 5 (Answer correct to three decimal places.)
b Number of hours to wait before driving is 3 (Answer correct to three decimal places.)
LEVEL 3
(10 N − 7.5 H )
9 Find the value of H in the formula BAC Male = given:
6.8 M
a BAC Male = 0.066, M = 60 and N = 5. (Answer correct to the nearest minute.)
b BAC Male = 0.050, M = 79 and N = 7. (Answer correct to the nearest minute.)
(10 N − 7.5 H )
10 Find the value of N in the formula BAC Female = if:
5.5 M
a BAC Female = 0.066, M = 48 and H = 2 (Answer correct to one decimal place.)
b BAC Female = 0.120, M = 57 and H = 4 (Answer correct to one decimal place.)
11 The graph below relates the lifetime risk of death to the number of standard drinks consumed
per day.
10
9 Men
8 Women
Lifetime risk per 100
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Australian standard drinks per day
a What is the lifetime risk for a female and a male who consume 7 drinks per day?
b Why is the effect of alcohol greater on a female than on a male?
3G Medication 119
3G Medication
Australians have access to free or low-cost medicines. When a medicine is prescribed, the amount
per dose, the frequency of dosage and the dosages for different medication types are calculated.
Medications involve concentrations that are expressed as mass per volume, for example 5g/10 mL.
A concentration is a measure of how much of a given substance is mixed with another substance.
Example 15: Converting a concentration 3G
The concentration of a medicine is given as 100 mg per 50 mL. What is the dosage rate for this
medicine in g/mL?
S OLUTI O N:
100 mg
1 Write the rate as a fraction. The numerator 100 mg/50 mL =
50 mL
is 100 mg and the denominator is 50 mL.
2 Divide the numerator by the denominator. = 2 mg/mL
3 Multiply by 0.001 to convert milligrams to = 2 × 0.001 g/mL
grams.
4 Evaluate. = 0.002 g/mL
5 Write the answer using the correct units. The concentration is 0.002 g/mL.
Example 16: Using a formula for medication 3G
This formula is used to change the dosage given in tablet form to the equivalent concentration in
liquid form.
Strength required (mg)
Volume required (mL) = × Volume of stock (mL)
Stock strength (mg)
Joseph is prescribed 1000 mg of a mild painkiller. The medication available contains 100 mg in
5 mL. How much medication should Joseph be given?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula. Volume required = 1000 × 5
100
2 Substitute the strength required (1000),
the stock strength (100) and the volume of
stock (5) into the formula.
3 Evaluate. = 50 mL
4 Write the answer in words. The medication required is 50 mL.
120 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3G
Formula for children and infants

There are three formulae used to calculate the required dosages for children and infants.
Name Purpose Formula

Fried’s rule Dosage for children Age of infant (months) × Adult dose
Dosage =
1–2 years 150
Young’s rule Dosage for children Age of child (years) × Adult dose
Dosage =
1–12 years Age of child (years) + 12
Clark’s rule Dosage for children Weight (kg) × Adult dose

Dosage =
General 70
Example 17: Calculating dosages for children 3G
Young’s rule is used to prescribe medicine

for infants. The formula is:
yA
D=
y + 12
The variable D represents the infant’s
dosage (milligrams), y represents the
infant’s age (years) and A is the adult
dosage (milligrams).
What is the dosage for a 3-year-old child if

the adult dosage is 50 mg?
S OLUTI O N:
yA
1 Write the formula. D =
y + 12
2 Substitute the values for y (3) and A (50) = 3 × 50 = 150
into the formula. 3 + 12 15
3 Evaluate. = 10 mg
4 Express the answer using the correct
units.
5 Write the answer in words. The child’s dosage is 10 mg.
3G Medication 121
Exercise 3G LEVEL 1
1 There are 250 capsules in a container labelled as containing 30 g of a drug. How many
milligrams of the drug is in each capsule?
2 A medicine bottle has a capacity of 0.75 L.

a How many tablespoons (15 mL) of medicine does the bottle contain?
b How many teaspoons (5 mL) of medicine does the bottle contain?
c The dosage required is 20 mL, three times a day. For how many days will the bottle last?
Example 15 3 Use the rate provided to answer the following questions.
a The concentration of a drug is 25 mg/50 mL. How many mg are there in 10 mL?
b The concentration of a drug is 100 mg/5 mL. How many mg are there in 2 mL?
c The concentration of a drug is 18 g/100 mL. How many mg are there in 10 mL?
4 Use Fried’s rule to find the required infant dose.

a Mikayla aged 6 months, if the adult dose is 15 mL
b Flynn aged 12 months, if the adult dose is 10 mL
c Lara aged 15 months, if the adult dose is 20 mL
d Toby aged 2 years, if the adult dose is 10 mL
Example 17 5 Use Young’s rule to find the required dose for these children. Answer to the nearest millilitre.
a Christian who is 4 years old, if the adult dose is 10 mL
b Indiana who is 8 years old, if the adult dose is 15 mL
c Gemma who is 3 years old, if the adult dose is 10 mL
d Alika who is 72 months old, if the adult dose is 30 mL
6 Use Clark’s rule to find the required dose for these children. Answer to the nearest millilitre.
a Harper who weighs 40 kg, if the adult dose is 20 mL
b Aaron who weighs 30 kg, if the adult dose is 10 mL
c Eve who weighs 10 kg, if the adult dose is 15 mL
d Tyson who weighs 25 kg, if the adult dose is 20 mL
122 Chapter 3 Formulae and equations 3G
LEVEL 2
7 The medical equipment shown inserts a fluid drip by drip

into the blood. Use this formula for the following questions:
Volume (mL)
Drip rate =
Time (h)
a Leo receives 1.5 litres of fluid over 8 hours. What is the
required drip rate in mL/h?
b Aanya receives 2 litres of fluid over 5 hours. What is the
required drip rate in mL/h?
Example 16 8 Use this formula for the following questions:
Volume =
Stock strength (mg)
where ‘stock strength’ is the strength of the medicine
available.
a Alicia is prescribed 750 mg of medication. Tablets, each
of 500 mg, are available. How many tablets should Alicia
receive?
b Hugo is prescribed 450 mg of medication. Tablets, each of 200 mg, are available. How
many tablets should Hugo receive?
9 Use this formula for the following questions:

Volume required (mL) = × Volume of stock (mL)
Stock strength (mg)
a Eden is prescribed 50 mg of a mild painkiller. The medication available contains 20 mg in
5 mL. How much medication should be given to Eden?
b Sofia is prescribed 40 mg of a mild painkiller. The medication available contains 50 mg in
15 mL. How much medication should be given to Sofia?
LEVEL 3
10 Alex buys a 200 mL bottle of cough mixture.

a The recommended dose for a 3-year-old child is 5 mL. What is the adult dose using Young’s
rule?
b How many adult doses are contained in the bottle?
c It is recommended the cough mixture be taken at most 4 times a day. How many days will
the cough mixture last at this rate for an adult?
11 The drip rate is the total volume divided by total time. If Claire needed 300 mL of fluid to go
through in 2 hours, calculate the drip rate (1 drop = 0.05 mL) in the following units:
a mL per hour b mL per minute
c drops per hour d drops per minute z
Summary
Substitution 1 Write the algebraic expression.
2 Replace the variables in the expression with the numbers.
4 Write the answer to the specified level of accuracy.
Distance, speed
S = D or T = D or D = S × T D − Distance, S − Speed
and time T S
T − Time
Stopping distance = Reaction-time distance + Braking distance
Linear 1 Look to perform the opposite operation.

equations 2 Add or subtract the same number from both sides.
4 To solve two- or three-step equations repeat the above steps.
Solving equations 1 Write the formula.

after substitution 2 Replace the variables in the formula with the numbers.
3 Solve the equation if the unknown is not the subject.
5 Write the answer to the specified level of accuracy.
Changing the subject Move the pronumerals and numbers, other than the pronumeral you
of the formula want as the subject, to the right-hand side of the equation.
(10 N − 7.5 H )
Blood alcohol BAC Male = or BAC – Blood alcohol content
6.8 M
content
N – Number of standard drinks
(10 N − 7.5 H )
BAC Female = H – Hours drinking
5.5 M
M – Mass in kilograms
Number of hours = BAC BAC – Blood alcohol content
0.015
Medication Medications involve concentrations expressed as mass/volume such

as 5 g/10 mL.
Fried’s rule, Young’s rule and Clark’s rule are used to calculate the
required dosages for children and infants.
124
Review Chapter 3 Formulae and equations
1 Evaluate x 2 + y if x = 5 and y = 1. Answer correct to two decimal places.

A 5.00 B 5.09
C 5.10 D 6.00
2 How long will it take a vehicle to travel 342 km at a speed of 70 km/h?

A 0.20 h B 2.394 h
C 4.89 h D 272 h
3 What is the solution to x = −8?

3
A x = −24 B x = −8
3
C x=8 D x = 24
3
4 Solve the equation 11v − 8 = 27.
A v = 11 B v = 11
35 15
8 2
C v = 1 11 D v = 3 11
5 If p = q2 + r 2 find the value of p when q = 8 and r = 6 .

A 14 B 28
C 10 D 100
6 Use the formula A = bh to find the base, b, of a triangle when A is 14 and h is 4.

2
A 1.75 B 7
C 28 D 112
7 Make w the subject of the equation u = −5w + v .

A w = 1u − v B w = −1u − v
5 5
C w= u−v D w = v−u
5 5
8 Layla is 61 kg and has consumed 5 standard drinks in the past four hours.
(10 N − 7.5 H )
Calculate Layla’s blood alcohol content using the formula BAC Female = .
5.5 M
A 0.007 B 0.048
C 0.059 D 0.060
Chapter 3 Review 125
Review
1 Evaluate P if P = 2l + 2 B
b and:
a l = 12 and b = 10
b l = 30 and b = 21
2 The circumference of a circle is given by the formula C = 2π r where C is the circumference

and r is the radius. Evaluate the circumference of a circle with radius 14 cm. Answer correct to
two decimal places.
3 Ihorangi travels 51 km to work and 51 km from work each day.

a How many kilometres does he travel to and from work in a 5-day working week?
b Ihorangi drives a car with a fuel consumption of 7.5 L/100 km to and from work each week.
How many litres of petrol does Ihorangi use travelling to and from work?
c What is Ihorangi’s weekly petrol bill for work if petrol costs $1.52 per litre?
4 A car is travelling at 70 km/h and the reaction time of the driver is 0.50 seconds.
2
a Find the stopping distance of this car using the formula d = 5Vt + V .
18 170
b How much further would it take to stop this car if the reaction time of the driver was
2 seconds?

a e−2=6 b 6b = 27 c 2 + w = 11
d 2n + 5 = 17 e 9 = 3a − 6 f 8q + 4 = 36
g h = 14 h d + 1 25 = 2 101 i 7 y = 3 12
7
a 7p + 2 = 6p − 6 b 3 − 2s = 3s + 12 c 1+ p = 2p − 1
d d + 5 = 4d + 2 e 5(2 y + 5) = 15 f 9(1 − 3a) = 21
2
a 2c + 5 = 6 b x + x =1 c 1 (5u + 7) = 4
3 2 6 3
126
Review Chapter 3 Formulae and equations
8 Use the formula A = 3 4 B to find the value of A (correct to two decimal places) when:
2π
a B=5 b B = 20 c B = 150
9 The kinetic energy K (joules) of a particle of mass m kg with a velocity of v m/s, is given by
the formula K = 1 mv 2.
2
a Find m when K = 5.2 joules and v = 2 m/s.
b Find v when K = 6.4 joules and m = 1.3 kg. Answer correct to three decimal places.
10 Make sinC the subject of the formula A = 1 ab sin C .

2
11 The formula v2 = u2 + 2as is used to relate acceleration, velocity and distance.
a Make s the subject of the formula.
b Make u the subject of the formula.
12 Levi weighs 74 kg and consumes five standard drinks in an hour.

(10 N − 7.5 H )
a Calculate Levi’s blood alcohol content: ( BAC Male = ).
6.8 M
b What is the number of hours Levi will need to wait before driving?
(Number of hours = BAC ).
0.015
13 Anna and Bridget live 33 km apart. They cycle to meet each other. Anna travels at 10 km/h and
Bridget travels at 12 km/h.
a How long until they meet each other?
b What distance have they each travelled?
14 A landscaper charges $120 up front and $65 for each hour, h, that he works.
a Write a linear equation for the total charge, C, of any job.
b How much would a 4-hour job cost?
4 Measurement and
energy
Syllabus topic — M1.1 Practicalities of measurement
M1.3 Units of energy and mass
This topic provides students with the opportunity to appreciate inherent errors in
measurements and to become competent in solving practical problems involving energy.
Outcomes
• Review the use of different units of measurement.
• Calculate the absolute and percentage error in a measurement.
• Use standard form and standard prefixes in the context of measurement.
• Express numbers to a certain number of significant figures.
• Use units of energy and mass related to food and nutrition.
• Use units of energy to describe consumption of electricity.
• Investigate common appliances in terms of energy consumption.


Knowledge check
128 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4A
4A Units of measurement
Measurement is used to determine the size of a quantity. It usually involves using a measuring
instrument. For example, to measure length, instruments that can be used include the rule, tape
measure, caliper, micrometer, odometer, laser range finder, and GPS. There are a number of systems
of measurement that define their units of measurement. We use the SI metric system.
SI units
The SI (‘Systeme International’, or International System of Units of Measurement), is based on
multiples of 10. It is a version of the metric system that allows easy multiplication when converting
between related units. Units shown in black are SI and those in red (below) are non-SI units
approved for everyday or specialised use alongside SI units.
Quantity Name of unit Symbol Value

Length Metre m Base unit
Millimetre mm 1000 mm = 1 m
Centimetre cm 100 cm = 1 m
Kilometre km 1 km = 1000 m
Nautical mile nm 1 nm = 1852 m
Area Square metre m2 Base unit
Square centimetre cm2 10 000 cm2 = 1 m2
Hectare ha 1 ha = 10 000 m2
Volume Cubic metre m3 Base unit
Cubic centimetre cm3 1000 000 cm3 = 1 m3
Litre L 1 L = 1000 cm3
Millilitre mL 1000 mL = 1 L
Kilolitre kL 1 kL = 1000 L
Mass Kilogram kg Base unit
Gram g 1000 g = 1 kg
Milligram mg 1000 mg = 1 g
Tonne t 1 t = 1000 kg
Mass
Mass is a measure of the amount of matter in a body. There is a difference between mass and
weight. Weight is the measure of the amount of force acting on the mass due to gravity. However
if you’re on the surface of the Earth and not moving, mass and weight can be considered to be the
same in everyday contexts. If you change your location with respect to gravity, mass will remain
unchanged, but weight will not.
Converting between SI units of the same type

The SI prefix to the unit indicates the conversion between units of the same type. It indicates a
multiple of 10. Common prefixes are mega (1000 000), kilo (1000), centi 1 and milli 1 .
100 1000 ( ) ( )
4A Units of measurement 129
LENGTH, MASS AND VOLUME
To change from one unit to another, × 1000

mega
÷ 1000
multiply or divide by a power of 10. kilo
× 1000 ÷ 1000
unit
× 100 ÷ 100
centi
× 10 ÷ 10
milli
Example 1: Converting units of length 4A
Complete the following.

a 35cm = mm b 4500 m = km
S OLUTI O N:
1 To change cm to mm multiply by 10. a 35 cm = 35 × 10 mm
= 350 mm
2 To change m to km divide by 1000. b 4500 m = 4500 ÷ 1000 km
= 4.5 km
Example 2: Converting units of mass 4A
Complete the following.

a 5.2 kg = g b 3850 kg = t
S OLUTI O N:
1 To change kilograms to grams multiply by 1000. a 5.2 kg = 5.2 × 1000 = 5200 g
2 To change kilograms to tonnes divide by 1000. b 3850 kg = 3850 ÷ 1000 = 3.85 t
Converting area and volume units

To convert area units, change the side length units and compare the values for area.
1m2 = 100 × 100 = 10 000 cm2

1m = 100 cm
1 m2 = 10 000 cm2
1m 100 cm
or 1 cm2 = 1 m2
10 000
To convert volume units, change the side length units and compare the values for volume.
1m 1 m3 = 100 × 100 × 100 = 1000 000 cm3
100 cm
1m = 1 m3 = 1000 000 cm3
100 cm 1
1m 100 cm or 1 cm3 = m3
1000 000
Exercise 4A LEVEL 1
Example 1 1 Complete the following.

a 5 cm = mm b 78 m = cm c 2 km = m
d 890 m = cm e 57 cm = mm f 6 km = cm
g 9400 m = km h 600 mm = cm i 8100 cm = m
j 49 000 cm = km k 22 000 m = km l 51mm = cm
Example 2 2 Complete the following.

a 3 t = kg b 45 kg = g c 76 t = kg
d 8100 kg = g e 4t= g f 0.52 t = kg
g 6800 g = kg h 9 300 000 g = t i 45000 000 g = t
j 300 kg = t k 2300 g = kg l 60 000 g = kg
3 Complete the following.

a 2 L = mL b 12 kL = L c 9 kL = mL
d 7800 kL = L e 50 L = mL f 300 kL = mL
g 6100 L = kL h 400 mL = L i 210 000 mL = kL
j 80 mL = L k 79 000 mL = kL l 8 000 000 mL = kL
4 What unit of length is most appropriate to measure each of the following?

a Length of a pen
b Height of a building
c Thickness of a credit card
d Distance from Sydney to Newcastle
e Height of a person
f Length of a football field
5 What unit of mass is most appropriate to measure each of the following?

a Weight of an elephant
b Mass of a mug
c Bag of onions
d Weight of a baby
e Mass of a truck
f Mass of a teaspoon of sugar
4A Units of measurement 131
6 There are 20 litres of a chemical stored in a

container.
a What amount of chemical remains if
750 mL is removed from the container?
Answer in litres.
b How many containers are required to hold a
kilolitre of the chemical?
7 The length of the Murray River is 2575 km.

The length of the Hawkesbury River is
80 000 m. What is the difference in their
lengths? Answer in metres.
8 Christopher bought 3 kg of sultanas. What mass of sultanas remains if he ate 800 grams?
Answer in kilograms.
9 A truck is loaded with 3000 bricks, each of mass 4 kg. Find the total mass (in t) of the bricks.
10 The mass of a box of cereal is 375 g. What is the total mass (in kg) of 15 boxes of cereal?
11 Find the total mass (in g) of five items of mass 250 mg, 1100 mg, 0.7 g, 5.95 g, and 15.4 g.
12 An empty plastic box has mass 750 g. It is packed with 8 bottles of drink, each of mass 1.25 kg.
Calculate the total mass (in g) of the packed box.
13 There are three tonnes of grain in a truck. What is the mass if another 68 kg of grain is added to
the truck? Answer in kilograms.
14 Find the total mass (in kg) of the following contents of a shopping trolley:
muesli, 600 g instant coffee, 250 g frozen peas, 1 kg
rice, 3 kg self-raising flour, 2 kg strawberry jam, 400 g
LEVEL 2
15 The distance from John’s home to Bankstown is 15.9 km

a John travels to Bankstown and back 5 times each week. What is the total distance travelled?
b John’s car can travel 8 km on 1 litre of petrol. How many litres of petrol will John use each
week travelling to Bankstown and back?
16 A cyclist travels to and from work over a 1200-metre long bridge. Calculate the distance
travelled in a week if the cyclist works for 5 days. Answer in kilometres.
17 Madison travels 32 km to work each day. Her car uses 1 litre of petrol to travel 8 km.
a How many litres of petrol will she use to get to work?
b How many litres of petrol will she use for 5 days of work, including return travel?
18 Arrange 500 m, 0.005 km, 5000 cm and 5000 000 mm in:

a ascending order (smallest to largest)
b descending order (largest to smallest)

a 1 km 2 = m2 b 1 m2 = mm 2
c 1 cm 2 = mm 2 d 1000 cm2 = m2
e 2000 mm2 = cm 2 f 5000 m 2 = km2
g 3.9 m2 = cm 2 h 310 km2 = m2
i 4.7 m2 = mm 2 j 74 300m2 = km 2
k 6500 mm 2 = cm 2 l 4000 cm 2 = m2
20 The area of a field is 80 000 square metres.

Convert the area units to the following.
a Square kilometres
b Hectares
LEVEL 3
21 Jackson swims 30 lengths of a 50-metre pool.

a How many kilometres does he cover?
b If his goal is 4 kilometres, how many more lengths must he swim?
4B Measurement errors 133
4B Measurement errors
There are varying degrees of instrument error and measurement uncertainty when measuring.
Every time a measurement is repeated, with a sensitive instrument, a slightly different result will
be obtained. The possible sources of errors include mistakes in reading the scale, parallax error and
calibration error. The accuracy of a measurement is improved by making multiple measurements of
the same quantity with the same instrument.
Accuracy in measurements
The smallest unit on the measuring instrument is called the precision
or limit of reading. For example, a 30 cm ruler with a scale for 1 cm 2 3 4 5
millimetres has a precision of 1 mm. The accuracy of a measurement
( )
is restricted to plus or minus half ± 1 of the precision. For example,
2
if the measurement on the ruler is 10 mm then the range of errors is
10 ± 0.5 mm. Here the upper bound is 10 + 0.5 mm or 10.5 mm and
the lower bound is 10 – 0.5 mm or 9.5 mm.
Every measurement is an approximation and has an error. The absolute error is the difference
between the actual value and the measured value indicated by the instrument. The maximum value
for an absolute error is 1 of the precision.
2
PRECISION ABSOLUTE ERROR UPPER BOUND LOWER BOUND
Smallest unit Measured value – Measurement + Measurement −

on measuring Actual value Absolute error Absolute error
instrument or ± 1 × precision
limit of reading 2
Relative error gives an indication of how good a measurement is relative to the size of the quantity
being measured. The relative error of a measurement is calculated by dividing the precision by the
actual measurement. For example, the relative error for the above measurement is 0.5 = 0.05. The
10 ( )
relative error is often expressed as a percentage and called the ‘percentage error’. For example, the
percentage error for the above measurement is 0.5 × 100 = 5%.
10 ( )
RELATIVE ERROR PERCENTAGE ERROR
 Absolute error   Absolute error 

± ± × 100%
 Measurement   Measurement 
134 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4B
Example 3: Finding the measurement errors 4B
a What is the length indicated by the arrow on this ruler?
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
b What is the precision or limit of reading?

c What is the upper and lower bound for each measurement?
d Find the relative error. Answer correct to three decimal places.
e Find the percentage error. Answer correct to one decimal place.
S OLUTI O N:
1 The arrow is pointing to a Length is 38 mm.
38 mm.
2 Precision is the b Precision is 1 mm.
smallest unit on the ruler
(millimetre).
3 Calculate half the precision. c 1 × precision = 1 × 1
2 2
= 0.5 mm
4 Lower bound is the measured Lower bound = 38 − 0.5 = 37.5mm
value minus 1 the precision.
2
5 Upper bound is the measured Upper bound = 38 + 0.5 = 38.5mm
value plus 1 the precision.
2
 Absolute error 
6 Write the formula for relative d Relative error = ± 
 Measurement 
error.
7 Substitute the values for absolute = ± 0.5
error and the measurement. 38
8 Evaluate correct to three ≈ ±0.013
decimal places.
 Absolute error 
9 Write the formula for e Percentage error = ±  × 100%
 Measurement 
percentage error.
10 Substitute the values for = ± 0.5 × 100%
38
absolute error and the
measurement.
11 Evaluate. ≃ ±1.3%
4B Measurement errors 135
Exercise 4B LEVEL 1
Example 3 1 Four measurements of length are shown on the ruler below.
A B C D
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
a What length is indicated by each letter? Answer to the nearest millimetre.

c What the largest possible absolute error?
d What is the upper and lower bound for each measurement?
e Calculate the relative error, correct to three decimal places, for each measurement.
f Calculate the percentage error, correct to one decimal place, for each measurement.
2 Two measurements of mass are shown on the scales below.
0 0
4.5 0.5 4.5 0.5
4kg 1kg 4kg 1kg

A B
3.5 1.5 3.5 1.5
3kg 2kg 3kg 2kg

2.5 2.5
a What mass is indicated by A and B?

c What the largest possible absolute error?
d What is the upper and lower bound for each measurement?
e Calculate the relative error, correct to three decimal places, for each measurement.
f Calculate the percentage error, correct to one decimal place, for each measurement.
136 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4B
LEVEL 2
3 A dishwasher has a mass of exactly 49.6 kg. Abbey

measured the mass of the dishwasher as 50 kg to the nearest
kilogram.
a Find the absolute error.
b Find the relative error. Answer correct to three decimal places.
c Find the percentage error. Answer correct to two decimal places.
4 An iPhone has a mass of exactly 251 g. Vivaan measured the

mass of the iPhone as 235 g to the nearest gram.
b Find the relative error. Answer correct to three decimal
places.
c Find the percentage error correct to two decimal places.
5 An LCD screen has a mass of exactly 2.71 kg. Saliha

measured the mass of the screen as 3 kg to the nearest
kilogram.
b Find the relative error. Answer correct to three decimal
places.
c Find the percentage error correct to three decimal places.
6 A measurement was taken of a skid mark at the scene of a

car accident. The actual length of the skid mark was
25.15 metres; however, it was measured as 25 metres.
a What is the absolute error?
b Find the relative error. Answer correct to three decimal places.
c Find the percentage error. Answer correct to one decimal place.
LEVEL 3
7 The length of a building at school is exactly 56 m. Cooper measured the length of the building
to be 56.3 m and Filip measured the building at 55.8 m.
a What is the absolute error for Cooper’s measurement?
b What is the absolute error for Filip’s measurement?
c Compare the relative error for both measurements. Answer correct to four decimal places.
d Compare the percentage error for both measurements. Answer correct to three decimal
places.
4C Standard form and significant figures

Standard form
Standard form or scientific notation is used to write very large or very small numbers more
conveniently. It consists of a number between 1 and 10 multiplied by a power of 10. For example,
the number 4 100 000 is expressed in scientific notation as 4.1 × 106. The power of 10 indicates the
number of tens multiplied together. For example:
4.1 × 106 = 4.1 × (10 × 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 × 10)

= 4 100 000
When writing numbers in scientific notation, it is useful to remember that large numbers have a
positive power of 10 and small numbers have a negative power of 10.
WRITING NUMBERS IN SCIENTIFIC NOTATION
1 Find the first two non-zero digits.

2 Place a decimal point between these two digits. This is the number between 1 and 10.
3 Count the digits between the new and old decimal point. This is the power of 10.
4 Power of 10 is positive for larger numbers and negative for small numbers.
Example 4: Expressing a number in standard form 4C
The land surface of the Earth is approximately 153 400 000

square kilometres. Express this area more conveniently by
using scientific notation.
S OLUTI O N:
1 The first two non-zero digits are 1 and 5. 1.534
2 Place the decimal point between these numbers.
3 Count the digits from the old decimal point (end of the 1.53 400 000 – eight digits
number) to the position of the new decimal point.
4 Large number indicates the power of 10 is positive. Power of 10 is +8 or 8
5 Write in standard form. 153400 000 = 1.534 × 108
138 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4C
Significant figures
Significant figures are used to specify the accuracy of a number. They are often used to round a
number. Significant figures are the digits that carry meaning and contribute to the accuracy of the
number. This includes all the digits except the zeros at the start of a number and zeros at the end of
a number without a decimal point. These zeros are regarded as placeholders and only indicate the
size of the number. Consider the following examples.
• 51.340 has five significant figures: 5, 1, 3, 4 and 0.
• 0.00871 has three significant figures: 8, 7 and 1.
• 56091 has five significant figures: 5, 6, 0, 9 and 1.
The significant figures in a number not containing a decimal point can sometimes be unclear. For
example, the number 8000 may be correct to one, two, three or four significant figures. To prevent
this problem, the last significant figure of a number can be underlined. For example, the number
8000 has two significant figures. If the digit is not underlined the context of the problem is a guide
to the accuracy of the number.
WRITING NUMBERS TO SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
1 Write the number in standard form.

2 Count the digits in the number to determine its accuracy (ignore zeros at the end, except
after a decimal point).
3 Round the number to the required number of significant figures.
Example 5: Writing numbers to significant figures 4C
Write these numbers correct to the number of significant figures indicated.

a 153400 000 (three significant figures)
b 0.000 657 (two significant figures)
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write in standard form. a 153 400 000 = 1.534 × 108
2 Count the digits in the number. 1.534 has 4 digits
3 Round to three significant figures. 1.53 rounded to 3 sig. fig.
4 Write the answer in standard form correct 153 400 000 = 1.53 × 108
to three significant figures.
5 Write in standard form. b 0.000 657 = 6.57 × 10−4
6 Count the digits in the number. 6.57 has 3 digits
7 Round to two significant figures. 6.6 rounded to 2 sig. fig.
8 Write the answer in standard form correct 0.000 657 = 6.6 × 10−4
to two significant figures.
Exercise 4C LEVEL 1
Example 4 1 Write these numbers in standard form.

a 7600 b 1 700 000 000
c 590 000 d 6 800 000
e 35 000 f 310 000 000
g 77 100 000 h 523 000 000 000
i 95 400 000 000 j 540
2 Write these numbers in standard form.

a 0.000 56 b 0.000 068 7
c 0.000 000 812 d 0.0043
e 0.000 058 f 0.000 003 12
g 0.26 h 0.092
i 0.000 000 000 167 j 0.000 06
3 A microsecond is one millionth of a second. Write 5 microseconds in standard form.
4 Sharks existed 410 million years ago.

a Write this number in standard form.
b Express this number correct to one significant figure.
5 Write each of the following as a basic numeral.

a 1.12 × 10 5 b 5.34 × 10 8
c 5.2 × 10 3 d 8.678 × 10 7
e 2.4 × 10 2 f 7.8 × 10 9
g 3.9 × 106 h 2.8 × 101
i 6.4 × 10 4 j 3.5 × 10 4
6 Write each of the following as a basic numeral.

a 3.5 × 10 −4 b 7.9 × 10 −6
c 1.63 × 10 −7 d 5.81 × 10 −3
e 4.9 × 10 −2 f 9.8 × 10 −1
g 4.12 × 10 −8 h 6.33 × 10 −5
i 3.0 × 10 −9 j 7.134 × 10 −9
140 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4C
7 Convert a measurement of 5.81 × 10 −3 grams into kilograms. Express your answer in

standard form.
8 Evaluate the following and express your answer in standard form.

a (2.5 × 103 ) × (5.9 × 106 )
b (4.7 × 10 5) × (6.3 × 10 2 )
c (7.1 × 10 −5 ) × (4.2 × 10 −2 )
d (3.0 × 10 −4 ) × (6.2 × 10 −5 )
a 9.1 × 10 5
2.8 × 10 −2
b 7.2 × 10−3
7
4.8 × 10
−4
c 4.8 × 10 −5
3.2 × 10
Example 5 10 Write these numbers correct to the number of significant figures indicated.
a 1 561 231 (2 sig. fig.) b 3677 720 (4 sig. fig.) c 789 001 (5 sig. fig.)
d 3 300 000 (1 sig. fig.) e 777 777 (3 sig. fig.) f 3 194 729 (5 sig. fig.)
g 821 076 (4 sig. fig.) h 7091 (1 sig. fig.) i 49 172 (2 sig. fig.)
11 Write these numbers correct to the number of significant figures indicated.

a 0.0035 (1 sig. fig.) b 0.191 785 (4 sig. fig.) c 0.001 592 (3 sig. fig.)
d 0.111 222 33 (6 sig. fig.) e 0.000 0271 (1 sig. fig.) f 0.019 832 6 (5 sig. fig.)
g 0.008 12 (2 sig. fig.) h 0.092 71 (3 sig. fig.) i 0.000 419 (2 sig. fig.)
12 A bacterium has a radius of 0.000 015765m.

Express this length correct to two significant
figures.
13 Convert a measurement of 2654 kilograms into centigrams. Express your answer correct to two
significant figures.
14 Convert a measurement of 4 239 810 milligrams into grams. Express your answer correct to
four significant figures.
LEVEL 2
15 If y = 1 x 2, find the value of y when:

2
a x = 2.4 × 103 b x = 9.8 × 10 −3
16 The arc length of a circle is l = θ 2π r where θ is the angle at the centre and r is the
360°
radius of the circle. Use this formula to calculate the arc length of a circle when θ = 30° and
r = 7.4 × 10 8. Answer in standard form correct to one significant figure.
17 Given that V = r find the value of r in standard form when:

h
a V = 5 × 10 and h = 9 × 106
4
b V = 6 × 10 −7 and h = 4 × 10 2
18 Use the formula E = md 2 to find d correct to three significant figures, given that:
a m = 0.08 and E = 5.5 × 109 b m = 2.7 × 103 and E = 1.6 × 10 4
19 Find x, given x 3 = 2.7 × 1012. Answer correct to four significant figures.
20 Light travels at 300000 kilometres per second. Convert this measure to metres per second and
express this speed in standard form.
LEVEL 3
21 Use the formula E = 3p − q to evaluate E, given that p = 7.5 × 105 and q = 2.5 × 10 4. Answer in
standard form correct to one significant figure.
22 The volume of a cylinder is V = π r 2 h where r is the radius and h is the height of the cylinder.
Use this formula to calculate the volume of the cylinder when r = 5.6 × 10 4 and h = 2.8 × 103.
Answer in standard form correct to three significant figures.
23 The Earth is 1.496 × 108 km from the Sun. Calculate the distance travelled by the Earth in a
year, using the formula C = 2π r. Answer in standard form correct to two significant figures.
142 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4D
4D Food and nutrition

Food provides our bodies with energy, and nutrients for growth and repair. Food energy is a form
of chemical energy, and is measured in kilojoules. A kilojoule is 1000 joules. The common unit for
food energy used to be the ‘calorie’ (Cal), but the SI unit ‘kilojoule’ (kJ) is now used internationally
(1 calorie = 4.184 kilojoules). If you consume a lot of
food with a high kilojoule rating you may be getting
more energy than you need. The excess energy is
stored as fat.
The healthy eating pyramid on the right shows how

food is placed into groups. It suggests the amount of
each food category that a person should eat each day,
with the more of the food groups at the bottom of the
pyramid being eaten than the foods at the top.
FOOD ENERGY
Food energy is measured in kilojoules (kJ). (1calorie = 4.184 kilojoules)
Example 6: Using units of energy related to food and nutrition 4D
The number of kilojoules your Age Men kJ per day Women kJ per day
body requires each day depends
18 − 35 12 500 9000
on your age, gender and life style.
Answer the following questions 36 − 70 10 000 8000
using the table.
a Jenny is 18 years old. How many kilojoules does she need each day?
b Mitchell is 25 years old and works out at the gym for 2 hours. A gym workout uses
2500 kJ per hour. How many kilojoules does he need each day?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read table using women aged 18− 35. a Jenny needs 9000 kJ
2 Calculate the energy used in the gym workout. b Gym workout = 2 × 2500 = 5000 kJ
Multiply 2500 (per hour) by 2(2 h) Energy = 12 500 + 5000
3 Add the energy used in the gym workout to the = 17 500 kJ
daily kilojoules needed for a man aged 18− 35.
Food labels
Food manufactures are required to label the energy content of their products, to help consumers control
their energy intake. The energy available from the food is usually given on labels for 100 g, for a typical
serving size and/or the entire pack contents. The nutrition information panel (eatforhealth.gov.au) below
provides a few tips on understanding the food label and shopping for healthy food.
www.eatforhealth.gov.au
Example 7: Using units of energy related to food and nutrition 4D
Use the above food label to answer the following questions.

a What is the serving size? b How many kilojoules per 100 g?
c What is the amount of fibre per serve? d How much saturated fat per serve?
S OLUTI O N:
1 The top of the label contains information about the serving size. a Serving size is 30 g.
2 Energy is measured in kilojoules and the per 100 g column is b 1441kJ per 100 g
located on the right-hand side.
3 Fibre per serve is highlighted in purple in the label. c Fibre per serve is 6.4 g
4 Saturated fat per serve is highlighted in salmon in the label. d Saturated fat per serve
is 0.1g
144 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4D
Exercise 4D LEVEL 1
1 Complete (use 1 calorie = 4.184 kilojoules). Answer to the nearest whole number.
a 450 Cal = kJ b 1800 Cal = kJ c 15200 Cal = kJ
d 7600 kJ = Cal e 370 kJ = Cal f 1250 kJ = Cal
Example 6 2 The table below shows the approximate energy value of some common foods.
Food kJ Food kJ
Bacon (1 rasher) 960 Milk (small glass) 777
Banana 294 Orange juice (1 glass) 231
Butter (for 1 slice of
105 Potato chips (1 serve) 1512
bread)
Cornflakes (1 serve) 441 Toast (1 slice) 420
Egg (fried) 550 Soft drink (1 can) 525
Find the number of kilojoules in following breakfast meals.

a 3 pieces of toast, butter for toast, 1 serve of cornflakes, milk
b 2 fried eggs, 2 rashers of bacon, 1 glass of orange juice
c 1 serve of cornflakes, 1 banana, milk, 1 glass of orange juice
d 1 fried egg, 1 rasher of bacon, 1 piece of toast, butter for toast
e 1 serve of cornflakes, milk, 1 glass of orange juice, 2 fried eggs
3 The column graph below shows the recommended daily food servings for teenagers.
12
10
8
Girls
6
Boys
4
2
0
Grain Vegetable Fruit Milk Meat
a How many servings of vegetables are recommended for a girl?

b How many servings of meat are recommended for a boy?
c Which food groups for girls have three servings of food recommended?
d Which food group for boys has four servings of food recommended?
e For which food group is it recommended that boys and girls have the same number of servings?
f Find the difference in the number of servings of grain recommended for girls and for boys.
LEVEL 2
Example 7 4 The food label on the right is provided on a 200 g box of cream biscuits.
a How many grams of fat are in the 200 g box?
per biscuit per 100 g
b What is the energy value of:
Energy 95 kJ 2090 kJ
i one biscuit?
ii five biscuits? Protein 0.5g 11.0 g
iii the box of biscuits? Fat, total 1.2 g 26.4 g
c What is the energy value of: – saturated 0.6 g 13.2 g
i 100 g of biscuits? Carbohydrate, total 2.4 g 52.8 g
ii 20 g of biscuits? – sugars 0.4 g 8.8 g
iii 1g of biscuits? Fibre 0.3g 6.6 g
d How many kilojoules in 4 boxes of biscuits?
Sodium 25mg 550 mg
e Harrison is on a diet of 7030 kJ. How many
Potassium 10 mg 220 mg
biscuits can he consume?
f The recommended dietary intake of protein
is approximately 50 g per day. What
percentage of the recommended dietary intake comes from
eating one biscuit?
g The recommended dietary intake of sodium is approximately
1600 mg per day. What percentage of the recommended
dietary intake comes from eating one biscuit?
h How many biscuits need to be eaten to provide 90 g of protein?
i What percentage of the total carbohydrate in each biscuit is from sugars?
j What percentage of each box of biscuits is fat?
LEVEL 3
5 The table below shows the recommended daily food servings.

Grain Vegetable Fruit Milk Meat
9 4 3 3 2
a How many servings are recommended for each day?

b Construct a sector graph to represent this data.
c What percentage of the recommended daily food servings is grain? Answer to the nearest
whole number.
d What percentage of the recommended daily food servings is fruit and vegetables? Answer to
the nearest whole number.
e Cindy needs 8700 kilojoules of energy in her diet. How many kilojoules should she get
from grain? Assume that every serving has the same number of kilojoules. Answer to the
nearest whole number.
f William needs 10 500 kilojoules of energy in his diet. How many kilojoules should he get
from fruit and vegetables? Assume that every serving has the same number of kilojoules.
Answer to the nearest whole number.
146 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy 4E
4E Energy consumption
Energy is the capacity to do work. Energy exists in numerous forms, such as heat. The joule (symbol J)
is the unit of energy used by the International System of Units (SI). Heat energy, such as that produced
by burning natural gas in the home, is usually measured in megajoules (one million joules), symbol MJ.
Power
Power is the rate at which energy is generated or consumed. The watt is the SI unit of power and is
equal to one joule per second. The symbol for the watt is W. As for the joule, the standard SI prefixes
such as milli, kilo, mega, giga and tera are then added and commonly used to measure power.
Name Symbol Meaning Value Example
Milliwatt mW One thousandth of a watt 10 −3 W Small laser pointer
Watt W One watt 10 0 W Smartphone making a call
Kilowatt kW Thousand watts 103 W Electric heater
Megawatt MW Million watts 106 W Large diesel generator
Gigawatt GW Billion watts 109 W Very large power station
Terawatt TW Trillion watts 1012 W Worldwide nuclear power
Electrical energy
The joule is not a practical unit for measuring electrical
energy in most settings. It is more helpful to think of
electrical energy in terms of the power drawn by an
electrical device, and the length of time the device is in use.
For example, when a device with a power rating of 100 W
is turned on for one hour, the amount of energy used is
100 watt-hours (Wh). This is the same amount of energy a
50 W device would use in 2 hours.
The kilowatt-hour (kWh) is commonly used to measure electrical energy in household electricity
meters. It represents the amount of electrical energy when a 1000 W power load is drawn for one
hour. It is the result of multiplying power in kilowatts and time in hours. Note the conversion
1kWh = 3.6 MJ.
Consumption is a rate expressed as an amount over time. Electrical energy consumption can be
expressed in units of energy (such as kilowatt-hours or megawatt-hours, or megajoules) consumed
per unit of time. The average annual energy use per household in Australia is 11MWh/y or 3 MJ/y,
which also equates to about eight tonnes of CO2 emissions.
ENERGY CONSUMPTION
Energy consumption is the amount of energy consumed per unit of time.
Energy rating of appliances

In Australia an energy rating label is provided for various
appliances. It allows consumers to compare the energy
efficiency of similar products. Energy rating labels all have
a simple star rating. The more stars on the label, the more
energy efficient the appliance. The energy consumption
figure is the number in the red box. It indicates the amount
of electricity (kWh) the appliance typically uses in a year.
The lower the number the less the appliance will cost to run. The
running cost of the appliance is calculated by multiplying the
energy consumption figure by the electricity price rate. Electricity
suppliers usually give prices per kilowatt-hour.
Example 8: Calculating the cost of running appliances 4E
Determine the cost of running the following appliances given the average rate for electricity is
$0.17 per kWh.
a A dishwasher with an energy consumption of 670 kWh per year
b A 2.4 kW fan heater for five hours
c A 20 W LED light bulb for a year
S OLUTI O N:
1 Determine the cost by multiplying the energy a Cost = 670 × 0.17
consumption figure by the electricity price rate. = $113.90
2 Determine the energy (kWh) by multiplying the b Electricity = 2.4 × 5
power rating (kW) by the hours used. = 12 kWh
3 Determine the cost by multiplying the energy by Cost = 12 × 0.17
the electricity price rate. = $2.04
4 Determine the energy (kWh) by multiplying the c Electricity = 0.02 × 24 × 365
power rating (kW) by the hours used. = 175.2 kWh
5 Determine the cost by multiplying the energy by Cost = 175.2 × 0.17
the electricity price rate. = $29.78
Exercise 4E LEVEL 1
1 Answer the following questions using this electricity account.
a When was this electricity account issued?

b What is the total amount due?
c What is the due date?
d How much GST was charged?
e What is the charge for the peak use of electricity?
f How much has the bill increased from the last bill?
g Express the increase as a percentage of the last bill. Answer correct to two decimal places.
Example 8 2 A washing machine has an energy consumption figure

of 206 kWh per year. Calculate the cost of running
the washing machine for a year using the following
electricity price rates.
a $0.2185 / kWh
b $0.2419 / kWh
c $0.2653 / kWh
3 Leo uses a 800 W microwave oven for a total of

20 hours per week.
a How much energy does the microwave oven use
per week?
b What is the cost of using the microwave oven for
a week if the electricity is charged at a rate of
$0.2367 per kWh?
4 The Bailey family has a television set with a 200 W

rating.
a How many kilowatt-hours of electricity does it use
in a week if it is switched on for an average of 9 hours per day?
b What is the cost of running the TV for a week if electricity is $0.2259 per kWh?
5 Samantha uses a hairdryer with a rating of 1.5 kW for a total of 8 hours. Her electricity is
charged at a rate of 22.81 cents per kWh.
a How many kilowatt-hours were used by the hairdryer?
b What is the cost of using the hairdryer? Answer to the nearest cent.
6 Darcy uses an iron with a rating of 500 W for an average of 8 hours per week. Find the cost of
the electricity used to do the weekly ironing if it is charged at a rate of 25.67 cents per kWh.
7 Bian received her natural gas account.
Amount used Charges Cost

First 5500 MJ 2.491 cents per MJ
Next 13900 MJ 1.499 cents per MJ
Supply fee $40.00
a Calculate the cost of the first 5500 MJ. Answer to the nearest cent.
b Calculate the cost of the next 13900 MJ. Answer to the nearest cent.
c What is the total charge? Answer to the nearest cent.
LEVEL 2
8 The power ratings of various electrical appliances are shown in the table.
Electrical appliance Power rating

Dishwasher 1600 W
Hair dryer 600 W
Light bulb 75 W
Refrigerator 150 W
Television 300 W
Toaster 1000 W
a How much energy is used by the television for 5 hours? Answer in kilowatt-hours.
b How much energy is used by the toaster for 30 minutes? Answer in watt-hours.
c For how many hours was the dishwasher used if its cost of operation was $11.76? The cost
of electricity is $0.2450 per kilowatt-hour.
d For how many hours was the hair dryer used if its cost of operation was $1.95? The cost of
electricity is 26 cents per kilowatt-hour.
LEVEL 3
9 An energy company’s charges for gas over a 3-month period are shown in the table.
First 4000 MJ $0.02590 per MJ

Usage charge
Additional MJ over 4000 $0.01573 per MJ
a Paige used 3580 MJ of gas in this period. What is the cost of this gas? Answer to the
nearest cent.
b Muhammad used 4250 MJ of gas in this period. What is the cost of this gas? Answer to the
nearest cent.
c What percentage of Muhammad’s gas usage was charged at the lower rate? Answer correct
d Jesse received a gas bill for $93.24. How much gas did he use in this period?
e Ellie has decided to reduce her energy bills. She has a target of $50 for gas. What is the
maximum number of MJ she can use in this period?
f Aaron used 5620 MJ of gas in this period. The gas charges are increasing by 5% in next
quarter. However, Aaron has purchased a new gas heater with a 5-star rating that will reduce
his consumption by 800 MJ. Calculate Aaron’s expected bill next quarter.
Summary
Units of × 1000 mega
÷ 1000 10 000 cm 2 = 1 m 2
measurement kilo
× 1000 ÷ 1000 1 ha = 10 000 m 2
unit
× 100 ÷ 100 1000 000 cm 3 = 1 m 3
centi
× 10 milli ÷ 10
Measurement Precision or limit of reading − smallest unit on the measuring instrument

errors Absolute error − the difference between actual value and measured value,
or ± 1 × precision
2
Upper bound = Measurement + Absolute error
Lower bound = Measurement − Absolute error
(
Percentage error = ± Absolute error × 100%
Measurement )
Writing 1 Find the first two non-zero digits.
numbers in 2 Place a decimal point between these two digits.
standard form 3 Power of 10 is number of the digits between the new and the old decimal
point. (Small number − negative value, large number − positive value)
Food and Food energy is measured in kilojoules. If you consume a lot of food with
nutrition a high kilojoule rating you may be getting more energy than you need.
The excess energy is stored as fat.
1calorie ( Cal ) = 4.184 kilojoules ( kJ ).
The energy available from the food is usually given on labels for 100 g,
for a typical serving size and/or the entire pack contents.
Energy Energy is the capacity to do work. The joule (J) is the basic SI unit of energy.
consumption Power is the rate of consuming or generating energy. Its SI unit is the
watt (W) which is equal to one joule per second.
Electricity meters measure electrical energy in kilowatt-hours, kWh,
which is the energy consumed by running a 1 kW appliance for one hour.
1 kWh = 3.6 MJ
Running cost of the appliance is calculated by multiplying the energy

consumption by the electricity price in cents per kilowatt-hour.
152 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy
Review
1 Convert 7.5 metres to millimetres

A 0.0075 mm B 75 mm C 750 mm D 7500 mm
2 Convert 0.85 g to kilograms.

A 0.00085 kg B 0.0085 kg C 85 kg D 850 kg
3 How many square millimetres are in a square centimetre?

A 10 B 100 C 1000 D 10 000
4 6.2 m2 is the same as:

A 620 cm2 B 0.0062 km2 C 62 000 cm2 D 6200 mm2
5 What is the absolute error if the precision is 0.1 cm?

A 0.005 cm B 0.05 cm C 0.5 cm D 5 cm
6 Write 4 500 000 in standard form.

A 4.5 × 10 −6 B 4.5 × 10 −5 C 4.5 × 10 5 D 4.5 × 106
7 Express 0.0655 correct to two significant figures.

A 0.06 B 0.07 C 0.065 D 0.066
8 What is the internationally accepted unit to measure food energy?

A Calorie B Gram C Kilowatt D Kilojoule
9 Flynn uses a 1.2-kilowatt dishwasher for a total of 5 hours. He is charged at a rate of

25.72 cents per kilowatt-hour. What is the cost of using the dishwasher?
A $0.31 B $1.29 C $1.54 D $6.00
10 How much energy does a 600-watt hair dryer use running for 5 hours?
A 1.2 kWh B 3 kWh C 120 kWh D 3000 kWh
Review
1 There are six tonnes of iron ore on a train. What is the mass (in tonnes) if another 246 kg of
iron ore is added to the train?
2 Complete the following

a 500 cm2 = m2 b 4000 cm2 = mm2 c 3 km2 = m2
3 A field has a perimeter of exactly 400 m. Lily measured the field to be 401.2 m, using a long
tape marked in 0.1 m intervals.
a Calculate the limit of reading.
b What is the absolute error for Lily’s measurement?
c What is the percentage error for Lily’s measurement? Answer correct to three decimal
places.
4 Write as a basic numeral.

a 4.8 × 106 b 6.25 × 10 −4 c 35 × 124
5 Write these numbers in standard form

a 50 800 b 0.0036 c 381 000 000

−5
b 4.6 × 10−2 c 5.8 × 10 4 × (3.5 × 106 )
4
a (7.2 × 105) × (2.1 × 10 4 )
2.3 × 10 2.9 × 10
7 Convert a measurement of 3580 tonnes into milligrams. Express your answer in standard form
correct to two significant figures.
8 Find the value of 45 × 154 and express your answer in standard form correct to two significant
figures.
9 The table below shows foods and the energy in kilojoules in a normal size serving.
Food KJ Food KJ
Chips 1425 Apple pie 1380
Fish 340 Ice cream 810
Roast lamb 1064 Soft drink 372
Find the number of kilojoules in following meals.

a Fish and chips, ice cream and soft drink
b Roast lamb, chips, apple pie
c Ice cream, apple pie, soft drink
154 Chapter 4 Measurement and energy
10 The graph on the right is part of an electricity

Review
account issued to a customer. 12

a How many times per year is the electricity
meter read? 10
b What unit is used to measure electrical
energy?
8
c What is the energy consumption in the
kWh
January quarter?
d What is the energy consumption in the 6
July quarter?
e Which quarter used 6 kWh of electricity? 4
f Which quarter used 9 kWh of electricity?
g Which quarter had the greatest usage of 2
electricity?
0 Apr Jul Oct Jan Apr
Extended-response question
11 The power rating for electrical appliances is

Electrical appliance Power rating
shown in the table.
Electric shaver 15 W
a How much energy does a laptop computer
use for 12 hours? Hair dryer 1000 W
b How much energy does a microwave use for
Iron 900 W
1 hour? Answer in watt-hours.
2 Laptop computer 50 W
c For how many hours was the vacuum cleaner used, if
the cost of operating the vacuum cleaner was $6.36? Microwave 1200 W
The price of electricity is $0.2650 per kilowatt-hour. Vacuum cleaner 600 W
5 Relative frequency
and probability
Syllabus topic — MS-S2 Relative frequency and probability
This topic will develop your awareness of the broad range of applications of probability
concepts in everyday life and their use in decision-making.
Outcomes
• Understand and use the language associated with probability.
• Understand and apply the definition of probability.
• Calculate probabilities using fractions, decimals and percentages.
• Use tables or tree diagrams to determine the outcomes for a multistage event.
• Demonstrate the range of possible probabilities.
• Identify and use the complement of an event.
• Calculate and use relative frequencies to estimate probabilities.
• Calculate the expected frequency of future events.
• Predict by calculation the number of people of each blood type in a population.


Knowledge check
156 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5A
5A language of probability
Probability language is used to specify the chances of an event occurring. For example:
‘The chance of rain next week is 50%.’
‘Connor has no chance of playing football tomorrow.’
‘Winning a race in the next month is very likely.’
‘Amber has an even chance of passing this test.’
Events that must occur are certain and events that have no chance of occurring are impossible.
When an event has an equal chance of occurring or not occurring, it is an even chance or 50 − 50 or
a 50% chance. Events that have better than an even chance are called likely, often, probable, sure
or expected. Conversely, events that have less than an even chance are called unlikely, doubtful,
improbable, rarely or unexpected.
0 0.5 1
Impossible Unlikely Even chance Likely Certain
PRObAbility
• Probability is the chance of something happening.

• Certain events have a probability of 1 and impossible events have a probability of 0.
Example 1: Using the language of probability 5A
Ying has a pear, an apple and an orange. She randomly

selects one piece of fruit. Describe the chance of the
following events using the words ‘certain’, ‘likely’,
‘even’, ‘unlikely’ or ‘impossible’.
a Ying selects a banana.
b Ying selects an orange.
c Ying selects a piece of fruit.
d Ying selects a pear or an apple.
S OlUti O n:
1 No chance of selecting a banana. a Impossible
2 One chance out of three of selecting the orange. b Unlikely
3 Selecting a piece of fruit must happen. c Certain
4 Two chances out of three of selecting the pear or the apple. d Likely
5A Language of probability 157
Sample space
Sample space is the set of all possible outcomes or possible results of an experiment. For example,
if the experiment is tossing a coin, then the sample space is a head and a tail. When a die is tossed,
the sample space is the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Each outcome or data value is an element of the
sample space. The sample space is usually listed between curly brackets {}.
SAMPlE SPACE
Sample space is the set of all possible outcomes.

Each outcome or data value is an element of the sample space.
Example 2: identifying the sample space 5A
a Daniel is choosing a day of the week to start his holiday. List the sample space.
b How many elements in the sample space?
S OlUti O n:
1 Each day of the week is a possible outcome − a Sample space = { M, T, W, T, F, S, S}
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
Friday, Saturday and Sunday.
2 List each element between the curly brackets.
3 Count the elements in the sample space. b There are 7 elements in the sample space.
Example 3: identifying the sample space 5A
Two unbiased coins are tossed.

a What is the sample space?
b How many possible outcomes are there?
S OlUti O n:
1 Each coin could land on a head or a tail. a First coin − H or T.
2 If the first coin was a head, then the second Second coin − H or T.
coin could be a head or a tail.
Sample space = {HH,HT,TH,TT}
3 If the first coin was a tail, then the second
coin could be a head or a tail.
4 Count the elements in the sample space. b Number of possible outcomes is 4.
Exercise 5A lEVEl 1
1 State whether the probability of each event is impossible or certain.

a Christmas Day occurring on the 25th December
b Winning a raffle without buying a ticket
c Rolling the number 7 on a standard six-sided die
d Friday being the day after Thursday
e Selecting the letter ‘A’ from letters in the word ‘SCHOOL’
f The sum of 1 and 2 being 3
g Choosing an even number from the numbers 2, 4, 6 and 8
h Winning a car race without a car
i Obtaining a head or a tail when a coin is tossed
j Night following day
Example 1 2 Describe the chance of the following events using the words ‘certain’, ‘likely’, ‘even’,
‘unlikely’ or ‘impossible’.
a There being 31 days in January
b Tossing a coin and getting a tail
c Randomly choosing a person who has never watched television
d Winning first division Lotto
e Choosing a red ball from a bag containing an equal number of red and white balls
f Snow on Mount Kosciuszko during a cold day in winter
g Newborn baby being a girl
h Drawing a heart from a normal pack of cards
i Tossing a coin and turning up a head
j Australia participating in the next cricket World Cup
3 Aliya has a better than even chance of winning

the marathon.
a What word could you use to describe this
probability?
b Aliya is sick with a cold. What word could be
used to describe her chances now?
4 Two coins are tossed. Describe in words the probability of the

following outcomes.
a Two heads c Two tails
b Head and a tail
5 A standard six-sided die is rolled. Describe in words the

probability of the following outcomes.
a Odd number
b Number between 1 and 6
c Number less than 10
d Number 3
5A Language of probability 159
Example 2 6 List the sample space for the following events.

a Tossing a $2 coin
b Selecting a ball from a box containing two red and three white balls
c Choosing a letter from the word ‘AUSSIE’
d Drawing a card from cards labelled from 1 to 5
e The sex of a newborn baby
f Selecting the outcome of a football match
7 The arrow on this regular pentagon is spun once. The result is

Blue
recorded as a blue or a red.
Red
a What is the sample space? Blue
b How many elements are in the sample space?
Blue Red
c Describe in words the probability of a red.
d Describe in words the probability of a blue.
Example 3 8 A fair die is rolled.
a List the sample space.
9 There are 10 counters each labelled with the letters from A to J.

a A counter is selected at random. List all the possible outcomes.
b Describe in words the probability of selecting a vowel.
10 A Rugby Union match is being played between Australia and South Africa.
a List the sample space for the possible outcomes of the match.
c Is each outcome equally likely? Why?
11 Jacob is learning to play chess. He has a match against the Australian champion. There are
three outcomes for the match − win, draw or lose.
b Are these events equally likely? Why?
lEVEl 2
12 Chloe is a clay target shooter. Describe in words the following probabilities.

a Hits the target 50% of the time
b Hits the target 10% of the time
c Hits the target 25% of the time
d Hits the target 90% of the time
e Hits the target 75% of the time
13 The probability of six outcomes is 0, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 0.90 and 1. Assign one of these numbers
to the following word descriptions.
a Even chance
b Likely
c Certain
d Very likely
e Impossible
f Unlikely
14 A bag contains four $10 notes, two $20 notes and three $50 notes. Two notes are selected from
the bag without replacement.
a List the sample space for the first note.
b How many distinct elements are in the sample space of the first note?
c Assume the first note chosen was a $10 note. List the sample space of the second note.
d Assume the first note chosen was a $20 note. List the sample space of the second note.
e Assume the first note chosen was a $50 note. List the sample space of the second note.
lEVEl 3
15 A fair coin and a standard die are thrown. Describe in the words the probability of the
following outcomes.
a Head and a number less than 10
b Head and a number greater than 10
c Tail and a 1
d Tail or head and an even number
16 ‘Six students enter a swimming race. The chance of a particular student winning is 1 .’ Is this
6
statement true or false? Give reasons to support your opinion.
17 Laura has an 80% chance of winning a tennis tournament. The other two players Mia and
Emma are equally likely to win.
b Are the outcomes equally likely? Why?
c What is the probability that Mia wins the tournament?
5b Definition of probability 161
5B Definition of probability
Probability is the chance of something happening. To accurately calculate the probability a more
formal definition is used. When a random experiment is performed, the outcome or result is called
the ‘event’. For example, tossing a coin is an experiment and a head is the event. The event is
denoted by the letter E and P( E ) refers to the probability of event E. The probability of the event
is calculated by dividing the number of favourable outcomes by the total number of outcomes. It is
expressed using fractions, decimals and percentages.
PRObAbility
Number of favourable outcomes

Probability (Event) =
Total number of outcomes
n( E )
P( E ) =
n( S )
Example 4: Calculating the probability 5b
A coin is chosen at random from 7 one dollar coins and 3 two dollar coins. Calculate the
probability that the coin is a:
a one dollar coin
b two dollar coin.
S OlUti O n:
n($1)
1 Write the formula for probability. a P($1) =
n( S )
2 Number of favourable outcomes (or $1 coins)
is 7. The total number of outcomes or coins is 10. = 7
10
3 Substitute into the formula.
4 Simplify the fraction if possible. = 0.7 or
5 Express as a decimal or percentage if required. = 70%
n($2)
6 Write the formula for probability. b P($2) =
n( S )
7 Number of favourable outcomes (or $2 coins)
is 3. The total number of outcomes or coins is 10. = 3
10
9 Simplify the fraction if possible. = 0.3 or
10 Express as a decimal or percentage if required. = 30%
162 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5B
Equally likely outcomes

Equally likely outcomes occur when there is no obvious reason for one outcome to occur more
often than any other. For example, when selecting a ball at random from a bag containing a red, a
blue and a white ball, each of the balls is equally likely to be chosen.
Winning a bike race is an example of an event for which the outcomes are not equally likely. Some
riders have more talent and some riders are better prepared. If one person is a better rider, their
chance of winning the race is greater.
A deck of playing cards

A normal deck of playing
cards has 52 cards. There are
four suits called clubs, spades,
hearts and diamonds. In each
suit there are 13 cards from
ace to king. There are 3 picture
cards in each suit (jack, queen
and king).
Example 5: Calculating the probability from playing cards 5b
What is the probability of choosing the following cards from a normal pack of cards?
a Red four b Diamond c Picture card
S OlUti O n:
n(Red 4)
1 Write the formula for probability. a P(Red 4) =
n( S )
2 Number of favourable outcomes (or red 4s)
is 2. The total number of outcomes is 52. = 2
52
= 1
4 Simplify the fraction. 26
n(Diamond)
5 Write the formula for probability. b P(Diamond) =
n( S )
6 Number of favourable outcomes (or diamonds)
is 13. The total number of outcomes is 52. = 13
52
=1
n(Picture)
9 Write the formula for probability. c P(Picture) =
n( S )
10 Number of favourable outcomes (or picture
cards) is 12. The total number of outcomes is 52. = 12
52
= 3
5b Definition of probability 163
Exercise 5b lEVEl 1
Example 4 1 What is the probability of the following experiments?

a A card dealt from a normal deck of cards is a diamond.
b A day selected at random from the week is a weekend.
c A head results when a coin is tossed.
d A letter from the alphabet is a vowel.
e A two results when a die is rolled.
f A six is chosen from {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}.
2 A bag contains 5 blue and 3 red balls. Find the probability of selecting the following at random.
a A blue ball b A red ball c Not a red ball
3 Aaron chooses one ball at random from his golf bag. The table below shows the type and
number of golf balls in his bag.
Type of golf ball Number

B51 Impact 3
Maxfli 4
Pinnacle 13
Find the probability of Aaron choosing:

a a Maxfli b a Pinnacle
c a B51 Impact d not a Maxfli
4 An unbiased coin is tossed three times. On the first two tosses the result is tails. What is the
probability that the result of the third toss will be a tail?
5 In Amber Ave there are 3 high school students, 4 primary school students and 5 preschool
students. One student from Amber Ave is chosen at random. What is the probability that a
primary school student is chosen?
6 A box contains 3 blue, 4 green and 2 white counters. Find the probability of drawing at random
a counter that is:
a blue b green c white d not blue
Example 5 7 A card is chosen at random from a standard deck of 52 playing cards. Find the probability of
choosing:
a the seven of clubs b a spade c a red card
d a red picture card e a nine f the six of hearts
g an even number h a picture card i a black ace
8 The weather on a particular day is described as either wet or dry. Therefore there is an even
chance of a wet day. Do you agree with this statement? Give a reason.
164 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5B
lEVEl 2
9 A die with 16 faces marked 1 to 16 is rolled. Find the probability that the number is:
a an odd number b neither a 1 nor a 2
c a multiple of 3 d greater than 12
e less than or equal to 15 f a square number
10 A wheel contains eight evenly spaced sectors numbered 1 to 8. The wheel is spun until it stops
at a number. Given that the wheel is equally likely to stop at any number, find the probability
that the wheel stops at:
a a7 b a number greater than 5
c an odd number d a 1 or 2
e a number less than 10 f a number divisible by 3
11 Lucy is dealt four cards

from a normal deck: two aces
and two kings. What is the
probability that the next card is:
a another ace?
b another king?
c not an ace?
d not a king?
lEVEl 3
12 Two cards are drawn at random from a normal deck of cards. What is the probability that the
second card is:
a a two if the first card was a two?
b an ace if the first card was an ace?
c the six of clubs if first card was a 10 ?
d a two if the first card was a king?
e a diamond if the first card was a diamond?
f a picture card if the first card was a picture card?
13 A four-digit number is formed from the digits 2, 3, 4 and 5 without replacement. What is the
probability that the number:
a starts with the digit 4?
b is greater than 3000?
c ends with a 2 or a 3?
d is 2345?
14 If six students enter a swimming race, then the chance of any particular student winning must
be 1 . Is this statement true or false? Give reasons to support your opinion.
6
5C tables and tree diagrams

Tables and tree diagrams are used to find the sample space for a multistage event. They are orderly
methods of determining all the possible outcomes. A multistage event consists of two or more
events. For example, tossing a coin and throwing a die or selecting three cards from a pack of cards
are multistage events.
tables
A table is an arrangement of information in rows and columns. Head Tail
The table shows all the possible outcomes for tossing two coins.
Head HH HT
There are two events: tossing the first coin and tossing the second
coin. The outcomes of the first event are listed down the first Tail TH TT
column (Head or Tail). The outcomes of the second event are
listed across the top row (Head or Tail). Each cell in the table is
an outcome. There are four possible outcomes.
Sample space = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
tAblES
A table is an arrangement of information in rows and columns.

Each cell in the table is a data value or an outcome.
Example 6: Using a table for a multistage event 5C
Two red cards (R1, R2) and one black card (B1) are placed in a box. Two cards are selected at
random with replacement.
a Construct a table to list the sample space.
b What is the probability of selecting R1 R1 or R2 R2?
S OlUti O n:
1 List the outcomes of the first event (first a

R1 R2 B1
card) down the first column. There are
three outcomes: R1, R2 and B1. R1 R1 R1 R1 R2 R1 B1
2 List the outcomes of the second event R2 R2 R1 R2 R2 R2 B1
(second card) across the top row. There B1 B1 R1 B1 R2 B1 B1
are three outcomes: R1, R2 and B1.
3 Write the outcome in each cell using the
intersection of the row and column.
n(R1R1 or R2 R2)
4 Write the formula for probability. b P(R1R1 or R2R2) =
n( S )
5 Substitute into the formula. 2
=
9
166 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5C
tree diagrams
A tree diagram is a diagram that details the outcomes of a multistage experiment. It shows each
event as a branch of the tree. The tree diagram below shows all the possible outcomes for tossing
two coins. The outcomes of the first event are listed (H or T) with two branches. The outcomes of
the second event are listed (H or T) with two branches on each of the outcomes from the first event.
The sample space is HH, HT, TH and TT.
1st 2nd
H HH
H
T HT
H TH
T
T TT
tREE DiAgRAMS
• Draw a tree diagram with each event as a new branch of the tree.
• Always draw large clear tree diagrams and list the sample space on the right-hand side.
Example 7: Drawing a tree diagram 5C
A coin is tossed and a die is rolled.

a Construct a tree diagram of these two events to show the sample space.
b What is the probability of a head and a 1?
S OlUti O n: Coin Die

1 H1
1 Draw branches for first event – tossing a coin. a
2 H2
2 Tossing a coin has two outcomes (head or tail) so there
3 H3
are two branches. H
4 H4
3 Draw branches for the second event – rolling a die.
5 H5
4 Rolling a die has six outcomes (1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) so there
are six branches. Draw six branches for each of the two 6 H6
outcomes from the first event. 1 T1
5 Use the branches of the tree to list the sample space. 2 T2
Write the outcomes down the right-hand side (sample 3 T3
space). T
4 T4
5 T5
6 T6
6 Write the formula for probability. n(H1)
7 Number of favourable outcomes (H1) is 1. The total b P(H1) =
n( S )
number of outcomes is 12. = 1
8 Substitute into the formula and simplify the fraction. 12
Exercise 5C lEVEl 1
1 Emily and Bailey are planning to have two children. Boy Girl
a Use a table to list the number of elements in the sample space.
Boy
Consider the sex of each child as an event.
b What is the total number of outcomes? Girl
2 Two fair dice are thrown and their sum recorded.

a Use a table to list the all the possible outcomes.
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
b How many elements are in the sample space?

Example 6 3 A menu has three entrees (E1, E2 and E3) and four mains (M1, M2, M3 and M4).
M1 M2 M3 M4
E1
E2
E3
b Verify the total number of outcomes by using the fundamental counting principle.
4 Three people (A, B and C) applied for a manager’s position and two people (D and E) applied
for an assistant manager’s position.
b What is the total number of outcomes?
5 One bag contains two discs labelled ‘X’ and ‘Y’. A second bag contains four discs labelled
‘D’, ‘E’, ‘F’ and ‘G’. A disc is chosen from each bag at random. Use a table to determine the
number of elements in the sample space.
168 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5C
lEVEl 2
6 Three yellow cards (Y1, Y2, Y3) and one green card
Y1 Y2 Y3 G1
(G1) are placed in a box. Two cards are selected
at random with replacement. Y1
a Use a table to list the number of elements in the Y2
sample space.
Y3
b Find the probability of the following selections:
G1
i Y1Y2 ii Two green iii Two yellow
7 Three cards (king, queen and jack) are placed face down
on a table. One card is selected at random and the result
recorded. This card is returned to the table. A second card
is then selected at random.
a Use a table to list the elements in the sample space.
b Find the probability of the following selections:
i KJ ii Two kings iii No kings
Example 7 8 Two coins are tossed and the results recorded.

1st 2nd
a List the sample space by completing this tree diagram.
b Find the probability of the following results:
H
i Two tails
ii Head then a tail
iii One head and one tail
T
9 A survey has two questions whose answers are ‘Yes’ or ‘No’.

Construct a tree diagram to list the sample space.
10 There are three questions in a True or False test. 1st 2nd 3rd
a Fill in the remainder of the partially drawn tree

diagram and list the sample space. T
c Find the probability of the following random
selections:
i All of the selections are false.
F
ii Two true selections and one false selection.
iii At least one of the selections is false.
11 A two-digit number is formed using the digits 1, 2 and 3. The same Tens Units
number cannot be used twice. The first digit chosen is the tens digit 2
1
and the second digit chosen is the units digit. 3
a List the sample space from the tree diagram. 1
b What is the probability of choosing 23? 2
3
12 A spinner has an equal number of red and green sections. This spinner 1
is spun twice. 3
2
a Use a tree diagram to list the total possible outcomes.
b What is the probability of the same colour when the spinner is spun twice?
13 Ebony tosses a coin and spins a spinner, which has a red, an amber and a green section.
Each colour on the spinner is equally likely.
a Use a tree diagram to list the sample space.
b What is the probability of a head on the coin and either a red or green section on the spinner?
14 Four cards (ace, king, queen and jack) are placed face down on a table. One card is selected
at random and the result recorded. This card is not returned to the table. A second card is then
selected at random. Use a tree diagram to list the total possible outcomes.
lEVEl 3
15 There are four candidates for the positions of leader and deputy leader. The four candidates are
Angus, Bridget, Connor and Danielle.
a Construct a tree diagram with the leader as the first event and the deputy leader as the
second event. Use a tree diagram to list the sample space.
b What is the probability of Bridget being the leader or deputy leader?
16 A two-digit number is formed using the digits 3, 5 and 7. The same number can be used twice.
The first digit chosen is the tens digit and the second digit chosen is the units digit.
a Construct a tree diagram to list the sample space.
b What is the probability of forming a number less than 70?
17 The number of laptops sold in the past two weeks is shown below.
Brand X Brand Y Total

Week 1 80 240 320
Week 2 50 150 200
Total 130 390 520
a Of all brand X laptops sold, what fraction was sold in week 2?

b What percentage of all sales in week 1 was brand Y?
c During the two weeks, what was the probability that any laptop sold would be
brand X?
170 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5D
5D Range of probabilities
The probability of an event that is impossible is 0 and the 1 Certain
probability of an event that is certain is 1. Probability is
0.75
always within this range, or from 0 to 1. It is not possible
to have the probability of an event as 2. The range of 0.5 Even chance
probability is expressed as 0 ≤ P ( E ) ≤ 1 or P( E ) ≥ 0 and
0.25
P( E ) ≤ 1. It is also important to realise that the probability
of every event in an experiment will sum to 1. 0 Impossible
RAngE Of PRObAbility
Probability of an event is between 0 and 1 or 0 ≤ P( E ) ≤ 1.

P( A) + P( B) + … = 1
A, B, … are all the possible outcomes or events.
Example 8: Using the range of probability 5D
A box contains red, yellow and blue cards.

The probability of selecting a red card is 3
5
and the probability of selecting a yellow card
is 1 . What is the probability of selecting a
10
blue card?
S OlUti O n:
1 Write the formula for the range of probability. P( R) + P(Y ) + P( B) = 1
2 Substitute into the formula the probabilities of 3 + 1 + P ( B) = 1
5 10
(
the other events P ( R) = 3 and P(Y ) = 1 .
5 10 ) ( )
3 Solve the equation by making P( B) the subject P ( B) = 1 − 3 − 1
5 10
of the equation.
4 Simplify the fraction if possible. = 3
10
5 Write the answer in words. Probability of a blue card is 3 .

10
5D Range of probabilities 171
Exercise 5D lEVEl 1
Example 8 1 A hat contains tickets labelled as ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’. The probability of selecting ticket A is 3
10
and the probability of selecting ticket B is 7 .
15
a What is the value of P(A)?
b What is the value of P(B)?
c What is the probability of selecting a ticket with the letter ‘D’?
d What is the probability of selecting tickets A, B or C?
e What is the probability of selecting ticket C?
2 A bag contains black, yellow and white cards. The probability of drawing a black card is
57% and the probability of drawing a yellow card is 8%. What is the value of the following,
expressed as a fraction in simplest form?
a P (Black) b P (Yellow) c P (White)
3
3 In a particular event the probability of Jun winning a gold medal is and a silver medal is 1 .
8 4
There is no bronze medal.
a What are Jun’s chances of winning a gold or a silver medal?

b What are Jun’s chances of not winning any medals?
4 Some picture cards from a deck of cards are placed face down on the table. The probability of
drawing a king is 0.25 and a queen is 0.60. What is the value of the following expressed as a
decimal?
a P (King) b P (Jack)
c P (Jack) + P (King) d P (King) + P (Queen) + P (Jack)
5 There are four outcomes of an experiment. Three of the outcomes have probabilities of
20%, 25% and 40% respectively. What is the probability of the fourth outcome?
6 A biased die is rolled. The probability of obtaining an even number is 0.4 and the probability
of a 1 or a 3 is 0.3. Find the value of the following probabilities.
a P (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) b P ( 2, 4, 5, 6 ) c P (Odd)
172 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5D
lEVEl 2
7 A disc is chosen at random from a bag containing five different colours: black, green, pink,
red and white. If P(B) = 1 , P(G) = 2 , P(P) = 2 and P(R) = 1 , find the probability of the
5 13 9 6
following outcomes.
a Black or green disc
b Pink or red disc
c Black or red disc
d Black, green or pink disc
e Black, green or red disc
f Black, green, pink or red disc
8 A card is chosen at random from some playing cards. The probability of a spade is 0.24, the
probability of a club is 0.27 and the probability of a heart is 0.23. Find the probability of the
following outcomes.
a Black card b Red card
c Club or a heart d Spade or a heart
e Diamond f Diamond or a club
9 Julia and Natasha are playing a game in which a standard six-sided die is rolled. Julia wins if
an even number is rolled. Natasha wins if a number greater than three is rolled. What is the
probability that the number rolled is neither even nor greater than three?
10 A bag contains white, green and red marbles. The probability of selecting a white marble is 2
7
and the probability of selecting a green marble is 1 . What is the probability of selecting a red
8
marble?
lEVEl 3
11 The numbers 1 to 20 are written on separate cards. One card is chosen at random. What is the
probability that the card chosen is a prime number or is divisible by 3?
12 One letter is selected at random from a word containing the letters T, A, M, P, R. It is given that
P(T ) = 1 , P( A) = 2 , P( M ) = 1 and P( P) = 1 .
5 5 10 10
a Find the probability of the following outcomes.
i Letters T or A ii Letters T or P iii Letters M or P
iv Letters A, M or P v Letter T, A, M or P vi Letter R
b The word contains 10 letters. From the letters T, A, M, P, R how many of the following
letters are in the word?
i T ii A iii M
iv P v R
c What is the word? (Hint: an Australian place)
5E Complementary events
The complement of an event E is the event not including E. For example, when throwing a die the
complement of 2 are the events 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The complement of an event E is denoted by E. An
event and its complement represent all the possible outcomes and are certain to occur. Hence the
probability of an event and its complement will sum to be 1.
COMPlEMEntARy EVEntS
P( E ) + P( E ) = 1 or P( E ) = 1 − P( E )
E – Event or outcome
E – Complement of event E or the outcomes not including event E
Example 9: Using the complementary event 5E
Lisa selects a card at random from a normal pack.

Find the probability of obtaining the following
outcomes.
a Not a 10
b Not a black jack (i.e. not a jack of clubs or spades)
c Not a picture card
S OlUti O n:
1 Write the formula for the complement. a P(10) = 1 − P (10)
2 Substitute into the formula the probability = 1− 4
(
for a 10 or P(10) =
4
52
. ) = 48
52
3 Evaluate. 52
4 Simplify the fraction. = 12
13
5 Write the formula for the complement. b P(black jack) = 1 − P(black jack)
6 Substitute into the formula the probability = 1− 2
52
(
for a black jack or P (black jack) =
2
52
. ) = 50
7 Evaluate. 52
26
9 Write the formula for the complement. c P(picture) = 1 − P(picture)
10 Substitute into the formula the probability = 1 − 12
52
(
for a picture card or P(picture) =
12
52
. ) = 40
52
11 Evaluate.
13
174 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5E
Exercise 5E lEVEl 1
1 What is the event that is the complement of the following events?

a Selecting a black card from a normal pack of cards
b Winning first prize in Lotto
c Throwing an even number when a die is rolled
d Obtaining a tail when a coin is tossed
e Drawing a spade from a normal pack of playing cards
f Choosing a green ball from a bag containing a blue, a red and a green ball
2 Find the value of P ( E ), given the following information about event E.

a P(E ) = 1 b P( E ) = 0.9 c P( E ) = 62% d P( E ) = 1:4
5
e P(E ) = 3 f P( E ) = 0.45 g P( E ) = 37.5% h P( E ) = 3:7
11
3 The chances of the Sydney Swans winning the premiership are given as 29%. What are the
chances that the Sydney Swans will not win the premiership?
a Express your answer as a decimal.
b Express your answer as a fraction.
Example 9 4 The probability of obtaining a 3 on a biased die is 0.6. What is the probability of not
obtaining a 3?
5 The probability of a rainy day in March is 11. What is the probability that a particular day in
15
March does not have rain?
6 The probability of drawing a red marble from a bag is 5. What is the probability of not drawing
8
a red marble? Express your answer as a:
a fraction
b decimal
c percentage
lEVEl 2
7 A ball is chosen at random from a bag containing four different colours: brown, orange,
purple and yellow. If P(O) = 2 , P( P ) = 2 and P(Y ) = 1 , find the probability of the following
11 9 4
outcomes.
a Not a yellow ball b Not an orange ball
c Not a purple ball d Orange or a purple ball
e Yellow or a purple ball f Not a brown ball
g A brown ball h Not an orange or a yellow ball
8 Samuel selects a card at random from a normal pack. Find the probability of obtaining the
following outcomes.
a Not a queen b Not a red ace
9 What is the probability that a person selected at random will:

a not be born on Saturday?
b not be born on a weekend?
lEVEl 3
10 A 12-sided die has faces marked 1 to 12. The die is biased. If P(8) = 0.1, P (2) = 0.15 and
P(3) = 0.91, find:
a P(8) b P(2)
c P(3) d P(8) + P(8)
e P (2) + P(2) f P(3) + P(3)
g P(2) + P(8) h P(2 or 8)
11 One card is selected at random from a non-standard pack of playing cards. If

P(ace) = 8%, P(king) = 7% and P (queen) = 10%, find the probability of the following
outcomes.
a Not an ace
b Not a king
c Not a queen
d King or a queen
e Ace or a queen
f Not an ace, king or queen
12 The probability of selecting a card labelled ‘T’ from 32 cards is given as

P(T ) = 3 .
16
a What is the probability of not selecting a card labelled with a ‘T’?
b How many of the 32 cards were labelled with a ‘T’?
176 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5F
5F Relative frequency
Relative frequency is calculated when an experiment is performed. The frequency of an event is the
number of times the event occurred in the experiment. Relative frequency is the frequency of the
event divided by the total number of frequencies. It is also known as experimental probability, as it
estimates the chances of something happening or the probability of an event. Relative frequency is
expressed using fractions, decimals and percentages.
RElAtiVE fREqUEnCy
Relative frequency is an estimate for the probability of an event.

Frequency of the data value f
Relative frequency = =
Total number of data values n
Example 10: finding the relative frequency 5f
An experiment of tossing two coins was Number Relative

completed and the number of heads recorded in of heads Frequency frequency
the frequency table shown.
0 100
Find the relative frequency of obtaining the 1 192
following number of heads:
2 108
a 0 b 1 c 2
S OlUti O n:
1 Add the frequency column to determine the total a n = 100 + 192 + 108
number of frequencies. = 400
f
2 Write the formula for relative frequency. Rel. freq. = = 100
3 Substitute the frequency and total number of n 400
= 1
frequencies into the formula. 4
4 Simplify the fraction if possible or express as a decimal. = 0.25 or 25%
5 Write answer in words. Relative frequency of 0 heads is 0.25.
f
6 Write the formula for relative frequency. b Rel. freq. = = 192
n 400
7 Substitute the frequency and total number of 12
= or 0.48 or 48%
frequencies into the formula. 25
8 Simplify the fraction if possible or express as a decimal.
9 Write answer in words. Relative frequency of 1 head is 0.48.
f
10 Write the formula for relative frequency. c Rel. freq. = = 108
11 Substitute the frequency and total number of n 400
frequencies into the formula. = 27
100
12 Simplify the fraction if possible or express as a decimal. = 0.27 or 27%
13 Write answer in words. Relative frequency of 2 heads is 0.27.
5f Relative frequency 177
Simulation
A simulation is a mathematical model that represents a real experiment or situation. Simulations
may involve calculators, computers, coins, dice or tables. Simulations are a useful tool when the real
experiment is time consuming or costly.
SiMUlAtiOn
A simulation is a mathematical model that represents a real experiment or situation.
Example 11: Performing a simulation 5f
Perform a simulation to determine the results of 50 cricket

matches played in a season. There are three outcomes for
a match – win, draw or lose. The probability of winning a
match is 30%, drawing a match is 50% and losing a
match is 20%.
a Assign 10 playing cards numbered from 1 to 10 to the
outcomes.
b Perform the simulation by selecting a card at random. Repeat the simulation 50 times as there
are 50 matches in a season.
c Construct a frequency table that includes a relative frequency column to record the results of
the simulation.
S OlUti O n:
1 Find 30% of 10 (3to determine the number of a Assign 1, 2 and 3 to win (30%)
cards assigned for a win.
2 Find 50% of 10 (5to determine the number of Assign 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 to draw (50%)
cards assigned for a draw.
3 Find 20% of 10 to determine the number of Assign 9 and 10 to lose (20%)
cards assigned for a loss.
4 Construct a frequency table with three columns: b and c
Score, Frequency and Relative frequency.
Relative
5 List the assigned outcomes in the score
Score Frequency frequency
column.
Win (1, 2, 3) 13 13
6 Select a card at random from the 10 cards.
50
Record the result. Replace the card.
Draw 27 27
7 Repeat the simulation and record the total for
(4, 5, 6, 7, 8) 50
each outcome in the frequency column.
8 Calculate the relative frequency of each Lose (9, 10) 10 10 = 1
50 5
outcome by dividing the frequency of the
Total 50 1
outcome by the total frequencies.
Exercise 5f lEVEl 1
Example 10 1 The frequency table shows the outcomes

of an experiment. What is the relative Relative
Letter Frequency
frequency for the following outcomes? frequency
Express as a fraction in simplest form. A 12
a A b B B 9
c C d D
C 15
D 6
2 The frequency table shows the outcomes
Outcome Frequency
Answer correct to three decimal places. HH 8
a HH b HT
HT 20
c TH d TT
TH 28
TT 12
Colour Frequency
Answer as a percentage correct to one Black 105
decimal place. Yellow 210
a Black b Yellow Red 145
c Red d Blue Blue 170
e Green f White
Green 215
White 155

Relative
of an experiment. What is the relative Score Frequency
frequency
frequency for the following outcomes?
Answer as a percentage, correct to the 30 4
nearest whole number. 31 6
a 30 b 31 32 2
c 32 d 33 33 3
e 34 34 5
5 Calculate the relative frequency for each of these numbers if the total frequency is 48. Write
your answer as a fraction in simplest terms.
a 16 b 40
c 24 d 6
6 Calculate the relative frequency for each of these numbers if the total frequency is 40. Write
your answer as a percentage.
a 4 b 30 c 15 d 32
Example 11 7 Perform a simulation to determine the gender (M or F) of a newly born baby.

a Use the Ran# function on a
calculator or toss a coin for
this simulation.
b Complete 100 trials of this
simulation.
c Use a frequency table to
record the results of this
simulation.
d Calculate the relative
frequency of each outcome.
e What is the probability of a
female baby?
8 Perform a simulation to determine the winner of an election. There are four candidates (A, B, C
and D) and each candidate is equally likely to win.
a Use the Ran# function on a calculator or toss two coins for this simulation. Assign each
candidate a result obtained from the simulation.
b Complete 148 trials of this simulation.
c Use a frequency table to record the results of this simulation.
d Calculate the relative frequency of each outcome.
e What is the probability of candidate A winning the election?
9 Perform a simulation to answer this question: ‘If families only stopped having children as soon
as the first girl was born, would there be more girls than boys?’
a Limit the number of children to a maximum of six. List the sample space.
b Use the Ran# function on a calculator or roll a die for this simulation.
c Complete 120 trials of this simulation.
d Use a frequency table to record the results of this simulation.
e Calculate the relative frequency of each outcome.
f How many girls were born in this simulation?
g How many boys were born in this simulation?
h What is your answer to the above question using the simulation results?
lEVEl 2
10 A retail store sold 512 televisions last year, of which 32 were faulty and returned to the store.
What is the relative frequency of a faulty television last year? Answer as a percentage, correct
to two decimal places.
11 A pistol shooter at the Olympic Games hits the target 24 out of 25 attempts. What is the
relative frequency of the shooter hitting the target? Give the answer as a decimal, correct to two
decimal places.
12 The birth statistics in a local community were 142 girls and 126 boys. What is the relative
frequency for a girl? Answer as a fraction in lowest terms.
13 In an experiment a die was thrown

Number Frequency Relative
120 times. The frequency of each data
frequency
value is shown in the frequency table.
a How many times would you expect to 1 30
obtain each of the data values? 2 16
b Do you think that the die is fair?
Give a reason for your answer. 3 14
4 16
5 16
6 28
14 Create the spreadsheet below using the
frequency table in question 4.
05fq14
a Cell B10 has a formula that adds cells B5 to B9. Enter this formula.
b The formula for cell C5 is ‘= B5/$B$10’. It is the formula for relative frequency. Fill down
the contents for C6 to C9 using this formula.
c Cells D5 to D9 have the same formula as cells C5 to C9. Enter this formula and format the
cells to a percentage.
lEVEl 3
15 Last year it rained on 140 days out of 365.

a Estimate the probability of it raining on any one day next year.
b How could your estimate be improved?
16 A frequency distribution table is shown below.
Score Frequency Relative frequency

3 x 0.20
4 6 0.30
5 5 0.25
6 5 y
a What is the value of x?

b What is the value of y?
c What is the total number of scores?
17 Perform an experiment by rolling a die 120 times.

a Use a frequency table to record the results of the experiment.
b Calculate the relative frequency of each outcome.
c What result would you have predicted for each outcome?
d Compare your results to those of the other students in your class.
18 Perform an experiment by dropping a drawing pin

100 times. Record whether it landed point up or
point down.
a Use a frequency table to record the results of the
experiment.
b Calculate the relative frequency of each
outcome.
19 Perform an experiment by tossing two coins 80 times.

a Use a frequency table to record the results of the experiment.
b Calculate the relative frequency of each outcome.
182 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5G
5G Expected frequency
The expected frequency is the number of times that a particular event should occur. It may not equal
the actual results. For example, when a coin is tossed the probability of getting a head is 1 . Hence,
2
if a coin is tossed 100 times, the expected number of heads is 50 or 1 × 100. Clearly, if a coin is
2
tossed 100 times it may not result in exactly 50 heads. However, the larger the number of trials the
closer the expected frequency will be to the actual results.
ExPECtED fREqUEnCy
Expected frequency is the number of times that a particular event should occur.
Expected frequency = n × p = np
n – number of times the experiment is repeated
p – probability of the event
The expected frequency may not be a whole number. It is an estimate of what to expect. For example,
when a die is tossed, the probability of getting a six is 1 . Hence, if a die is tossed 100 times the
6
expected number of sixes is 1 × 100 or 16 2 . Clearly, it is not possible to have 2 of an outcome.
6 3 3
However, the expectation is that the number of outcomes will be a whole number close to 16 2 .
3
Example 12: finding the expected frequency 5g
Two coins are tossed 120 times and the results recorded.
a What is the expected frequency for two heads?
b What is the expected frequency for a head and a tail?
S OlUti O n:
1 Calculate the probability of two heads. a P(HH) = 1
4
2 Number of favourable outcomes is 1 (HH). The total Expected frequency
number of outcomes is 4 (HH, HT, TH, TT).
= np
3 Write the formula for expected frequency.
4 Substitute into the formula. = 1 × 120
4
5 Evaluate. = 30
6 Calculate the probability for a head and a tail. b P (HT or TH) = 2 = 1

4 2
7 Number of favourable outcomes is 2 (HT, TH). The Expected frequency
total number of outcomes is 4 (HH, HT, TH, TT).
= np
8 Write the formula for expected frequency.
9 Substitute into the formula. = 1 × 120
2
10 Evaluate. = 60
5g Expected frequency 183
Exercise 5g lEVEl 1
Example 12 1 The probability of a red traffic light at an intersection is 1 . How many red traffic lights are
3
expected on a trip that passes through 54 intersections?
2 The probability of a person living in a certain community of developing melanoma is four

out of nine. There are 1404 people living in this community. What is the expected number of
people who will develop melanoma?
3 Andrew and Caitlin are planning to have five children. A genetic counsellor has calculated
they have a 40% chance of having a child with green eyes. How many of Andrew and Caitlin’s
children are expected to have green eyes?
4 Amira is a goal shooter for her netball team. The probability that she scores a goal is 88%. This
year she had 225 attempts at goal.
a How many goals would you expect Amira to have scored this year?
b How many goals would you expect Amira to have missed this year?
5 Akira is a professional golfer who has a 78% chance of breaking par. He plays 150 games of
golf in a year. How many times would you expect Akira to break par in a year?
6 The probability of a worker in an industrial

plant having an accident is 0.12. The industrial
plant employs 175 workers. What is the expected
number of accidents?
7 A die is tossed 480 times and the results recorded.

a What is the probability of throwing a 4?
b How many 4s are expected?
c What is the probability of throwing an odd
number?
d How many odd numbers are expected?
e What is the probability of throwing a number
greater than 2?
f How many numbers greater than 2 are
expected?
g What is the probability of throwing a number divisible by 3?
h How many numbers divisible by 3 are expected?
184 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5G
lEVEl 2
8 Five cards (ace, king, queen, jack and 10) are

placed face down on a table. One card is selected
at random and replaced. A second card is then
selected at random. This experiment is repeated
200 times.
a What is the probability of selecting two aces?
b How many double aces are expected?
c What is the probability of selecting an ace
followed by a king?
d How many aces then kings are expected?
e What is the probability of exactly one of the cards being a 10?
f How many single 10s are expected?
9 A three-digit number is selected from cards labelled 3, 4 and 5. The first card selected is the
hundreds digit, the second card is the tens digit and the third card is the units digit. The cards
are selected without replacement. This selection is repeated 30 times.
a What is the probability the number starts with the digit 3?
b How many numbers starting with the digit 3 are expected?
c What is the probability the number is 453?
d How many times is the number 453 expected?
e What is the probability the number ends with a 4 or a 5?
f How many numbers ending with a 4 or 5 are expected?
10 A bag contains 6 yellow discs and 5 red discs. Two discs are drawn in succession from the bag.
The first disc is not replaced before the second disc is drawn. This process is repeated
352 times.
a How many of the first discs are expected to be yellow discs?
b How many of the first discs are expected to be red discs?
c How many double yellow discs are expected?
d How many double red discs are expected?
e How many are expected to have a first disc yellow and a second disc red?
f How many are expected to have a first disc red and a second disc yellow?
5g Expected frequency 185
05gq11
a Cell C8 has a formula that multiplies cells B8 and B4. Enter this formula.
b Fill down the contents of C8 to C11 using the formula in cell C8.
c Change the number of trials from 230 to 800. Observe the change in C8:C11.
12 There are 240 families with three children.

a How many of these families are expected to have three boys?
b How many of these families are expected to have exactly one boy?
c How many of these families are expected to have exactly two boys?
d How many of these families are expected to have no boys?
lEVEl 3
13 Two cards are selected at random from a normal playing pack with replacement. This
experiment is repeated 2704 times with the cards being replaced each time.
a What is the expected number of times the result would be two spades?
b What is the expected number of times the result would be two aces?
c What is the expected number of times the result would be two picture cards?
d What is the expected number of times the result would be two cards with a number
less than 9?
14 Two dice are tossed one after the other onto a table. This event is repeated 144 times.
a On how many occasions would you expect the result to be a 6 then a 1?
b On how many occasions would you expect the result to be two 3s?
c On how many occasions would you expect the result to be two odd numbers?
186 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5H
5H blood types
A person’s blood type is described by Blood types of Australians
the appropriate letter (A, B, AB or O) 40%
40
and whether or not their blood is Rh
positive or Rh negative. The column 31%
30
graph opposite shows the percentage
of blood type frequency in Australia 20
(Source: Australian Red Cross Blood
Service). Blood is vital to life, and 10 9%
7% 8%
for many people blood donors are 2% 2% 1%
their lifeline. Most of the blood 0
O+ O− A+ A− B+ B− AB+ AB−
donated is used to treat people with
cancer and other serious illnesses.
Example 13: Calculating the number of people of a particular blood type 5H
The table opposite shows the number of males and females

NSW population
living in NSW. Use the above column graph and this table to
Males 3.80 million
answer these questions.
a How many males in NSW have blood type B+? Females 3.90 million
b How many females in NSW have blood type O−? Total 7.70 million
c How many people in NSW have blood type A+?
S OlUti O n:
1 Read the percentage of blood type a 8% of the Australian population
B+ in the column graph (8%). is B+.
2 Read the male population of NSW in 8% of 3.80 million = 0.08 × 3 800 000
the table. = 304 000
3 Multiply the percentage by the
population and evaluate.
4 Read the percentage of blood type b 9% of the Australian population
O− in the column graph (9%). is O−.
5 Read the female population of NSW. 9% of 3.90 million = 0.09 × 3 900 000
6 Multiply the percentage by the = 351 000
7 Read the percentage of blood type c 31% of the Australian population
A+ in the column graph (31%). is A +.
8 Read the population of NSW from the 31% of 7.70 million = 0.31 × 7 700 000
table. = 2 387 000
9 Multiply the percentage by the
5H Blood types 187
Exercise 5H lEVEl 1
1 A blood compatibility chart is shown below (Source: Australian Red Cross Blood Service).
Donor’s blood type

O− O+ B− B+ A− A+ AB− AB+
AB+
Patient’s blood type
AB−
A+
A−
B+
B−
O+
O−
a List the donor blood types that are compatible with a patient with the following blood type.
i A− ii B−
iii AB− iv O−
v A+ vi B+
vii AB+ viii O+
b Which donor blood type is compatible with every patient’s blood type?
c Which donor blood types are compatible with 4 patients’ blood types?
d Which patient’s blood type is compatible with every donor’s blood type?
e Which patient’s blood type is only compatible with O−?
f Which patient’s blood type is compatible with B+?
2 The table shows the age proportion of blood donors in low-income and high-income countries.
a Which age group from the high-income countries has the greatest proportion of blood
donors?
Age groups (years) High-income countries Low-income countries

<18 8% 2%
18–24 20% 42.5%
25–44 33% 37%
45–64 34% 18%
>65 5% 0.5%
b Which age group from the low-income countries has the greatest proportion?
c What percentage of blood donors from high-income countries is given by people aged less
than 18 years?
d Why is the least proportion of blood donors people aged over 65 years?
188 Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability 5H
lEVEl 2
3 Australia’s blood donation rate is 1 in 30 and 27 250

donations are required every week.
a Express Australia’s donation rate as a percentage.
b Australia’s population is 24.6 million. How many
people are blood donors?
c NSW’s population is 7.7 million. How many people
are blood donors?
d Sydney’s population is 5.25 million. How many
people are blood donors?
e How many donations are required every year?
4 The table below shows the use of 27 250 blood donations every week in Australia.
Use of blood
Cancer and blood disease 34%
Other causes of anaemia 19%
Surgical (heart surgery, burns) 18%
Medical problems (kidney, etc.) 13%
Orthopaedic (fractures, etc.) 10%
Obstetrics (pregnant women) 4%
Trauma (road accidents, etc.) 2%
a How many blood donations are used for cancer and blood disease each week?
b How many blood donations are used for surgical procedures each week?
c How many blood donations are used for obstetrics each week?
d How many blood donations are used for trauma patients each week?
lEVEl 3
5 In Australia there are 550 686 blood donors making 1.3 million blood donations per year.
a What is the average number of blood donations per blood donor? Answer correct to one
decimal place.
b Australia’s population is predicted to increase by 2% next year. How many people are
expected to give blood if the donation rate remains the same?
c The demand for blood products is predicted to double in the next 10 years. How many blood
donors are required if the donation rate remains the same?
d Each donation can be separated into red cells, platelets and plasma, and given to three different
patients, leading to the saying ‘one donation saves three lives’. If this is true, how many lives
are saved by blood donors each year? Does this number seem believable? If not, why not?
Summary
language of probability Probability is the chance of something happening.
Sample space is the set of all possible outcomes.
Each outcome is an element of the sample space.
Equally likely outcomes have an equal chance of occurring.
Multistage event consists of two or more events.
n( E )
Definition of probability Probability (Event) = Number of favourable outcomes or P ( E ) =
Total number of outcomes n( S )
tables and tree diagrams A table is an arrangement of information in rows and columns.
A tree diagram is a diagram that details the outcomes of a multistage
event.
Range of probability Probability of an event that is impossible is 0 and certain is 1.
Probability of an event is between 0 and 1 or 0 ≤ P ( E ) ≤ 1.
P( A) + P( B) + … = 1
A, B, ... are all the possible outcomes or events.
Complementary events Complement of an event E is the event not including E.
Probability of an event and its complement will sum to 1.
P( E ) + P( E ) = 1 or P( E ) = 1 − P( E )
E – Event or outcome
E – Complement of event E or the outcomes not including event E
Relative frequency Relative frequency is an estimate for the probability of an event.
Frequency of a data value f
Relative frequency = =
Number of data values n
Expected frequency Expected frequency is the number of times that a particular event
should occur.
Expected frequency = n × p = np
n – number of times the experiment is repeated
p – probability of the event
Expected value Expected value = Sum all these results [ P ( E ) × Outcome ]
190
Review Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability
1 An event has the probability of occurring equal to 0. What word can you use to describe this
probability?
A Certain. b Impossible. C Likely D Unlikely.
2 How many elements are there in the sample space when two cards are selected without
replacement from cards labelled 1 to 7?
A 7 b 14 C 42 D 49
3 A three-digit number is formed from the digits 5, 7, 8 and 9. What is the probability that the
number will be odd?
A 0.25 b 0.50 C 0.75 D 0.80
4 One card is selected from cards labelled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. What is the probability of an even
number or a number divisible by 5?
A 10% b 50% C 60% D 100%
5 A bag contains black, white and grey balls. The probability of selecting a black ball is 0.3 and a
grey ball is 0.6. What is the probability of selecting a white ball?
A 0.1 b 0.36 C 0.63 D 0.9
6 A letter is chosen at random from the word ‘NEWCASTLE’. What is the probability that the
letter will not be a vowel?
A 1 b 2 C 1 D 2
9 9 3 3
7 The frequency of an event is 6 and the total number of frequencies is 20. What is the relative
frequency?
A 14% b 26% C 30% D 70%
8 Two unbiased coins are tossed 100 times. Which calculation illustrates the expected number of
times you would get a tail and a head?
A 1 × 100 b 1 × 100 C 1 × 100 D 1 × 200
4 2 3 4
9 A card is selected at random from a normal pack of playing cards. The card is
replaced each time. What is the expected number of times you would select a king
from 260 trials?
A 5 b 20 C 52 D 65
Review
1 Describe each of these events as either impossible, likely, unlikely or certain.
a Throwing an 8 when a standard die is thrown
b A student travelling to school on the wrong bus
c A piece of gold being found in your backyard
2 List the sample space of the following events.

a Selecting a card from cards labelled with an even number from 1 to 10
b A spinner with each section labelled with a vowel
c Choosing at random a ball from a bag containing three white and four blue balls
3 A paper bag contains three green, four brown and five yellow beads. To win a game, Zoe needs to
draw two green beads from the bag in two draws. How many elements are in the sample space?
4 A raffle ticket is drawn from a box containing 50 raffle tickets numbered from 1 to 50. Find the
probability of the following outcomes.
a The number 50 b An even number c A number less than 20
d A number greater than 30 e A number divisible by 5 f A square number
5 What is the probability of choosing a black card from a standard deck of cards?
6 Four kings are taken from a standard deck of cards and placed face down on a table. One card
is selected at random. What is the probability of selecting:
a the king of clubs? b a black king? c a picture card?
7 There are four girls, three boys and two adults in a house. If one person is chosen at random,
what is the probability that the person:
a is a girl? b is a boy? c is a girl or a boy?
8 An eight-sided die has the numbers 1 to 8 on it. What is the probability of rolling the following
outcomes?
a The number 2 b Either a 3 or a 5 c The number 9
d A number divisible by 3 e An odd number f A prime number
9 There are five students in a group and their names are Adam, Sarah, Max, Hayley and David.
If one name is chosen at random, what is the probability of selecting a name:
a with five letters? b with the letter ‘a’? c with one vowel?
10 A fair coin is tossed three times. The probability of throwing three tails is 0.125, two tails is
0.375 and one tail is 0.375. What is the probability of the following outcomes?
a No tails b Three or two tails c At least one tail
d Not throwing a head e Not throwing two tails f Throwing one head
192
Review Chapter 5 Relative frequency and probability
11 There are three outcomes of a rugby league game:

win, lose or draw. If P (Win) = 5 and P (Lose) = 1,
7 5
find the probability of the following.
a Winning or losing the match
b Drawing the match
c Not winning the match
d Not losing the match
12 Caitlin selects a card at random from a standard pack of cards. Find the probability of obtaining
the following outcomes.
a Not an ace b Not a heart c Not a red six
Relative
13 A class frequency table shows the scores in a test. Score Frequency
frequency
What is the relative frequency for the following
outcomes? Answer correct to two decimal places. 50 − 59 5
a 50 − 59 b 60 − 69 60 − 69 6
c 70 − 79 d 80 −89 70 − 79 8
80 −89 6
14 Last year Oscar bought a packet of biscuits every week and found 30 of these packets
contained broken biscuits. What is the relative frequency of this event? Answer as a decimal
15 The probability of a couple having a baby with red hair is 33 1 %. If the couple have six
3
children, how many children with red hair are expected?
16 A probability of a dog catching heartworm is 3 . If there are 896 dogs in the local community,
8
how many of them would you expect to catch heartworm?
17 A lie detector was used to indicate the guilt or innocence of 200 suspects.
Accurate Not accurate Total
True statements 95 10 105
False statements 70 25 95
Total 165 35 200
a Find the probability a person selected at random, with an accurate test, made a true statement?
b Find the probability a person selected at random, with a false statement, has an accurate test?
6 Perimeter, area
and volume
Syllabus topic — M1.2 Perimeter, area and volume
This topic will develop your skills to competently solve problems involving perimeter, area,
volume and capacity.
Outcomes
• Calculate the area of circles and sectors of • Calculate the volume of right prisms.
a circle. • Calculate the volume of cylinders and
• Calculate the area of composite figures. spheres.
• Apply the trapezoidal rule to estimate area. • Calculate the volume of pyramids and
• Calculate the surface area of right prisms. cones.
• Calculate the surface area of cylinders • Calculate the surface area and volume of
and spheres. composite solids.
• Calculate the surface area of pyramids • Relate capacity to volume.
and cones.


Knowledge check
194 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6A
6A Area of circles and sectors

The area of a circle is calculated using the formula A = π r 2
where r is the radius of the circle. An annulus is the area
between a large and a small circle with the same centre.
The area of an annulus is calculated using the formula
A = π ( R 2 − r 2 ) where R is the radius of the large circle and
r is the radius of the small circle.
A sector is part of a circle between two radii and an arc. The
area of a sector is calculated using the formula A = θ π r 2
360
where θ is the angle formed at the centre of the circle and r is
the radius of the circle. The area of a semicircle A = 1 π r 2
2 ( )
( )
and the area of a quadrant A = 1 π r 2 are special cases of the area of a sector formula.
4
Area formulae
Name Shape Area
r A = πr2
Circle
r
Annulus A = π (R 2 − r 2 )
r
Sector A = θ πr2
θ 360
r
Semicircle 180° A = 1 πr2

2
r r
Quadrant r
A = 1 πr2
4
r
6A Area of circles and sectors 195
Example 1: Finding the area of an annulus 6A
Thomas draws two concentric circles whose radii are 4 cm and 6 cm. What is the area of the
annulus formed, to the nearest square centimetre?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a diagram to represent the 6 cm
information in the question.
4 cm
2 The shape is an annulus, so use the A = π (R2 − r 2 )

formula A = π ( R 2 − r 2 ).
3 Substitute the values for R ( R = 6) and r (r = 4). = π × (62 − 4 2 )
4 Evaluate. = 62.83185307
5 Express the answer correct to the nearest whole
number.
6 Give your answer with the correct units. ≈ 63 cm2
7 Write the answer in words. The area of the shape is 63 cm2.
Example 2: Finding the area of a sector 6A
Find the area of a sector with an angle at the centre of 55° and radius 2 cm. Write your answer
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a diagram to represent the
information in the question. 2 cm
55°
2 cm
2 The shape is a sector, so use the formula A = θ πr2

360
A = θ πr2 .
360
3 Substitute the values for θ (θ = 55) and = 55 × π × 2 2
360
r (r = 2).
4 Evaluate. = 1.919862177
5 Express the answer correct to one decimal place.
6 Give your answer with the correct units. ≈ 1.9 cm 2
7 Write the answer in words. The area of the shape is 1.9 cm 2.
Exercise 6A LEVEL 1
1 Find the area of each circle. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
4m
2.3 mm
4.5 cm
d e f 11 mm
9.1 mm
12 cm
2 What is the area of the following circles? Answer correct to two decimal places.
a Radius of 25 mm b Radius of 3 cm
c Radius of 10 m d Diameter of 18 m
e Diameter of 98 cm f Diameter of 2.8 mm
Example 1 3 Find the area of each annulus. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c Outer radius 3.2 m
Inner radius 0.6 m
3 mm 7m
8 mm 6m
d e f 12.5 mm
5 cm 11 cm 15 m 2m
14 mm
4 What is the area of each annulus? Answer correct to two decimal places.
a Outer radius of 7 m and inner radius of 4 m
b Outer radius of 5.6 cm and inner radius of 2.1 cm
c Outer diameter of 12 cm and inner diameter of 8 cm
d Outer diameter of 44 mm and inner diameter of 38 mm
6A Area of circles and sectors 197
LEVEL 2
5 What is the area of an annulus with circles of radii 17 cm and 8.5 cm? Answer in square
centimetres correct to one decimal place.
6 An annulus consists of two circles with the same centre. Find the area of an annulus that has an
inner diameter of 6 cm and an outer diameter of 10 cm. Answer correct to the nearest square
centimetre.
Example 2 7 Find the area of each sector. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
10 cm
150°
39° 6 mm
3 cm 3 cm 10 cm 6 mm
d e f 5m
4 cm 10.2 mm
104° 5m 110°
4 cm 10.2 mm
8 Find the area of each sector. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a b c
4 cm 7 mm
2.3 cm
124° 65° 153°
d e f
5 cm 1.3 m
134° 80°
9 cm
127°
9 Calculate the area of the sector shown opposite.

Express your answer correct to the nearest
8 cm
square centimetre.
LEVEL 3
10 The cross-section of a piece of conduit

is an annulus. It has an outer diameter of
60 mm and an inner diameter of 50 mm.
a Find the area of the cross-section to the
nearest square millimetre.
b What is the increase in cross-sectional area if the
outer diameter is increased to 65 mm? Answer
correct to the nearest square
millimetre.
11 An annulus with an inner diameter of 4.2 metres and an

outer diameter of 10 metres is divided into two equal
parts. What is the area of each part? Answer correct to 4.2 m
three significant figures. 10 m
12 The area of a circular pond is 5.3 square metres. What is the radius of the pond? Answer correct
13 A traffic roundabout has a circular garden

in the centre and two lanes for traffic
encircling the garden. The diameter of the
garden is 16 metres and each lane is 3 metres
wide. Each lane is to be resurfaced. Calculate
the area to be resurfaced. Answer in square
metres to the nearest whole number.
14 An annulus has an area of 392.70 square metres.

Calculate the inner radius of the annulus if the
outer radius is 15 metres. Answer correct to the
15 Find the angle at the centre of these sectors

to the nearest degree.
a Area of 104.72 cm2 and a radius of 10 cm
b Area of 139.63 m2 and a radius of 40 m
16 An area to be landscaped is a sector with a radius of 19 metres and an angle at the centre
of 145°. The area is to be covered with turf at $12.50 per square metre and then top-dressed
with soil at $2.30 per square metre. Find the total cost of the landscaping to the nearest
dollar.
6B Area of composite shapes 199
6B Area of composite shapes

A composite shape is made up of two or more plane shapes. The area of a composite shape is
calculated by adding or subtracting the areas of each plane shape. In some questions it may be
necessary to determine the length of a missing side.
AREA OF COMPOSITE SHAPES
1 Divide the composite shape into two or more plane shapes.

2 Calculate the area of each plane shape.
3 Add or subtract the areas of the plane shapes.
4 Write the answer to the specified level of accuracy with the correct units.
Example 3: Finding the area of a composite shape 6B
A concrete area in the shopping centre consists of a square and a triangle. x

The square has a side length of 12 metres and the triangle is isosceles.
a Use Pythagoras’ theorem to find the value of x.
b Calculate the area of the shaded region.
12 m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write Pythagoras’ theorem. a a2 + b2 = c2
2 Substitute the length of the sides. x2 + x2 = 12 2
3 Make x 2 the subject. 2x 2 = 12 2
x2 = 72
4 Take the square root to find x. x = 72
5Divide the shaded region into a square and a triangle. b A = s2 (Square)

6Use the formula A = s 2 to find the area of the square.
7Substitute the value for s (s = 12) into the formula. = 122
8Evaluate. Give your answer using the correct units. = 144 m2
9 Use the formula A = 1 bh to find the area of the triangle. A = 1 bh (Triangle)
2 2
10 Substitute the values for b and h (b = 72 , h = 72 ). = 1 × 72 × 72
2
11 Evaluate. Give your answer using the correct units. = 36 m 2
12 Add the areas of the two plane shapes to determine Shaded area
the area of the shaded region. = Area of square + Area of triangle
13 Express using the correct units. = 144 + 36
= 180 m2
14 Write the answer in words. Area of shaded region is 180 m2 .
200 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6B
A square with a side length of 6 cm is cut from a triangle with a

base of 24 cm and a height of 16 cm. What is the shaded area? 16 cm
6 cm
S OLUTI O N: 24 cm
1 The shape is a triangle, so use the formula A = 1 bh. A = 1 bh (Triangle)

2 2
2 Substitute the values for b and h (b = 24 and h = 16). 1
= × 24 × 16
2
3 Evaluate and express using correct units. = 192 cm 2
4 The shape is a square, so use the formula A = s 2 . A = s 2 (Square)
5 Substitute the value for s (s = 6) . = 62
6 Evaluate and express using the correct units. = 36 cm2
7 Subtract the area of the square from the area of the Shaded area
triangle to determine the area of the shaded region. = Area of triangle − Area of square
= 192 − 36
8 Express using the correct units. = 156 cm2
9 Write the answer in words. Shaded area is 156 cm2 .
The diagram shows a semicircle cut out of a semicircle.

a What is the area of the smaller semicircle?
b What is the area of the larger semicircle?
c What is the shaded area correct to one decimal place? 4 cm
16 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 The shape is a semicircle, so use the formula a A = 1 π r2 (Semicircle)
2
A = 1 π r 2.
2 = 1 × π × 42
2 Substitute the value for r (r = 4) . 2
3 Evaluate and express using correct units. Unless = 8π cm2
otherwise instructed leave as an exact answer (8π ).
4 The shape is a semicircle, so use the formula A = 1 π r 2. b A = 1 π r 2 (Semicircle)
2 2
5 Substitute the value for r (r = 8). = 1 × π × 82

2
6 Evaluate and express using the correct units. = 32π cm2
7 Subtract the areas of the two plane shapes to c Shaded area = 32π − 8π
determine the area of the shaded region. = 75.39822369…
8 Write the answer correct to one decimal place. ≈ 75.4 cm2
9 Express using the correct units.
10 Write the answer in words. Shaded area is about 75.4 cm 2.
Exercise 6B LEVEL 1
Example 3 1 Find the area of each composite shape. Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
a 2 cm b c
6 cm 4m
5 cm 24 m 24 m 4m
8 cm
d e f
17 m 12 m 8 mm 14 cm
14 m
3 cm
18 m 8 mm 18 cm
2 A swimming pool is a composite shape. It is

an L-shape consisting of two rectangles. The
dimensions of the L-shape are shown opposite. 5m
What is the area of the swimming pool? 6m
4m
8m
3 A drawing consists of a square and a triangle. The 8 cm

square has a side length of 10 cm and the triangle
10 cm
has sides of length 6 cm and 8 cm. What is the area
6 cm
of the drawing? Answer correct to one decimal place.
10 cm
Example 4 4 A piece of cardboard consists of a parallelogram with

two identical squares removed from its shape. The two
8 cm
squares have a side length of 2 cm. Find the shaded area.
Answer correct to the nearest square centimetre. 12 cm
5 A circle is removed from a square as shown in the diagram.

The square has a side length of 6 cm and the radius of the
circle is 3 cm. What is the shaded area? Answer correct to
3 cm
one decimal place.
6 Find the area of the following irregular shaped blocks of land. Units are metres.
a b c
28 50
35 20 80
60 50
30 45
60 80
50
d D e D 18 f D
60 50 C 26
60 25
C C
40 45 110
12 32
B B
48
50 B
20 24
A A A
7 The diagram on the right shows a block of land that D

has been surveyed. All measurements are in metres.
a Find the area of the quadrilateral ABCD. Answer 35
correct to one decimal place. 25
B
b What is the length of AB? Answer correct to the 32 14
nearest metre. C
13
8 The diagram on the right shows a block of land that E

has been surveyed. All measurements are in metres. C 11
Answer correct to one decimal place. 44 G D
54
a Find the area of the triangle ABF. 67
b Find the area of the triangle ACE.
F 46
c Find the area of the triangle DGE. B
15
d Find the area of the trapezium BFGD.
A
e What is the total area of the block of land?
LEVEL 2
9 A composite plane shape consists of a semicircle and an

isosceles triangle. 10 mm
a What is the radius of the semicircle?
b What is the area of the semicircle? Answer correct to 13 mm
12 mm
one decimal place.
c Calculate the area of the shape. Answer correct to
one decimal place.
10 A photo can be displayed inside a circle using a rectangular

picture frame whose dimensions are 18 cm by 10 cm.
The circle has a diameter of 10 cm.
a What is the area of the rectangular picture frame?
b What is the area of the circle? Answer correct to two decimal
places.
c What is the area remaining after the circle is removed from
the rectangular picture frame? Answer correct to two decimal
places.
Example 5 11 A circle is cut from a square with a side length of 12 cm. 12 cm

a Determine the area of the circle. Answer correct to two
decimal places.
b What is the shaded area after the circle has been removed?
12 A sports ground consists of a square and two semicircles.

a What is the radius of the semicircular ends?
b Calculate the area of the sports ground in square metres
70 m
13 A circle of diameter 10 cm surrounds a square with a side length

of 5 cm. What is the shaded area between the square and the circle?
LEVEL 3
14 Lauren cuts circles with a radius of 4 cm from a rectangular piece of cardboard 8 cm

by 16 cm.
a What is the area of the rectangular piece of cardboard?
b How many circles can be cut from the piece of cardboard?
c What is the area of the remaining cardboard after the circles have been cut? Answer
15 Aaron has decided to landscape a new lawn. The lawn is in

x
the shape of a rectangle with a semicircle on one end.
a Explain why the expression for the area of the lawn
is 1 π x 2 + 2 xy.
2 y
b Find the area of lawn if x = 4 metres and y = 5 metres. Answer
correct to the nearest square metre.
16 Oliver wants to pave a rectangular area measuring 3.0 m by 2.5 m in his backyard. The pavers
he wishes to use are 50 cm by 50 cm. How many pavers will he need? Answer correct to the
17 Saanvi is using the composite shape on the right as a design element.

34 mm
a What is the area of the semicircle? Answer correct to one x
decimal place.
32 mm
b Find the height of the triangle.
c What is the area of the composite shape? Answer correct
18 Samantha bought a block of land that is a composite shape. It consists of a square with an
equilateral triangle on top. The side length of the square is 40 metres. What is the area of the
block of land? Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
19 Aaron is using the composite shape drawn below as the basis for a garden.
The composite shape is a semicircle with a circle of radius y removed from
the centre.
a Find an expression for the area of the semicircle.
b What is the shaded area of the composite shape?
c Find the area of garden if x = 6 metres and y = 0.5 metres. x
Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
6C Trapezoidal rule
The trapezoidal rule is the area formula for a trapezium with different names for the variables. The
variable h is the height or the distance between the parallel sides, while the variables df and dl are
the distances of the first and last parallel sides.
A = 1 (a + b)h
2 h
Area of trapezium
= h (a + b)
2
b
Trapezoidal rule A = h (df + dℓ )

2 df dl
The trapezoidal rule is used to estimate the area of a shape with an irregular boundary, such as a lake.
Example 6: Using the trapezoidal rule to estimate the area 6C
A lake forms a boundary for a block of land as shown. Apply the trapezoidal rule to approximate
the area of the block. Answer to the nearest square metre
20 m
36 m Lake
22 m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the trapezoidal rule A = h (df + dl ). A = h (d f + dl )
2 2
2 Write the values for h, d f and dl. h = 36 , df = 20, and dl = 22
3 Substitute the values for h, d f and dl and
A = 36 (20 + 22)
evaluate. 2
4 Write the answer using the correct units. = 756 m2
206 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6C
TRAPEZOIDAL RULE
A = h (d f + dl ) Irregular
2
boundary
A – Area of shape
h – Height or width between the parallel sides
df – Distance along first parallel side df dl
dl – Distance along last parallel side

h
Trapezoidal rule with two applications

If the trapezoidal rule is applied more than once it provides a better estimate for the area of the
shape.
Example 7: Using the trapezoidal rule to estimate the area 6C
Use the trapezoidal rule twice to estimate the area

of ABCD to the nearest square centimetre.
A Section 1 Section 2
22 cm 60 cm 48 cm
18 cm 18 cm
D C
36 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Divide the area ABCD into two sections at 60. Section 1: h = 18, d f = 22, and dl = 60
Label each section.
Section 2: h = 18, df = 60, and dl = 48
2 Write the trapezoidal rule twice for each
section: A = h (d f + dl ). A = h (df + dl ) + h (df + dl )
2 2 2
3 Substitute the values for h, d f , and dl. = 18 (22 + 60) + 18 (60 + 48)
4 Evaluate. 2 2
2
5 Write the answer using the correct units. = 1710 cm
Exercise 6C LEVEL 1
Example 6 1 Estimate the area by applying trapezoidal rule once for the following irregular fields. Answer
correct to the nearest square metre.
a b 26 m
Billabong
42 m
16 m 18 m
River
24 m
6m
c 18 m d
11 m 12 m 12 m 13 m
16 m
Garden
e 14 m f 13 m
10 m 11 m
36 m
2 The following irregular shapes are the cross-sections for two swimming pools with a uniform
depth of 2 metres. Calculate the volume of the swimming pools by applying the trapezoidal
rule to estimate the area of the base.
a b 25 m
8m 14 m 48 m
12 m 12 m
208 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6C
LEVEL 2
3 The cross-section of a piece of wood is shown opposite. 18 cm

Use the trapezoidal rule to estimate the area of the piece.
Answer to the nearest square centimetre.
32 cm
4 A portion of land 6 m by 4.8 m is divided into lawn and a 4.8 m

native garden. Lawn
a Find the area of the lawn by applying the trapezoidal 3.0 m
rule twice. Answer correct to one decimal place. 3.8 m
b What is the area of the native garden? Answer correct to
one decimal place. 3.0 m
Native garden
Example 7 5 Connor took three measurements at 6 m intervals across an irregular-shaped field. The
measurements were 10 m, 12 m and 8 m. Use two applications of the trapezoidal rule to
calculate the area of the field. Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
LEVEL 3
6 The diagram opposite shows a vertical cross-section of 20 m

the ocean. It is divided into four vertical strips of equal width 8m 2m
15 m
by the dashed lines. Estimate the area of the cross-section by
applying the trapezoidal rule four times. Answer correct to
the nearest square metre.
7 A uniform cross-section of a sculpture is shown opposite. 2m

It is divided into four horizontal strips of equal width by the
dashed lines. Apply the trapezoidal rule four times to estimate the
2.2 m
area of the cross-section. Answer correct to the nearest square 8m
metre.
5m
2.1 m
8 A curved road has five offsets to a straight boundary line with distances of 50 m, 60 m, 30 m,
40 m and 30 m. The offsets are 20 m apart. Use four applications of the trapezoidal rule to
calculate the area of the field. Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
6D Surface area of right prisms

To find the surface area of a prism, it is often useful to draw the net of the solid to ensure that all the
sides have been added. A net is a plane figure that shows all the surfaces of a solid. When a net is
folded it forms the solid. The net of a prism is identified by each polygon that represents a surface.
The surface area (SA) of a solid is the sum of the area of each surface or polygon of the solid. It is
common for the area of some of the surfaces to be equal. This makes the calculations easier.
FINDING THE SURFACE AREA OF RIGHT PRISMS
1 Visualise the surfaces of the solid. If necessary draw the net of the solid.
2 Write a formula for the surface area, using the net as a guide.
3 Substitute the values into the formula for the surface area.
4 Use your calculator to find the surface area.
Example 8: Finding the surface area of a rectangular prism 6D
Find the surface area of this rectangular prism.

2 cm
4 cm
8 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a net of the rectangular prism. 8 cm
2 cm
4 cm
2 Write down a formula for surface area. SA = (2 × l × b) + (2 × b × h) + (2 × l × h)

3 Substitute the values into the formula. SA = (2 × 8 × 4) + (2 × 4 × 2) + (2 × 8 × 2)
4 Evaluate. = 112
5 Give answer to the correct units. = 112 cm 2
6 Write the answer in words. Surface area is 112 cm2 .
210 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6D
Example 9: Finding the surface area of a triangular prism 6D
Find the surface area of this triangular prism.

10 mm
10 mm
6 mm
8 mm
S OLUTI O N:
1 A triangular prism has two triangular faces and three Triangular faces
rectangular faces.
2 The triangular face has a base of 8 mm and a height of A = 1 bh
2
6 mm. Write the formula for the area of a triangle.
3 Substitute the values into the area of triangle formula. = 1 ×8×6
2
4 Evaluate. = 24 mm2
5 Write an expression for surface area of the SA = (2 × 24) + (10 × 10)
prisms using the area of all the faces. + (10 × 6) + (10 × 8)
6 Evaluate and write answer to the correct units. = 288 mm2
7 Write the answer in words. Surface area is 288 mm2 .
Example 10: Finding the surface area of a trapezoidal prism 6D
Find the surface area of this trapezoidal prism. 11 cm

7.7 cm
6.4 cm
6 cm 16 cm
18 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 A trapezoidal prism has two trapezoidal faces and Trapezoidal faces
four rectangular faces. A = 1 (a + b)h
2 The trapezoidal face has a perpendicular height of 2
6 cm and two parallel sides of 11 cm and 18 cm.
3 Substitute the values into the formula. = 1 × (18 + 11) × 6
2
4 Evaluate. = 87 cm2
5 Write down an expression for surface area, using SA = (2 × 87) + (11 × 16) + (7.7 × 16)
the area of all the faces. + (18 × 16) + (6.4 × 16)
6 Evaluate and write answer to the correct units. = 863.6 cm2
7 Write the answer in words. Surface area is 863.6 cm2.
Exercise 6D LEVEL 1
Example 8 1 Find the surface area of the following rectangular prisms.

a 10 mm 25 mm b c
3m
10 mm
2 cm
2 cm 4m
3 cm 9m
d 5 mm e f
5 mm 4 cm 5m
5 mm
3 cm 3m
3 cm 8m
2 Find the surface area of rectangular prisms with the following dimensions.
a Length 7 m, breadth 4 m, height 2 m
b Length 10 cm, breadth 9 cm, height 6 cm
Example 9 3 Find the surface area of the following triangular prisms.

a 24 cm b 10 mm
10 mm
10 cm
6 mm
16 cm 26 cm
8 mm
c d 10 m
16 m
6m 8m
16 m 15 m
40 m
16 m
Area of base
is 110.8 sq m
e f 10 m
5m
13 m
4m 3m 9m
12 m
5m
212 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6D
LEVEL 2
Example 10 4 Find the surface area of the following right prisms.

a Area of base is 88 cm 2 b Area of base is 36 m2 c Area of base is 56 cm2
5 cm 5m 4 cm
5m
4m 4m
7m 8 cm
6m 10 cm
25 cm
10 cm 25 cm 10 cm
10 cm
17 cm
d e 3m 8m f 9 cm
3 cm 4m 7m 3 cm 6 cm
5 cm 4m 4 cm
8 cm
15 m
6 cm 2 cm
4m
5 A bathroom is 3.5 m long and 2.5 m wide and its walls are to be tiled to a height of 1.5 m.
a Find the area of the walls to be tiled, deducting 3 m 2 for the door and window.
b If the tiles cost $150 per m 2 and the tiler charges $120 per m 2 to lay them, find the total cost
for tiling the bathroom walls.
6 Find the surface area of the following right prisms.

a b c
7.8 cm
5 cm
22 cm 20.5 cm
15 cm
13 cm 9 cm
12.2 cm
LEVEL 3
7 Find the surface area of a right triangular prism if the triangular base has a perpendicular height
of 12 m and a base of 18 m. The height of 12 m and base of 18 m form the two short sides of
the triangular base. The triangular prism has a length of 20 m.
8 The surface area of a cube is 162.24 cm2.

a How many faces make up the cube?
b Find the area of one face of the cube.
9 What is the height of a rectangular prism that has a

surface area of 352 cm 2 , given that the length of the
rectangular prism is 12 cm and its breadth is 4 cm?
6E Surface area of cylinders and spheres

Cylinders
The surface area (SA) of a cylinder is the sum of the area of each surface of the solid. To calculate
the surface area of cylinders and spheres we use the formulae below.
SURFACE AREA OF A CYLINDER
r
SA = 2π rh
Open cylinder h
Curved surface = 2π rh
r SA = 2π r 2 + 2π rh
Area of top = π r 2
Closed cylinder h
Area of bottom = π r 2
Curved surface = 2π rh
Example 11: Finding the surface area of a cylinder 6E
A closed cylinder has a diameter of 32 mm and a height of 50 mm. 32 mm

a Find the area of the curved surface.
b Find the surface area of this cylinder. Answer in square
millimetres correct to two decimal places. 50 mm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write down a formula for surface area of an a SA = 2π rh
open cylinder. = 2 × π × 16 × 50
2 Substitute the values for r and h into the = 5026.5482...
formula. ≈ 5026.55 mm 2
3 Write the answer correct to two decimal places.
Area of the curved surface is
4 Express using correct units.
5026.55 mm 2.
5 Write the answer in words.
6 Write down a formula for the surface area of a b SA = 2π r 2 + 2π rh
closed cylinder. = 2 × π × 16 2 + 2 × π × 16 × 50
7 Substitute the values for r and h into the formula. = 6635.043684
8 Write the answer correct to two decimal places. ≈ 6635.04 mm 2
9 Express using correct units. Surface area of cylinder is
10 Write the answer in words. 6635.04 mm 2.
214 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6E
Surface area of a sphere and hemisphere

The surface area ( SA) of a sphere is calculated using the formula listed below. The surface area of
an open hemisphere is half that of the sphere. For a closed hemisphere, add the area of the base,
which is a circle.
SURFACE AREA OF A SPHERE AND HEMISPHERE
Sphere r SA = 4π r 2
Open hemisphere r SA = 2π r 2
SA = 3π r 2
Closed hemisphere r
Area of curved surface = 2π r 2
Area of base = π r 2
Example 12: Finding the surface area of a sphere 6E
What is the total surface area of one dozen tennis balls?

Each ball has a radius of 3.5 cm. Answer correct to the
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write down a formula for the surface area SA = 4π r 2
of a sphere.
2 Substitute the values for r into the formula. = 4 × π × 3.5 2
3 Evaluate and express using correct units. ≈ 153.93804 cm 2
4 Multiply the surface area of one ball by 12. SA × 12 balls = 153.93804 × 12
5 Evaluate. = 1847.25648
6 Write the answer correct to the nearest ≈ 1847 cm 2
whole number and express using correct
units.
7 Write the answer in words. Surface area of 12 tennis balls is 1847 cm 2 .
Exercise 6E LEVEL 1
Example 11 1 Find the surface area of these open cylinders. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b 5 cm c 6m
12 mm
3 cm 8m
22 mm
2 Find the surface area of these closed cylinders. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c 19 m
5.1 cm
15 mm
34 m
8 mm 9.2 cm
Example 12 3 Find the surface area of these spheres. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a b c
6m
5 mm 14 cm
4 Find the surface area of these open hemispheres. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a b c
2.2 m 8 cm 12 mm
5 Find the surface area of these closed hemispheres. Answer correct to two decimal places.
a b 22 m c
3.5 m
7 cm
216 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6E
LEVEL 2
6 A can of soup has a 9 cm diameter and is 14 cm high.

a What is the radius of the can?
b Find the area of a label that wraps around the can.
c What is the surface area of the can including the top and
bottom of the can? Answer correct to one decimal place.
7 The outer surface of a spherical ball is made from plastic.

The diameter of the ball is 0.5 metres and the cost of plastic
is $24 per square metre.
a What is the outer surface area of the ball? Answer correct to
two decimal places.
b What is the cost of the plastic for one ball to the nearest cent?
c What is the cost of the plastic for a larger ball whose diameter
is twice the size?
LEVEL 3

06EQ8
a Cell C6 has a formula that calculates the surface area of an open cylinder. Enter this formula.
b Fill down the contents of C6 to C12 using the formula for C6.
c Cell D6 has a formula that calculates the surface area of a closed cylinder. Enter this
formula.
d Fill down the contents of D6 to D12 using the formula for D6.
e Change the radius of each cylinder from 1 to 5.
f Change the height of the tallest cylinder from 8 to 30.
6F Surface area of pyramids and cones

Surface area of a square pyramid
The surface area of a pyramid is found by finding the area of Apex
each face. For pyramids, the surface area is calculated by adding
the area of the base and the area of the triangular faces. To find Slant height
the area of the triangular face requires the slant height. The slant
height of a right pyramid is the distance from the apex to the Perpendicular
height
base, along a triangular face.
SURFACE AREA OF A SQUARE PYRAMID
Square pyramid has a square

base and 4 triangular faces
l
2 ( )
SA = s 2 + 4 × 1 bh
with equal area.
s – side length of the base 2 ( )
= s 2 + 4 × 1 sl
l – slant height of triangular s
face s
Example 13: Finding the surface area of a square pyramid 6F
A square pyramid has a base with side length is 6 cm and a slant

4 cm
height of 4 cm. Find the surface area of this square pyramid.
6 cm
6 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a net of the square pyramid.
6 cm
4 cm
2 Write down a formula for surface area. SA = s 2 + 4 × 1 sl

2 ( )
3 Substitute the values into the formula. (
= (6 2 ) + 4 × 1 × 6 × 4
2 )
4 Evaluate.
5 Express answer in the correct units. = 84 cm 2
218 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6F
Surface area of a cone Apex

A cone has a flat circular base and a curved surface. The area
of the circular base is π r 2 and the area of the curved surface Slant height
is π rl where r is the radius of the circular base and l is the

Perpendicular
slant height. height
SURFACE AREA OF A CONE
A cone has a flat circular base and a

curved surface.
r – radius of the circular base h l SA = π r 2 + π rl
l – slant height of curved surface
h – perpendicular height of cone
r
Example 14: Finding the surface area of a cone 6F
A cone has a radius of 6 cm and a perpendicular height of 14.4 cm.

a Find the slant height of the cone. Answer correct to one decimal place.
14.4 cm
b Find the surface area of the cone. Answer correct to the nearest
square centimetre.
S OLUTI O N: 6 cm
1 Draw the right triangle and label the radius, a

perpendicular height and slant height.
l
14.4
2 Write Pythagoras’ theorem. l 2 = h2 + r 2

3 Substitute the lengths of the sides. = 14.4 2 + 62
4 Take the square root to find l. l = 14.4 2 + 6 2
≈ 15.6
5 Write down a formula for surface area. b SA = π r 2 + π rl

6 Substitute the values into the formula. = π × 6 2 + π × 6 × 15.6
7 Evaluate. = 407.1504...
8 Express correct to the nearest square centimetre. ≈ 407 cm 2
Exercise 6F LEVEL 1
Example 13 1 Find the surface area of the following square pyramids. Answer correct to one decimal place
where necessary.
a 6.3 mm b c
4 cm
12 cm
6.3 mm
6 cm
Slant height
is 5 mm
6 cm 8 cm
d 6.1 cm e f 6 cm
6.1 cm
25 m
6.3 cm 8 cm
5m
2 Find the surface area of the following square pyramids. Answer correct to one decimal place
where necessary.
a b c 8m
48 cm 1.5 m
5m
2m
40 cm
3 A rectangular pyramid has base length of 12.6 cm and

breadth of 9.4 cm The slant height to the apex from the 13.6 cm
length is 12.9 cm and from the breadth is 13.6 cm. 12.9 cm
a What is the area of the rectangular base?
b What is the area of the triangular face that has a base of
12.6 cm and height of 12.9 cm? 9.4 cm
c What is the area of the triangular face that has a base of
12.6 cm
9.4 cm and height of 13.6 cm?
d What is the surface area of the rectangular pyramid?
220 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6F
4 Find the surface area of the following cones. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b 4 cm c 44 cm
1.52 m
15.3 cm
35 cm
0.95 m
5 Find the surface area of the following cones. Round values used in calculations to one decimal
place. Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
a 1.8 m b c
12.1 cm
18.7 cm
3.2 m
6.4 cm
20.4 cm
6 A cone has a perpendicular height of 5.6 cm and slant height of 7 cm.

Answer these questions correct to one decimal place.
a What is the radius of the cone?
b What is the area of the circular base?
7 cm 5.6 cm
c What is the area of the curved surface?
d What is the surface area of the cone?
7 Find the area of the curved surface for the following cones. Answer correct to the nearest whole
number.
a Cone with a radius of 9 cm and a slant height of 14 cm
b Cone with a radius of 7.4 cm and a slant height of 11.5 cm
8 Find the surface area of the following cones. Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
a Cone with a radius of 1.7 cm and a slant height of 2.1 cm
b Cone with a radius of 6.1 cm and a slant height of 7.5 cm
LEVEL 2
9 The solid opposite is called a frustum. It is the portion of a square pyramid 2 cm

that remains after the upper part has been cut off by a plane parallel to
its base. What is the surface area of the frustum? Answer correct to one
decimal place.
3.5 cm
4 cm
10 Find the surface area of a rectangular pyramid with a base length of 7 cm, base breadth of 5 cm
and perpendicular height of 10 cm. Answer correct to 2 significant figures.
11 The curved surface area of a cone is 150 cm 2 and the radius of the base is 5 cm.
Give answers correct to one decimal place.
a What is the slant height?
b What is the perpendicular height?
c What is the surface area of the cone?
LEVEL 3
12 A cone with a radius of 5 cm has a surface area of 200π cm 2. What is the perpendicular height
of the cone? Answer correct to one decimal place.
13 A cone with a base area of 150 cm 2 has a total surface area of 2000 cm 3.
a What is the radius of the base? Answer correct to two decimal places.
b What is the slant height? Answer correct to two decimal places.
c What is the perpendicular height? Answer correct to nearest whole number.
14 Find the surface area of the following solids. Answer correct to the nearest square
centimetre.
a b c
17.1 cm Diameter
4 cm 9 cm
7 cm
15 cm
14.8 cm
18 cm
18.6 cm 15 cm
12 cm
222 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6G
6G Volume of right prisms

Volume is the amount of space occupied by a three-dimensional object. It is measured by counting the
number of cubes that fit inside the solid. When calculating volume, the answer will be in cubic units.
1000 mm 3 = 1 cm 3
1000 000 cm 3 = 1 m 3
1000 000 000 m 3 = 1 km 3
To calculate the volume of the most common solids, we use a formula. Some of these formulae
are listed below. The volume of a prism is found by using its cross-sectional area. Prisms are
three-dimensional objects that have a uniform cross-section along their entire length.
VOLUME OF RIGHT PRISMS
V = Ah
Cube s = (s 2 ) × s
s = s3
s
V = Ah
Rectangular prism b = lb × h
h = lbh
l
V = Ah
Triangular prism
1
H
( )
= 1 bh × H
2
A= 2 bh
Example 15: Finding the volume of a right prism 6G
The base area of a triangular prism is 15 m 2 and the height is 7.2 m.

What is the volume of the triangular prism?
7.2 m
S OLUTI O N: A = 15 m2
1 Use the volume formula for a right prism V = Ah. V = Ah

2 Substitute the values into the formula. = 15 × 7.2
3 Evaluate. = 108 m3
4 Write answer to the correct units.
Example 16: Finding the volume of a rectangular prism 6G
A rectangular prism has a length of 8 cm, a breadth 2 cm

of 2 cm and a height of 4 cm. Find the volume
of this rectangular prism. Answer in cubic
4 cm
centimetres.
8 cm
S OLUTI O N:
2 Determine the shape of the base and the formula to
calculate the area of the base A = lb. = lbh
3 Substitute the values into the formula. = 8×2×4
4 Evaluate.
5 Give the answer to the correct units. = 64 cm 3
Example 17: Finding the volume of a trapezoidal prism 6G
The dimensions of a trapezoidal prism are shown opposite. 12 m

Find the volume of this prism. 5m
4m 15 m
15 m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Find the area of the trapezoidal side (front face in
the diagram.)
2 Use the area formula for a trapezium A = 1 (a + b)h. A = 1 (a + b)h
2 2
3 Substitute the values into the formula. = 1 × (12 + 15) × 4
2
4 Evaluate.
5 Write answer to the correct units. = 54 m 2
7 Substitute the values into the formula. = 54 × 15
8 Evaluate.
9 Write answer to the correct units. = 810 m 3
224 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6G
Exercise 6G LEVEL 1
Example 15 1 Find the volume of the following prisms where A is the area of the base.
a b c
A = 8 m2 40 m 16 m
12 m A = 110 m2
A = 7 m2
2 What is the volume of a rectangular prism with a base area of 15 mm 2 and a height of 11 mm?
3 Find the volume of a triangular prism with a height of 15 m and a base area of 50 m 2.
Example 16 4 Find the volume of the following solids. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b 18 cm c
3m
64 cm
4m 18 cm
9m 58 cm
18 cm 37 cm
5 What is the volume of a rectangular prism with dimensions 4.5 cm by 6.5 cm by 10.5 cm?
6 Find the volume of the following triangular prisms, to the nearest whole numbers.
a b c
10 mm
6m 7 cm
10 mm 13 cm
15 m
6 mm 9 cm
10 m
8 mm
7 A triangular prism has a base length of 12 cm and base height of 20 cm. What is the volume of
the prism if the height of the prism is 10 cm? Answer correct to one decimal place.
LEVEL 2
a b 8 cm c 12.4 mm
5 cm
7 cm
4 cm 9 cm
16.8 cm
20.5 cm
18.4 mm 41.6 mm
12.2 cm
22.5 mm
9 A hollow container is in the shape of a rectangular prism as shown.
6m 2m
6m
10 m
10 m
a What would be the volume of the container if it were solid?
b What is the area of the shaded base?
c What is volume of the hollow container?
10 A step is shown opposite. 5m 12 m

a What is the area of the shaded base?
b Determine the volume of the step. 2m
1m 10 m
LEVEL 3
11 Find the volume of an equilateral triangular prism with side lengths 3 cm and a depth of 10 cm.
Answer correct to three decimal places.
12 A vase with a volume of 200 cm 3 is packed into the cardboard box shown below. The space around
the vase is filled with foam to protect the vase from breaking. The parcel is sealed and posted.
6 cm
8 cm
10 cm
a What is the volume of the foam?
b What is the area of cardboard on the surface of the box?
226 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6H
6H Volume of cylinders and spheres

Cylinders
A cylinder is a right prism whose cross-section is a circle. Its volume is found using V = Ah where
A = π r 2. The volume of a cylinder is the product of π , the square of the radius and the height.
VOLUME OF A CYLINDER
r
V = Ah
Cylinder
h = (π r 2 ) × h
= π r 2h
Example 18: Finding the volume of a cylinder 6H
A cylinder has a radius of 8 mm and a height of 12 mm. Find the 12 mm

volume of the cylinder. Answer correct to two decimal places.
8 mm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the volume formula for a cylinder V = π r 2 h. V = π r 2h

2 Substitute the r = 8 and h = 12 into the formula. = π × 8 2 × 12
3 Evaluate. = 2412.74 3158
4 Write the answer correct number of decimal places and with ≈ 2412.74 mm 3
correct units.
Example 19: Finding the volume of a annulus prism 6H
The diameter of a DVD is 12 cm, and the diameter of the hole in its centre is 1.5 cm. Find its
volume in cubic centimetres, correct to two decimal places, given that the DVD is 0.12 cm thick.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the area formula for an annulus A = π ( R 2 − r 2 ). A = π (R 2 − r 2 )
2 Substitute the R = 6 and r = 0.75 into the formula. = π (6 2 − 0.75 2 )
3 Evaluate. = 111.33018… cm 2
5 Substitute the A = 111.33... and h = 0.12 into the formula. = 111.33018… × 0.12
6 Evaluate. = 13.35962…
7 Write answer correct to two decimal places. ≈ 13.36 cm 3
Volume of a sphere
The volume of a sphere is four-thirds the product of π and the cube of the radius. The volume of a
hemisphere is half the volume of the related sphere or four-thirds the product of π and the cube of
the radius.
VOLUME OF SPHERE
V = 4 πr 3
r
Sphere
3
r V = 1 × 4 πr 3
2 3
Hemisphere
2
= πr 3
3
Example 20: Finding the volume of a sphere and a hemisphere 6H
Find the volume of these solids. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b
7m
3.5 m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the volume formula for a sphere V = 4 π r 3. a V = 4 πr 3
3 3
2 Substitute r = 7 into the formula. = 4 × π × 73
3
3 Evaluate. = 1436.75504
4 Write the answer correct to one decimal place and ≈ 1436.8 m 3
with correct units.
5 Use the volume formula for a hemisphere. b
( )
V = 1 × 4 πr 3 = 2 πr 3
2 3 3
6 Find r and substitute the value into the formula. r = 3.5 ÷ 2 = 1.75 m
7 Evaluate. V = 2 × π × 1.75 3
3
8 Write the answer correct to one decimal place and
= 11.2246…
with correct units.
≈ 11.2 m 3
228 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6H
Exercise 6H LEVEL 1
Example 18 1 Find the volume of the following cylinders. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a 2m b 14 mm
6 mm
2.5 m
c d 19 m
7 mm
34 m
20 mm
e f 6m
12 m
20 m 8m
2 A closed cylindrical plastic container is 20 cm high and its circular end surfaces each have a
radius of 5 cm. What is its volume, correct to two decimal places?
a 5 cm b 8 mm
c
14 cm
d e 5m f
2.2 m
180 mm
4 Find the volume of a sphere with a diameter of 12 mm. Answer correct to the nearest whole
number.
LEVEL 2
5 Find the volume of the following solids. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a 2m b 16.8 cm c
3m 8 cm
12.2 cm 6 cm
6 A water tank is in the shape of a closed cylinder with a radius of 10 m

10 m and height of 8 m.
8m
a What is the area of the top circular face of the water tank? Leave your answer in
terms of π .
b Determine the volume of the water tank. Leave your answer in terms of π .
7 A cylindrical wheat hopper is 8 m across and 10 m high.

a Calculate its volume correct to one decimal place.
b Grain pours out at 48 000 cm 3 per second. How long would it take a full hopper to empty?
Answer correct to the nearest second.
8 The circumference of Earth at the equator is about 40 075 km.

a Use the formula C = 2π r to find the radius of Earth correct to the nearest kilometre.
b Use this radius to find the volume of Earth. Express your answer in standard notation using
three significant figures.
LEVEL 3
9 A cylinder has its radius doubled. How many times is its volume increased?
10 A can of tennis balls contains three balls squeezed in with no room

for the balls to move. The container has a height of 21 cm. Answer
these questions correct to one decimal place.
a What is the radius of a tennis ball?
b Calculate the volume of a ball.
c Calculate the volume of the container.
d What volume of the container is not occupied by the balls?
e Express this unused space as a percentage of the total container.
230 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6I
6I Volume of pyramids and cones

A pyramid fits exactly inside a prism and occupies one third of the volume of the prism. Therefore
the formula for a pyramid will be V = 1 Ah where A is the area of the base and h is the height of the
3
pyramid. Likewise, the volume of a cone is one third the volume of a cylinder.
Volume formulae
Name Solid Volume
Square h V = 1 Ah
3
pyramid
s = 1 × s2 × h
3
s
h V = 1 Ah
Rectangular 3
pyramid 1
= × lb × h
b 3
l
V = 1 AH
Triangular 3
H
pyramid = 1 × 1 bh × H
A 3 2
V = 1 Ah
h 3
Cone
= 1 × πr 2 × h
r 3
Example 21: Finding the volume of a square pyramid 6I
Find the volume of this square pyramid of height 6 m and base 5 m. Give your answer correct to
the nearest cubic metre.
6m
5m
5m
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the volume formula for a pyramid V = 1 Ah. V = 1 Ah
3 3
2 Determine the shape of the base and the formula to = 1 s 2h
calculate the area of the base: A = s 2 . 3
3 Substitute the values into the formula. = 1 × 52 × 6
3
4 Evaluate.
5 Give the answer to the correct units. = 50 m 3
6 Write the answer in words. Volume of the pyramid is 50 m 3.
Example 22: Finding the volume of a cone 6I
Find the volume of this cone. Answer correct to three significant figures.
S OLUTI O N:
5m 12 m
1 Use the volume formula for a cone V = 1 Ah. V = 1 Ah
3 3
2 Determine the shape of the base and the
= 1 π r 2h
formula to calculate the area of the base: 3
A = π r 2. = 1 × π × 5 2 × 12
3
3 Substitute the values for r and h into the formula.
4 Evaluate. = 314.1592654...
5 Express the answer in the correct units. ≈ 314 m 3
6 Write the answer in words. Volume of the cone is 314 m 3.
232 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6I
Exercise 6I LEVEL 1
Example 21 1 Find the volume of the following pyramids. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b c
20 m
6m 4m
A = 49 m2 A = 9 m2
A = 7 m2
d e f
10 m 14 m 8m
9m 10 m 6m
9m
12 m 6m
2 Find the volume of the solids with the following dimensions. Give the answers correct to the
a Rectangular pyramid with base area 24 m2 and height 20 m.
b Triangular pyramid with base area 120 mm 2 and height 50 mm.
3 A square pyramid has a base side length of 3 cm and a height of 4 cm. What is its volume?
Answer correct to the nearest cubic centimetre.
Example 22 4 Find the volume of these cones to the nearest whole number.
a b 8m c
14 m
17 m 4m
5m 9m
5 Find the volume of a cone with base radius 4.5 cm and height 14 cm. Answer correct to two
decimal places.
14 cm
4.5 cm
LEVEL 2
6 The Red Pyramid is the third tallest pyramid ever

built. It has a square base with a side length of
220 m and a height of 104 m.
a What is the area of the square base?
b Determine the volume of the Red Pyramid.
7 An ice-cream cone measures 4.6 cm in diameter and is 9 cm high. Calculate the volume of the
cone. Answer correct to two decimal places.
8 A triangular pyramid has a base with a height of 15 cm and base length of 5 cm.
a What is the area of the base of the pyramid?
b What is the volume of the triangular pyramid if the height of the pyramid is 12 cm?
LEVEL 3
9 A triangular pyramid has a base with sides 16 m, 17 m and 17 m. The

20 m
height of the pyramid is 20 m. What is the volume of the triangular
pyramid? Answer correct to two decimal places. 16 m
17 m
10 A frustum is a portion of a solid. The frustum shown

opposite is formed from a cone.
5m 30 m
a What is the volume of the missing top cone?
Give answers correct to the nearest cubic metre.
b What was the volume of the entire cone?
c What is the volume of the frustum? 30 m
10 m
11 Find the volume of the composite solid shown opposite. 2 cm

This solid consists of the rectangular prism and a rectangular
pyramid. Answer correct to the nearest cubic centimetre.
3 cm
3 cm
4 cm
234 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6J
6J Surface area and volume of composite solids

Surface area of composite solids
The surface area of a composite solid is calculated in the same way as for right prisms and pyramids.
Visualise the surfaces of the solid, calculate the area of each face and then add these areas together.
SURFACE AREA OF A COMPOSITE SOLID
1 Visualise the surfaces of the solid.

2 Write a formula and calculate the surface area of each face.
3 Add the area of each surface.
4 Check that all surfaces have been counted.
5 Write the answer to the speciﬁed level of accuracy with the correct units.
Example 23: Finding the surface area of a composite solid 6J
The red cube is a sculpture in New York

consisting of a cube with a cylindrical hole
removed from the centre. The side length of the
cube is 8.53 m and the radius of the cylindrical
hole is 1.42 m.
a What is the surface area of the face with
the cylindrical hole, correct to two decimal
places?
b What is the surface area of the red cube?
Include only the outer red surfaces. Answer
S OLUTI O N:
1 Required face consists of a square with a a A = s2 − π r2
circle removed, so use the formula for a square
and a circle. = 8.53 2 − π × 1.422
2 Substitute the values into formula. = 66.4261 … ≈ 66.43 m2
3 Evaluate.
4 Composite solid has two faces with cylindrical b SA = (2 × 66.43) + (4 × 8.53 2 )
holes and four faces that are squares.
5 Write down an expression for surface area = 423.895 …
using the area of all the faces.
6 Evaluate. ≈ 423.90 m2
7 Write answer in the correct units. Surface area is 423.90 m 2.
Volume of composite solids

To calculate the volume of most common solids we use a formula. Some of these formulae are listed
earlier in this chapter. Composite solids are made up of two or more common solids. The volume of
a composite solid is calculated by adding or subtracting the volumes of each common solid.
VOLUME OF COMPOSITE SOLIDS
1 Divide the composite solid into two or more common solids.

2 Calculate the volume of each common solid.
3 Add or subtract the volumes of the common solids.
Example 24: Finding the volume of a composite solid 6J
A grain silo consists of a cylinder with

a cone on top, as shown. The diameter
of the cylinder is 16 m and its height is
20 m. The diameter of the base of the
cone is the same as that of the cylinder,
and its height is 2 m. What is the volume
of the silo correct to one decimal place?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the volume formula for a cone V = 1 π r 2 h. V = 1 π r 2 h (Cone)
3 3
1
= × π × 82 × 2
2 Substitute r = 8 and h = 2 into the formula. 3
3 Evaluate. = 134.0412866 … m 3
V = π r 2 h (Cylinder)
4 Use the volume formula for a cylinder V = π r 2 h.
5 Substitute r = 8 and h = 20 into the formula. = π × 8 2 × 20
6 Evaluate. = 4021.238597 m 3
7 Add the volume of the cone to the volume of the V = Cone + Cylinder
cylinder. = 134.0412 … + 4021.238 …
8 Evaluate. ≈ 4155.3 m 3
9 Write the answer correct to one decimal place and
with correct units. Volume of silo is 4155.3 m 3.
236 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6J
Exercise 6J LEVEL 1
1 Each of the following solids is made up of 1 cm cubes. What is the surface area and volume of
each solid?
a b c
2 What is the surface area and volume of each solid? Answer to the nearest whole number.
a 14 m b c 20 cm
19 m 2m 5m
12 m
2m 28 cm
16 cm 34 cm
7m 6m 9m 4m
45 cm
3 What is the surface area and volume of each solid? Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b 8 mm c
11.8 cm
4 mm
2m
6.7 cm
4m
4 A hemisphere of ice cream is placed on a waffle

cone. The waffle cone has a radius of 3.5 cm,
a perpendicular height of 12 cm and a slant
height of 12.5 cm.
Answer the following questions
a What is the (outside) surface area of the
waffle cone?
b What is the surface area of the hemisphere of
ice cream?
c What is the total surface area of the waffle
cone with the ice cream?
d What is the volume of the waffle cone?
e What is the volume of the hemisphere of
ice cream?
LEVEL 2
Example 24 5 What is the surface area and volume of each solid? Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b c
3m 5m
12 cm
3m 3m
14 cm 10 cm
4m
7m
5m
6 A cone sits exactly inside a cylinder as shown. The height of the

cone is 16 cm.
a What is the volume of the cylinder to the nearest cubic centimetre?
b What is the volume of the cylinder not taken up by the cone? Answer to the
nearest cubic centimetre.
18 cm
7 A composite solid consists of two square pyramids with their

40 cm
bases touching, as shown. The side length of the base is 40 cm
and the height of the solid is 80 cm. Find the volume of the solid 80 cm
correct to the nearest cubic centimetre.
LEVEL 3
8 A trapezoidal prism has a cylindrical hole of radius of 0.5 m cut out

as shown.
a What is the volume of the cylindrical hole? Answer correct to 2m
two decimal places. 3m
4m
b What is the area of the trapezoidal base or front face?
c What is the volume of the trapezoidal prism after the hole is cut? 3m
9 The first of two hot water tanks is a square prism with a side length of 80 centimetres and a
height of 1.9 metres. The second hot water tank is a cylinder with a diameter of 80 centimetres
and a height of 1.9 metres.
a What is the volume of each tank? Answer in cubic metres correct to three decimal places.
b What is the surface area of each tank? Answer to the nearest square metre.
10 A square pyramid has a side length of 200 cm and a perpendicular height of 180 cm. A frustum
is formed by removing the top of the square pyramid with a side length of 100 cm. Find the
volume of the frustum to the nearest cubic centimetre.
238 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6K
6K Capacity
The capacity of a container is the amount of liquid it
can hold. Some solids have both a volume and a capacity.
For example, a can of soft drink is a cylinder that has a
volume (V = π r 2 h) and a capacity (360 mL). The base
unit for capacity is the litre (L). Three commonly used
units for capacity are the megalitre (ML), kilolitre (kL)
and millilitre (mL).
Capacity
1 ML = 1000 kL 1 cm3 = 1 mL 1 m3 = 1000 000 cm3
1 ML = 1000 000 L 1 cm3 = 0.001 L 1 m3 = 1000 000 mL
1 kL = 1000 L 1000 cm3 = 1 L 1 m3 = 1000 L
1 L = 1000 mL 1 m3 = 1 kL
Example 25: Finding the capacity 6K
The container shown is filled with water.

a Find the volume of the container in cubic centimetres.
30 cm
b Find the capacity of the container in litres.
40 cm
70 cm
S OLUTI O N:
1 Use the volume formula for a right prism a V = Ah
V = Ah.
2 Determine the shape of the base and the
formula to calculate the area of the base
A = lb. = lbh
3 Substitute the values into the formula. = 70 × 40 × 30
4 Evaluate. = 84 000 cm 3
5 Give answer to the correct units.
6 To change cm3 to L multiply by 0.001 b Capacity = 84 000 × 0.001 L
(1 cm3 = 0.001 L). = 84 L
7 Alternative method is to convert to mL Capacity = 84 000 × 1 mL
(1 cm3 = 1 mL). = 84 000 mL
= 84 L
6K Capacity 239
Exercise 6K LEVEL 1
1 A can of soft drink has a capacity of 375 mL. How many cans of soft drink would it take to fill
a 1.2 L bottle? How much would remain?
2 A medicine bottle has a capacity of 0.3 L.

a What is the capacity in millilitres?
b How many tablespoons (15 mL) does the bottle
contain?
c How many teaspoons (5 mL) does the bottle
contain?
d The correct dosage is 10 mL, 3 times a day.
How many doses does the bottle contain?

a 4 cm3 = mL b 2000 cm3 = L c 70 cm3 = mL
d 34 000 cm3 = L e 900 cm3 = mL f 500 cm3 = L
g 43 m3 = kL h 30 m 3 = L i 103 m3 = kL
j 7 m3 = L k 5 m3 = kL l 8 m3 = mL
Example 25 4 What is the capacity of a rectangular prism whose base area is 20 cm2 and height is 10 cm?
Answer correct to the nearest millilitre.
5 Find the capacity of a triangular prism with a height of 18 m and a base area of 40 m2 . Answer
in litres, correct to two significant figures.
6 Find the capacity of a rectangular pyramid whose base area is 12 cm 2 and height is 15 cm .
Answer correct to the nearest millilitre.
7 Find the capacity of a cylindrical plastic container 16 cm high and with circular end surfaces of
radius 8 cm. Answer correct to the nearest litre.
8 Find the capacity of a cube whose side length is 75 mm. Answer in millilitres, correct to two
decimal places.
240 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume 6K
LEVEL 2
9 Find the capacity of the following solids in millilitres, correct to two decimal places.
a b c 18 mm
6 mm
4m
10 mm
5 mm
3m 3 mm
8m
4 mm
d e A = 21 m2 f 10 cm
7m
9m 6 cm
3m
10 m
10 A water tank is the shape of a cylinder with a radius of 2 m and height of 2.5 m.
a What is the area of the top circular face of the water tank? 2m
b Determine the volume of the water tank in cubic metres.
Answer correct to one decimal place. 2.5 m
c What is the capacity of the tank, to the nearest kilolitre?
LEVEL 3
11 A swimming pool is the shape of a rectangular prism

as shown. The swimming pool is filled to 25 cm from 1.7 m
the top.
a What is the volume of water in cubic metres?
b How much water does the swimming pool contain, 10 m
15 m
to the nearest kilolitre?
12 A swimming pool is the shape of a 38.8 m

10.5 m
trapezoidal prism as shown opposite. 3.2 m
a Find the volume of the pool in 1.5 m
cubic metres.
b What is the capacity of the pool in
kilolitres?
c In hot weather the level of the pool dropped by 75 cm. The pool was originally full. What
volume of water, in litres, evaporated?
Summary
Area of circles and Circle A = π r2 Semicircle A = 1 π r2
2
sectors
Annulus A = π ( R2 − r 2 ) A = θ π r2
Sector
360
Area of composite 1 Divide the composite shape into two or more plane shapes.
shapes 2 Add or subtract the areas of the plane shapes.
Trapezoidal rule A = h (d f + dl ) A – Area of shape

2
h – Height or distance between the parallel sides
df – Distance of first parallel side
dl – Distance of last parallel side
Surface area of Right prisms Sum of the area of each surface.
prisms, cylinders,
Open cylinder SA = 2π rh
spheres, pyramids
and cones Closed cylinder SA = 2π r 2 + 2π rh
Sphere SA = 4π r 2
Square pyramid SA = s 2 + 4 × 1 sl
2 ( )
Cone SA = π r 2 + π rl
Volume of prisms, Cube V = Ah = (s 2 ) × s = s3
cylinders, spheres,
Rectangular prism V = Ah = lb × h = lbh
pyramids and
cones Triangular prism V = AH = ( 1 bh) × H
2
Cylinder V = Ah = (π r 2 ) × h = π r 2 h
Sphere V = 4 π r3
3
Square pyramid V = 1 Ah = 1 × s2 × h
3 3
Rectangular pyramid V = 1 Ah = 1 × lb × h
3 3
Cone V = 1 Ah = 1 × π r 2 × h
3 3
Surface area of 1 Visualise the surfaces of the solid.
composite solids 2 Calculate the area of each face and add them together.
Volume of 1 Divide the composite solid into two or more composite solids.
composite solids 2 Add or subtract the volume of the common solids.
Capacity The amount of liquid a container can hold. Base unit is the litre.
242 Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume
Review
1 What is the area of the sector?

A 1.6 cm2 B 1.6 cm2
3 cm
C 6.4 cm2 D 28.3 cm2
82°
3 cm
2 A composite shape consists of a square with a side length of 6 mm and a circle of radius 2 mm
removed from the centre of the square. What is the area of the shape?
A 13 mm2 B 23 mm2 C 36 mm2 D 49 mm2
3 What is the surface area of a rectangular prism with a length of 2.5 m, a breadth of 3 m and a
height of 2.8 m?
A 8.3 m2 B 21 m2 C 29 m2 D 45.8 m2
4 What is the surface area of a sphere with a diameter of 16 mm?

A 804 mm2 B 2145 mm2 C 3217 mm2 D 17157 mm2
5 What is the volume of a rectangular prism with length 2.5 m, breadth 3 m and height 2.8 m?
A 17.5 m3 B 63 m3 C 12 m3 D 21 m3
6 What is the surface area of the square pyramid? 10 m

A 144 m2 B 384 m2
C 624 m2 D 1440 m2
7 What is the volume of the square pyramid?

12 m
A 120 m3 B 384 m3
12 m
C 480 cm3 D 1440 cm3
8 What is the volume of a hemisphere with a radius of 10 m?

A 261 m3 B 526 m3 C 2094 m3 D 4189 m3
9 What is the volume of the composite solid?

A 12.6 m3 B 12.6 m3 2m
C 20.9 m3 D 83.8 m3
1m
4m
10 A cubic water tank has a side length of 6 m. What is the capacity of the tank?
A 36 kL B 216 kL C 360 kL D 216 000 kL
Review
1 Find the area of each shape. Answer correct to one decimal place.
a b c
1.4 mm 3 mm
4 mm 83° 5 m
2 A semicircular trough has a diameter of 40 cm and a width of 15 cm. 15 cm

a What is the cross-sectional area of the trough? Answer to the 40 cm
b What is the volume of water for the trough? Answer to the nearest
cubic centimetre.
c How many litres of water will fill the trough? Answer correct to
one decimal place.
3 The diagram opposite shows a composite shape.

a What is the area of the rectangle?
b What is the area of the triangle? 8 cm
3 cm
c What is the area of the composite shape?
6 cm
4 Find the surface area of a square prism with a side length of 7 cm and height of 6 cm.
5 The diagram opposite shows a vertical cross-section of an ornament. 8m

Estimate the area of the cross-section by applying the trapezoidal
10 m
rule twice. Answer correct to the nearest square metre.
12 m
10 m
4m
6 A label covers the curved surface of a cylinder. The label does not overlap. The cylinder
has a radius of 8 cm and a height of 12 cm. What is the area of the label? Answer correct
to four significant figures.
7 A car hose is an open cylinder with a radius of 3 cm and a length of 14 cm. Calculate the
area of the outer surface, correct to two decimal places.
244
Review Chapter 6 Perimeter, area and volume
8 A sphere has a radius of 10 cm.

a What is the surface area of the sphere? Answer correct to
the nearest whole number. 10 cm
b What is the volume of the sphere? Answer correct to
the nearest whole number.
9 Find the volume of the following solids. Answer to the nearest whole number.
a b c 8m
4 mm
5 mm
10 m 3 mm
17 m
4 mm
4.5 m
3.2 m
10 A composite solid is shown opposite.

a What is the volume of the outer rectangular prism?
b What is the volume of the inner rectangular prism?
4m
c What is the volume of the composite solid? 6m
8m
3m
11 Find the capacity of a triangular prism with a height of 5m
50 cm and a base area of 120 cm2. Answer in litres.
12 A pool with dimensions 12 m by 5 m is surrounded 16 m

by timber decking in the shape of a trapezium.
12 m
a What is the area of the timber decking? 10 m 5m
b The pool has a constant depth of 2 m. What is the
volume of the pool?
c The interior of the pool is to be painted blue. What is 4m 4m
the surface area to be painted?
13 A cylindrical water tank has a radius of 3.75 metres and is 2 metres deep.
a What is the volume of the cylindrical tank? Answer correct to 3.75 m
the nearest cubic metre.
b The tank provides water for the sprinklers to water the garden.
Sprinklers use water at a rate of 5000 litres per hour. How long 2m
will it take the sprinklers to empty a full tank?
Practice Paper 1
Section I
Attempt Questions 1–15 (15 marks)
Allow about 20 minutes for this section
1 Which of the following is the highest pay?

A $1442.22 per week
B $2884.68 per fortnight
C $6247.50 per month
D $75 000 per annum
2 What is the number of significant figures in the number 0.00206?

A2
B3
C 4
D5
3 Which of the following is the correct simplification of 11x 4 − 7 x 4 ?

A4
B 4x
C 4x 4
D 4x 8
4 Stella sells shoes for a retail store and receives wages of $1875 per month plus 4% commission
on all her sales. What were her sales in a month in which she received a total pay of $1953?
A $878.00
B $1946.88
C $1950.00
D $2190.12
5 Simplify 6 − 4(2 x − 1).

A 4x − 2
B 4x + 6
C 7 − 8x
D 10 − 8x
246 Practice Paper 1
6 Arrange the numbers 4.8 × 10 −2 , 4.0 × 10 −1, and 5.6 × 10 −2 in ascending order.
A 4.8 × 10 −2 , 5.6 × 10 −2 , 4.0 × 10 −1
B 4.0 × 10 −1 , 4.8 × 10 −2 , 5.6 × 10 −2
C 5.6 × 10 −2 , 4.8 × 10 −2 , 4.0 × 10 −1
D 4.0 × 10 −1 , 5.6 × 10 −2 , 4.8 × 10 −2
7 What is the value of 2 x − x 2 if x = −3 ?

A −15
B −3
C3
D 15
8 A wage sheet of a mobile phone business shows one employee’s details.
Employee Rate per hour Normal hours Overtime (× 2) Wage
Terry Brown $20.00 30 x $840
Terry worked some overtime at double-time rate but it is missing from the wage sheet. Using the
information on the wage sheet, how many hours of overtime did Terry work?
A4
B5
C6
D8
9 The circumference of a bicycle wheel is 220 cm. How many revolutions will the wheel make if
it travels a distance of 6.6 km?
A 30
B 33.3
C 300
D 3000
10 Find the value of m, correct to one decimal place, given k = 24 and the formula m = k.
5
A 1.0
B 2.2
C 2.4
D 4.8
11 Find the value of x given a = 32, y = 2 and the formula a = 2 xy 2.

A3
B4
C5
D6
12 Tennis balls are sold in a box of 5 yellow balls or a box of x white balls. A tennis coach needs
400 balls and purchases 20 boxes of yellow balls and a certain number of white balls. Which of
the following expressions describes the number of boxes of white balls purchased?
A 400 − x
5
B 300x
C 300 + x
D 300
x
13 The irregular shape shown below has a width of 20 metres. The vertical dashed line divides
it into two parts of equal width. Two applications of the trapezoidal rule were used to estimate
the area.
Which expression is correct?
16 m
18 m
20 m
A 10 (16 + 18)
2
B 10 (32 + 18)
2
C 20 (16 + 18)
2
D 20 (32 + 18)
2
14 What is the solution to the equation 9 x − 8 = 27?
A x= 9
35
B x=7
3
C x = 18
9
D x = 38
9
15 A book was bought for $( x + 10) and sold for $( x − 20). Which of the following statements
is true?
A There was a profit of $( x − 30).
B There was a loss of $30.
C There was a profit of $( x + 10).
D There was a loss of $( x − 30).
Section II
All necessary working should be shown for every question.
Question 16 (15 marks) Marks

a A communication company pays overtime at a rate of time-and-a-half for the first
4 hours overtime and double-time thereafter. Natalie is employed as a personal
assistant. During a normal week she works 35 hours at $27.80 an hour.
i How much did Natalie earn in a week in which she worked 42 hours? 2
ii Natalie receives annual leave loading of 17 1 % of 4 weeks basic pay. 2

2
1 What is the value of Natalie’s leave loading?
2 Calculate the total amount Natalie is paid for her 4 weeks annual leave.
b Taxable income Tax payable
0 − $18 200 Nil
$18 201− $37 000 Nil +19 cents for each $1 over $18 200
$37 001− $87 000 $3572 + 32.5 cents for each $1 over $37 000
$87 001− $180 000 $19 822 + 37cents for each $1 over $87 000
$180 001 and over $54 232 + 45cents for each $1 over $180 000
Daniel earns a gross income of $63 500 during the financial year.
He has allowable deductions of $4500.
i What is Daniel’s taxable income? 1
ii Calculate the tax payable on Daniel’s income. 2
iii Daniel must pay 2% of his taxable income for the Medicare Levy. Calculate 1
how much Daniel pays in Medicare Levy.
iv What is Daniel’s total tax payable including the Levy? 1
v Daniel has paid $12 255 in tax during the financial year. Determine whether 2
Daniel receives a refund or whether he is required to pay more tax, and determine
this amount.
c Simplify.
i 1 − 2(5a + 3) ii 45 x 6 y 5 ÷ 9 xy 5 4

a Blake plays cards with a normal deck and draws a card from the deck.
i What are the chances of drawing a 3 or a black card? 1
ii What are the chances of not drawing an ace? 1
b An ornament is the shape of a cone with a 4.5 cm diameter and a height of 9 cm. 2
Find the volume of the ornament. Answer correct to two decimal places.
c Solve the equation 2 x − 5 = 1. 2

3
d A cylindrical aluminium can has a diameter of 22 cm and a height of 13 cm.
i What is the total surface area of the cylindrical can? Answer correct to one 2
decimal place.
ii The curved surface of the cylindrical can is cut from an aluminium sheet 100 cm 1
by 70 cm. How many curved surfaces can be cut?
e Solve these equations.
i 11 = x − 4 1
ii 8 x − 2 = 12 x 1
f Light travels at a speed of 2.9979 × 10 8 metres per second. How many kilometres 2
does light travel in one hour? Answer in scientific notation correct to three
significant figures.
g In a 100 m freestyle swimming race the winning time was 48.92 seconds. What is 2
the percentage error (to three decimal places) in this time?
a The volume of a solid is given by the formula V = 4 π r 3 where r is the radius.

3
i Write the formula with r as the subject. 2
ii What is the radius in metres of the solid, given it has a volume of 2 m 3? Answer 1
b Henry’s room measures 5850 mm by 4950 mm and needs carpeting.
i The cost of the carpet is $90 per m2, and a tradesperson charges $40 per m 2 to lay 2
the carpet. What is the cost to have the room carpeted?
ii Henry’s room has a ceiling height of 2800 mm. He is considering buying heater 2
A, B or C as shown in the table below.
Heater A Rooms up to 70 m 3
Heater B Rooms up to 80 m 3
Heater C Rooms up to 90 m 3
Determine the most suitable heater and give a reason for your answer.
c An above-ground swimming pool is the shape of a cylinder. It has a radius of

3 metres and contains water to a uniform depth of 0.9 metres.
i What is the volume of water in the pool, in cubic metres (two decimal places)? 2
ii How many litres of water are in the pool? Answer correct to the nearest litre. 1
(1m3 = 1000 L)
0.9 m
3m
d What is the value (two decimal places) of a + 3b if a = 6.4 and b = 2.1? 2

4b
e Make x the subject of the equation y = mx + b. 1
f The number of ‘standard drinks’ in various glasses of wine is shown. 2
Number of standard drinks

White wine Red wine
Small glass Large glass Small glass Large glass
0.8 1.3 1.0 1.5
Jane weighs 66 kg and drinks two small glasses of white wine and three large
glasses of red wine between 7 pm and midnight.
What would be her blood alcohol content (BAC) estimate at midnight?
Answer correct to two significant places.
7 Classifying and
representing data
Syllabus topic — S1.1 Classifying and representing data
This topic involves the planning and management of data collection, the classification of the
data and then the representation of the data in tables and graphs.
Outcomes
• Describe the distinguishing features of a population and a sample.
• Investigate data collection methods for both samples and populations.
• Classify data as numerical or categorical.
• Class categorical data as nominal or ordinal.
• Classify numerical data as discrete or continuous.
• Organise and display data in dot plots and stem-and-leaf plots.
• Create frequency tables to organise ungrouped and grouped data.
• Calculate the cumulative frequency from a grouped frequency table.
• Draw frequency and cumulative frequency graphs.
• Organise and display data in Pareto charts.
• Construct and interpret tables and graphs related to motor vehicles and water.
• Calculate the fuel consumption and running costs of a vehicle.

Knowledge check
252 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7A
7A Data collection
Data collection involves deciding what data to collect, locating it and collecting it. Data comes from
either primary or secondary sources.
• Primary sources – interviewing people, conducting questionnaires or observing a system in
operation
• Secondary sources – data collected or created by someone else, such as information gathered
from newspapers, books and the internet
It is important that procedures are in place to ensure the collection of data is accurate, up-to-date,
relevant and secure. If the data collected comes from unreliable sources or is inaccurate, the
information gained from it will be incorrect.
Data collection methods are used for both a census and a sample survey.
• A census is a survey of every person in a population. For example, all the students in your school
are regarded as the population. A census can be very expensive and time-consuming, if the
population is large.
• A sample is only part of a population. For example, a sample of the school population is the
students in your class. Estimates are made about the population based on the sample. Samples
are cheaper than censuses, but are not as accurate. Bias can also be an issue. A sample must be
large enough to give a good representation of the population, but small enough to be manageable.
There are many different types of sampling including a random sample, stratified sample and
systematic sample.
Random sample
A random sample occurs when all members of the population have an equal chance of being
selected. For example, six students are selected at random from the entire school population. Lotto
is another good example of random sampling. A sample of 6 numbers is chosen from 40 numbers.
Random samples are simple and easy to use for small populations. However, for large populations,
it is possible to miss out on a particular group.
Stratified sample
A stratified sample occurs when categories or strata of a population are chosen and then members
from each category are randomly selected. For example, one student is selected from each year
7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12. Each year group is a category in a stratified sample. Some other common types
of categories are age, sex, religion or marital status. A stratified sample is useful when the categories
are simple and easy to determine. However, care needs to be taken when selecting categories to
avoid any bias in the data.
Systematic sample
Systematic sampling occurs when the population is divided into a structured sample size. For example,
the students in the school population are put in alphabetical order and the 100th student, 200th student,
7A Data collection 253
300th student, … are selected. A systematic sample is often used by a manufacturer to ensure the
machines are working correctly. Here the manufacturer might test a machine every 30 minutes or check
the 50th item on a production line. Systematic sampling results in a gap between each selection.
Self-selected sample
In a self-selected sample, members of the population volunteer themselves. For example, six
students from the entire school population offer to complete a questionnaire. A self-selected sample
often occurs on the internet. There is the potential for self-selected sampling to be biased as only
people who are motivated and have the time volunteer themselves.
RANDOM STRATIFIED SYSTEMATIC SELF-SELECTED

SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE SAMPLE
Members of Categories of a Population is divided Members of the
the population population are into a structured population volunteer
have an equal chosen. Members sample size. Members themselves.
chance of being then are randomly are then selected in a
selected. selected from each certain order from this
category. structure.
Example 1: Distinguishing sample types 7A
A retirement village has 63 residents, 42 women and 21 men. Decide whether each sample of
resident would be random, stratified, systematic or self-selected.
a Every seventh resident
b Six of the women and three of the men
c Nine names picked from a hat containing the names of the residents.
d Residents sorted into alphabetical order and each ninth resident selected.
e Residents are divided into four age groups (51− 60, 61–70, 71–80, 81–90) and two residents
selected from each age group
S OLUTI O N:
1 The population has been divided into a structured a Systematic sample

sample size – 7 th, 14 th, 21st, … 63rd.
2 The population has been divided into categories – b Stratified sample
women and the men.
3 Sample is taken at random. c Random sample
4 The population is divided into alphabetical order and a d Systematic sample
structured sample size taken.
5 The population has been divided into four age group e Stratified sample
categories and then randomly selected.
Exercise 7A LEVEL 1
1 State whether a census or a sample is the most appropriate way to collect this data.
a Information on the shopping experience of
people in the city
b John collecting the heights of his best
friends
c The travelling habits of the Jones family
to work
d Australians watching the grand final
e Number of people eating toast for breakfast
f Length of time every AAA battery lasts
g Number of people entering a gym between
5 p.m. and 6 p.m..
h Holly collecting the length of time students
in her class spend on the internet
i The world’s reaction to climate change
j Shop manager’s reaction to a drop in sales.
Example 1 2 State whether the sample is random, stratified, systematic or self-selected.

a A police officer breathalyses every tenth person.
b Each person is given a raffle ticket and the tickets are drawn out of a hat.
c Each person leaving a bus was given a survey form. We used the data from the people who
sent it back.
d A business has 240 married and 120 unmarried employees. A sample was chosen to include
10 of the married and 5 of the unmarried employees.
e Students were sorted into alphabetical order and each third student selected.
f Individuals were randomly selected using their tax file number.
g Every 12th jogger was selected from an alphabetical list.
h Ten cards were randomly selected from a normal deck of cards.
i Ten girls and ten boys were randomly selected from a concert audience.
j Ten people who arrive at a shopping centre each day completed the survey.
3 Michael uses a random sample to survey 10% of the local community. In the local community
there are 810 males and 920 females. How many people does Michael need to survey?
7A Data collection 255
4 Amelia plans to conduct a random

sample to survey the netball players
in the local association. There are
2850 players in the local
association and she plans to survey
171 players. What percentage of
the population is her sample?
5 Paige uses a stratified sample

to survey 5% of her school
population. At the school there are
80 teachers and 1160 students.
a How many teachers should
complete the survey?
b How many students should complete the survey?
c How many people should complete the survey?
6 Tyler uses a stratified sample to survey 25% of the members of his swimming club. He uses
their sex as a category and selects a random group of female and male swimmers. There are
88 female swimmers and 112 male swimmers in his club.
a How many swimmers are in the entire population?
b How many female swimmers are in the sample?
c How many male swimmers are in the sample?
7 Osman uses a stratified sample to survey 7.5% of his chat room friends. He uses marital status
as a category and selects a random group of married and unmarried friends. There are 200
married and 240 unmarried friends in his chat room.
a How many friends are in the entire population?
b How many married friends are in the sample?
c How many unmarried friends are in the sample?
8 Taylia uses a stratified sample to survey 20% of the senior students from her school. There are
205 Year 11 students and 180 Year 12 students. How many students should Taylia choose from
Year 12?
9 Ming uses a stratified sample to survey 12 1 % of the junior students from his school. There are
2
88 Year 7, 120 Year 8, 104 Year 9 and 128 Year 10 students.
a How many students are in the entire population?
b How many students should Ming choose in following years?
i Year 7 ii Year 8 iii Year 9 iv Year 10
LEVEL 2
10 A survey was conducted in a school on whether Australia should remain a constitutional

monarchy or become a republic. The results are shown below.
Male Female Total

Republic 51 79 130
Monarchy 23 47 70
Total 74 126 200
a How many males surveyed did not think Australia should change to a republic?
b What percentage of people favour changing to a republic?
c This survey is not a good random sample of all Australians. Why?
11 A sample of 30 students is taken from a primary school that has an enrolment of 420 students
from kindergarten to Year 6. The sampling is designed so that the proportion of each year of the
sample matches the population. There are 4 students from Year 1 in the sample. How many
Year 1 students are there in the school population?
12 A store has 400 employees of which 208 are female and 192 are male. The store intends to
survey 25 of its employees. A stratified survey is to be conducted.
a How many females should be surveyed?
b How many males should be surveyed?
LEVEL 3
13 Identify any possible issues with each of the following survey questions.
a Do you like the government’s new policy? Yes/No
b Alan is a lazy boss who should be forced to pay his diligent workers more money.
Agree or disagree?
14 Kayla surveyed a group of 15 people at

the Tamworth country music festival on their
music preferences. She used this data to
draw conclusions for the entire population
of NSW.
a Do you think her conclusions will be
accurate? Give a reason.
b What would be a more appropriate method of
sampling music preferences?
7B Classification of data 257
7B Classification of data
There are many types of data that can be collected. For example, if you ask six friends how many
pets they own, they might give you the following data: 1, 0, 2, 4, 1, 15. However not all data are
numbers. For example, if you also record the gender of each of your friends, you get the following
data: male, male, female, female, female, male. Data is divided into two broad classifications:
categorical and numerical.
Categorical data
Categorical data represents characteristics such as a person’s gender, marital
status, address or music they like. Categorical data can take on numerical
values (such as ‘0’ for unsatisfactory and ‘1’ for satisfactory), but those
numbers don’t have mathematical meaning.
Categorical data is further classified as nominal or ordinal.
• Nominal data uses a name or label that does not indicate order.
For example, a student’s gender could be classified as an ‘F” for
female and an ‘M’ for male.
• Ordinal data uses a name or label that does indicate order. For example,
the quality of work could be classified as an ‘A’ for excellent, ‘B’ for
good and ‘C’ for satisfactory. It shows a sequence A, B and C.
Categorical data has no quantity or amount associated with each category.
Numerical data
Numerical data indicates a quantity and is used to perform calculations.
For example, if we asked each student in the class their height, we would
expect to get a variety of answers. However each answer is a number.
Numerical data is further classified as discrete or continuous.
• Discrete data is data that can only take exact numerical values. For
example, the number of sisters will give rise to numbers such as
0, 1 or 2. Counting a quantity often results in discrete data.
• Continuous data is data that can take any numerical value (depending
on the degree of accuracy). For example, a student’s height will give rise
to numbers such as 171.2 cm and 173.5 cm. Measuring a quantity often
results in continuous data.
CLASSIFICATION OF DATA
1 Categorical data – data is classified by the name of the category it belongs to.
a Nominal data – name does not indicate order.
b Ordinal data – name does indicate order.
2 Numerical data – data indicates a quantity and is used to perform calculations.
a Discrete data – data can only take exact numerical values.
b Continuous data – data can take any numerical value.
258 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7B
Example 2: Classifying data as categorical or numerical 7B
Classify the data from these situations as categorical or numerical.

a The heart rate of a group of personal trainers
b The most watched television show in Australia
c The number of people living in Smith Ave
d The reasons for people travelling to work by train
S OLUTI O N:
1 The heart rate, such as 70 beats per minute, a The heart rate is numerical data.
can be measured and results in a number.
2 A television show, such as the news, does not b A television show is categorical
result in a number. data.
3 The number of people living in Smith Ave, such c The number of people living in
as 27, can be counted and results in a number. Smith Ave is numerical data.
4 The reason for travelling to work by train, such d The reasons for travelling to
as it is cheaper, does not result in a number. work is categorical data.
Example 3: Classifying data as a nominal or ordinal 7B
Classify the following numerical data as nominal or ordinal.

a School year level
b Internet use at home
S OLUTI O N:
1 Year level such as Year 11 indicates order a Year level is ordinal data.
but has no mathematical meaning.
2 Internet use such as email is a label that b How the internet is used at home is
does not indicate any order. nominal data.
Example 4: Classifying data as a discrete or continuous 7B
Classify the following numerical data as discrete or continuous.

a The number of pets in your family
b The perimeter of the school
S OLUTI O N:
1 The number of pets can be counted and is exact. a The number of pets is discrete data.
2 The perimeter of the school is a measurement of b The perimeter of the school is
distance and assumes a value. continuous data.
Exercise 7B LEVEL 1
Example 2 1 Classify the data from these situations as categorical or numerical.

a The favourite colours of Jenny’s friends
b The number of people travelling in a car
c The weight of each student in the year in kilograms
d People rating their doctor on personal service (high, medium or low)
e The number of students in each class
f The IQ of a group of students
g Responses to a survey question (agree or disagree)
h A person’s lucky number
i A female’s favourite mobile phone
j The distance from Sydney to Wollongong
k The cost of bread at the supermarket
l The community’s preferred leader
m The number of computers in the school
Example 4 2 Classify the following numerical data as discrete or continuous.

a The price paid for a can of soft drink
b The number of people at a concert
c The time between trains
d The number of pages in the newspaper
e The amount of water used in the past month
f The number of people in your immediate family
g The numbers drawn in this week’s lotto
h The length of the cricket pitch
i The distance measured for the long jump at the world championships
j The score achieved from a quiz consisting of 10 questions
k The height of the tallest person in the world
260 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7B
3 State whether the following is categorical, discrete or continuous data.

a The heights of members of a football team
b The distance to drive to the train station
c The different types of ice creams
d The quality of food in a restaurant
e The eye colour of a group of people
f The number of pets in a household
g The time to swim 50 metres
h The number of goals scored in the first match of the season
i Today’s most fashionable style of dress
j The number of computers in the building
k Replies given to a questionnaire (Yes or No)
l The perimeter of Joel’s block of land
m The width of the Anzac Bridge
n The number of people killed on the roads due to speed
o The stopping distance for a car travelling at 60 km/h
p The most popular type of car sold in the past 12 months.
Example 3 4 A hospital measures the weight and length of every new baby.
a Classify the data as numerical or categorical.
b If the data is numerical, is this data discrete or continuous? If the data is categorical,
is it nominal or ordinal?
5 A coffee shop is conducting a survey on the drinking habits of its customers. One of the
questions was: ‘How many cups of coffee do you drink each day?’
a State whether the data is numerical or categorical.
b If the data is numerical, is this data discrete or continuous? If the data is categorical,
is it nominal or ordinal?
6 The government collected data on its latest policy proposal. The people surveyed answered
10 questions and were given three choices for each question: Agree, Disagree or Not sure.
What type of data has the government collected?
LEVEL 2
7 In a survey customers were asked to rate the service they received by selecting one of the
following:
outstanding, excellent, good, satisfactory or needs improvement
Describe the type of data that would result from this question.
8 A teacher marks a class’s assessment task and awards a mark out of 100 for each student.
Describe the type of data that that has been collected by the teacher.
9 A marketing poll was conducted that asked about a person’s employment status:
unemployed, receiving education, part-time job or full-time job
Describe the type of data that would result from this poll.
10 Emma is planning to build a new restaurant. She conducted a survey of the community. One
of the questions asked was ‘How far in kilometres would you be prepared to travel to get to a
good restaurant?’ The options given were:
5 km, 10 km, 20 km, 50 km
Describe the type of data that would result from this question.
11 The local community recorded the amount of rainfall

each day for the past 3 months. Some of the data is
shown below.
Rainfall
23rd April 10 mm
24th April 0 mm
25th April 25 mm
Describe the data collected by the local community.
LEVEL 3
12 The police department collected data on fatal crashes. One of the questions it asked was:
‘What was the age of the driver involved in a fatal crash?’
a Describe the type of data collected by the police department.
b The question was modified to give the interviewee six choices:
17–24 years , 25–34 years , 35–44 years , 45–54 years , 55–64 years , 65+ years
Describe the type of data that would result from these choices.
262 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7C
7C Dot plots and stem-and-leaf plots
Dot plots
The simplest display of numerical data is a dot plot. A dot plot consists
of a number line with each data point marked by a dot. When several 3
2
data points have the same value, the points are stacked on top of 1
each other. Dot plots are a great way of displaying fairly small data
sets in which the data takes a limited number of values. 1 2 3 4 5
DOT PLOT
It is a number line with each data point marked by a dot. When several data points have the same
value, the points are stacked on top of each other.
Example 5: Constructing a dot plot 7C
The number of hours spent watching television on the weekend is shown below.
Construct a dot plot.
3 4 3 2 7 6 2 2 3 7 3 5 2
3 4 5 6 8 1 6 1 2 3 4 1 5
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a number line, scaled to all the data values. Hours watching television
Label the line with the variable being displayed.
6
2 The vertical axis indicates the frequency of the 5
data value. It may be omitted. 4
3 Plot each data value by marking in a dot above the 3
corresponding value on the number line. 2
1
4 Count the number of dots and check that it matches
the number of data values. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hours
7C Dot plots and stem-and-leaf plots 263
Stem-and-leaf plots
A stem-and-leaf plot or stem plot is used to present a small (less than 50 values) numerical data
set. The tens digit of the data values becomes the ‘stem’ and is written in numerical order down the
page. The ‘units’ digits become the ‘leaves’ and are written in numerical order across the page.
STEM-AND-LEAF PLOT BACK-TO-BACK STEM-AND-LEAF PLOT
0 57 Leaf 9 0 0
1 2 2557 8532 1 12559
Leaf Stem
Stem 2 1256 79
98 4 4 2 2 4 578 Leaf
Example 6: Constructing a stem-and-leaf plot 7C
Use the following data set to construct a stem-and-leaf plot.

24 7 19 19 15 18 27 28 11 19 29 30 9
6 25 25 26 5 6 6 10 10 28 29 14
S OLUTI O N:
1 The data set has values from 5 to 30. This requires 0 5666 79
stems 0, 1, 2 and 3. Write these down from smallest to
1 0 014 58999
largest, followed by a vertical line.
2 4 556 78899
2 Attach the leaves. The first data value is ‘24’. It has a
stem of ‘2’ and a leaf of ‘4’. Opposite the 2 in the stem, 3 0
write the number 4. Complete all the values.
3 Rewrite the leaves so that they are in increasing order.
Example 7: Constructing a back-to-back stem-and-leaf plot 7C
Use the following data set to construct a back-to-back stem-and-leaf plot.

Girls 28 24 24 31 34 26 27 12 18 13 15 6 29 30 22
Boys 19 27 21 25 35 28 29 13 11 30 31 32 25 16 9
S OLUTI O N:
1 The data set has values from 6 to 35. This requires Girls Boys
stems 0, 1, 2 and 3. Write these down from smallest to 6 0 9
largest, followed by two vertical lines.
8532 1 1369
2 Attach the leaves for the girls. The first data value is
98 76 4 4 2 2 155789
‘28’. It has a stem of ‘2’ and a leaf of ‘8’.
3 Attach the leaves for the boys. The first data value is 410 3 0125
‘19’. It has a stem of ‘1’ and a leaf of ‘9’.
4 Rewrite the leaves so that they are in increasing order.
264 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7C
Exercise 7C LEVEL 1
1 The dot plot represents the number of customers per hour.

Customers each hour
6
5
4
3
2
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Number of customers
a What is the highest number of customers?

b What is the most common number of customers per hour?
c What are the least common numbers of customers?
d Calculate the total number of customers.
Example 5 2 A group of 26 people were asked how many times in the last week they had shopped at a
particular supermarket. Their responses were as follows:
1 3 3 2 1 1 4 5 4 2 1 3 4
6 2 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 5 6 1
a Construct a dot plot of this data.

b How many people were at the supermarket four times last week?
c What is the difference between the highest and lowest number of visits to the supermarket?
3 The goals scored in each match are listed below.
4 4 3 3 2 2 2
2 3 4 2 1 2 1
3 1 5 1 2 1
1 3 2 4 2 1
a Construct a dot plot for this data set.

b How many matches resulted in 3 goals?
c In how many matches were 4 or 5 goals scored?
7C Dot plots and stem-and-leaf plots 265
LEVEL 2
4 The stem-and-leaf plot represents the results achieved by students in a test.
0 6
1 2358
2 2 4 4 6 789
3 014
a What is the highest score in this test?

b Which score occurred the most number of times?
c What is the difference between the highest and lowest scores?
d How many students completed the test?
e What is the median for this data set?
5 An investigator recorded the life of 24 similar batteries in a toy. Her results (in hours) were:
41 25 37 46 17 4 33 31 28 34 19 26
40 24 31 27 30 22 33 20 21 27 30 26
a Make a stem-and-leaf plot of these times.

b How many of the batteries lasted for more than 25 hours?
c What is the median for this data set?
LEVEL 3
Example 7 6 The following table shows the number of nights spent away from home in the past year by a
group of 15 Australian tourists and by a group of 15 New Zealand tourists.
AUS 21 5 8 7 17 3 15 14 3 11 5 4 11 6 4
NZ 19 6 23 32 17 29 23 22 12 28 26 5 22 14 14
a Construct a back-to-back stem-and-leaf plot of these data sets.

b Compare the number of nights spent away by Australian and New Zealand tourists in terms
of shape, centre and spread.
7 The ages of patients admitted to a particular hospital during one week are given below.
Male 72 56 57 77 63 71 57 54 63 72 59 56 57 67 75
Female 61 55 58 78 65 68 71 78 79 72 73 64 68 66 69
a Construct a back-to-back stem-and-leaf plot of these data sets.

b Compare the ages at admission to the hospital for male and female patients in terms of
shape, centre and spread.
266 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7D
7D Grouped frequency tables

Data with a large range of values are often grouped into a small number of convenient intervals,
called class intervals. When choosing class intervals ensure:
• Every data value is in an interval.
• Intervals do not overlap.
• No gaps exist between the intervals.
The choice of intervals can vary depending on that data. Recommendations:
• A division of 5 to 15 groups is preferred.
• Choose an interval that is easy to read such as 5 units, 10 units, etc.
• Start the interval with an appropriate exact value. For example, choose intervals such
0 − 9, 10 −19,… rather than 1−10, 11− 20, …
GROUPED FREQUENCY TABLE
1 Classes or groups are listed in the first column in ascending order.

2 Class centre column is obtained by finding the middle of the class endpoints.
3 Tally column shows the number of times a score occurs in a class (groups of 5s).
4 Frequency column is total count of scores in each class.
Example 8: Constructing a grouped frequency table 7D
Twenty-six people were asked to record how many cups of coffee they drank in a particular week.
The results are listed below. Draw a frequency table to show the data.
0 33 6 14 0 32 0 25 10 0 2 9 23
0 34 5 17 3 0 23 1 32 0 8 0 2
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a table with 4 columns and label Class
them class, class centre, tally and Class centre Tally Frequency
frequency. 0−4 2 |||| |||| || 12
2 The data ranges from 0 to 34 . A class
5− 9 7 |||| 4
interval width of 5 results in 7 classes.
3 Calculate the class centre (middle of 10 −14 12 || 2
each class). 15−19 17 | 1
4 Record a mark in the tally column for 20 − 24 22 || 2
each data value in the class interval. 25 − 29 27 | 1
5 Count the tally marks in the frequency
30 − 34 32 |||| 4
column.
6 Add the frequency column to find the Total 26
total number of scores.
7D Grouped frequency tables 267
Exercise 7D LEVEL 1
1 The ages of the people living in Matilda Rd

Class
was recorded.
Class centre Frequency
a Copy and complete the table opposite.
b How many people are younger than 20? 5–19 10
c Which class occurred the most number of 20 –34 8
times?
d How many people are living in this road? 35– 49 6
50 – 64 4
Total 28
2 A grouped frequency table is

Class
shown.
Class centre Tally Frequency
a Copy and complete the
table. 3–7 |||| 4
b How many class intervals 10 |||| | 6
have been used?
c Which class occurred 13–17 15 2
the least? 18– 22 20 |||| ||
d What is the total number
25 | 1
of scores?
28–32 3
33–37 35 |||| |||
40 |||| 5
Example 8 3 The heights of the 30 players in a netball club

are recorded below. Construct a grouped
frequency table using class intervals
(170–174,175–179,180–184,185–189, …).
174 184 183 179 180 181 189 188

194 185 178 173 183 188 183 182
194 189 184 182 183 189 193
184 189 194 188 192 190 180
268 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7D
LEVEL 2
4 A drink vending machine records the number of bottles sold each day.
13 22 26 34 21 33 32 31 33 26 30 33 37 27 36
28 35 24 31 3 35 39 26 13 34 21 29 36 24 33
25 9 39 19 29 36 38 29 38 38 37 38 31 37 37
28 40 34 29 18 35 22 20 35 25 31 39 39 18 36
38 35 8 29 35 20 34 30 37 33 27 32 32 36 16
39 30 14 29 20 22 12 24 17 21 18 17 38 28 25
a Decide on appropriate classes for a frequency

table.
b Calculate the class centres for these classes.
c Construct a grouped frequency table using
these class intervals.
5 The players’ scores after the second round of a golf tournament are recorded below.
162 163 175 161 166 163 167 151 150 176
159 173 162 155 149 171 181 163 154 165
145 177 184 171 154 166 168 158 136 156
161 162 169 162 160 150 174 176 146 137
a Decide on appropriate classes for a frequency table.

c Construct a grouped frequency table using these class intervals.
LEVEL 3
6 Jordan surveyed his friends to check the number of emails they saved on their computers.
These are the numbers he recorded:
22, 9, 51, 6, 30, 18, 30, 4, 10, 5, 19, 23, 37, 17, 18, 12, 10, 24, 28, 25, 60, 45, 19, 17, 11, 8, 16, 1, 24, 3
d What percentage of friends had fewer than 20 emails saved on their computer?
7E Cumulative frequency 269
7E Cumulative frequency
Cumulative frequency is the frequency of the score Cumulative
plus the frequency of all the scores less than that Score Frequency frequency
score. A cumulative frequency column is often
18 1 1
inserted next to the frequency column in a
frequency table. 19 5 6
20 3 9
21 7 16
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY
The frequency of the score plus the frequency of all the scores less than that score
Example 9: Calculating the cumulative frequency 7E
The frequency table opposite shows the Cumulative

temperatures for 17 days. Complete the Score Frequency frequency
cumulative frequency column. 18 1
19 2
20 3
21 3
22 5
23 3
S OLUTI O N:
1 The lowest score is 18 and it has a Cumulative
frequency of 1. Cumulative frequency Score Frequency frequency
of 18 is 1.
18 1 1
2 Add the frequency of the next score to the
19 2 1+ 2 = 3
cumulative frequency of the previous score.
Cumulative frequency of 19 = 2 + 1 = 3. 20 3 3+3 = 6
3 Repeat this process. 21 3 6+3 = 9
22 5 9 + 5 = 14
23 3 14 + 3 = 17
270 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7E
Exercise 7E LEVEL 1
Example 9 1 The frequency table shows the results of a test. Cumulative

a Copy and complete the table. Score Frequency frequency
b How many students scored 8?
4 4
c How many students scored more than 5?
d How many students scored less than 6? 5 6
e How many students completed the test?
6 7
7 10
8 5
2 The number of times an ambulance was called out Number Cumulative

each day is recorded in a frequency table. of calls Frequency frequency
20 4
b On how many days was the ambulance called
out 21 times? 21 3
c On how many days was the ambulance called
22 10
out fewer than 25 times?
d On how many days was the ambulance called 23 12
out more than 23 times? 24 6
25 5
3 The results of a survey are listed below.
13 11 11 10 10 10 9 10 9 11 9 10 12 11 13
10 9 12 11 13 10 11 10 10 10 13 8 8 10 9
a Copy and complete the table. Cumulative

b How many people completed Score Tally Frequency frequency
the survey?
8
c How many people scored 10 in
the survey? 9
d What is the difference between
10
the highest and lowest scores?
e Which score had the highest 11
frequency? 12
13
7E Cumulative frequency 271
LEVEL 2
4 The ages of children at the local park are shown below.
9 8 4 6 10 10 8 6 5 4 5 6 8 4 9
10 5 8 8 9 10 4 6 10 9 9 7 7 6 5
a Construct a frequency table to represent this data; include a tally column.

b Add a cumulative frequency column.
c How many children are there altogether?
d How many children are 8 years old?
e How many children are 6 years old?
f How many children are older than 5?
g How many children are younger than 9?
h What are the most common ages?
i What is the least common age?
j What fraction are 7 years old?
k What fraction are 4 years old?
l What percentage are older than 5?
m What percentage are younger than 6?
LEVEL 3
5 Blake recorded his time (in seconds) to run the 400-metres hurdles throughout the year.
61 62 62 63 64 62 66 64 63 63 62 61 62 62 63
64 63 65 63 63 62 61 62 63 62 61 61 64 64 64
63 63 64 65 64 63 63 62 61 62 62 63 64 63 62
a Construct a frequency table to represent this data;

include a tally column.
b Add a cumulative frequency column to the table.
c How many times were recorded?
d How many times did Blake run the 400 metres in
61 seconds?
e How many times are less than or equal to 63?
f What fraction of his 400-metre times is 62?
g What percentage of his 400-metre times is 65?
h What percentage of his times are less than or equal to 64? Answer correct to
two decimal places.
272 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7F
7F Frequency and cumulative frequency graphs

Frequency histogram and polygon
A frequency histogram is a graph of a frequency table in which equal intervals of the scores
(or classes) are marked on the horizontal axis and the frequencies associated with these intervals are
indicated by vertical rectangles. A frequency polygon is a line graph of the frequency table and can
be constructed by joining the midpoints at the tops of the rectangles of a frequency histogram.
FREQUENCY HISTOGRAM FREQUENCY POLYGON

Frequency
Frequency
3
2 2
1 1
Score Score
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Example 10: Constructing a grouped frequency histogram 7F
The weights of 25 students were recorded Class Class centre Frequency

and displayed in a grouped frequency table.
30–39 34.5 0
Construct a grouped frequency histogram
40 – 49 44.5 5
and polygon.
50 –59 54.5 7
60 –69 64.5 9
70 –79 74.5 4
80 – 89 84.5 0
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw the horizontal axis with each class
Number of students
8
(or class centre) the same distance apart.
6
2 Draw a vertical axis using a scale that will 4
cater for the lowest to highest frequency. 2
3 Label the horizontal and vertical axes.
30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79 80–89
Weight (kg)
Frequency histogram:
Number of students
8
4 Draw a rectangle for each class to the
6
matching frequency. The class is in the 4
centre of the rectangle. 2
Frequency polygon:
30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79 80–89
5 Draw a line for each class to the matching Weight (kg)
frequency.
7F Frequency and cumulative frequency graphs 273
Cumulative frequency graphs

A cumulative frequency histogram is constructed using equal intervals of the scores (or classes)
on the horizontal axis and the cumulative frequencies associated with these intervals indicated by
vertical rectangles. A cumulative frequency polygon or ogive is a line graph constructed by joining
the top right-hand corner of the rectangles of a cumulative frequency histogram.
Example 11: Constructing cumulative frequency graphs 7F
a Construct a cumulative Cumulative

frequency histogram and Class Class centre Frequency frequency
polygon or ogive.
30 –39 34.5 0 0
b Estimate the median using
the ogive. 40– 49 44.5 5 5
50 –59 54.5 7 12
60 –69 64.5 9 21
70 – 79 74.5 4 25
80 –89 84.5 0 25
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw the horizontal axis with each class a Cumulative frequency histogram
(or class centre) the same distance apart.
Number of students
25
2 Draw a vertical axis using a scale that will 20
cater for the lowest to highest frequency. 15
3 Draw a rectangle for each class to the 10
5
matching cumulative frequency. The class
is in the centre of the rectangle. 34.5 44.5 54.5 64.5 74.5 84.5
Weight (kg)
4 Draw a line for each class to the top Cumulative frequency polygon
right-hand corner of the rectangle.
Number of students
25
20
15
10
5
34.5 44.5 54.5 64.5 74.5 84.5

Weight (kg)
Number of students
5 There are 25 students, so the median b 25

student is 12.5. 20
15
6 Draw a horizontal line from 12.5 until it 10
intersects the ogive. Draw a vertical line 5
from this point to the horizontal axis. 34.5 44.5 54.5 64.5 74.5 84.5
Weight (kg)
7 Estimate the median value. The median is about 60.
Exercise 7F LEVEL 1
Example 10 1 The frequency table shows the scores for a

mathematics quiz. Use this data to construct a:
a frequency histogram 4 ||| 3
b frequency polygon. 5 |||| 5
6 |||| || 7
7 |||| |||| 10
8 ||| 3
2 The numbers of brothers and sisters reported by each of 30 students is as follows.
3 2 2 6 4 5 2 1 3 2 6 3 7 2 1
4 2 1 5 4 4 5 3 4 1 3 1 2 1 3
a Construct a frequency table for this data.

b Use the frequency table to construct a frequency histogram.
c Use the frequency table to construct a frequency polygon.
3 The number of magazines purchased in a

month by 20 different people was recorded as:
6 5 8 4 4 5 4 7 5 6
7 4 5 5 4 7 6 5 4 4
a Construct a frequency table for the data.

4 The maximum temperatures for several capital cities around the world are listed.
22 23 23 24 18 18 19 19 19 20 21 20
21 20 21 17 24 23 17 22 24 24 17 17
a Construct a frequency table for this data.

b Construct a frequency histogram for this data.
c Construct a frequency polygon for this data.
7F Frequency and cumulative frequency graphs 275
LEVEL 2
Example 11 5 Jade owns five clothing stores that sell jackets. She recorded the total number of jackets sold
each day for the month of April. This data is shown below.
61 66 67 67 60 63 67 63
64 62 65 65 67 66 61 62
65 61 63 63 67 67 60
66 64 67 62 65 65 67
a Construct a frequency table with a cumulative

frequency column.
b Construct a cumulative frequency histogram
for this data.
c Construct a cumulative frequency polygon for this data.
d On how many days was the number of jackets sold less than or equal to 63?
e On how many days was the number of jackets sold less than or equal to 66?
6 The marks for a university exam are shown in the cumulative frequency polygon.
Cumulative frequency
500
400
300
200
100
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Mark
a What was the frequency of 10? b What was the frequency of 20?
c What was the frequency of 30? d What was the frequency of 40?
e What was the frequency of 50? f What was the frequency of 60?
g What was the frequency of 70? h What was the frequency of 80?
i What was the frequency of 90? j What was the frequency of 100?
k How many students completed this university exam?
l Construct a frequency table from the cumulative frequency polygon.
LEVEL 3
7 The number of words in each of the first 30 sentences of a book were recorded.
22 20 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 21 21 20 20 22 26
22 20 24 26 20 21 21 23 22 23 22 20 20 21 21
a Construct a frequency table with a cumulative frequency column.

d Construct a cumulative frequency histogram and polygon for this data.
e Use the cumulative frequency graphs to estimate the median.
f Use the cumulative frequency graphs to estimate the first and third quartile.
g Use the cumulative frequency graph to estimate the interquartile range.
8 The percentage of female births, correct to the nearest whole number, is shown below. These
birth percentages have been taken from 30 different hospitals.
38 56 57 59 58 60 43 52 49 61
47 38 41 50 51 55 45 50 49 53
54 48 51 43 55 53 42 42 44 46

b Construct a grouped frequency table using these class intervals.
c Add a cumulative frequency column.
d Construct a frequency histogram for this data.
e Construct a frequency polygon for this data.
f Construct a cumulative frequency histogram and polygon for this data.
g Use the cumulative frequency graphs to estimate the median.
h Use the cumulative frequency graphs to estimate the upper and lower quartile.
i Use the cumulative frequency graph to estimate the interquartile range.
7G Pareto charts
A Pareto chart (named after Vilfredo Pareto) combines a frequency histogram and cumulative
frequency line graph. The histogram is plotted in decreasing order of relative frequency from
left to right with the vertical scale on the left-hand side. The cumulative frequency line graph is
superimposed on the histogram, with the vertical scale on the right-hand side.
Pareto principle
A Pareto chart highlights the Pareto principle which 60 100
90
states that 20% of the invested input is responsible for 50 80 Sales
80/20 rule 70
80% of the results obtained. It is also referred to as the 40 60 Cumulative
‘Pareto rule’ or the ‘80/20’ rule. The Pareto principle is 30 50 percentage
40
applied in a wide range of areas such as manufacturing, 20 30
10 20
management and human resources. Another common 10
0
use for the Pareto principle is time management, as
USA
Europe
Africa
Canada
Pacific
Asia
India
most people tend to evenly spread their time and not
focus on the most important tasks.
A table of projected sales for a business and the corresponding Pareto chart is shown below.
Cumulative Cumulative
Region Sales frequency percentage
USA 57 57 28
Europe 52 109 54
Africa 41 150 74
Canada 24 174 86
Pacific 16 190 94
Asia 8 198 98
India 5 203 100
PARETO CHART
To create a Pareto chart follow these steps.

1 Draw the horizontal axis and place each category on the horizontal axis in order of frequency.
The category with the highest frequency is on the left-hand side.
2 Draw the frequency histogram with an appropriate vertical axis on the left-hand side.
3 Find the cumulative frequency and cumulative percentages for each category.
4 Draw a cumulative percentage line graph with the vertical axis on the right-hand side.
5 Construct a legend for both the histogram and the line graph.
278 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7G
Example 12: Applying the Pareto principle 7G
Motor vehicle thefts have been recorded for each day of the week and are shown below.
Cumulative Cumulative 30 100

90
Day Thefts frequency percentage 25 80 Thefts
20 70
Sun 26 26 26 60 Cumulative
15 50 percentage
Sat 24 50 50 10
40
30
Fri 24 74 74 5 20
10
Mon 8 82 82 0 0
Sun
Fri
Mon
Wed
Tue
Thu
Sat
Wed 7 89 89
Tue 6 95 95
Thu 5 100 100
a On which day was there the least number of motor vehicle thefts?
b What is the cumulative percentage for Saturday and Sunday?
c What is the cumulative percentage for Friday, Saturday, Sunday and Monday?
d Apply the 80 / 20 rule to determine the days on which motor thefts are a major concern.
S OLUTI O N:
1 The day (category) with the smallest a Thursday – 5 thefts
frequency is located on the right-hand side.
2 Read the cumulative percentage for Saturday b Cumulative percentage is 50.
from the table.
3 Read the cumulative percentage for Monday c Cumulative percentage is 82.
from the table.
4 Draw a horizontal line from the 80 cumulative d Sunday, Saturday and Friday.
percentage until it intersects the line graph. 30 100
Draw a vertical line from this point of 25
90
80
intersection. The most significant categories 20 80/20 rule 70
60
are located on the left-hand side. 15 50
40
10 30
5 20
10
0 0
Sun
Fri
Mon
Wed
Tue
Thu
Sat
Exercise 7G LEVEL 1
1 The orders received by a business for five months are shown below.
Month Frequency Cumulative frequency Cumulative percentage

Apr 25 25
May 9 68
Mar 8
Feb 5 47
Jan 3 100
a Copy and complete the table above.

b How many categories will be on the horizontal axis of a Pareto chart?
c What is an appropriate scale for the vertical axis on the left-hand side of a Pareto chart?
d What is an appropriate scale for the vertical axis on the right-hand side of a Pareto chart?
e Draw a Pareto chart from your frequency table.
f Determine which are the most significant months by applying the Pareto principle.
2 The results of a survey of major health issues are shown below.
Health issue Frequency Cumulative frequency Cumulative percentage

Obesity 56
Mental health 13 69
Physical activity 12 81
Smoking 7
Alcohol 4 92
Nutrition 4
Injury 3 99
Environment 1
a Copy and complete the table above.

b How many categories will be on the horizontal axis of a Pareto chart?
c What is an appropriate scale for the vertical axis on the left-hand side of a Pareto chart?
d What is an appropriate scale for the vertical axis on the right-hand side of a Pareto chart?
e Draw a Pareto chart from your frequency table.
f Determine which are the most significant health issues by applying the Pareto principle.
280 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7G
LEVEL 2
3 Create the spreadsheet and chart below.

07GQ3
a Enter the formula ‘= C5/$C$9 * 100’ into cell D5.

b Fill down the contents of D5 to D9.
c Use the Pareto principle to determine which waste products require the most attention.
LEVEL 3
4 The results of a survey showing the preferred sport of 80 students as a percentage are
shown below.
Tennis Netball Football Swimming Golf Cricket

5 10 20 45 15 8
a Construct a frequency table with columns for sport, frequency, cumulative frequency and
cumulative percentage.
b Draw a Pareto chart to represent the above data.
c Use the Pareto principle to determine which sports require the most attention.
7H Motor vehicle statistics

Since there have been motor vehicles, there have been motor vehicle accidents that result in death,
injury and damage. Governments collect, present and interpret data on road incidents to try to
reduce the problem. There are many factors that may cause a road accident, such as poor driving,
speeding, alcohol, fatigue, bad road design and lack of vehicle maintenance.
Example 13: Reading a table of motor vehicle accident statistics 7H
The table below shows the number of road accidents involving fatigue in the last four months
of the year.
Killed Injured
September 112 1488
October 197 4365
November 89 2019
December 134 3487
a How many deaths occurred in road accidents during October involving fatigue?
b Which month had the least number of injuries in road accidents involving fatigue?
c How many deaths in road accidents involving fatigue occurred in the four months?
d What is the percentage increase in number of injuries involving fatigue from November
to December?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read the value in the intersection of a 197 deaths
October and killed.
2 Lowest value in the injured column b September
is 1488.
3 Add the deaths for each month. c Deaths = 112 + 197 + 89 + 134
= 532
4 Find the increase in the number of injuries d Increase = 3487 − 2019

(subtract 2109 from 3487). = 1468
5 Express the increase in the injuries in Percentage = 1468 × 100
2019
December over the injuries for November.
= 72.709...
Multiply this fraction by 100 to find the
≈ 73%
percentage increase.
282 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7H
Exercise 7H LEVEL 1
1 The decrease in the price of a used car over four

4000
years is shown in the graph opposite.
a What is the initial value of the used car?
3000
b How much did the used car decrease in price
Value ($)
during the first year?
2000
c When is the value of the used car $2000?
d When is the value of the used car $1500? 1000
e What is the value of the used car after 4 years?
f What is the value of the used car after 1 12 years?
1 2 3 4
Years
Example 13 2 The table below shows the running costs for fuel, tyres and servicing as cents per km for four
brands of motor vehicle.
Brand A Brand B Brand C Brand D

Fuel 5.06 6.90 9.69 8.99
Tyres 1.03 1.18 0.88 1.28
Service 2.51 3.73 3.02 3.88
a What is the cost of service for the Brand D vehicle?

b Which of the cars has the best fuel economy?
c Harry has driven his Brand C vehicle 7580 kilometres this year. What is the fuel cost of his
vehicle for the year?
d Calculate the difference in service costs between Brand A and Brand B, when both cars are
driven 15000 km in a year.
e What is the difference in tyre costs between Brand D and Brand A, when they are both
driven 100 000 km?
3 The table below shows the petrol used at different speeds to cover the same distance.
Speed 50 km /h 70 km /h 90 km /h 110 km/h

Litres 34 38 43 49
a How much petrol would you save by travelling at 50 km/h instead of 70 km/h?
b How much petrol would you save by travelling at 70 km/h instead of 110 km/h?
c What is the difference in cost of travelling at 50 km/h instead of 90 km/h? Assume the petrol
costs are $1.45 per litre.
LEVEL 2
4 The table opposite shows the number of road accidents Month Accidents
involving speed that caused an injury in the first five
months of the year. Find the following summary January 2814
statistics. February 1652
a How many accidents involved speed in the
first five months? March 1786
b What percentage of these road accidents occurred April 1589
in January?
May 2182
c What fraction of these road accidents occurred
in March?
d What is the mean number of accidents per month for these five months?
e Which month had the highest number of accidents? Can you suggest a reason for this month
having the most accidents?
5 The speed (in km/h) of some motor vehicles

travelling through an intersection was
42, 36, 36, 44, 30, 34, 38, 36 and 39.
a What is the fastest speed?
b What is the slowest speed?
c What is the mean, correct to the nearest
whole number?
d What is the mode?
e Find the median.
f What is the range?
6 The frequency table below shows the number of motorbikes passing through a
checkpoint each hour for the past 24 hours.
Motorbikes (x) Frequency ( f ) Frequencyf × xScore ( fx)
11 4
12 7
13 6
14 5
a In how many hours did 13 motorbikes pass through the checkpoint?

b What was the greatest number of motorbikes passing through a checkpoint in an hour?
c How many motorbikes passed through the checkpoint?
d Find the mean of this data. Answer correct to one decimal place.
e What is the median of this data?
f What is the mode of this data?
284 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7H
LEVEL 3
7 The grouped frequency table below shows the ages of drivers involved in fatal road accidents
during the past year.
Class Class centre ( x ) Frequency ( f ) f×x

20 – 29 85
30 –39 72
40 – 49 71
50 –59 55
60 –69 36
a Copy and complete the grouped frequency table.

b How many fatal road accidents occurred in the past year?
c Find the mean of this data to the nearest whole number.
d What percentage of road accidents had a driver younger than 30? Answer correct to
two decimal places.
e What percentage of road accidents had a driver older than 49? Answer correct to two
decimal places.
8 A local community was concerned about the

number of accidents at a particular intersection.
The number of accidents at the intersection in
the past 13 days is recorded below.
0 0 6 1 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 1 0
a Find the mean, median and mode of this data.
b Which is the better measure for the centre for
the data? Explain your answer.
9 A motor vehicle is bought for $32 000. It depreciates at 16% per annum and is expected to be
used for 5 years.
a How much does the motor Year Current value Depreciation Depreciated value
vehicle depreciate in the 1
first year?
b Copy and complete the 2
following depreciation 3
table for the first five years.
4
c Graph the value in dollars
against the age in years. 5
7I Water usage 285
7I Water usage
Rainfall
Rainfall changes are occurring due to climate change as a result of the increased concentration of
carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. We are also experiencing more droughts and floods. Australia’s
annual mean rainfall has increased slightly over the last century.
Example 14: Interpreting rainfall graphs 7I
The graph shows the annual rainfall data for Newcastle (—) and Wollongong (—) over 10 years.
1500
Newcastle
1400
1300
1200
Rainfall (mm)
1100
1000
900
800
Wollongong
700
600
2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
Year
a What was annual rainfall for Newcastle in 2015?

b Which was the wettest year during this 10-year period for Wollongong?
c Which year has the largest difference in annual rainfall?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read the values at 2015 for Newcastle. a Newcastle’s rainfall in 2015 was 960 mm.
2 Read the year when Wollongong had the b Wollongong’s wettest year was 2013.
highest rainfall.
3 Find the largest gap between the two line c Largest difference occurred in 2016.
graphs. Read this year.
286 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7I
Household water usage

The amount of water that is available for local, state and national needs will vary from year to year.
In recent years governments have imposed restrictions on our water use, to help conserve supplies
in times of drought.
Example 15: Interpret data about a household’s water usage 7I
The pie chart shows the annual water usage in kilolitres for a family.
Bathroom basin
5 19 Bathroom shower
49
13 Downstairs toilet
9 Ensuite basin
6 12 Ensuite shower
Ensuite toilet
11
36 7 Garden tap
Kitchen basin
Kitchen dishwasher
Washing machine
a How many kilolitres of water were used by this family in a year?

b What percentage of the total water use is in operating the washing machine?
c A dual-flush toilet saves 60% of the water used in a conventional toilet. How many
kilolitres per year would be saved by replacing the toilets with dual-flush toilets?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read the values for each sector. a Water usage = 36 + 6 + 49 + ...
2 Add all the sector values to find = 167 kL
the total.
3 Divide the amount of water used b Washing machine = 49 × 100
167
by the washing machine by the total
≈ 29.34%
water use and multiply this fraction
by 100.
4 Evaluate.
5 Add the water use in the downstairs c Water usage = 13 + 11 = 24 kL
and ensuite toilets. Water saving = 60% of 24 kL
6 Change 60% to a decimal and multiply
= 0.60 × 24
it by the water use (24). = 14.4 kL
7 Evaluate.
8 Write the answer in words. Two dual-flush toilets save 14.4 kL
a year.
7I Water usage 287
Exercise 7I LEVEL 1
Example 14 1 The rainfall (January to June) for two years at Byron 400
Bay is shown in the graph. 350 1
a What was the rainfall in year 1 for April? 300 2
Rainfall (mm)
b Which month had the lowest rainfall for both 250
years? 200
150
c Which year had the lower rainfall for January
100
to June?
50
d In which month was there the biggest difference
0
in rainfall between year 1 and year 2? Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun
2 The table shows the capacity and available water

Capacity Available
storage (%) in seven dams.
Dam (ML) water (%)
a Which dam has the highest capacity?
b Which dam is closest to full capacity, as a Avon 146 700 80
percentage? Cataract 97190 78
c How much water is available in the Avon dam?
Cordeaux 93640 93
d How much water is available in the
Woronora dam? Nepean 67 730 82
e Calculate the total capacity for these
Prospect 33330 91
seven dams.
f What is the average capacity for these Warragamba 2 027 000 99
seven dams? Woronora 71790 87
g Construct a line graph showing the
available water by percentage.
3 The column graph below shows the percentage of households with water saving devices.
100
90
80
70
60 Water-efficient
50 shower head
40 Dual-flush toilet
30
20
10
0
ACT NSW QLD SA VIC WA
a Which state has the highest percentage of households with dual-flush toilets?
b Which state has the lowest percentage of households with water-efficient shower heads?
c Which state has the highest percentage of households with both water-saving devices?
d Which state has the lowest percentage of households with both water-saving devices?
288 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data 7I
LEVEL 2
4 The table shows Dylan’s average water use in one day.

Water usage L/day
a How much water is Dylan using each day?
b How much water would Dylan use in a year? Shower 51
c What percentage of his water usage is in taking Toilet 32
a shower?
Tap 22
d Construct a column chart for this data.
Washing machine 40
Other 5
5 The table shows the annual rainfall (mm) at Prospect for the past 10 years.
Year 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
January 76.9 69.5 83.0 109.9 45.1 83.2 22.4 34.0 68.5 140.6
a What was the wettest year in this 10-year period?

b What was the driest year in this 10-year period?
c Find the mean and median rainfall for January.
d What is the range in rainfall for January?
e Construct a line graph to illustrate the changes in rainfall over time.
f Briefly comment on any trends that can be seen from the graph.
LEVEL 3
6 The table below shows the percentage of household water used in different locations.
Location ACT NSW QLD SA VIC WA

Bathroom 20 25 20 15 26 18
Kitchen 11 10 8 10 5 8
Laundry 10 16 10 13 15 14
Toilet 19 24 12 12 20 10
Outdoors 45 25 50 50 34 50
a Construct a column chart with each location as a data series.

b Construct a pie chart for NSW with each location as a sector.
c Which state uses the highest percentage of household water in the toilet? Why?
d Which states use the highest percentage of household water outdoors? Why?
e Which location uses the smallest percentage of household water? Why?
f Which location uses the highest percentage of household water? Why?
g Outline any differences between NSW and the other states and territories.
Summary
Categorical (Category) Nominal Name does not indicate order
Ordinal Name does indicate order
Numerical (Numbers) Discrete Data can only take exact numerical values such as 0 or 1
Continuous Data that can take any numerical value such as 71.25
Random sample Members of the population have an equal chance of being selected.
Stratified sample Categories of a population are chosen such as male/female. The
members are randomly selected from each category.
Systematic sample Population is divided into a structured sample size. The members are
orderly selected from this structure, such as each 3rd person in order.
Self-selected sample Members of the population volunteer themselves.
Dot plot A number line with each data point marked by a dot.
Stem-and-leaf plot Used to present a small (less than 50 values) numerical data set.
The ‘tens’ digit of the data values becomes the ‘stem’ and is written
in numerical order down the page. The ‘units’ digits become the
‘leaves’ and are written in numerical order across the page.
Grouped frequency 1 Classes are listed in ascending order.
table 2 Tally column records the number of times the score occurred.
3 Frequency column is a count of each outcome or class.
Cumulative frequency The frequency of the score plus the frequency of all the scores less
than that score.
Frequency and 1 Frequency histogram is a column graph that uses the score as the
cumulative frequency horizontal axis and frequency as the vertical axis.
graphs 2 Cumulative frequency histogram is a column graph with the
score as the horizontal axis and cumulative frequency as the
vertical axis.
3 Frequency polygon is a line graph of a frequency table. It can be
constructed by joining the mid-points of the bars of the histogram.
4 Cumulative frequency polygon or ogive is a line graph
constructed by joining the top right-hand corner of the rectangles
in a cumulative frequency histogram.
Pareto charts A Pareto chart combines a frequency histogram and cumulative
frequency line graph.
290 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data
Review
1 Sorting people in alphabetical order and selecting every fifth person. How would you describe
this type of sample?
A Self-selected B Random C Stratified D Systematic
2 Sample designed to include four boys and four girls randomly selected from members of
a surf club. How would you describe this type of sample?
A Self-selected B Random C Stratified D Systematic
3 ‘The number of rooms in your house’. What is the classification for this data?
A Categorical B Continuous C Discrete D Text
4 The female and male smoking rates, expressed as percentage are shown below.
Female Male
9 7 7 6 5 1 7 9
8 6 5 5 6 2 1 0 2 2 2 4 4 5 6 7 7
3 0 0 1 16 6 9
What is the lowest female smoking rate?

A 5% B 15% C 17% D 19%
5 What is the frequency of 22 in this cumulative Cumulative

frequency table? Score Frequency frequency
A 5 B 8 21 5 5
C 13 D 22
22 13
6 What is the cumulative frequency of 23? 23 7
A 7 B 13 24 3 23
C 16 D 20 Total
7 What is vertical axis title on the right-hand side of a Pareto chart?

A Cumulative percentage B Cumulative frequency
C Frequency D Category
8 Jesse’s water usage in one day was 60 L shower, 45 L toilet, 30 L tap and 15 L washing
machine. What percentage of Jesse’s water usage is for the washing machine?
A 10% B 15% C 30% D 150%
Review
1 Classify the data from these situations as
numerical or categorical.
a Most popular student in the class
b Ava’s favourite beach in Australia
c The call cost on a mobile phone
d Blake’s school high jump record
e The amount of annual leave
f The hair colour of the students in your class
g The number of websites accessed today
h The digital download time for a 4 MB file
i The average age of the people living in NSW
2 The stem-and-leaf plot on the right represents the results

0 9
achieved by students in a test.
a What is the highest score? 1 12 4 9
b What is the difference between the highest and 2 135788
lowest scores? 3 0 235
c What is the median?
3 Use the dot plot to answer these questions.

5
a What is the lowest score?
4
b What is the difference between the
3
highest and lowest scores?
2
c What is the mode?
1
d What is the median?
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
4 The times (in hours) students spent completing

Cumulative
an assessment task are listed in the table.
Class Frequency frequency
b How many students completed the 4−8 5
assessment task? 9 −13 6
c How many students spent greater than
14 −18 8
13 hours?
d What percentage of students spent less 19 − 23 4
than 14 hours?
292 Chapter 7 Classifying and representing data
5 The percentage of households using single- and dual-flush toilets is shown below.
Review
100
80
60
40
20
0
2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017
Single-flush toilet Dual-flush toilet
a What percentage of households used a dual-flush toilet in 2007?

b In which year was the percentage of single-flush toilets half the percentage of dual-flush
toilets?
c What is the trend shown by this column graph?
d There were 14.2 million toilets in 2017. How many of these toilets were dual flush?
6 Alyssa recorded the following times (in minutes) running a cross-country course.
51 53 57 55 58 57 53 55 54 53 56 55 53 57 51 57 54
58 55 56 51 53 53 54 52 56 52 54 54 53 56 56 53 54
52 53 54 57 58 56 54 55 52 55 55 58 54 56 55 56 52
a Construct a frequency table using a tally column.

c How many times were below 55 minutes?
d Add a cumulative frequency column.
e What is the Alyssa’s fastest time?
f What is the mode?
g What is the difference between Alyssa’s fastest and slowest times?
h What is the median?
i Construct a frequency histogram.
j Construct a cumulative frequency histogram and a cumulative frequency polygon.
8 Linear relationships
Syllabus topic — MS-A2 Linear relationships
This topic involves the graphing and interpretation of practical linear and direct variation
relationships. Students develop fluency in the graphical approach to linear modelling and its
representativeness in common aspects of their life.
Outcomes
• Construct straight-line graphs.
• Determine and interpret the gradient and intercepts of a straight-line graph.
• Use and interpret graphs of the form y = mx + b.
• Construct and analyse a linear model to solve practical situations.
• Determine a direct variation relationship and solve problems.


Knowledge check
In the Interactive Textbook you can take a test of prior knowledge required for this
chapter, and depending on your score you may be directed to revision from the
previous years’ work.
294 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8A
8A Graphing linear functions

A linear function makes a straight line when graphed on a number plane. A linear function, for example
y = 3 x , has two variables y and x. When a number is substituted for a variable, such as x = 2, then this
variable is called the independent variable. The dependent variable depends on the number substituted
for the independent variable. That is, when x = 2 (independent) then y = 3 × 2 or 6 (dependent).
To graph a linear function, construct a table of values with the independent variable as the first
row and the dependent variable as the second row. Plot these points on the number plane with the
independent variable on the horizontal axis and the dependent variable as the vertical axis. Join the
points to make a straight line.
DRAWING A STRAIGHT-LINE GRAPH
1 Construct a table of values with the independent variable as the first row and the dependent
variable as the second row.
2 Draw a number plane with the independent variable on the horizontal axis and the dependent
variable as the vertical axis. Plot the points.
3 Join the points to make a straight line.
Example 1: Drawing a straight-line graph 8A
Draw the graph of y = 3 x .
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a table of values for x and y. x −2 −1 0 1 2
2 Let x = −2, − 1, 0, 1 and 2. Find y using the y −6 −3 0 3 6
linear function y = 3 x .
y
3 Draw a number plane with x as the horizontal 6
axis and y as the vertical axis.
4
4 Plot the points ( −2, − 6), ( −1, − 3), (0, 0), (1, 3)
2
and (2, 6).
x
−2 −1 0 1 2
−2
−4
−6
8A Graphing linear functions 295
Draw the graph of y = 2 x − 1.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a table of values for x and y.
x −2 −1 0 1 2
2 Let x = −2, − 1, 0, 1 and 2. Find y using the
linear function y = 2 x − 1.
y −5 −3 −1 1 3
y
3 Draw a number plane with x as the horizontal
3
axis and y as the vertical axis.
4 Plot the points (−2, − 5), (−1, − 3), (0, − 1), (1, 1) 2
and (2, 3). 1
5 Join the points to make a straight line. x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1
−2
−3
−4
−5
Draw the graph of y = − x − 2
S OLUTI O N:
x −2 −1 0 1 2
2 Let x = −2, − 1, 0, 1 and 2. Find y using the
linear function y = − x − 2 . y 0 −1 −2 −3 −4
y
3 Draw a number plane with x as the
horizontal axis and y as the vertical axis. 3
2
4 Plot the points (−2, 0), (−1, − 1), (0, − 2), 1
(1, − 3) and (2, − 4). x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1
−2
−3
−4
296 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8A
Exercise 8A LEVEL 1
1 Plot the following points on number plane and join them to form a straight line.
a b
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y 2 1 0 −1 −2 y −3 −1 1 3 5
c d
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y 0 1 2 3 4 y 3 2 1 0 −1
Example 1 2 Complete the following table of values for each linear function.
a y = 2x b y = −2 x
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y y
c y = x +1 d y = x −1
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y y
Example 2 e y = 2x + 3 f y = −x + 2
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y y
Example 3 3 Draw the graph of these linear functions by first drawing a table of values.
a y=x b y = 2x + 2 c y = −x + 3
d y = −x − 1 e y = 3x − 1 f y = −2 x + 3
4 a Complete the following tables of values.

i b = 3a + 4 ii q = − p + 1
a −2 −1 0 1 2 p −2 −1 0 1 2
b q
b Graph b = 3a + 4. c Graph q = − p + 1.
8A Graphing linear functions 297
LEVEL 2
5 Chocolates are sold for $12 per kg. The table below shows weight against cost.
Weight ( w) 1 2 3 4 5
Cost (c) 12 24 36 48 60
a Which is the dependent variable? b Which is the independent variable?

c Draw a graph of weight against cost. d Use the graph to find c if w is 1.5.
6 Soraya conducted a science experiment and presented the results in a table.
Mass (m) 3 6 9 12 15
Time (t ) 2.2 3.7 5.2 6.7 8.2
a Draw a graph of mass against time. b Use the graph to find t if m is 10.
7 Dallas travels 4 km in 2 hours.

a Write a linear equation in the form d = mt to describe this situation.
b Complete the table below and draw the graph of d against t.
Time (t ) 0 2 4 6 8
Distance (d )
8 Answer true or false to the following questions.

a Does the point (3, 0) lie on the line y = 3 x ?
b Does the line y = x + 7 pass through the point ( −1, 6)?
c The point (1, 4) lies on the line x + 2 y = 9.
d The line 2 x − 3 y = 0 passes through the point (0, 0).
e The point (1, − 1) lies on the line 4 x − y + 1 = 0.
f The line 3 x − 4 y + 1 = 0 passes through the point (2, 0).
LEVEL 3
9 Draw the graph of these linear functions by first drawing a table of values.
a y + 2 = 3x b x+y−4 =0 c y+ 1x =1
2
d 4x − y + 2 = 0 1x − y =1
e f 4 − y = 3x
3
298 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8B
8B Gradient and intercept

Gradient
The gradient of a line is the slope or steepness of the line. It is calculated by dividing the vertical
rise by the horizontal run. The larger the gradient, the steeper the slope. The letter m is often used to
indicate gradient.
Vertical
rise
Horizontal run
Vertical rise
Gradient (or m) =
Horizontal run
Positive gradients are lines that go up to the

right or are increasing. Conversely, negative
gradients are lines that go down to the right or
are decreasing.
+ −
Positive Negative
gradient gradient
Example 4: Finding the gradient of a line 8B
Find the gradient of a line through the points (1, 1) and (3, 4).
SOLUTI O N:
1 Draw a number plane with x as the y
horizontal axis and y as the vertical axis. (3, 4)
4
2 Plot the points (1, 1) and (3, 4).
3 Draw a line between the two points. 3
Vertical
4 Construct a right-angled triangle by rise
2
drawing a vertical and a horizontal line. (1, 1)
1
Horizontal run
5 The line is positive as it slopes towards x
0 1 2 3 4
the right.
6 Determine the vertical rise (4 − 1 = 3). Vertical rise
7 Determine the horizontal run (3 − 1 = 2). Gradient or m =
Horizontal run
8 Substitute 3 for the vertical rise and 2 for
= +3
the horizontal run into the formula. 2
8B Gradient and intercept 299
Intercept
The intercept of a line is where the line cuts the axis. The intercept on the vertical axis is called
the y-intercept and is denoted by the letter b. The intercept on the horizontal axis is called the
x-intercept and is denoted by the letter a.
GRADIENT INTERCEPT
Gradient of a line is the slope of the line. The intercept of a line is where the line cuts the
Vertical rise axis. Vertical intercept is often denoted by b.
Gradient (or m) =
Horizontal run
Example 5: Finding the gradient and vertical intercept 8B
Find the gradient and vertical intercept for the line y = −2 x + 1.
S OLUTI O N:
x −1 0 1
2 Let x = −1, 0 and 1. Find y using the linear
y 3 1 −1
function y = −2 x + 1.
y
3 Draw a number plane with x as the 3
horizontal axis and y as the vertical axis.
Vertical
4 Plot the points (−1, 3), (0, 1) and (1, − 1). 2
rise
5 Draw a line between these points. Vertical
intercept
6 Construct a right-angled triangle by 1
drawing a vertical and a horizontal line. Horizontal
run
x
−2 −1 0 1 2
7 The line is negative as it slopes to the left.
8 Determine the vertical rise (3 − 1 = 2). −1
9 Determine the horizontal run (−1 − 0 = −1).
10 Substitute 2 for the vertical rise and −1 for
Vertical rise
the horizontal run into the formula. Gradient or m =
Horizontal run
11 Evaluate.
= −2
1
= −2
12 The line cuts the vertical axis at 1. Intercept on the vertical axis is 1.
300 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8B
Exercise 8B LEVEL 1
1 Find the gradient of the following lines.
a y b y
4 2
3 1
2 x
−2 −1 0 1 2
1 −1
x −2
0 1 2 3 4
c y d y
8 16
4 12
x 8
−2 −1 0 1 2
−4 4
−8 x
0 1 2 3 4
Example 4 2 What is the gradient of the line that joins these points?
a (0, 1) and (2, 5)
b (1, 3) and (2, − 2)
c (2, − 1) and (4, − 2)
3 What is the intercept on the vertical axis for the following lines?
y y
a b
4 4
3
2
2
1 x
−4 −2 0 2 4
x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 −2
−1
−4
8B Gradient and intercept 301
LEVEL 2
4 Plot the following points on a number plane and join them to form a straight line. Determine
the gradient and y-intercept for each line.
a b
x 0 1 2 3 4 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y 2 4 6 8 10 y 3 1 −1 −3 −5
c d
x 0 2 4 6 8 x 0 3 6 9 12
y −1 1 3 5 7 y 0 1 2 3 4
Example 5 5 Draw a graph of these linear functions and find the gradient and y-intercept.
a y = x+3 b y = −x + 1 c y = 1 x +1
2
d y = −2x−3 e y + 3 = 4x f 2x − y = 0
3
6 The distance (d ) a train travels in kilometres

is calculated using the formula d = 150t
where (t ) is the time taken in hours.
a Construct a table of values using 0, 1, 2, 3
and 4 as values for t. Calculate the
distance (d ).
b Draw the graph of the distance (d ) against
the time (t ).
c What is the gradient of the graph?
d What is the intercept on the vertical axis?
LEVEL 3
7 Meat is sold for $16 per kilogram.

a Construct a table of values using 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 as values for the number of kilograms (n).
Calculate the cost (c) of the meat.
b Draw the graph of the cost (c) against the number of kilograms (n).
c What is the gradient of the graph?
d What is the intercept on the vertical axis?
302 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8C
8C Gradient–intercept formula
When the equation of a straight line is written in the form y = mx + b it is called the gradient–intercept
formula. The gradient is m, the coefficient of x, and the y-intercept is b, the constant term. The
independent variable in the formula is x and the dependent variable in the formula is y.
The gradient–intercept formula is useful in modelling relationships in many practical situations.

However, the variables are often changed to reflect the situation. For example, the formula
c = 25n + 100 has c as the cost of the event ($) and n as the number of guests. These letters are the
dependent and independent variables.
GRADIENT–INTERCEPT FORMULA
Linear equation − y = mx + b
m – Slope or gradient of the line (vertical rise over the horizontal run)
b – y-intercept where the line cuts the y-axis or vertical axis
Example 6: Finding the gradient and y-intercept from the equation 8C
Write down the gradient and y-intercept for each of the following equations.
a y = −2 + 5 x b y =8−x c y = 6x d y − 3x = 4
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the equation and rearrange to a y = −2 + 5 x
gradient–intercept form. y = 5x − 2
2 Gradient is the coefficient of x. Gradient is 5
3 y-intercept is the constant term. y-intercept is −2
4 Write the equation in gradient–intercept b y = 8− x
form. y = −1x + 8
5 Gradient is the coefficient of x. Gradient is −1
6 y-intercept is the constant term. y-intercept is 8
7 Write the equation in gradient–intercept c y = 6x
form. y = 6x + 0
10 Write the equation in gradient–intercept d y − 3x = 4
form. y = 3x + 4
Sketching a linear function using the gradient–intercept formula

Sketching a straight-line graph requires at least two points. When an equation is written in gradient–
intercept form, one point on the graph is immediately available: the y-intercept. A second point can
be quickly calculated by using the gradient or by substituting a suitable value of x into the equation.
Example 7: Sketching a straight-line graph from its equation 8C
Draw the graph of y = 3 x + 1.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the equation in gradient–intercept form. y = 3x + 1
2 Gradient is the coefficient of x or 3. Gradient is 3
3 y-intercept is the constant term or 1. y-intercept is 1
4 Mark the y-intercept on the y-axis at (0, 1). y
5 Gradient of 3 (or 13 ) indicates a vertical rise (1, 4)
of 3 and a horizontal run of 1. 4
6 Start at the y-intercept (0, 1) and draw a 3
horizontal line, 1 unit in length. Then draw a Rise = 3
2
vertical line, 3 units in length.
7 The resulting point (1, 4) is a point on the (0, 1) 1
Run = 1
required line. x
−2 −1 0 1 2
8 Join the points (0, 1) and (1, 4) to make the
−1
straight line.
Example 8: Sketching a straight-line graph from its equation 8C
Draw the graph of y = −2 x + 1.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the equation in gradient–intercept form. y = −2 x + 1
2 Gradient is the coefficient of x or −2. Gradient is −2
3 y-intercept is the constant term or 1. y-intercept is 1
4 Mark the y-intercept on the y-axis at (0, 1). y
5 Gradient of −2 (or − 12 ) indicates a vertical rise of 2
and a horizontal run of 1 to the left. 3
6 Start at the y-intercept (0, 1) and draw a horizontal Rise = 2 2
line, 1 unit in length. Then draw a vertical line, 2 1
Run = 1
units in length. x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3
7 The resulting point ( −1, 3) is a point on the −1
required line. −2
8 Join the points (0, 1) and ( −1, 3) to make the −3
straight line.
304 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8C
Exercise 8C LEVEL 1
Example 6 1 State the gradient and y-intercept for each of the following equations.
a y = 4x + 2
b y = 3x − 7
c y = 5 x + 0.4
d y = 1.5 x − 2
e y = 1x+3
2
f y = 5 − 3x
g y=x
h y = 2 + 5x
2 Write the equation of a line that has the following gradient and y-intercept.
a Gradient = 3 and y-intercept = 2 b Gradient = −2 and y-intercept = 10
c Gradient = −4 and y-intercept = −1 d Gradient = 0.5 and y-intercept = 1
3 Find the equation of the following line graphs.

a y b y
3 2
2 1
1 x
−2 −1 0 1 2
x −1
−2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1 −2
c y d y
1 12
x 8
−2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1 4
−2 x
1 2 3 4
−3
Example 7 4 A straight line has the equation y = 2 x + 3.

a What are the gradient and the y-intercept?
b Sketch the straight line on a number plane using the gradient and y-intercept.
LEVEL 2
5 It is known that y varies directly with x. When x = 4, y = 12.

a Write a linear equation in the form y = mx to describe this situation.
b Draw the graph of y against x.
6 Kalina’s pay ( p) is directly proportional to the

number of hours (h) she works. For an 8-hour day
she receives $168.
a Write a linear equation in the form p = mh to
describe this situation.
b Draw the graph of p against h.
7 A bike is travelling at constant speed. It travels 350 km in 7 hours.

a Write a linear equation in the form d = mt to describe this situation.
b Draw the graph of d against t.
Example 8 8 Sketch the graphs of the following equations on the same number plane.
a y = 2x b y = 2x + 1
c y = 2x + 2 d y = −x
e y = −x − 1 f y = −x − 2
g What do you notice about these graphs?
9 Sketch the graphs of the following equations on the same number plane.
a y = x +1 b y = 3x + 1
c y = 1 x +1 d y = −x − 2
2
e y = −2 x − 2 f y = −3 x − 2
g What do you notice about these graphs?
LEVEL 3
10 Sketch the graphs of the following equations using the gradient–intercept formula.
a y = 2x+2 b y = 0.25 x − 3 c y = 2− 1x
3 3
d y = −0.5 x − 3 e y+x = 5 f 4x + y = 8
g 2x + y + 6 = 0 h x + 4y = 0 i 3 x − y = −3
306 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8D
8D Linear models
Linear modelling occurs when a practical situation is described mathematically using a linear
function. For example, the gradient–intercept form of a straight-line graph can sometimes be used
to model catering costs. A catering company charges a base amount of $100 plus a rate of $25 per
guest. Using this information, we can write down a linear equation to model the cost of the event.
Let c be the cost of the event ($) and n be the number of guests. We can then write c = 25n + 100.
Note: The number of guests (n) must be greater than zero and a whole number.
c Catering cost
The graph of this linear model has been drawn
1500
opposite. There are two important features of this
1000
linear model:
500
1. Gradient is the rate per guest or $25. n
2. The c-intercept is the base amount or $100. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Example 9: Using graphs to make currency conversions 8D
The graph below is used to convert

Australian dollars to euros. Use the graph to
convert:
a 50 Australian dollars to euros.
b 15 euros to Australian dollars.
Australian dollars
EUR to euros
30
25
20
15
10
5
AUD
10 20 30 40 50
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read from the graph (when AUD = 50, EUR = 30). a 30 euros
2 Read from the graph (when EUR = 15, AUD = 25). b 25 Australian dollars
8D Linear models 307
Example 10: Interpreting linear models 8D
Water is pumped into a partially full tank. The graph gives the V Volume of water
volume of water V (in litres) after t minutes.
1600
a How much water is in the tank at the start?
1400
b How much water is in the tank after 10 minutes? 1200
c The tank holds 1600 L. How long does it take to fill? 1000
d Find the equation of the straight line in terms of V and t. 800
e Use the equation to calculate the volume of water in the tank 600
after 7 minutes. 400
f How many litres are pumped into the tank each minute? 200
t
S OLUTI O N: 2 4 6 8 10 12
1 Read from the graph (when t = 0, V = 300). a 400 L

2 Read from the graph (when t = 10, V = 1400). b 1400 L
3 Read from the graph (when V = 1600, t = 12). c 12 minutes
4 Find the gradient by choosing two suitable
d m = Rise
points such as (0,400) and (12,1600). Run
5 Calculate the gradient (m) between these = 1600 − 400
points using the gradient formula. 12 − 0
= 100
6 Determine the vertical intercept (400). b = 400
7 Substitute the gradient and y-intercept into y = mx + b
the gradient–intercept form y = mx + b .
8 Use the appropriate variables V = 100t + 400
(V for y, t for x). e V = 100t + 400
9 Substitute t = 7 into the equation. = 100 × 7 + 400
10 Evaluate. = 1100 L
11 Check the answer using the graph.
12 The rate at which water is pumped into the f 100 L/min
tank is the gradient of the graph (m = 100).
Exercise 8D LEVEL 1
Example 10 1 Water is pumped into a partially full tank. The graph gives the volume of water V (in litres)
after t minutes.
a How much water is in the tank at the start?
V Volume of water
b How much water is in the tank after 5 minutes?
c How much water is in the tank after 8 minutes? 3000
d The tank holds 2500 L. How long does it take to fill? 2500
e Use the graph to calculate the volume of water in the tank 2000
after 7 minutes. 1500
1000
500
t
2 4 6 8 10
Example 9 2 The conversion graph opposite is used to convert

Australian dollars to Chinese yuan. Use the graph to
convert: Australian dollars
CNY to Chinese yuan
a 80 Australian dollars to yuan
b 50 Australian dollars to yuan 500
c 100 yuan to Australian dollars 400
d 350 yuan to Australian dollars
300
e What is the gradient of the conversion graph?
200
100
AUD
20 40 60 80 100
3 Mailing costs are charged according to the weight of the
parcel. Use the step graph to determine the postal charges
for the following parcels.
Postal charges
a 50 g
4
b 900 g
3
Cost ($)
c 200 g
2
d 800 g
1
200 400 600 800 1000

Weight (g)
8D Linear models 309
LEVEL 2
4 A new piece of equipment is purchased by a business for $120 000. Its value is depreciated
each month using the graph opposite.
a What was the value of the equipment after 32 v Value of equipment
months?
b What was the value of the equipment after one year? 120
c When does the line predict the equipment will have 100
$ (× 1000)
no value? 80
d Find the equation of the straight line in terms of v and t. 60
e Use the equation to calculate the value of the
40
equipment after 2 months.
f By how much does the equipment depreciate in value 20
each month? t
8 16 24 32 40 48
Months
5 The amount of money transacted through
Amount of transactions
ATMs has increased with the number of ATMs through ATMs
A
available. The graph shows this increase.
a What was the amount of money transacted 125
through ATMs when there were 500 000
Amount (billions of $)
machines? 100
b How many ATM machines resulted in
75
transactions of $75 billion?
c Find the equation of the line in terms of
50
amount of money transacted, A, and the
number of ATMs, N. 25
d Use the equation to calculate the amount of
money transacted when there were 350 000 N
machines. 100 200 300 400 500
e Use the equation to predict how much money Number of machines (× 1000 )
will be transacted through ATM machines
when there are 1000 000 machines.
6 A phone company charges a monthly service fee, plus the cost Total monthly
of calls. The graph gives the total monthly charge, C dollars, for C charge
making n calls. This includes the service fee. 70
a How much is the monthly service fee? 60
b How much does the company charge if you make 20 calls a 50
month? 40
c How many calls are made if the total monthly charge is $30? 30
d Find the equation of the line in terms of total monthly charge 20
(C ) and the number of calls (n). 10
n
20 40 60 80 100
LEVEL 3
7 A company charges the following parking fees:

$10 for up to 3 hours, $15 for 3–6 hours and $20 over 6 hours.
a Draw a step graph to illustrate
the parking fees, with the Time
(h) on the horizontal axis and
Cost ($) on the vertical axis.
b What is the cost to park for
4 hours? Use the step graph.
c Liam arrived in the parking
area at 10 : 30 a.m. and left at
1 : 00 p.m. How much did he
pay for parking?
d Ruby arrived in the parking
area at 5 : 15 p.m. and left at
11 : 15 p.m. How much did
she pay for parking?
8 Tomas converted 100 Australian dollars to 40 British pounds.

a Draw a conversion graph with Australian dollars on the horizontal axis and British pounds
on the vertical axis.
b How many British pounds is 40 Australian dollars? Use the conversion graph.
c How many Australian dollars is 10 British pounds? Use the conversion graph.
d Find the gradient and vertical intercept for the conversion graph.
e Write an equation that relates Australian dollars (AUD) to British pounds (GBP).
8E Direct variation
Direct variation (or direct proportion) occurs when one variable depends directly on another
variable. One quantity increases or decreases at the same rate as another quantity increases or
decreases. For example, a person’s wage depends directly on the number of hours worked. The
more hours worked the greater the wage.
Direct variation problems involve a constant of variation ( k ). It is the rate at which the quantities
vary. For example, the hourly rate of pay is the constant of variation when determining a person’s
wage. To solve a direct variation problem, write an equation relating the two variables and use the
information given to calculate the value of k.
SOLVING A DIRECT VARIATION PROBLEM
1 Write an equation relating the two variables. (k is the constant of variation.)

If y is directly proportional to x the equation is y = kx.
2 Solve the equation for k by substituting values for x and y.
3 Write the equation with the solution for k (step 2) and solve the problem by substituting a value
for either x or y.
Example 11: Solving a direct variation problem 8E
The cost of a photocopier (C, in dollars) varies directly with its speed (s, in pages per minute).
A photocopier with a speed of 50 pages per minute costs $700.
a What is the constant of variation ( k )?
b Write an equation connecting C and s.
c How much does a photocopier with a speed of 60 pages per minute cost?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Cost is directly proportional to the speed. a C = ks
2 Use the formula y = kx by replacing the y
with C and the x with s.
3 Substitute 700 for C and 50 for s into the 700 = k × 50
formula. k = 700
50
4 Evaluate. = 14
5 Replace the k with 14 in the formula. b C = 14 s
6 Write the formula using the value for the c C = 14 s
proportionality constant ( k = 14). = 14 × 60
7 Substitute 60 for s into the formula.
8 Evaluate. = $840
9 Write the answer in words. Photocopier costs $840.
312 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8E
Example 12: Using linear models 8E
The graph below is used to convert Australian dollars to New Zealand dollars. Use the graph
to convert:
a 40 Australian dollars to New Zealand dollars.
b 25 NZD to AUD.
Australian dollars
to New Zealand dollars
NZD
60
50
40
30
20
10
AUD
10 20 30 40 50
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read from the graph (when AUD = 40, NZD = 50). a 50 NZD
2 Read from the graph (when NZD = 25, AUD = 20). b 20 AUD
Example 13: Graphing a linear function from a table of values 8E
The table below shows the cost of postage (c) as a function of the weight of the parcel ( w).
Weight ( w) kg 1 2 3 4 5
Cost (c) $ 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6.0
a Draw a graph of cost (c) against the weight of the parcel ( w).
b Use the graph to determine the cost of a parcel if the weight is 2.5 kg
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw a number plane with the weight of parcel ( w) as a c Cost of postage
the horizontal axis and the cost of postage (c) as the 6

Cost of postage in $
vertical axis. 5
2 Plot the points (1, 1.2) (2, 2.4) (3, 3.6) (4, 4.8) and (5, 6.0). 4
3 Join the points to make a straight line. 3

2
4 Find 2.5 kg on the horizontal axis and draw a vertical
1
line. Where this line intersects the graph draw a
w
horizontal line to the vertical axis. 1 2 3 4 5
Weight of parcel in kg
5 Write the answer in words. b 2.5 kg would cost $3.
Exercise 8E LEVEL 1
Example 11 1 y varies directly with x and y = 24 when x = 8.

a Write an equation connecting y and x, using k as the constant of variation.
b Calculate the constant of variation.
c What is y when x is 4?
d What is x when y is 15?
2 y varies directly with x and y = 20 when x = 10.

3 It is known that y varies directly with x. When x = 12 then y = 3.

4 It is known that a varies directly with b. If a = 84 then b = 56.

a Write a linear equation connecting a and b, using k as the constant of variation.
c Find the value of a when the value of b is 22.
d Find the value of b when the value of a is 36.
5 Oscar’s pay ( p) is directly proportional to the number of hours (h) he works. For a 9-hour day
he receives $193.50.
a Write a linear equation to describe this situation.
c What is Oscar’s pay if he works for 11 hours?
d What is Oscar’s pay if he works for 6.5 hours?
e How many hours does Oscar have to work to earn $365.50?
f How many hours does Oscar have to work to earn $752.50?
314 Chapter 8 Linear relationships 8E
LEVEL 2
Example 13 6 The cost (c) of apples is $2.50 per kilogram and is determined by the formula c = 2.5w where
( w) is the weight of the apples.
a Construct a table of values for the weight against cost. Use 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 for w.
b Draw the graph of the cost (c) against the weight ( w).
c How many kilograms of apples can be purchased for $15?
7 The relationship for the age of a computer ( t in years) to its current value ( v in $100) is
v = −5t + 30.
a Construct a table of values for the age against current value (t = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4).
b Draw the graph of the age (t ) against current value ( v ).
c What is the initial cost of the computer?
d What will be the value of the computer after two years?
e When will the computer be half its initial cost?
LEVEL 3
8 The cost of hiring a taxi is $3 flag fall and $2 per kilometre travelled.
a Construct a table of values for kilometres travelled (d ) and cost of a taxi (C ).
Use 0, 10, 20, 30 and 40 as values for d.
b Draw the graph of kilometres travelled (d ) against cost of taxi (C ).
9 Emily was born on Jack’s tenth birthday.

a Construct a table of values using of 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 as values for Emily’s age ( E ) and
calculating Jack’s age ( J ).
b Draw the graph of Emily’s age ( E ) against Jack’s age ( J ).
Example 12 10 One Australian dollar (AUD) was converted for 1.20 New Zealand dollars (NZD).
a Construct a table of values using of 0, 10, 20, 30 and 40 as values for AUD and calculate the
NZD using the above conversion.
b Draw the graph of the AUD against NZD.
Summary
Graphing linear functions 1 Construct a table of values with the independent variable as
the first row and the dependent variable as the second row.
2 Draw a number plane with the independent variable on
the horizontal axis and the dependent variable on the
vertical axis. Plot the points.
Gradient and intercept Gradient of a line is the slope of the line.

Gradient (or m) = Vertical rise
Horizontal run
The intercept of a line is where the line cuts the axis.
Gradient–intercept formula Linear equation in the form y = mx + b.

m – Slope or gradient of the line.
b – y-intercept.
Sketching a straight-line graph requires at least two points. When
an equation is written in gradient–intercept form, one point on the
graph is immediately available: the y-intercept. A second point
can be calculated using the gradient.
Linear models Linear modelling occurs when a practical situation is described

mathematically using a linear function.
Direct variation 1 Write an equation relating the two variables, using k is the
constant of variation.
When y is directly proportional to x the equation is y = kx.
2 Solve the equation for k by substituting values for x and y.
3 Write the equation with the solution for k (step 2) and solve
the problem by substituting a value for either x or y.
316
Review Chapter 8 Linear relationships
y
1 What is the gradient of this line?
A 2 B 3 5
3 4 4
C 4 D 8 3
3 5
2
2 What is the y-intercept of this line? 1
x
A −2 B −1 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3
C 1 D 2
−2
−3
3 A straight line has the equation of y = −3 x + 1.
−4
What is the y-intercept? −5
A −3 B −1
C +1 D 3
4 What is the constant of variation if a varies directly with b and when a = 32 then b = 16?
A −2 B −0.5
C 0.5 D 2
5 The relationship of the age of a fax machine ( t in years) to its current value ( v ) is
v = −40t + 150. What is the value of the fax machine after two years?
A 70 B 108
C 150 D 230
6 What is the equation of the line shown in the graph? Monthly

c charge
A c=n B c = n + 30
C c = 30 n D c = 8n + 240 240
180
7 Using the graph in the previous question, what is the charge
120
for 12 months?
60
A 24 B 36
C 240 D 360 n
2 4 6 8
8 The cost (C ) of a mobile phone plan for a certain number of months (t) is given by
C = 50t + 10 . What is the cost of the phone plan for 10 months?
A $50 B $60
C $510 D $600
Review
1 Complete the following table of values for each linear function.
a y = x+3 b y = −2 x − 1
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x −2 −1 0 1 2
y y
2 Draw the graphs for the two linear functions in question 1.
3 What is the gradient of the line that joins these points?

a (1, 5) and (3, 7) b ( −2, 1) and (0, 4) c (−3, − 1) and (2, − 11)
4 Find the equation of the following line graphs.
a y b y
2 4
1 2
x x
−2 −1 0 1 2 −4 −2 0 2 4
−1 −2
−2 −4
5 Draw a graph of these linear functions and find the gradient and y-intercept.
a y = x +1 b y = −2 x + 5 c y = 3x − 2
6 The circumference of a circle (C ) varies directly the diameter of the circle (d ) using the
formula C = π d .
a What is the constant of variation?
b What is the diameter (to nearest centimetre) if the circumference of a circle is 6 cm?
7 An internet access plan charges an excess fee of $8 per GB.
Data (d ) GB 1 2 3 4 5 6
Cost (c) $ 8 16 24 32 40 48
a Which is the dependent variable?

b Which is the independent variable
c Draw a graph of data against cost.
d Use the graph to find d if c is 20.
318
Review Chapter 8 Linear relationships
8 One Australian dollar (AUD) was converted to 0.90 Japanese yen (JPY).
a Construct a table of values using of 0, 10, 20, 30 and 40 as values for AUD and calculate
the JPY using the above conversion.
b Draw the graph of the AUD against JPY.
9 A motor vehicle is purchased by a business for $30 000. Its value is then depreciated each
month using the graph shown.
a What was the value of the motor vehicle after 24 months? v Motor vehicle
b What was the value of the motor vehicle after one year?
c Find the equation of the straight-line in terms of v and t. 30
Dollars ($1000)
d Use the equation to determine the value of the motor vehicle 24
after 6 months. 18
e When does the line indicate that the motor vehicle will 12
have no value? 6
f By how much does the motor vehicle depreciate in value t
each month? 12 24 36 48
Time (months)
10 The table below shows the speed v (in km/s) of a rocket at time t seconds.
Time (t ) 1 2 3 4 5
Speed ( v ) 2 3 4.5 6 7.5
a Find a line of best fit for the speed ( v ), against the time (t ).
b Use the line to determine the rocket’s speed when t = 6 seconds.
c Extend the straight line to predict the time when the rocket’s speed is 12 km/s.
9 Interest and
depreciation
Syllabus topic — F1.1 Interest and depreciation
This topic will develop your skills in calculating and graphing simple interest. It presents a
variety of applications involving simple interest, including straight-line depreciation.
Outcomes
• Calculate simple interest for different rates and periods.
• Apply percentage increase or decrease in various contexts.
• Calculate GST in absolute and percentage terms.
• Compare simple interest graphs for different rates and periods.
• Calculate the depreciation of an asset using straight-line method.
• Calculate and graph compound interest as a repeated application of simple interest.


Knowledge check
320 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9A
9A Simple interest
Interest is paid for borrowing money. There are different ways of calculating interest. Flat-rate loans
use simple interest. Simple interest (or flat interest) is a fixed percentage of the amount borrowed and
is calculated on the original amount. For example, if you borrow $10 000 from a bank at a simple
interest rate of 6% per annum (per year) you would be required to pay $600 each year. That is,
Interest = $10 000 × 0.06 or 6 = $600

100 ( )
Flat-rate loans are calculated on the initial amount borrowed or the principal. The amount owed on
the loan is calculated by adding the interest to the principal.
SIMPLE INTEREST
I = Prn A= P+I
I – Interest (simple or flat) to be paid for borrowing the money
P – Principal is the initial amount of money borrowed
r – Rate of simple interest per period, expressed as a decimal
n – Number of time periods
A – Amount owed or total to be paid
Example 1: Calculating simple interest 9A
Abbey applied for a flat-rate loan of $40 000 at 9% per annum simple interest. She plans to repay
the loan after two years and six months.
a How much interest will be paid?
b What is the total owing at the end of two years and six months?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the simple interest formula. a I = Prn
2 Substitute P = 40 000, r = 0.09 and n = 2.5 = 40 000 × 0.09 × 2.5
into the formula.
3 Evaluate. = $9000
4 Write the answer in words. Simple interest owed is $9000.
5 Write the amount owed formula. b A= P+I
6 Substitute P = 40 000 and I = 9000 into the = 40 000 + 9000
formula.
7 Evaluate. = 49 000
8 Write the answer in words. Amount owed is $49 000.
9A Simple interest 321
Example 2: Calculating the simple interest paid to a bank account 9A
The table opposite shows the entries Date Transaction Debit Credit Total
in Shane’s bank account. If the bank
30 Mar Pay 500.00 500.00
pays interest at a rate of 3% per
4 May Cash 60.00 440.00
annum on the minimum monthly
balance, find the interest payable 16 May Cash 100.00 540.00
for the month of May correct to the 1 Jun 540.00
nearest cent.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Determine the minimum monthly balance The minimum balance in the
for May. account for May was $440.00
3 Substitute P = $440.00, r = 0.03, and = $440 × 0.03 × 1
12
n = 1 (1month ) into the formula.
12
4 Evaluate. = $1.10
5 Write answer in words. Interest payable is $1.10
Example 3: Finding the principal for a simple interest loan 9A
Noah applied for a simple interest car loan with an interest rate of
9% p.a. He was told the total simple interest would be $6300 for
3 1 years. What was the principal?
2
S OLUTI O N:
2 Substitute I = 6300, r = 0.09 and 6300 = P × 0.09 × 3.5
n = 3.5 into the formula.
3 Make P the subject of the formula by P= 6300
(0.09 × 3.5)
dividing both sides by (0.09 × 3.5).
4 Evaluate. = $20 000
5 Write the answer in words. Principal is $20 000.
Loan repayments
A loan repayment is the amount of money to be paid at regular intervals over the time period. The
interval is often fortnightly or monthly.
LOAN REPAYMENTS
Loan repayment = Total to be paid ÷ Number of repayments
Example 4: Calculating a loan repayment on a simple interest loan 9A
Jessica wishes to buy a lounge suite priced at

$2750. She chooses to buy it on terms by paying
a 10% deposit and borrowing the balance. Interest
is charged at 11.5% p.a. on the amount borrowed.
Jessica makes fortnightly repayments over 3 years.
Calculate her fortnightly repayments.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Calculate the deposit by multiplying Deposit = 10% of $2750
10% or 0.10 by $2750. = 0.10 × 2750
2 Calculate the balance by subtracting = $275
the deposit ( $275) from the cost Balance = 2750 − 275
price ( $2750 ). = $2475
4 Substitute P = 2475, r = 0.115 and = 2475 × 0.115 × 3
n = 3 into the formula.
5 Evaluate. = $853.875
6 Write the loan repayment formula. Total to be paid
Repayment =
7 Calculate the total to be paid by Number of repayments
adding the balance ( $2475) and the Principal + Interest
interest ( $853.875). =
Number of repayments
8 Calculate the number of repayments (2475 + 853.875)
by multiplying the fortnights in a =
(3 × 26)
year (26) by the number of years (3).
9 Evaluate correct to two decimal = 42.67788462
places. ≈ 42.68
10 Write the answer in words. Fortnightly repayments are $42.68.
Exercise 9A LEVEL 1
Example 1a 1 Calculate the amount of simple interest for each of the following loans.
a Principal = $25000, interest rate = 11% p.a., time period = 4 years
b Principal = $400 000, interest rate = 8 1 % p.a., time period = 5 years
4
c Principal = $560 000, interest rate = 6.75%p.a. , time period = 15 years
d Principal = $7400, interest rate = 7% p.a., time period = 18 months
e Principal = $80 000, interest rate = 9.25% p.a., time period = 30 months
Example 1b 2 Calculate the amount owed for each of the following loans.
a Principal = $800, simple interest rate = 6% p.a. , time period = 3 years
b Principal = $5200, simple interest rate = 16% p.a. , time period = 7 1 years
2
c Principal = $12500, simple interest rate = 11.4% p.a. , time period = 4.5 years
d Principal = $6000, simple interest rate = 4 1 % p.a. , time period = 6 months
2
e Principal = $40 000, simple interest rate = 7.75% p.a. , time period = 42 months
3 A sum of $170 000 was borrowed for 3 years.

a Find the simple interest owed if the rate of interest is 6.5% per annum.
b What is the amount owed at the end of 3 years?
4 Hayley intends to borrow $2700 to build a

driveway for her new house. She is offered a
flat-rate loan with a simple interest rate of
14.5% per annum. How much interest will be
owed after 3 months? Answer correct to the
nearest cent.
Example 2 5 The table shows the entries

Date Transaction Debit Credit Total
in Julia’s bank account. If the bank
pays interest at a rate of 4% per 28 Feb Pay 500.00 800.00
annum on the minimum monthly 3 Mar Cash 150.00 650.00
balance, find the interest payable for
the month of March correct to the 18 Mar Cash 150.00 500.00
nearest cent. 1 Apr 500.00
LEVEL 2
9AQ6
a Cell D5 has a formula that calculates the simple interest. Enter this formula.
b Fill down the contents of D6 to D8 using the formula for D5.
c Cell E5 has a formula that calculates the amount owed. Enter this formula.
d Fill down the contents of E6 to E8 using the formula for E5.
e Change the interest rate from 8% to 10%.
f Change the time period from 20 years to 15 years.
7 Kim buys a television for $1800. He pays it off monthly over 2 years at a flat interest rate of
12.5% per annum.
a How many months will it take Kim to pay for the television?
b What is the interest charged for the 2 years?
c How much per month will he pay? Give your answer to the nearest cent.
8 Mitchell approached a bank for a business

loan of $22 000. The interest rate is
10.5% p.a. flat. He decides to repay the loan
over a period of 4 years.
a What is the principal?
b What is the rate of interest?
c What will be the amount of interest
charged over that period?
d What will be the monthly repayment? Give
the answer correct to the nearest cent.
Example 4 9 Jordan decides to buy a car for $23000.
He has saved $9000 for the deposit and takes out a simple interest loan over 2 years for the
balance. The interest charged is 13% per annum.
a What is the balance?
b What is the total amount of interest to be paid?
c What will be his monthly repayment? Answer correct to the nearest cent.
LEVEL 3
10 Mia borrowed $400 000 at a flat rate of interest of 8.5% per annum. This rate was fixed for
2 years on the principal. She pays back the interest only over this period.
a How much interest is to be paid over the 2 years?
b After paying the fixed rate of interest for the first year, Mia finds the bank will decrease the
flat interest rate to 7.5% if she pays a charge of $2000. How much will she save by changing
to the lower interest rate for the last year?
11 Cooper plans to borrow money to

Fortnightly repayments
purchase a car and considers the Amount borrowed
fortnightly repayment guide shown in the 1 year 2 years 3 years
table. He decides to borrow $19 000 and $18 000 $755 $427 $305
pay back the loan in fortnightly
instalments over 2 years. What is the flat $18500 $783 $429 $307
rate of interest per annum on this loan, $19 000 $804 $431 $309
correct to two decimal places?
12 A truck is advertised at $36 000. It can be bought on terms for a 20% deposit and repayments of
$276 per week for 3 years. Assume there are 52 weeks in the year.
a What is the deposit?
b Calculate the total cost of the truck if bought on these terms.
c What is the total interest paid?
d What is the flat interest rate for the loan, correct to one decimal place?
13 A painting was purchased on terms with a 20%

deposit and the balance to be paid at $370 per
month for 2 years. Determine the flat rate of
interest charged on the painting given that it
has a cash price of $7500.
14 Grace takes a loan of $30 000 over 60 months

for a swimming pool. The repayment rate is
$677.50 per month.
a How much will Grace pay back altogether?
b What is the flat interest rate per annum for
the loan, correct to one decimal place?
c Grace would like to increase the loan to $40 000 to landscape the pool. What would be her
monthly repayment, assuming the same time period and flat interest rate? Answer correct to
the nearest cent.
326 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9B
9B Simple interest graphs

When graphing simple interest, make the horizontal axis the time period and the vertical axis the
interest earned. Simple interest will increase by a constant amount each time period. This will result
in a straight-line graph.
SIMPLE INTEREST GRAPHS
1 Construct a table of values for I and n using the simple interest formula.
2 Draw a number plane with n the horizontal axis and I the vertical axis. Plot the points.
Example 5: Constructing a simple interest graph 9B
Draw a graph showing the amount of simple interest earned over a period of 4 years if $1000 is
invested at 6% p.a. Use the graph to estimate the interest earned after 8 years.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the simple interest I = Prn
formula. = 1000 × 0.06 × n
2 Substitute P = 1000, r = 0.06 = 60 n
and n into the formula.
3 Draw a table of values for n 0 1 2 3 4
I and n. I 0 60 120 180 240
4 Let n = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4. Find
the interest ( I ) using I = 60 n.
5 Draw a number plane with n Simple interest on
as the horizontal axis and I I $1000 at 6% p.a.
as the vertical axis.
500
6 Plot the points (0, 0), (1, 60),
400
(2, 120), (3, 180) and (4, 240). 300
7 Extend the line to estimate 200
the value of I when n = 8. 100
8 Read the graph to estimate I. n
(I = 480 when n = 8). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 Write the answer in words. Interest after 8 years is approximately $480.
9B Simple interest graphs 327
Exercise 9B LEVEL 1
Example 5 1 Luke invested $1000 at 2% per annum simple interest for 3 years.
a Simplify the simple interest formula ( I = Prn) by substituting values for the principal and
the interest rate.
b Use this formula to complete the following table of values.
n 0 1 2 3 4
I
c Draw a number plane with n as the horizontal axis and I as the vertical axis.
d Plot the points from the table of values. Join the points to make a straight line.
2 Nicholas invested $1000 at 7% per annum simple interest for 4 years.

the interest rate.
n 0 1 2 3 4
I
e Use the graph to find the interest after 2 1 years.
2
f Extend the graph to find the interest after 6 years.
g Find the time when the interest is $210.
3 Melissa invested $600 at 5% per annum simple interest for 5 years.

the interest rate.
n 0 1 2 3 4 5
I
e Use the graph to find the interest after 3 1 years.
2
f Extend the graph to find the interest after 6 years.
g Find the time when the interest is $360.
328 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9B
LEVEL 2
4 Draw a graph showing the amount of simple interest earned over a period of 4 years if $1000 is
invested at 4% p.a. Use the graph to estimate the interest earned after 6 years.
5 Chloe is comparing three different interest rates for a possible investment.

a Draw a graph to represent the interest earned over 5 years on:
i $5000 invested at 5% per annum simple interest
ii $5000 invested at 7% per annum simple interest
iii $5000 invested at 9% per annum simple interest.
b How much does each investment earn after 2 1 years?
2
c How much does each investment earn after 5 years?
d Find the time for each investment to earn $1000 in interest.
6 Mick is comparing three different interest rates for a possible investment.

a Draw a graph to represent the interest earned for 6 months on:
i $100 000 invested at 6% p.a. simple interest
ii $100 000 invested at 9% p.a. simple interest
iii $100 000 invested at 12% p.a. simple interest.
b How much does each investment earn after 1 month?
c How much does each investment earn after 6 months?
d Find the time for each investment to earn $2000 in interest.
LEVEL 3
7 The table below gives details for a fixed-term deposit.
Time period Simple interest rate per annum

Less than 3 months 6.5%
3 to 6 months 7.0%
6 to 12 months 7.5%
12 to 24 months 8.1%
24 to 48 months 8.3%
Chris has $50 000 to invest in a fixed-term deposit. Draw a separate graph to represent the
interest earned after 12 months given these investments.
a Fixed-term deposit for 3 months. Assume Chris reinvests his $50 000 at the end of every
3 months.
b Fixed-term deposit for 6 months. Assume Chris reinvests his $50 000 at the end of the first
6 months.
c Fixed-term deposit for 12 months
9C Percentage increase or decrease

Percentage change involves increasing or decreasing a quantity as a percentage of the original
amount of the quantity.
PERCENTAGE INCREASE PERCENTAGE DECREASE
1 Add the % increase to 100%. 1 Subtract the % decrease from 100%.

2 Multiply the above percentage by the 2 Multiply the above percentage by the
amount. amount.
Example 6: Calculating the percentage change 9C
The retail price of a toaster is $36 and is to be increased by 5%. What is the new price?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Add the 5% increase to 100%. 100% + 5% = 105%
2 Write the quantity (new price) to be found. New price = 105% of $36
3 Multiply the new percentage (105%) by the = 1.05 × 36
amount.
5 Write the answer in words. New price is $37.80.
Example 7: Calculating consecutive percentage changes 9C
Increase $75 by 20% and then decrease the result by 20%.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Add the 20% increase to 100%. 100% + 20% = 120%
amount.
5 Subtract the 20% decrease from 100%. 100% − 20% = 80%
amount.
9 Write the answer in words. New price is $72.
330 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9C
Exercise 9C LEVEL 1
Example 6 1 What is the amount of the increase for each of the following?
a Increase of 10% on $48 b Increase of 30% on $120
c Increase of 15% on $66 d Increase of 25% on $88
e Increase of 40% on $1340 f Increase of 36% on $196
g Increase of 4.5% on $150 h Increase of 1 % on $24
2
2 What is the amount of the decrease for each of the following?

a Decrease of 20% on $110 b Decrease of 60% on $260
c Decrease of 35% on $320 d Decrease of 75% on $1096
e Decrease of 6% on $50 f Decrease of 32% on $36
g Decrease of 12.5% on $640 h Decrease of 1 1 % on $56
4
3 The David Jones clearance sale has a discount of 30% off the retail price of all clothing.
Find the amount saved on the following items.
a Men’s shirt with a retail price of $80
b Pair of jeans with a retail price of $66
c Ladies jacket with a retail price of $450
d Boy’s shorts with a retail price of $22
e Jumper with a retail price of $124
f Girl’s skirt with a retail price of $50
4 A manager has decided to award a salary increase of 6% to all employees. Find the new salary
of employees currently earning following amounts.
a $46 240
b $94860
c $124 280
d $64 980
5 Aya has a card that entitles her to a 2.5% discount at the store where she works. How much will
she pay for the following items?
a Vase marked at $190
b Cutlery marked at $240
c Painting marked at $560
d Pot marked at $70
LEVEL 2
6 A used car is priced at $18600 and offered for sale at a discount of 15%.
a What is the discounted price of the car?
b The car dealer decides to reduce the price of this car by another 15%. What is the new price
of the car?
Example 7 7 Find the results after these repeated percentage changes.

a Increase $100 by 20% and then decrease the result by 20%.
b Increase $280 by 10% and then increase the result by 5%.
c Decrease $32 by 50% and then increase the result by 25%.
d Decrease $1400 by 5% and then decrease the result by 5%.
e Increase $960 by 15% and then decrease the result by 10%.
f Decrease $72 by 12.5% and then increase the result by 33 1 %.
3
8 An electronic store offered a $30 discount on a piece of software marked at $120.

What percentage discount has been offered?
LEVEL 3
9 The cost price of a sound system is $480.

Retail stores have offered a range of successive discounts. Calculate the final price of the sound
system at the following stores.
a Store A: Increase of 10% and then a decrease of 5%
b Store B: Increase of 40% and then a decrease of 50%
c Store C: Increase of 25% and then a decrease of 15%
d Store D: Increase of 30% and then a decrease of 60%
10 The price of a clock has been reduced from $200 to $180.

a What percentage discount has been applied?
b Two months later the price of the clock was increased by the same percentage discount.
What is new price of the clock?
332 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9D
9D Calculating GST
GST
The Australian Government collects a tax when people purchase goods and services. The tax is
called the GST (Goods and Services Tax) and is 10% of the pre-tax price of the item. There are
exceptions for basic food items and some medical expenses.
GST
To calculate the GST, find 10% of the pre-tax price.

To calculate the total cost of an item, add the GST to the pre-tax price. Alternatively, find 110%
of the pre-tax price.
To calculate the pre-tax price given the total cost of an item, divide the total cost by 110%.
Example 8: Finding the GST 9D
John bought a ticket with a pre-tax price of $142 to see

a concert at the Sydney Olympic Stadium. He was also
required to pay a 10% GST.
a How much GST is payable?
b What was the total cost of his ticket including the
GST?
c What was the pre-tax price of a ticket if the final
price of the ticket was $149.60?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (GST) to be calculated. a GST = 10% of $142
2 Multiply 0.10 by 142. = 0.10 × 142
4 Write the quantity (total cost) to be b Total cost = $142 + $14.20
calculated. = $156.20
5 Add the GST to the cost of the ticket.
6 Evaluate and write using correct units.
7 Write the quantity (pre-tax price) to be c Pre-tax price = $149.60 ÷ 110%
calculated. = $149.60 ÷ 1.10
8 Divide the final price by 1.10. = $136
VAT
In some countries the GST is called the VAT (Value Added Tax). The rate of the VAT ranges from
2% to 25%. The calculations for the VAT are similar to the calculations for the GST except the rate
of taxation is different.
VAT
• To calculate the VAT, find the VAT rate of the pre-tax price.
• To calculate the total cost of an item, add the VAT to the pre-tax price. Alternatively,
find 100% + VAT rateof the pre-tax price.
• To calculate the pre-tax price given the total cost of an item, divide the total cost by
100% + VAT rate.
Example 9: Finding the VAT 9D
Singapore has VAT levied at 5%. Olivia bought a microwave in Singapore for $275 plus a
VAT of 5%.
a How much VAT is payable?

b What was the total cost of her microwave including the VAT?
c What was the pre-tax price of another microwave if its final price was $672?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the quantity (VAT) to be calculated. a VAT = 5% of $275
2 Multiply 0.05 by 275. = 0.05 × 275
4 Write the quantity (total cost) to be calculated. b Total cost = $275 + $13.75
5 Add the VAT to the cost of the microwave. = $288.75
7 Write the quantity (pre-tax price) to be c Pre-tax price = $672 ÷ 105%
calculated. = $672 ÷ 1.05
8 Divide the final price by 1.05. = $640
334 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9D
Exercise 9D LEVEL 1
Example 8a 1 Calculate the GST payable on each of the following items. The GST rate is 10%.
a Football at $36 b Shoes at $140 c Dinner at $170
d Bucket at $3.20 e Dress at $490 f Book at $42
g Belt at $42.90 h Ring at $2600 i Camera at $370
Example 8b 2 Blake received a $620 bill for electrical work and was required to pay a 10% GST.
b What was the total cost of the electrical work including the GST?
3 Isabelle received an invoice for her gym membership of $780. In addition she was required to
pay a 10% GST.
b What was the total cost of her gym membership including the GST?
Example 9a 4 Great Britain has VAT of 17.5% on clothing. How much VAT is payable on the
following items?
a Football jumper with a pre-tax price of £150

b Football boots with a pre-tax price of £80
c Football shorts with a pre-tax price of £20
d Football socks with a pre-tax price of £8
5 What is the VAT payable in the following countries on a car with a pre-tax price of 42 000?
Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
a Argentina – 21% VAT b Canada – 7% VAT
c China – 17% VAT d India – 12.5% VAT
e Russia – 18% VAT f Singapore – 5% VAT
g South Africa – 14% VAT h Switzerland – 6.5% VAT
LEVEL 2
Example 8c 6 The cost of the following items includes a 10% GST. What was the pre-GST price?
a Pen at $17.60 b Calculator at $24.20 c Chair at $99
d DVD at $38.50 e Plant at $15.40 f Watch at $198
Example 9c 7 New Zealand has VAT levied at 12.5%.

a Ata bought a jacket in New Zealand for
$480 plus the VAT. What price did she pay
for the jacket?
b A second jacket costs $390 including the VAT.
What was the price of the jacket before
VAT was added? Answer correct to the nearest
dollar.
09DQ8
a Cell C5 has a formula that calculates a 10% GST. Enter this formula.
b The formula in cell D5 adds the cost price and the GST. Enter this formula. Fill down the
contents of D6 to D10 using this formula.
LEVEL 3
9 After the 10% GST was added, the price of a mobile phone was $362. What was the price
without GST? Answer correct to the nearest cent.
10 What was the original cost of a notebook computer that has a GST-included price of $1850?
The rate of GST is 10%. Answer correct to the nearest cent.
336 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9E
9E Straight-line depreciation
Straight-line depreciation occurs when the value of the item decreases by the same amount each
period. For example, if you buy a car for $20 000 and it depreciates by $2000 each year, the value
of the car after one year is $20 000 − $2000 or $18 000. After the second year the value of the car is
$20 000 − $2000 − $2000 or $16 000.
STRAIGHT-LINE DEPRECIATION
S = V 0 − Dn
S – Salvage value or current value of an item; also referred to as the book value
V 0 – Purchase price of the item; value of the item when n = 0
D – Depreciated amount per time period
Example 10: Calculating the straight-line depreciation 9E
Molly pays $14 500 for a used car. It depreciates $1100 each year. How much will it be worth after
three years?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the straight-line depreciation formula. S = V 0 − Dn
2 Substitute V 0 = 14 500 , D = 1100 and n = 3 = 14 500 − 1100 × 3
into the formula. Evaluate. = $11200
3 Write the answer in words. The value of the car is $11200.
Example 11: Calculating the salvage value 9E
A new car is purchased for $25800. After 4 years its salvage value is $15160. What is the annual
amount of depreciation, if the amount of depreciation is constant?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the straight-line depreciation formula. S = V 0 − Dn
2 Substitute V 0 = 25800, S = 15160 and n = 4 15160 = 25800 − D × 4
into the formula. 25800 − 15160
D=
4
3 Evaluate. = $2660
4 Write the answer in words. Annual depreciation is $2660.
9E Straight-line depreciation 337
Exercise 9E LEVEL 1
1 Mia bought a used car for $15200. She estimates that her car will depreciate in value by $3040
each year.
a What is the loss in value (depreciation) during the first year?
b What is the value of the car at the end of the first year?
c What is the loss in value (depreciation) during the second year?
d What is the value of the car at the end of the second year?
e What is the loss in value (depreciation) during the third year?
f What is the value of the car at the end of the third year?
Example 10 2 Harrison pays $9500 for a motor bike. It depreciates $850 each year. What will be the value of
the bike after:
a three years? b five years? c seven years? d nine years?
Example 11 3 Patrick buys a car for $55500 and it is depreciated at a rate of 10% of its purchase price each
year. What is the salvage value of the car after four years?
4 The graph shows the depreciation of a car over

16 000
four years.
a What is the initial value?
b How much did the car depreciate each year? 12 000
Value ($)
c What is the value of the car after 3 years?

d When was the car worth $8000? 8 000
e What is the value of the car after 3 1 years?
2
f What is the value of the car after 6 months? 4 000
0 1 2 3 4
Years
338 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation 9E
LEVEL 2
5 Ryan bought a commercial van three years ago. It has a salvage value of $36 000 and
depreciated $4650 each year. How much did Ryan pay for the van?
6 Lucy bought a used car four years ago. It has a salvage value of $16 400 and depreciated $1250
each year. How much did Lucy pay for the used car?
7 Ethan has a car worth $9220. It depreciates by $420 each year.

a When will the car be worth $5440?
b When will the car be worth $3340?
8 A ute is purchased for $18600. After two years it has depreciated to $14800 using the straight
line method of depreciation.
a When will the ute be worth $3400?
b When will the ute be worth $1500?
9 A truck is purchased new for $64 000. After 3 years its market value is $44800.
a What is the annual amount of depreciation, if the amount of depreciation is constant?
b Determine the book value of the truck after 7 years.
10 Grace bought an SUV costing $38 000. It is expected that the SUV will have an effective life of
10 years and then be sold for $14 000. Assume the SUV depreciated by the same amount each
year. What is the annual depreciation?
11 A utility van is purchased new for $24 000. After 3 years its book value is $15000. What is the
annual amount of depreciation, if the amount of depreciation is constant?
LEVEL 3
12 A caravan is bought for $82 000. It is expected to be used for 4 years and then sold for $50 000.
Assume the caravan depreciates by the same amount each year.
a How much does the caravan depreciate each year?
b What is the total amount of depreciation for 4 years?
c Copy and complete the following depreciation table for the first four years.
Year Current value Depreciation Depreciated value

1
2
3
4
d Graph the value in dollars against the age in years.
Summary
Simple interest I = Prn A= P+I
I – Interest (simple or flat) is the amount earned for the use of the money
P – Principal is the initial amount of money borrowed
r – Rate of simple interest per period expressed as a decimal
A – Amount or final balance
Loan repayments Loan repayment = Total to be paid ÷ Number of repayments
Simple interest graphs 1 Construct a table of values for I and n using I = Prn.
2 Draw a number plane with n the horizontal axis, I the vertical axis.
Plot the points and join them to make a straight line.
Percentage increase 1 Add the % increase.

2 Multiply the new percentage by the amount.
Percentage decrease 1 Subtract the % decrease from 100%.

2 Multiply the new percentage by the amount.
Calculating GST To calculate the GST, find 10% of the pre-tax price.
To calculate the total cost of an item, add the GST to the pre-tax price.
To calculate the pre-tax price given the total cost of an item, divide the
total cost by 110%
Calculating Value Added To calculate the VAT, find the VAT rate of the pre-tax price.
Tax (VAT) To calculate the total cost of an item, add the VAT to the pre-tax price.
To calculate the pre-tax price given the total cost of an item, divide the
total cost by (100% + VAT rate )
Straight-line depreciation S = V 0 – Dn S – Salvage value or current value

V 0 – Purchase price of the item
D – Depreciated amount per time period
340 Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation
Review
1 What is the flat-rate interest on $1400 at 7% p.a. for 3 years?

A $98 B $294 C $498 D $1694
2 Eve invested $800 for 2 years at a simple interest rate of 4% per annum. What is the total
amount of interest earned by the investment?
A $32 B $64 C $160 D $320
3 David wants to earn $9000 a year in interest. How much must he invest if the simple interest
rate is 15% p.a.? Answer to the nearest dollar.
A $1350 B $10 350 C $60 000 D $600 000
4 Use the graph to find the interest after 3 1 years. Simple interest
2
I at 4% p.a.
A $120 B $140
C $160 D $240 240
200
5 What was the amount of the investment shown in the 160
graph?
120
A $40% B $100
80
C $240 D $1000
40
6 What is the new price when $80 is increased by 20% n
then decreased by 20%? 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
A $51.20 B $115.20
C $80.00 D $76.80
7 An electrician quoted $300, excluding GST, to complete a job. A GST of 10% is added to the
job. What is the total cost of the job?
A $303 B $30 C $310 D $330
8 A house owner receives an electricity bill for $598, before a GST of 10% is added. How much
is the GST?
A $5.98 B $538.20 C $592.02 D $59.80
9 After 16% VAT was added, the price of a DVD player was $278. What was the price without
VAT? Answer to the nearest cent.
A $44.48 B $239.67 C $239.66 D $322.48
10 Abdul purchased a used car for $7500 and it depreciated by $700 each year. What is its
depreciated value after 3 years?
A $5400 B $4700 C $6100 D $6800
Review
1 William takes out a flat-rate loan of $60 000 for a period of 5 years, at a simple interest rate of
12% per annum. Find the amount owing at the end of 5 years.
2 Amet would like to purchase a $2000 TV from an electronics shop.

However, to buy the TV he has applied for a flat rate loan over
2 years at 15% p.a. How much does Amet pay altogether for the TV?
3 Ethan borrowed $1800 at 6% per annum. What is the simple interest

owed between 30 June and 1 September?
4 Ruby borrows $36 000 for 3 1 years. What is the rate of simple interest needed for her to owe
2
$8820 in interest?
5 Chloe has paid $49500 interest on a $220 000 loan at a flat interest rate of 10%. What was the
term of the loan?
6 Adam bought a $500 tablet on hire-purchase plan, consisting of a deposit, then monthly
payments. He paid $50 deposit and monthly instalments of $25 for two years. What is the
simple interest rate charged per annum? Answer correct to one decimal place. (Hint: If he paid
a $50 deposit, consider what the value of the principal was.)
7 The minimum monthly balances for three consecutive months are:

$360.00 $525.75 $718.40
How much interest is earned over the three-month period if interest is calculated on the
minimum monthly balance at a rate of 3.5% per annum?
8 Nicholas invested $1000 at 5% per annum simple interest for 5 years.

the interest rate.
n 0 1 2 3 4 5
I
e Extend the line to find the amount of interest after 5 1 years.
2
342
Review Chapter 9 Interest and depreciation
9 Jill has a shareholder card that entitles her to a 5% discount at a supermarket. How much will
she pay for the following items? Answer to the nearest cent.
a Breakfast cereal at $7.60 b Milk at $4.90
c Coffee at $14.20 d Cheese at $8.40
10 An electrician is buying a light fitting for $144 at a hardware store. He receives a clearance
discount of 15% then a trade discount of 10%. How much does the electrician pay for the light
fitting?
11 Ibrahim received a bill of $286 for internet access. In addition he paid a 10% GST.
b What was the total cost of internet access including the GST?
12 A caravan is purchased for $12 986. After 3 years it has a salvage value of $6020.
a What is the annual amount of depreciation, if the amount of depreciation is constant?
b Determine the book value of the caravan after 5 years.
13 Jackson wants to buy a new computer for $3500. He considers buying the computer on a
no-deposit leasing arrangement with terms of 14.4% per annum simple interest over three years
with equal monthly repayments. How much would Jackson’s monthly repayment be under this
proposal? Answer correct to the nearest cent.
14 While shopping on Monday, Madeleine found a dress priced at $350. On Wednesday,

Madeleine noticed the dress was marked down by 20%.
a What is the marked-down price of the dress?
b When Madeleine enquired about the dress, she was offered a further $40 discount off the
marked-down price. She bought the dress. What was Madeleine’s saving as a percentage of
the original price of the dress? Answer correct to one decimal place.
15 Audrey is a florist who has just purchased a second-hand delivery van for $23250 with the
intention of replacing it after three years.
a Calculate the trade-in value of the van in three years time given that it depreciates at the rate
of $3750 per annum.
b The new van Audrey is planning to buy in three years time is worth $44 360 today. Given
that the inflation rate is 2.8% per annum, how much will this van cost in three years time?
c How much extra money will Audrey need to be able to buy the new van in three years time
if she sells her second-hand van at the calculated trade-in value?
10 Exploring and
describing data
Syllabus topic — S1.2 Exploring and describing data arising from a
single continuous variable
This topic will develop your skills in calculating summary statistics for single data sets and
their use in the interpretation of data.
Outcomes
• Calculate and interpret the measures of central tendency: mean, mode and median.
• Calculate and interpret measures of spread: range, quantiles, interquartile range and
standard deviation.
• Investigate and describe the effect of outliers on summary statistics.
• Identify outliers and investigate their effect on the mean and the median.
• Describe, compare and interpret datasets in graphical and numerical form.
• Construct and compare parallel box-and-whisker plot using a five-number summary.


Knowledge check
344 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10A
10A Measures of central tendency

The mean is calculated by summing all the scores and dividing by the number of scores.
There are two notations for the mean depending on whether the data is a population or a sample.
The population mean is denoted by the symbol µ and the sample mean is denoted by the symbol x .
To calculate the mean from a grouped frequency table, the ‘class centre’ is used instead of the
score ( x ). The ‘frequency × score’ ( fx ) column becomes the ‘frequency × class centre ’ column. The
same formula for the mean is used. The mean calculated from grouped data is an approximation.
MEAN
Sum of scores ∑x ∑ fx
Mean = or x = or x = (for grouped data)
Number of scores n ∑f
µ – Population mean x – Sample mean
Example 1: Finding the mean from a grouped frequency table 10A
The points scored by a rugby team are shown Class Class centre Frequency f×x
in the grouped frequency table. The data ( x) (f)
represent all the team’s matches for the past 0 –5 3 2
two seasons. 6–10 8 9
What is the mean number of points 11–15 13 11
scored over the two seasons? 16–20 18 13
21–25 23 10
26 –30 28 5
S OLUTI O N:
1 Complete the fx column by multiplying the x f fx
class centre ( x ) by the frequency ( f ). 3 2 6
2 Sum the f column (∑ f = 50). 8 9 72
13 11 143
3 Sum the fx column (∑ fx = 825).
18 13 234
∑ fx 23 10 230
4 Write the formula x = .
∑f
28 5 140
Total 50 825
5 Substitute the values for ∑ fx and ∑ f . ∑ fx 825

x= =
∑f 50
6 Evaluate. = 16.5
7 Write the answer in words. Mean number of points is 16.5.
10A Measures of central tendency 345
Median
The median is the middle score or value. To find the median, list all the scores in increasing order
and select the middle one. For example, the median of 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 is 5. When there is an even
number of scores, the median is the average of the two middle scores. For example, the median of
1, 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 is found by sorting the six scores and finding the average of 4 and 5 or 4.5.
MEDIAN
1 Arrange all the scores in increasing order.

2 Count the total number of scores. This is represented by the letter n.
3 Odd number of scores then the median is n + 1 score.
2
4 Even number of scores then the median is the average of the n and the n + 1 score.
2 2
Example 2: Calculating the median 10A
The data below shows the change in temperature of a sick child.

37 38 39 38 40 40
a Sort the data in ascending order.
b Calculate the median.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the scores in increasing order. a 37, 38, 38, 39, 40, 40
2 Count the total number of scores (n = 6).
b n = 6, n +1 = 6 +1
3 There is an even number of scores, so the 2 2 2 2
median is the average of the 3rd (score 38) and =3 =4
the 4th scores (score 39). Median = 38 + 39
2
4 The average or midpoint of 38 and 39 is 38.5. = 38.5
5 Write the answer in words. Median is 38.5.
Mode
The mode is the score that occurs the most. It is the score with the highest frequency. The mode is
useful for categorical data that do not allow numerical calculations, such as when the data collected
are colours. Modes may occur at the beginning or end of a range of values; therefore, conclusions
based only on the mode may be inaccurate. It is common for data to have several modes. For
example, if there are two modes the data is referred to as bimodal. When data is grouped into
classes, the class that occurs the most is called the modal class.
MODE
1 Determine the number of times each score occurs.

2 Mode is the score that occurs the most number of times. If two or more scores occur
the same number of times they are both regarded as the mode.
Exercise 10A LEVEL 1
Example 1 1 The grouped frequency table shows the number of people by age at a Gold Coast resort.
Class Class Frequency f×x
centre (x) ( f)
25–29 25
30 –34 21
35–39 35
40 –44 21
45–49 26
50 –54 23
55–59 32
a Copy and complete the table by finding the class centre and fx column.
b How many people stayed at the Gold Coast resort?
c Find the mean of this data. Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
2 Find the mean of the data in the following table. Answer correct to one decimal place.
Class 30–39 40 –49 50–59 60–69 70 –79 80 –89 90 –99
Class centre
Frequency 9 4 6 8 10 6 7
3 The grouped frequency table shows the weights of randomly selected motor vehicles.
All motor vehicle weights are in kilograms.
Class Class centre (x) Frequency ( f ) f×x
2000 –2004 9
2005–2009 15
2010–2014 18
2015–2019 10
2020 –2024 8
2025–2029 6
2030–2034 3
2035–2039 1
a Copy and complete the table by finding the class centre and the fx column.
b How many motor vehicles were weighed?
c Find the mean of this data.
Example 2 4 The number of hours Amy works per week was 32, 41, 36, 35, 41, 58, 56, 61 and 72.
a What is the median number of hours worked?
b What is the mean number of hours worked?
c What measure of location (median or mean) will not change if 72 is deleted?
10A Measures of central tendency 347
LEVEL 2
5 The number of people entering a competition over a number of weeks was 19, 16, 10, 15, 11, 1
11, 17, 26, 23 and 16.
a Calculate the mean, median and mode for this data.
b What is the effect on the mean, median and mode of adding 5 to each score?
c Calculate the mean, median and mode with these extra people entering the competition.
6 A score was added to this set of scores: 13, 18, 20, 20, 22 and 26. The new mean is now 19.
What score was added?
7 Ten adults were surveyed on the number of hours

they slept last night. Their answers were
8, 10, 9, 5, 5, 6, 9, 8, 4 and 12.
a Find the mean number of hours slept.
b Another adult was then surveyed and the mean
changed to 8. How many hours did this adult
sleep?
8 The table on the right shows the ages of students

at an acting academy. Age Frequency Cumulative
a What is the median age? frequency.
b What is the mean age? Answer correct to 18 2
one decimal place. 19 5
c Complete the cumulative frequency column. 20 6
d The two oldest students leave the academy. 21 2
What is the new median?
9 The frequency histogram shows the number of drinks sold

each day. 7
6
a What is the maximum number?
Frequency
5
b What is the minimum number?
4
c Construct a frequency table.
3
d Calculate the median. 2
e The next day there were 14 drinks sold. Does the 1
median change?
6 7 8 9 10
Drinks
10 The mean distance travelled by five friends on the weekend was calculated as 60 km.
One friend who claimed to have travelled 45 km did not include a journey of 22 km , so
the total distance travelled by this person was actually 67 km. What was the mean distance of
the five friends now? Answer correct to one decimal place.
LEVEL 3
11 The marks for a Mathematics exam are shown in the
cumulative frequency polygon. 300
a What is the frequency of 70? 250
b What is the frequency of 30? 200
c How many students completed the exam? 150
d Estimate the median using the graph. 100
50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Mark
12 The number of mobile calls made by a phone company is shown below.

80 84 87 70 68 83 85 86 70 90
68 90 78 83 75 69 82 89 89 82
80 85 90 74 74 70 90 80 75 75
70 90 83 68 79 79 82 79 91 80
a Decide on appropriate classes for a grouped frequency table.
d How many pieces of data have been collected?
e Using the class centres, find the mean of this data. Answer correct to one decimal place.
f One score entered above was found to be incorrect. A score of 86 should have been 68. What
is the new mean of this data? Answer correct to one decimal place.
13 The number of plants sold in a nursery each day is shown below.

21 20 20 24 21 23 21 21 23 22 22 22 20 20 26
22 23 20 22 26 21 24 24 25 25 22 21 20 20 23
a Construct a frequency table with a cumulative frequency column.
b Construct a cumulative frequency histogram and polygon for this data.
c Use the cumulative frequency graphs to estimate the median.
10B Measures of spread 349
10B Measures of spread

A measure of the spread is calculated to determine whether most of the values are clustered together
or stretched out. The range, interquartile range and standard deviation are all measures of spread.
Range
The range is the difference between the highest and lowest scores. It is a simple way of measuring
the spread of the data.
RANGE
Range = Highest score – Lowest score
Example 3: Calculating the range 10B
The assessment results for two different tasks are shown below. Find the range for Task A and Task B.
3 5 10 13 14 14 17 22 24 24 27 27 28 33 38
Task A
40 40 41 43 44 45 45 46 50 52 52 55 55 58 95
10 15 19 20 24 27 31 31 35 38 40 49 51 51 54
Task B
55 58 62 62 68 68 71 72 76 78 79 79 86 88 90
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the formula for range. Task A
2 For Task A, substitute the highest score Range = Highest − Lowest
(95) and the lowest score (3). = 95 − 3
3 Evaluate. = 92
4 Write the formula for range. Task B
5 For Task B, substitute the highest score (90) Range = Highest − Lowest
and the lowest score (10). = 90 − 10
6 Evaluate. = 80
Note: The range for Task A is not a good indicator of the spread as it is affected by the score of
95 (outlier).
Quantiles
Quantiles are a set of values that divide an ordered dataset into equal groups. Examples include
quartiles, deciles and percentiles.
QUARTILES DECILES PERCENTILES
4 equal parts 10 equal parts 100 equal parts

1st quartile – 25% of data (Q 1) 1st decile – 10% of data 1st percentile – 1% of data
2nd quartile – 50% of data (Q 2) 5th decile – 50% of data 50th percentile – 50% of data
3rd quartile – 75% of data (Q 3) 9th decile – 90% of data 90th percentile – 90% of data.
350 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10B
Interquartile range
The interquartile range does not rely on the extreme values like the range. The data is arranged in
increasing order and divided into 4 equal parts or quartiles. The interquartile range (IQR) is the
difference between the first quartile and the third quartile. The first quartile cuts off the lowest
()
25% 1 of scores and the third quartile cuts off the lowest 75% 3 of scores.
4 4 ()
INTERQUARTILE RANGE
IQR = Third quartile (Q 3 ) − First quartile (Q 1 )

= Q 3 − Q1
1 Arrange the data in increasing order.
2 Divide the data into two equal-sized groups. If n is odd, omit the median.
3 Find Q 1, the median of the first group.
4 Find Q 3, the median of the second group.
5 Calculate the interquartile range (IQR) by subtracting Q 1 from Q 3.
Example 4: Calculating the interquartile range 10B
The assessment results for two different tasks are shown below.
Find the interquartile range for Task A and Task B.
What is shown by these results?
3 5 10 13 14 14 17 22 24 24 27 27 28 33 38
Task A
40 40 41 43 44 45 45 46 50 52 52 55 55 58 95
10 15 19 20 24 27 31 31 35 38 40 49 51 51 54
Task B
55 58 62 62 68 68 71 72 76 78 79 79 86 88 90
S OLUTI O N:
1 Arrange the data in increasing order. Task A
2 Divide the data into two equal-sized groups. There are
30 scores in total, hence 15 scores in each group.
3 Write the formula for interquartile range. IQR = Q 3 − Q 1
4 For Task A, the median of the first group is 22 (or Q 1) = 46 − 22
and the median of the second group is 46 (or Q 3). = 24
5 Substitute into the formula and evaluate. Task B
6 For Task B, the median of the first group is 31 (or Q 1) IQR = Q 3 − Q 1
and the median of the second group is 72 (or Q 3). = 72 − 31
7 Substitute into the formula and evaluate. = 41
8 Interpret the result and answer the question. Task A is more consistent than
Task B (lower IQR).
Standard deviation
The standard deviation is a measure of the spread of data about the mean. There are two slightly
different methods for calculating the standard deviation. The population standard deviation (σ n or
σ x) is a better measure when we have the data for the entire population. However, when a sample is
taken from a large population, the sample standard deviation (σ n −1 or S x) is a better measure.
STANDARD DEVIATION
Standard deviation measures the spread of data about the mean.

σ n or σ x – Population standard deviation S x – Sample standard deviation
Example 5: Calculating the standard deviation 10B
Find the population and sample standard deviation for these assessment tasks (Example 4).
3 5 10 13 14 14 17 22 24 24 27 27 28 33 38
Task A
40 40 41 43 44 45 45 46 50 52 52 55 55 58 95
10 15 19 20 24 27 31 31 35 38 40 49 51 51 54
Task B
55 58 62 62 68 68 71 72 76 78 79 79 86 88 90
S OLUTI O N:
1 Enter the statistics mode of the calculator.
2 Clear memory and enter the data into the calculator.
3 Select the σ x and S x key to view the results. Task A: σ x = 19.25, S x = 19.58
Task B: σ x = 23.30, S x = 23.69
Example 6: Calculating the standard deviation 10B
The frequency table below shows the number of customers

at the local vegetable market for the past 22 days.
Score (x) Frequency ( f )
15 3
16 4
17 6
18 4
19 5
Find the population and sample standard deviation.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Enter the statistics mode of the scientific calculator.
2 Clear memory and enter the data.
3 Select the σ x and S x key to view the results. σ x = 1.34, S x = 1.37
Exercise 10B LEVEL 1
Example 3 1 Find the range of each data set.

a 4, 23, 6, 6, 9, 14, 32, 4, 4 b 14, 13, 13, 12, 23, 18, 13, 13, 15
c 12, 5, 0, 8, 5, 6, 7, 16, 0 d 12, 21, 18, 12, 33, 12
e 6, 33, 6, 1, 3, 6, 31, 11, 3, 7 f 5, 5, 5, 10, 7, 10, 15
2 Aki scored the following marks in a spelling test:

4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 8, 9 and 9
a What is the first quartile? b What is the third quartile?
c What is the second decile? d What is the seventh decile?
3 The number of calls for help each hour after

a storm are recorded below:
8 12 5 11 10 12
7 9 11 10 9 9
7 2 5 9 6
a What is the range?
b What is the first quartile?
c What is the third quartile?
d What is the interquartile range?
Example 4 4 Find the interquartile range for each data set.

a 13, 19, 8, 28, 16, 27, 11, 17 b 62, 51, 53, 64, 65, 53, 56, 61
c 29, 24, 30, 22, 32, 29, 24, 26, 25, 28 d 58, 59, 58, 34, 29, 29, 37, 57, 31, 39
e 31, 34, 38, 39, 43, 57, 57, 61, 41 f 59, 44, 40, 41, 46, 50, 46, 53, 46
5 The systolic blood pressure for a sample of 20 people is listed below:

203 124 180 210 105 148 161 131 192 125
159 106 170 138 100 120 109 144 190 193
a What is the range? b What is the first quartile?
c What is the third quartile? d What is the interquartile range?
Example 5 6 Find the population standard deviation of each data set (correct to one decimal place).
a 5.3, 6.6, 4.4, 8.8, 3.3, 10.1 b 98,112, 7, 4, 0, 100, 1
c 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7 d 130, 145, 145, 132,124, 135, 156
7 Find the sample standard deviation of each data set (correct to one decimal place).
a 7.5, 8.9, 1.0, 3.4, 1.3 b 3, 0, 11, 7, 5, 1, 2, 9, 7
c 9, 3, 6, 9, 13, 9, 15, 10, 7, 9 d 9, 10, 100, 5, 100, 7, 9
8 The number of kilometres Stephanie walked each day while on her trek are
22, 26, 34, 28, 36, 30, 29, 31 and 28.
a What is the population standard deviation,
correct to two decimal places?
b The longest and the shortest distances were not
included in this data. The longest distance was
44 km and the shortest distance was 17 km. What is
the new sample standard deviation? (Answer correct
to two decimal places.)
9 Find the sample standard deviation for each of the following tables. Answer correct to one
decimal place.
a
Score 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Frequency 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3
b
Score 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Frequency 1 3 5 7 7 5 3 1
c
Score 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
Frequency 5 6 9 10 11 8 7 4
10 A grouped frequency table is shown below.
Class Class centre (x) Frequency ( f )

10 –29 5
30 –49 10
50–69 11
70–89 4
a What is the population standard deviation? Answer correct to one decimal place.
b What is the sample standard deviation? Answer correct to one decimal place.
11 A railway attendant recorded the delay times of seven trains during peak hour:
0,60,35,120,10,40 and 80. All times were measured in seconds.
a What is the range for these times?
b What is the sample standard deviation for these times, correct to two decimal places?
c Calculate the interquartile range for these times.
LEVEL 2
12 Joshua has been ill and only scored 36% in a recent English test. However, the results of
his class were very good, with every other student scoring above 70%. Joshua’s teacher has
decided not to include Joshua’s results in the class statistics. What effect would this have on the
mean and sample standard deviation?
13 The results for Molly and Harry in their tests this term are listed below.
Molly 10 19 16 15 7 15 11 3 9 16
Harry 18 16 17 8 14 15 13 10 13 16
a What is the mean and population standard deviation for Molly’s results?
b What is the mean and population standard deviation for Harry’s results?
c Which student had the more consistent results throughout the term? Give a reason.
LEVEL 3
14 Charlie’s median score for cricket is 32 and

the interquartile range of his scores is 5.
Thomas’s median score for cricket is 30 and
the interquartile range of his scores is 10.
a Which player is the more consistent? Explain
your answer.
b Which player is more likely to make the higher
score? Explain your answer.
15 The table below shows Amber’s results for two Mathematics tests as well as the class mean and
standard deviation.
Topic Amber’s result Class mean Class standard deviation

Data 78 70 7
Algebra 83 74 10
Which is the better result for Amber compared to her class? Justify your answer.
16 Twelve teenagers were selected at random from a concert audience and their ages were
recorded:
14 16 15 16 17 19 17 16 15 15 15 18
a Calculate the mean of their ages. Answer correct to two decimal places.
b What is the population standard deviation, correct to one decimal place?
c Explain the meaning of standard deviation.
10C Outliers 355
10C Outliers
An outlier is a score that is separated from the Median
majority of the data. It is sometimes difficult
to decide whether or not a score should be 1.5 × IQR IQR 1.5 × IQR
classified as an outlier. We define an outlier
Outliers in this range
as any value more than 1.5 interquartile ranges
above the third quartile (Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR ), or
more than 1.5 interquartile ranges below the first quartile (Q 1 – 1.5 × IQR ).
Outliers have little effect on the mean, median and mode for large sets of data. However, in small
data sets, the presence of an outlier will have a large effect on the mean, a smaller effect on the
median and usually no effect on the mode.
OUTLIER
An outlier is a score that is separated from the majority of the data.

Use Q 1 – 1.5 × IQR and Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR as criteria to determine an outlier.
Example 7: Determining the effect of an outlier 10C
Task A 5 7 12 15 16 16 19 20 26 26 29 29 29 35 40
40 42 43 45 46 47 47 48 52 54 54 57 57 60 91
a What is the outlier in Task A?
b What is the effect of the outlier on the mean, median and mode?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Looking at the data it appears that 91 is an outlier. a IQR = 48 – 20 = 28
2 To check assumptions, use interquartile range. Lower limit = 20 − (1.5 × 28)
3 Lower limit is first quartile minus 1.5 times the IQR. = −22
4 Evaluate. No values
5 Upper limit is third quartile plus 1.5 times the IQR. Upper limit = 48 + (1.5 × 28)
6 Evaluate. = 90
7 Determine if any values are greater than 90. The outlier is 91.
8 Enter the data into the calculator in statistics mode. b x = 36.9 (with outlier)
9 Select x for the mean. Clear the outlier and select x. x = 35.0 (without outlier)
10 Mode is the score with the highest frequency (29). Mode = 29 (with outlier)
11 Median of the 30 scores is the average of the Mode = 29 (without outlier)
15th and 16th scores (40 and 40). Median = 40 (with outlier)
12 Median of the 29 scores (without outlier) is the Median = 40 (without outlier)
15th score (40).
13 State the effect of the outlier on the mean, median and Outlier has increased the mean
mode. but has had no effect on the median
or the mode.
356 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10C
Exercise 10C LEVEL 1
1 List any outliers for each data set by observation.

a 6, 5, 8, 8, 11, 16, 34, 6, 6 b 33, 33, 34, 33, 33, 32, 43, 48, 35
c 7, 5, 0, 7, 16, 0, 8, 5, 6 d 28, 22, 133, 22, 31, 22
e 11, 3, 7, 6, 53, 6, 1, 6, 3, 1, 3 f 13, 10, 13, 0, 8, 8, 8
2 The results of an assignment are represented in the following box-and-whisker plot.
30 35 40 45 50 55 60
a What is the lower extreme? b What is the upper extreme?

c What is the lower quartile? d What is the upper quartile?
e Find the interquartile range. f Give the outlier if it exists.
Example 7 3 Give the outlier in the following data sets, if it exists. Justify using the criteria Q 1 − 1.5 × IQR.
a 1, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9, 9 b 69, 82, 82, 85, 86, 90, 91
c 20, 31, 32, 35, 35, 35, 35, 36, 36 d 10, 18, 19, 20, 21
e 56, 66, 68, 70, 70 f 0, 8, 8, 8, 10, 13, 13, 13
4 Give the outlier in the following data sets, if it exists. Justify using the criteria Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR .
a 0, 0, 1, 3, 5, 5, 10 b 22, 23, 23, 24, 25, 25, 25, 27, 36
c 70, 72, 73, 74, 82 d 32, 33, 33, 33, 33, 34, 35, 43, 48
e 45, 45, 45, 47, 50, 50, 59 f 101, 102, 102, 102, 103, 115
5 The ages of a group people attending a musical was as follows:

29, 37, 27, 28, 40, 76, 26, 31, 42, 34, 25, 26, 30, 40, 27, 52, 36, 23, 31, 14, 27, 32, 28, 29, 40, 20
a Find the lower quartile. b Find the upper quartile.
c What is the interquartile range? d Give the outlier if it exists.
6 Seven students scored the following marks in an assessment task: 35, 49, 56, 59, 65, 69, 96.
Is the mark of 96 an outlier for this set of data? Justify your answer with calculations.
7 The rainfall for the past nine months was as follows: 15, 20, 22, 14, 31, 19, 20, 16, 17.
Is the 31 an outlier for this set of data? Justify your answer with calculations.
10C Outliers 357
LEVEL 2
8 Jennifer scored the following points in her basketball

games this season: 4, 5, 5, 6, 8, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 20.
b What is the interquartile range?
c What is the value of the outlier?
d How does the outlier affect the range and the
interquartile range?
9 Consider the following set of scores: 3, 5, 6, 13, 13, 19, 20, 20, 81.
a Calculate the mean and the median of this set of scores.
b What is the effect on the mean and the median of removing the outlier?
10 a Calculate the mean, median and mode for each data set. Answer correct to one decimal place
when necessary.
i 26, 27, 21, 26, 57, 22, 23 ii 38, 41, 26, 29, 34, 27, 27, 34, 116
iii 95, 92, 91, 88, 88, 87, 42 iv 21, 61, 62, 62, 65, 68, 69, 71, 73
b Calculate the mean, median and mode for each data set after removing the outlier.
11 Consider the following set of scores: 12, 15, 16, 16, 18, 18, 19, 20, 20, 60.
a Calculate the mean and the median of the set of scores.
LEVEL 3
12 Nine employees earned the following wages per week: $680, $590, $490, $990, $660, $520,
20, $300, $510 and $540.
a Is the wage of $990 an outlier for this set of data? Justify your answer with calculations.
b Each employee receives a $50 pay increase. What effect will this have on the standard
deviation?
13 The players in Noah’s football team completed a Number of messages Frequency

survey on the number of text messages sent using
their mobile phone within the last day. The results 0 10
are summarised in the table opposite. 1 8
a What is the mean number of messages sent?
Answer correct to one decimal place. 2 5
b Calculate the median number of messages sent. 3 4
c What is the mode?
6 1
d Calculate the mean, the median and the mode when
the outlier is removed.
358 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10D
10D Describing distributions

The general shape of a graph can be described in terms of smoothness, symmetry and the number
of modes. Smooth curves have no breaks or jagged sections, and data gradually increases and/or
decreases. Symmetrical graphs are balanced about a vertical line in the centre, and the mode is the
score that occurs the most (highest frequency). Unimodal graphs have one mode. However, it is
common for data to have several modes. Bimodal graphs have two modes and multimodal graphs
have many modes.
SHAPE DESCRIPTION GRAPH
Data has no breaks

Smoothness
or jagged sections.
Data is symmetrical
Symmetry and balanced about
a centre.
Data has only one

Unimodal
mode or peak.
Data has two modes

Bimodal
or peaks.
Data has many

Multimodal
modes or peaks.
10D Describing distributions 359
Symmetry or skewness
Data is symmetric if it forms a mirror image
of itself when folded in the ‘middle’ along a
vertical axis. Otherwise the data is skewed.
Skewed data has more data on one side. There
are two types:
• Positively skewed data has a long tail on the
right-hand side.
• Negatively skewed data has a long tail on the
left-hand side.
SHAPE DESCRIPTION GRAPH
Data is symmetrical and

No skew
balanced about a vertical
(Symmetric)
line.
There is more data on the

left side. The long tail is
Positively skewed
on the right side (positive
side).
There is more data on

the right side. The long
Negatively skewed
tail is on the left side
(negative side).
360 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10D
Exercise 10D LEVEL 1
1 Describe the smoothness, symmetry and modality of the following graphs.

a b
c d
e f
g h
2 Describe the skewness of the following graphs.

a b
c d
e f
g h
10D Describing distributions 361
LEVEL 2
3 The grouped frequency table shows the age of people entering a competition.
Class Class centre (x) Frequency ( f ) f×x
5–9 1
10 –14 0
15–19 2
20 –24 3
25–29 7
30 –34 18
35–39 16
a Calculate the mean, median and modal class from the frequency table. Answer correct to
one decimal place when necessary.
c Display the data in a frequency histogram.
d Describe the symmetry and modality of the data.
e Describe the skewness of the distribution.
LEVEL 3
4 There are eight students in a hospitality class. The students sat for a test and the results were
98, 95, 91, 94, 95, 11, 95 and 94.
a Find the mean, the median and the mode. Answer correct to nearest whole number.
b Lily scored 91. She told her father that her result was above the average. Do you agree with
Lily’s statement? Give a reason for your answer.
5 High school students were surveyed and the results of two samples are shown below.
Sample A Score 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency 3 5 8 9 8 5 3
Sample B Score 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency 3 9 9 7 6 5 1
a For sample A (correct to one decimal place where necessary), find the:
i median ii mean
iii mode iv standard deviation
b For sample B (correct to one decimal place where necessary), find the:
i median ii mean
iii mode iv standard deviation
c Construct a frequency histogram for sample A.
d Construct a frequency histogram for sample B.
e Describe the symmetry and modality of sample A and sample B.
f Describe the skewness of sample A and sample B.
362 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10E
10E Comparing distributions

The selection and the use of the appropriate measure of location (mean or median) and measure of
spread (range, interquartile range or standard deviation) depends on the nature of the data and the
relative merits of each measure. For example, if the dataset contains one or two extreme scores then
the value of the mean will greatly increase or decrease.
MEASURES OF LOCATION
Advantages Easy to understand and calculate.

Depends on every score.
Mean Varies least from sample to sample.
Disadvantages Distorted by outliers.
Not suitable for categorical data.
Advantages Easy to understand.
Not affected by outliers.
Median Disadvantages May not be central.
Data needs to be sorted.
Varies more than the mean in a sample.
Advantages Easy to determine.
Mode Suitable for categorical data.
Disadvantages There may be no mode or more than one mode.
May not be central.
Measures of spread
Advantages Easy to understand.
Easy to calculate.
Range
Disadvantages Dependent on the smallest and largest values.
May be distorted by outliers.
Advantages Easy to determine for small data sets.
Easy to understand.
Interquartile range
Disadvantages Difficult to calculate for large data sets.
Dependent on lower and upper quartiles.
Data needs to be sorted.
Advantages Depends on every score.
Not significantly affected by outliers.
Standard deviation
Disadvantages Difficult to determine without a calculator.
Difficult to understand.
10E Comparing distributions 363
Example 8: Comparing statistics for two sets of data 10E
The table below shows the number of participants in a fitness class for two instructors.
M T W T F S S
Bec 8 5 4 8 8 4 5
Rita 10 9 12 14 8 10 1
a Find the mean and median for each

set of data. Answer correct to one
decimal place where necessary.
b Find the range and interquartile range
for each set of data.
c Examine the summary statistics and
outline any concerns.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Determine the mean and median for each a Bec Rita
instructor.
2 Mean is the sum of all the scores divided Mean x = 42 = 6 Mean x = 64
7 7
by the number of scores; evaluate. = 9.1
3 Write the scores in increasing order. 4, 4, 5, 5, 8, 8, 8 2, 8, 9, 10, 10, 12, 14
4 Median is the middle score. There is an Median is 5. Median is 10.
odd number of scores so the median is the
4th (or score 5).
5 Determine the range and IQR for each b Bec Rita
instructor.
6 Range is the highest score minus the Range = 8 − 4 = 4 Range = 14 − 2 = 12
lowest score; evaluate.
7 Interquartile range is the upper quartile IQR = 8 − 4 = 4 IQR = 12 − 8 = 4
minus the lower quartile score; evaluate.
8 Look at the data for any outliers or a score c There is an outlier (Rita’s class on
that is separated from the majority of Sunday: 1).
the data.
9 Compare all the statistics and the effect of The outlier has affected the calculation
the outlier. for the mean and the range.
364 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10E
Exercise 10E LEVEL 1
Example 8 1 Two classes in Year 11 were given a short quiz. The

Score Class A Class B
test was marked out of 10 and the results are listed
in the table. 7 4 1
Answer the following questions, correct to one decimal 8 3 3

place when necessary. 9 5 6
a How many students are there in each class? 10 6 8
b What is the mean and median for class A?
c What is the mean and median for class B?
d What is the range and interquartile range for class A?
e What is the range and interquartile range for class B?
f What is the standard deviation for class A?
g What is the standard deviation for class B?
h Which class performed better in these short quizzes? Give reasons for your answer.
i Compare and contrast the two sets of data.
2 The number of males and females retiring in

the past 15 years is displayed in the double
stem-and-leaf plot.
Males Females
6 0 9
8532 1 1369
9876442 2 155789
410 3 0125
Answer the following questions, correct to one decimal place when necessary.
a Find the mean and median number of male retirees.

b Find the mean and median number of female retirees.
c Find the range and interquartile range for the number of male retirees.
d Find the range and interquartile range for the number of female retirees.
e Find the standard deviation for the number of male retirees.
f Find the standard deviation for the number of female retirees.
g Compare and contrast the two sets of data.
10E Comparing distributions 365
LEVEL 2
3 Create the spreadsheet below for the number of employees at two branches of a department
store.
10EQ3
a The formulae in cells B13 − B20 and D13 − D20 are shown above. Enter these formulae.
b Comment on the measures of location (mean, median and mode) for the city branch.
c Comment on the measures of location (mean, median and mode) for the Bondi branch.
d Comment on the measures of spread (range and standard deviation) for the city branch.
e Comment on the measures of spread (range and standard deviation) for the Bondi branch.
f Compare and contrast the two sets of data.
LEVEL 3
4 The areas of eight suburbs of Sydney and Melbourne are listed below.
Sydney 9.0 7.4 8.2 11.5 6.4 6.3 5.6 7.3

Melbourne 3.0 7.5 9.5 25.2 4.5 3.6 2.0 14.5
Answer the following questions, correct to one decimal place when necessary.
a Find the mean and median for each set of data.

b Which is the better measure for the centre of this data? Explain your answer.
c Find the range and interquartile range for each set of data.
d Which is the better measure for the spread of this data? Explain your answer.
e Compare and contrast the two sets of data.
366 Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data 10F
10F Parallel box-and-whisker plots

A box-and-whisker plot or box plot is a graph that uses five important statistics: lower extreme
(or lowest value); lower quartile (or first quartile, Q1); median; upper quartile (or third quartile, Q3),
and the higher extreme (or highest value). These statistics are referred to as a five-number summary.
A box-and-whisker plot is constructed from a scale of data values. The box is between the two
quartiles with a dividing line for the median (Q2) and the whiskers are drawn to the two extremes.
BOX-AND-WHISKER PLOT PARALLEL BOX-AND-WHISKER PLOT
Lower extreme Higher extreme Parallel box-and-whisker plots have two box
plots on the same scale.
They are used to compare two sets of data.
Lower quartile Median Upper quartile

(Q1) (Q2) (Q3)
Five-number summary
Example 9: Constructing a parallel box-and-whisker plot 10F
Construct a parallel box-and whisker plot from this data.

Saturday 60 62 65 69 70 72 75 75 77 78 80 85
Sunday 30 35 40 45 54 66 75 77 80 85 94 94
S OLUTI O N:
1 Calculate the five-number Saturday: Min = 60
summary for each day. Q 1 = 67
2 Draw a labelled and scaled Median = 73.5
number line that covers the full Q 3 = 77.5
range of values for each day. Max = 85
3 For Saturday, draw a box starting at Sunday: Min = 30
Q 1 = 67 and ending at Q 3 = 77.5. Q 1 = 42.5
4 Mark the median value with a Median = 70.5
vertical line at 73.5 (Q 2 ). Q 3 = 82.5
5 Draw in the whiskers, lines Max = 94
joining the midpoint of the
Saturday
ends of the box to the minimum
and maximum values. Sunday
6 Repeat steps 3 − 5 to construct
the box-and-whisker plot for Sunday. 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
7 Label each box plot.
Using a parallel box-and-whisker plot to compare data

Parallel box-and-whisker plots are useful for comparing two or more sets of data collected
on the same variable, such as the assessment results for two different groups of students.
A double box-and-whisker plot allows the median and the spread to be easily identified
and compared.
Example 10: Comparing data with a parallel box-and-whisker plot 10F
The number of births in a city hospital each day

during the past two weeks is shown in the table
below and summarised in the parallel box-and
whisker plots.
a What is the lower extreme for week A?
b What is the upper quartile for week B?
c What is the median for week A?
d What was the lower quartile for week B?
e Compare and contrast the two sets of data.
Week A 13 13 15 15 17 18 18 19
Week B 8 9 10 12 12 15 18 20
Week A
Week B
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read the value from the graph. a Lower extreme for week A is 13.
2 Read the value from the graph. b Upper quartile for week B is 16.5.
3 Read the value from the graph. c Median for week A is 16.
4 Read the value from the graph. d Lower quartile for week B is 9.5.
5 Spread of the data for Week B is e The number of births each day was more
larger than the spread for Week A consistent and the median higher in Week A.
(box widths and extreme values However, the largest and smallest number of
are larger). births occurred in Week B.
Exercise 10F LEVEL 1
Example 10 1 From the box-and-whisker plot, find the:

a lower extreme
b higher extreme
c median
20 40 60 80 100
d lower quartile
e upper quartile
2 Complete a five-number summary for each set of data.

a 44, 46, 51, 52, 55, 57, 59, 61
b 8, 10, 12, 15, 17, 24, 25, 30, 32, 42
3 Construct a box-and-whisker plot using the following five-number summaries.

a Min = 3, Q 1 = 4, median = 5, Q 3 = 6 and max = 7
b Min = 60, Q 1 = 64, median = 70, Q 3 = 73 and max = 80
4 a Given the data set 2, 5, 9, 12, 14, 17 and 19, find the:
i lower extreme ii upper extreme iii range
iv lower quartile v upper quartile vi median
b Construct a box-and-whisker plot for the above data set.
5 a Given the data set 42, 34, 49, 32, 50, 43, 47, 32, 38, 51, 37 and 35, find the:
i lower extreme ii upper extreme iii range
iv lower quartile v upper quartile vi median
b Construct a box plot for the above data set.
6 The heights (in centimetres) of people living in Olivia Parade are listed below.
157 168 133 135 154 167 167 123 140 157 163 176 160 165
145 149 157 154 159 180 143 154 156 123 150 143 132 140
a What is the lower extreme?
b What is the upper extreme?
c What is the median?
d What is the lower quartile?
e What is the upper quartile?
f Construct a box-and-whisker plot for
this data set.
g Describe the data in terms of shape,
centre and spread.
LEVEL 2
7 The parallel box-and-whisker plot shows the amount of data uploaded and downloaded by
Anthony each day for the past month.
Upload
Download
10 15 20 25 30 35
a What is the highest amount of data uploaded?

b What is the lowest amount of data downloaded?
c What is the median amount of data uploaded?
d Calculate the range for downloading data.
e What is the lower quartile for data downloaded?
f What is the upper quartile for data uploaded?
g What is the interquartile range for data uploaded?
h What is the interquartile range for data downloaded?
Example 9 8 Construct a parallel box-and-whisker plot, using the following five-number summaries.
Part 1: Min = 12, Q 1 = 14, median = 19, Q 3 = 22 and max = 26
Part 2: Min = 14, Q 1 = 19, median = 23, Q 3 = 26 and max = 29
9 Construct a parallel box-and-whisker plot using the following five-number summaries.

Aaron: Min = 20, Q 1 = 21.5, median = 26, Q 3 = 30 and max = 35
Eliza: Min = 18.5, Q 1 = 26, median = 27.5, Q 3 = 34 and max = 35
10 The ages of residents who attended two community

meetings are displayed in the double stem-and-leaf
plot below.
a What is the five-number summary for meeting A?
b What is the five-number summary for meeting B?
c Construct a parallel box-and-whisker plot using the
data in the double stem-and-leaf plot.
d What is the interquartile range for meeting A?
e What is the interquartile range for meeting B?
Meeting A Meeting B
6 0 9
6521 1 337
987521 2 0266899
2100 3 2335
LEVEL 3
11 The TAFE results of two students are listed below.
Ryan 69 76 75 75 70 78 79 72 63 72 73 81
Tane 76 70 76 74 72 74 70 73 77 68 75 75
a What is Ryan’s lower score?
b What is Tane’s median?
c What is Tane’s upper score?
d What is Ryan’s median?
e What is Tane’s lower quartile?
f What is Ryan’s upper quartile?
g Construct a parallel box-and-whisker plot for the
two sets of data.
h Determine the range and interquartile range for each data set.
i Who is the better student? Give a reason for your answer.
12 The approval ratings for two local politicians are listed below.
Jade 80 65 69 62 72 70 75 77 78 85 75 60
Ruby 75 85 66 35 92 94 40 30 45 54 77 80
a What is Ruby’s lower extreme?
b What is Ruby’s upper extreme?
c What is Jade’s median?
d What is Jade’s lower quartile?
e What is Jade’s upper quartile?
f Construct a double box plot.
g Compare and contrast the shapes of the box-and-whisker plots.
h Who is the more popular politician? Justify your answer.
13 The ages of the people attending an environmental conference are recorded below.
Female 35 63 28 30 27 42 53 50 52 63 61 62 45 18
Male 22 63 13 20 12 22 30 25 30 52 37 46 22 12
a What is the five-number summary for females attending the conference?
b What is the five-number summary for males attending the conference?
c Construct a double box-and-whisker plot for the above data.
d Determine the range and interquartile range for each data set.
e Compare and contrast the shapes of the box-and-whisker plots.
f What conclusions can you make about the ages of females and males attending the conference?
Summary
Measures of central
Mean Mean = Sum of scores or x = ∑ fx
tendency Number of scores ∑f
µ – Population mean x – Sample mean
Median The median is the middle score. To find the median,

list all the scores in increasing order and select the
middle one.
Mode The mode is the score that occurs the most.
It is the score with the highest frequency.
Measures of spread Range Range = Highest score – Lowest score
Interquartile IQR = Third quartile – First quartile = Q 3 − Q 1

range
Standard Standard deviation is the spread of data about the mean.
deviation Population standard deviation – σ n or σ x .
Sample standard deviation – σ n −1 or S x .
Outlier An outlier is a score that is separated from the majority of the data.
Use Q 1 − 1.5 × IQR and Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR as criteria to determine an
outlier.
Describing datasets • Shape of the graph is described in terms of smoothness, symmetry

and the number of modes.
• Positively skewed data has a long tail on the right-hand side.
• Negatively skewed data has a long tail on the left-hand side.
Comparing datasets The selection and the use of the appropriate measure of location
(mean or median) and measure of spread (range, interquartile range or
standard deviation) depends on the nature of the data and the relative
merits of each measure.
Parallel box-and-whisker Two box-and-whisker plots on the same scale. They are used to
plots compare two sets of data.
372
Review Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data
1 Sarah scored 48, 74, 89, 55, 64 and 89 in the Trial HSC. Which measure of location would
Sarah prefer to tell her parents?
A Mean B Median C Mode D Range
2 Find the median of this data: 8, 9, 10, 6, 7, 7, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 4, 10

A 3 B 5.5 C 7 D 6
3 Two examinations results are displayed in the A

box plot. What is the interquartile range for
exam B? B
A 25 B 40
0 20 40 60 80
C 50 D 60
4 The table shows statistics

Student Mean Standard Range
of the results of five tests. deviation
Which student has the more
Alice 13.6 3.8 8
consistent results?
A Alice Hamza 13.9 4.2 8
B Molly Molly 13.8 2.7 8
C Hamza Ryder 14.0 3.4 8
D Ryder
5 What is the difference between the range and interquartile range for the following data:
11, 14, 12, 10, 15, 16, 10, 15, 16, 20, 10
A 4 B 5 C 6 D 10
6 There are 7 scores in a data set. One of the scores is an outlier. Which of the mean, mode,
median or interquartile range will be most influenced by the outlier?
A Mode B Mean C Median D Interquartile range
7 How would you describe the symmetry

and skewness of the histogram opposite? 6
5
A Positively skewed
Frequency
4
B Negatively skewed
3
C Symmetric
2
D Symmetric with a clear outlier 1
0
2 7 12 17 22 27
Review
1 Find the missing number in these data sets.
a The scores 10, 11, 13, 15, , 16, 18, 20 and 20 have a median of 15.
b The scores 4, 4, , 6, 8 and 11 have a median of 5.
c The scores 5, 6, 6, 6, , 9, 10 and 11 have a median of 7.
2 Members of a swimming club recorded the following times (in minutes) at a carnival.
46 48 48 47 44 46 44 45 42 45 45 45 44 46 48 42 42
47 43 45 45 47 47 48 45 44 43 46 41 43 47 43 41 44
43 45 44 41 46 43 44 42 46 42 44 46 43 46 43 43 44
c Add an fx column.
d What is the mean for this data? Answer correct to one decimal place.
3 Philip has completed three mathematics tests. His mean mark is 64%. What mark (out of 100)
does he have to get in his next test to increase the mean to 65%?
4 Find the interquartile range for each data set.

a 18, 16, 19, 18, 16, 13, 12, 15 b 19, 22, 17, 18, 23, 15, 15, 13
c 32, 29, 24, 26, 25, 28, 29, 24, 30, 22 d 29, 37, 39, 57, 58, 34, 58, 59, 29, 31
e 43, 57, 39, 61, 31, 34, 57, 38, 41 f 40, 50, 46, 41, 46, 53, 59, 44, 46
5 The number of service calls per day made by an

air-conditioning technician is recorded below:
8, 1, 6, 8, 11, 4, 9, 11, 10, 8, 7, 10, 8, 4, 5, 6, 9
b What is the first quartile?
c What is the third quartile?
d What is the interquartile range?
6 The lifetimes in hours of six batteries of Brand A and Brand B are recorded below.
Brand A 74 57 61 90 89 79
Brand B 67 74 39 109 68 99
a What is the mean and sample standard deviation of each brand of battery?
b Which brand of battery has the more consistent lifetimes? Explain your answer.
374
Review Chapter 10 Exploring and describing data
7 The time taken (in minutes) for Liam to travel to work each day for 2 weeks is shown below.
Week 1 32 31 35 33 35 59 40
Week 2 38 30 32 37 41 39 42
a Draw a parallel box plot.
b What is the median of the scores in week 1?
c What is the median of the scores in week 2?
d What is the interquartile range for Week 1?
e What is the interquartile range for Week 2?
f Comment on the skewness of the scores in Week 1
8 The results of a survey are shown in the parallel box-and-whisker plot.

a What is the range of the results in the east? East
b What is the range of the results in the west?
c What is the median of the results in the east? West
d Describe the skewness of the results in the east.

0 5 10 15 20
e Describe the skewness of the results in the west.
f Is 20 an outlier for the East data? Show using
calculations.
9 A survey was conducted with 20 students to see if they took longer to perform a study task
when listening to music than when not listening to music. The data is presented below.
Five-number summary Listening to music (min) Not listening to music (min)

Lower extreme 17 13
Lower quartile 19 18
Median 24 21
Upper quartile 32 26
Upper extreme 33 30
a Draw a parallel box-and-whisker plot.

b Consider the following comment made by one of the students.
‘It does not take any longer to complete a study task if you are listening to music.’
Is this a reasonable comment based on the data? Use the box plots to compare and contrast
the data. Fully justify your response.
11 Syllabus topic — MS-M2 Working with time
Working
with time
This topic will develop your understanding of the concepts related to locations on the Earth’s
surface and calculation of distances and time differences using latitude, longitude and time
zones.
Outcomes
• Convert units of time including 12-hour and 24-hour clocks.
• Interpret timetables and use them to solve problems.
• Locate positions on the Earth’s surface, using latitude and longitude.
• Find time differences between two places on Earth using time zones.
• Solve problems involving Coordinated Universal Time and the International Date Line.
• Solve practical problems using time zones in Australia and in neighbouring nations.


Knowledge check
376 Chapter 11 Working with time 11A
11A Units of time

Time is the ongoing sequence of events taking place: the past,
present and future. We measure time using seconds, minutes,
hours, days, weeks, months and years. One year is the time
it takes Earth to travel around the Sun. This is approximately
365 1 days. There are 30 days in September, April, June and
4
November; all the rest have 31 except for February, which has
28 days or 29 days in a leap year. Clocks measure time.
Time units
The table below outlines the time conversions for various time units.
Quantity Name of unit Symbol Value

Second s Base unit
Minute min 1 min = 60 s
Time
Hour h 1 h = 60 min
Day d 1 d = 24 h
Converting between units

The diagram below outlines the time conversions for various units. Follow the directions along the
arrows until you reach the desired unit. Most scientific calculators have a degrees-minutes-seconds
key .,,, or DMS that can be used to convert between hours, minutes and seconds.
TIME CONVERSIONS
days
× 24 ÷ 24
hours
× 60 ÷ 60
minutes
× 60 ÷ 60
seconds
Example 1: Converting units of time 11A
Complete a 3 h and 15 min = min b 10 080 min = d
S OLUTI O N:
1 To change hours to minutes multiply by 60. a 3 h 15 min = 3 × 60 + 15 min = 195 min
2 To change minutes to hours divide by 60. b 10 080 min = 10 080 ÷ 60
3 To change hours to days divide by 24. = 168 h
= 168 ÷ 24 = 7 d
24-hour time
The time of day is written in the 24-hour notation in the form hh:mm (hours:minutes). The day
begins at midnight (00:00) and the last minute of the day begins at 23:59. The advantage of the
24-hour clock is that it clearly distinguishes the time in the morning and the afternoon without the
a.m. and p.m. notation.
The 24-hour notation is used in many applications such as timetables, oven clocks and airport
arrivals and departures.
12-hour clock 24-hour clock 12-hour clock 24-hour clock

12:00 (midnight) 00:00 12:00 (noon) 12:00
1:00 a.m. 01:00 1:00 p.m. 13:00
2:00 a.m. 02:00 2:00 p.m. 14:00
3:00 a.m. 03:00 3:00 p.m. 15:00
4:00 a.m. 04:00 4:00 p.m. 16:00
5:00 a.m. 05:00 5:00 p.m. 17:00
6:00 a.m. 05:00 6:00 p.m. 18:00
7:00 a.m. 07:00 7:00 p.m. 19:00
8:00 a.m. 08:00 8:00 p.m. 20:00
9:00 a.m. 09:00 9:00 p.m. 21:00
10:00 a.m. 10:00 10:00 p.m. 22:00
11:00 a.m. 11:00 11:00 p.m. 23:00
12:00 a.m. 12:00 12:00 p.m. 24:00
24-HOUR TIME
24-hour notation is in the form hh:mm (hours:minutes).
Example 2: Using 24 -hour time 11A
a Convert 8:15 p.m. to 24-hour time.

b Write 21:45 in 12-hour time.
c How long is it between 18:00 and 23:15?
S OLUTI O N:
1 8:15 p.m. is in the afternoon. Add 12 to the hour (8). a 20:15
2 21:45 is a time in the afternoon. Subtract 12 from the hour (21). b 9:45 p.m.
3 Subtract the two times to calculate the time difference. c 23:15 – 18:00 = 5:15
4 Write the answer in words. It is 5 hours and
15 minutes between the
two times.
Example 1 1 Complete the following

a 2.5 h = min b 2 min = s c 20 d = h
d 40 min = s e 4.5 d = h f 10 h = min
g 720 min = h h 48 000 s = min i 96 h = d
j 1080 h = d k 390 min = h l 780 s = min
2 What unit of time is most appropriate to measure each of the following?

a Lesson at school b Reheating a meal in a microwave
c Age of a person d School holidays
e Accessing the internet f Movie
3 Find the number of seconds in:

a 1 hour b 1 day c 1 year
4 What time will it be:

a 4 hours after 5:30 p.m.? b 7 hours before 1:00 p.m.? c 17 hours before midday?
d 15 hours after 2:00 a.m.? e 3.5 hours after 1:00 p.m.? f 2.25 hours before 4:00 a.m.?
5 The time required to bake a cake in an oven is

1 h 9 min. When will the cake be finished if the
starting time are as follows?
a 5:00 a.m. b 9:00 a.m.
c 8:20 p.m. d 10:34 a.m.
e 5:44 p.m. f Midnight
g 3:56 p.m. h 10:51 a.m.
6 Add these times.

a 2 h 24 min + 2 h 14 min b 4 h 04 min + 1 h 46 min c 5 h 30 min + 3 h 30 min
d 7 h 41 min + 5 h 50 min e 11 h 29 min + 6 h 55 min f 9 h 09 min + 3 h 59 min
7 Subtract these times.

a 10 h 47 min − 2 h 22 min b 4 h 52 min − 1 h 40 min c 6 h 20 min − 5 h 08 min
d 8 h 10 min − 4 h 20 min e 5 h 34 min − 2 h 18 min f 10 h 46 min − 7 h 56 min
8 Find the difference between these times.

a 8:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m. b 2:15 a.m. and 9:25 a.m.
c 1:43 p.m. and 12:40 p.m. d 11:05 a.m. and 9:35 a.m.
e 1:30 p.m. and midnight f 6:23 a.m. and 5:25 p.m.
9 What is the time:

a 11 hours before 2 a.m.? b 5 hours after 7 p.m.?
c 1 1 hours after 6:30 a.m.? d 2 1 hours before 3:30 p.m.?
2 3
e 4 h and 11min after 1:45 p.m.? f 12 h and 50 min after 6:23 a.m.?
10 Lauren is a cyclist who recorded the following training times

at the gym.
1 h 21 min 59 min
2 h 05 min 1 h 47 min
45 min 1 h 35 min
a What is the total training time?
b What is the mean training time?
c What is the median training time?
Example 2 11 Write in 24-hour time.

a 2:00 a.m. b 10:30 p.m. c 8:41 p.m.
d 11:12 p.m. e 1:59 a.m. f Midnight
g 9:09 p.m. h 4:39 p.m. i 5:15 a.m.
12 Write in 12-hour time.

a 03:18 b 10:40 c 12:00
d 17:56 e 09:11 f 23:00
g 18:45 h 03:20 i 20:50
13 What is the time 5 hours and 29 minutes after the following times?
a 07:00 b 13:19 c 22:41
14 What is the time 6 hours and 20 minutes before the following times?
a 15:45 b 14:56 c 02:30
15 Ivy leaves home at 09:28 to go shopping. She returns at 13:48. How long, in hours and
minutes, had she been away?
16 A game of football starts at 14:12 and finishes at 15:59. What is the length of the game? Answer
in hours and minutes.
17 Alexis’s dad is going to pick her up from the cinema once the film has finished. If the film
starts at 17:35 and is 99 minutes long, at what time will he need to pick her up?
LEVEL 2
18 Copy and complete the following table for a Blu-ray player that uses 24-hour time.
Program (12-hour time) Time settings (24-hour time)

a 6:00 a.m. to 7:38 a.m.
b 10:25 a.m. to 12:35 p.m.
c 3:20 p.m. to 4:54 p.m.
d 6:30 p.m. to 8:05 p.m.
e 07:50 to 10:00
f 12:45 to 14:10
g 00:20 to 15:49
h 23:10 to 02:07
19 A movie runs for 212 minutes

a Convert this time to hours and minutes.
b It takes Sophie 34 minutes to drive to the cinema from home. What is the minimum time
Sophie needs to leave home if the movie starts at 16:08?
c What is the finishing time of the movie if the movie starts at 14:35?
d What is the starting time if the movie finishes at 11:10?
20 Sydney airport shows the arrival of a

Arrival
number of international flights. FLIGHT FROM LANDED GATE
a What is the arrival time of the London DB692 LONDON 1632 A2
flight in 12-hour time? AK721 NEW YORK 1735 B6
CS169 DUBAI 1805 A5
b How long is there between the flight AL379 ROME 1855 B2
from Toronto and the flight from AF4485 PARIS 1900 A1
New York? QA034 MADRID 1910 B4
c How long ago did the Rome flight arrive CA456 TORONTO 2030 B3
if the current time is 8:35 p.m.?
d How long ago did the Dubai flight arrive
if the current time is 9:45 p.m.?
LEVEL 3
21 Eliza worked from 10:30 a.m. until 4:00 p.m. on Friday, from 7:30 a.m. till 2:00 p.m. on
Saturday, and from 12 noon till 5:00 p.m. on Sunday.
a How many hours did Eliza work during the week?
b Express the time worked on Friday as a percentage of the total time worked during the
week. Answer correct to the nearest whole number.
11B Timetables 381
11B Timetables
A timetable is a list of times at which possible events or actions are intended to take place. There
are many different types of timetables, such as your school timetable, train timetables or airline
departures. Timetables are written using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
TIMETABLES
A timetable is a list of times at which possible events or actions are intended to take place.
Example 3: Reading and interpreting a train timetable 11B
This timetable is part of a rail timetable from Parramatta to Central.
a How long does the train take to travel from Granville to Burwood?
b At what time does the 15:59 train from Parramatta depart Strathfield?
c How long does the 15:46 train take to go from Parramatta to Redfern?
d Alan wants to travel from Parramatta and get to Central before 16:30. Describe the different
options shown on this timetable.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Departs Granville at 15:48 and arrives at a Time taken = 16:04 − 15:48 = 16 minutes
Burwood at 16:04. Subtract the times.
2 Read the right-hand side of the timetable. b The 15:59 train departs Strathfield at 16:17.
3 Departs Parramatta at 15:46 and arrives c Time taken = 16:10 − 15:46 = 24 minutes
at Redfern at 16:10 . Subtract the times.
4 Read the bottom of the timetable to d Alan could catch the all stations train departing
determine which trains arrive before at 15:44 and arriving at 16:17. Alternatively
16:30. Check that the trains depart fast trains depart at 15:46 arriving at 16:14 and
Parramatta. at 15:52 arriving at 16:20.
382 Chapter 11 Working with time 11B
Example 4: Reading and interpreting a train timetable 11B
The timetable opposite is part of a rail timetable from Condobolin to

Stockinbingal.
a How long does the trip take from Condobolin to Stockinbingal?
b Nina joins the train at Lake Cargelligo and gets off at Temora.
How long is her trip?
c Another train leaves Condobolin at 12:45 p.m. and travels at the
same speed and stops at the same stations. When will this train
arrive at Stockinbingal?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Departs Condobolin at 07:25 and arrives a Time taken = 12:00 − 07:25
at Stockinbingal at 12:00. = 4:35 or 4 h and 35 min
2 Departs Lake Cargelligo at 09:00 and b Time taken = 11:30 − 09:00
arrives at Temora at 11:30. = 2:30 or 2 h and 30 min
3 Add the time taken for the trip in part a to c Trips takes 4 h and 35 min
the departure time of 12:45 p.m. Arrivaltime = 12:45 + 04:35 = 05:20
∴Train arrives at 5:20 p.m.
Example 5: Reading and interpreting a bus timetable 11B
Part of a bus timetable is shown

opposite.
a Where does the 373 bus start
and finish?
b Where is stop 200 081?
c When does the bus arrive at
St James?
d How long does it take to travel
from Circular Quay to Museum
station at Liverpool St?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read timetable under bus number 373. a Circular Quay to Coogee
2 Read right-hand side of the timetable. b Martin Place Station
3 Read left-hand side of the timetable. c St James station at 11:06
4 Departs Circular Quay at 10:59 and arrives d Time taken = 11:11 − 10:59
at Museum station at 11:11. = 12 minutes
5 Subtract the times.
11B Timetables 383
Example 3 1 Use the train timetable below to answer the following questions.
a Find the time the 23:06 train from Town Hall arrives at:
i Redfern ii Tempe iii Arncliffe
b How long does it take for the 23:05 to travel from Bondi Junction to:
i Kings Cross? ii Martin Place? iii Central?
c How long does it take for the 22:58 train from Edgecliff to reach Arncliffe?
d How long does the train leaving Kings Cross at 22:51 take to get to Sydenham?
e At how many stations will the 22:45 train from Bondi Junction stop at after leaving Bondi
Junction?
f Maya needs to be in Central by 23:00. What is the latest train from Bondi Junction she can
take to get there on time?
g Dylan gets to Wolli Creek on time at 23:20. At what time did that train leave Martin Place?
Example 5 2 Use the ferry timetable on the right to

answer the following questions.
a Where does the F2 ferry start?
b Where is stop 20883?
c When does the ferry arrive at
Mosman?
d How long does it take to travel from
Circular Quay to Mosman at 11:00?
3 Use the bus timetable below to answer the following questions.
a At what time does the earliest 423 bus leave Earlwood?

b How many 423 and 426 buses take passengers to the city from Newtown departing between
5:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m.?
c What is the latest time to catch a bus from Dulwich Hill and get to Martin Place by 6:30 a.m.?
d Edward is waiting at the Marrickville stop for a bus to the city on Tuesday at 6:00 a.m. What
is the earliest time he can expect to be in Martin Place?
e How long does it take to travel on the 06:00 bus from Kingsgrove to Martin Place?
4 Use the Manly to Darling Harbour fast ferry timetable to answer the following questions.
a How long does it take to travel on the 7:35 ferry from Darling Harbour to Manly?
b How long does it take to travel on the 19:05 ferry from Darling Harbour to Manly?
c What is the latest time to catch a ferry from Manly and get to Darling Harbour by 9:00?
d What is the latest time to catch a ferry from Pyrmont Bay and get to Manly by 18:45?
e Eve is waiting at North Sydney for a ferry to Darling Harbour at 8:00 a.m. How long does
she need to wait?
11B Timetables 385
5 Use the airline timetable shown (ignore differences in time zones) to answer the
following questions.
a What is the scheduled departure time in
12-hour format?
b From where is airline flight JQ27
departing and where is it arriving?
c How long is flight JQ27?
a What is the scheduled arrival time in
12-hour format?
b From where is airline flight SQ232
departing and where is it arriving?
c How long is flight SQ232?
a From where is airline flight JL4026 departing
and where is it arriving?
b How long is flight JL4026 on the 25 Mar?
c How long is flight JL4018 on the 25 Mar?
d How long is flight JL4018 on the 26 Mar?
e From where is airline flight QF0026 departing
and where is it arriving?
f How long is flight QF0026 on the 25 Mar?
8 Use the airline timetable below (ignore differences in time zones) to answer the
a From where is airline flight QF1 departing and where is it arriving?

b How long is flight QF1 from Sydney to Dubai?
c How long is flight QF1 from Dubai to London?
d For how long does flight QF1 stopover in Dubai?
e How long is flight QF1?
LEVEL 2
Example 4 9 The timetable opposite is part of a rail timetable from Moree

Town to Grafton.
a How many stops are there after leaving Moree Town up to
Grafton?
b How long does the trip take from Moree Town to Grafton?
c Another train leaves Moree Town at 17:53 and travels at
the same speed and stops at the same stations. When will
this train arrive at Grafton?
d How long does the trip take from Warialda to Jackadgery?
e Layla joins the train at Inverell and gets off at Grafton.
How long is her trip?
f Another train leaves Inverell at 06:43 and travels at the
same speed and stops at the same stations. When will this
train arrive at Grafton?
LEVEL 3
10 Research the public transport system in NSW to determine the best type of transport, the
travelling time and the cost of public transport for the following trips.
a Sydney at Central to the Blue Mountains b Sydney at Central to the Bradman
museum in Bowral
c Sydney at Central to Hawkesbury River d Dubbo zoo to Sydney airport
e Byron bay to Newcastle f Parliament house in Canberra to Sydney
Olympic park
g Armidale to Parkes Observatory h Wollongong to Tamworth
11C Latitude and longitude

Earth’s surface is divided into parallels of latitude and meridians of longitude, which are imaginary
lines on the Earth’s surface, forming circles and a grid. This imaginary grid is used to specify the
position of a point on the Earth’s surface. Latitude is an angle north or south of the equator, and
longitude is an angle east or west of the Greenwich meridian. The angle of latitude is the angle
at the Earth’s centre between the plane of the equator and a line from the centre to the parallel
of latitude. The angle of longitude is likewise formed at the Earth’s centre between the plane of
the Greenwich median and a line from the centre of the Earth to the meridian of longitude. The
Greenwich or prime meridian is an imaginary north–south line that passes through the town of
Greenwich (London).
Latitude is given first (N or S) and then the longitude (E or W). For example, the position of Sydney
is (33°S, 151°E). It is 33° south of the equator and 151° east of the Greenwich meridian.
Example 6: Finding a position on Earth’s surface 11C
A diagram of Earth’s surface is shown.
50° N
B 30° E
0°
A
Greenwich
meridian
60° S
a What is the latitude and longitude of point A?

b What is the latitude and longitude of point B?
c What are the coordinates of a point 60° due south of point A?
d What are the coordinates of a point 10° due east of point B?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Latitude is the angle north or south of the equator (0°). a Point A is at (0°, 30°E).
Point A is on the equator.
2 Longitude is the angle east or west of the Greenwich
meridian (30°E).
3 Latitude is the angle north or south of the b Point B is at (50° N, 0°).
equator (50° N) .
4 Longitude is the angle east or west of the Greenwich
meridian (0°). Point B is on the Greenwich meridian.
5 Point A is on the equator (0°) hence the required point c Point A is at (60°S, 30°E).
is 60°S. It has the same longitude as point A (30°E).
6 Point B is on the Greenwich meridian (0°) hence the
required point is 10°E. It has the same latitude as d Point B is at (50° N, 10°E).
point B (50° N).
Latitude Longitude
Measures the angular distance north and south Measures the angular distance east and west of
of the equator (0°) the Greenwich meridian (0°)
45°N Meridians of
Parallels of longitude
latitude
0° Equator 20°W 20°E
0° Greenwich
45°S
meridian
Example 7: Applying latitude and longitude 11C
Brisbane is located at (27°S, 153°E). Perth is located at (31°S, 115°E).

a What is the difference in longitude between Brisbane and Perth?
b Which city is closer to the equator?
15˚S
30˚S
120˚E 135˚E 150˚E
S OLUTI O N:
1 Longitude of Brisbane is 153°E and a Longitude difference = 153 − 115
Perth is 115°E. Both cities are east = 38 degrees
of the Greenwich meridian.
2 Subtract the angles to find the
difference in longitude.
3 Latitude of Brisbane is 27°S and b Brisbane is closer to the equator
Perth is 31°S. Both cities are south (smaller angle).
of the equator.
4 Smaller angle is closer to the
equator.
390 Chapter 11 Working with time 11C
Example 6 1 A diagram of Earth’s surface is shown below. The coordinates of point A are (60° N, 70°E).
a What are the coordinates of point B?
b What are the coordinates of point C?
c What is the maximum value possible for latitude? Where does it occur?
N
Greenwich B A
meridian
0°
Example 7 2 Brussels is located at (50° N, 4°E). Lima is located at (12°S, 77° W).
a Which city is closer to the equator?
b What is the difference in latitude between Brussels and Lima?
c What is the difference in longitude between Brussels and Lima?
3 Tehran is located at (35° N, 51°E). Wellington is located at (41°S, 174°E).

a Which city is closer to the Greenwich meridian?
b What is the difference in latitude between Teheran and Wellington?
c What is the difference in longitude between Teheran and Wellington?
4 Nagoya is located at (35° N, 136°E). Determine the coordinates of a point that is:
a 20° due south of Nagoya
b 20° due north of Nagoya
c 20° due west of Nagoya
d 20° due east of Nagoya.
5 Belgrade is located at (44° N, 20°E). Determine the coordinates of a point that is:
a 40° due south of Belgrade
b 40° due north of Belgrade
c 40° due west of Belgrade
d 40° due east of Belgrade.
6 Munich has the coordinates (48° N, 11°E) and Paris has the coordinates (48° N, 2°E)
a What do these cities have in common in terms of their position on Earth’s surface?
b What is the longitude of a point 20° due south of Munich?
c Which city is further from the Greenwich meridian?
d What are the coordinates of a point 80° due east of Paris?
LEVEL 2
7 The following table shows the latitude and longitude of cities around the world.
City Latitude Longitude

Adelaide 34°S 139°E
Athens 37° N 23°E
Birmingham 52° N 1° W
Cairo 30° N 31°E
Montevideo 34°S 56° W
Rio de Janeiro 22°S 43° W
Sofia 42° N 23°E
Warsaw 52° N 21°E
Kuala Lumpur 3° N 101°E
a Which city is closest to the following latitudes?

i 10° N ii 27°S
iii Equator iv Latitude of Athens
b Which city is closest to the following longitudes?
i 121°E ii 50° W
iii Greenwich meridian iv Longitude of Sofia
c List the cities in the Northern Hemisphere.
d List the cities in the Western Hemisphere.
e Which cities have the same latitude?
f Which cities have the same longitude?
g Which city is closest to the North Pole?
h Which city is closest to the South Pole?
LEVEL 3
8 Hobart is located at (42°S, 147°E) and Port Moresby is located at (9°S, 147°E).
a Describe the relative positions of these cities on Earth’s surface.
b What are the coordinates of a point half-way between these cities?
9 Kingston is located at (17° N, 76° W). Jakarta is located at (6°S, 106°E) .

a What is the difference in latitude between Kingston and Jakarta?
b What is the difference in longitude between Kingston and Jakarta?
c What are the coordinates of a point 20° due south of Kingston?
d What are the coordinates of a point 80° due east of Jakarta?
392 Chapter 11 Working with time 11D
11D Time zones

A time zone is a region of the Earth that has a uniform standard time or local time. There are
24 time zones (from −12 to +12) roughly divided by longitude (see the table of international time
zones on page 394). The time zone number indicates how many hours to add or subtract from the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The UTC reflects the mean solar time along the Earth’s prime
meridian and is still widely known as the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The International Date
Line is an imaginary line through the Pacific Ocean that corresponds to 180º longitude. It runs from
the North Pole to the South Pole and defines the change of one calendar day to the next.
TIME ZONE
Everywhere within a time zone has the same time.

• Positive time zone number – ahead of UTC or GMT. Add the time.
• Negative time zone number – behind of UTC or GMT. Subtract the time.
Australian time zones

Australia has three time zones called the Eastern Standard Time (+10), Central Standard Time
(+9.5) and Western Standard Time (+8). On the map below, DST stands for Daylight Saving Time.
15˚S
Western Standard
Time (+10) Central
Standard
Time (+9.5)
Eastern
(DST) Standard Time
30˚S (+10)
(DST)
(DST)
(DST)
(DST)
120˚E 135˚E 150˚E
11D Time zones 393
Example 8: Solving problems using a time zone 11D
Hobart is located in the Australian Eastern Standard Time zone (+10) and Greenwich is at the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) in time zone (0). What is the time in:
a Hobart if it is 8:00 p.m. in Greenwich?
b Greenwich if it is 5:30 a.m. in Hobart?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Hobart is in the EST (+10) zone and is 10 hours a Hobart = 8:00 p.m. + 10 hours
ahead of UTC at Greenwich. Add the time. = 6:00 a.m.
2 Greenwich is at UTC and is 10 hours behind Hobart, b Greenwich = 5:30 a.m. − 10 hours
which is in EST (+10). Subtract the time. = 7:30 p.m.
Daylight saving time

Daylight Saving Time (DST) is the practice of advancing clocks one hour during the warmer
months of the year. There are many countries that adopt daylight savings time to take advantage
of the increased hours of sunlight. In Australia, daylight saving is observed in New South Wales,
Victoria, South Australia, Tasmania and the Australian Capital Territory. Daylight saving is not
observed in Queensland, the Northern Territory or Western Australia. Daylight saving time in
Australia begins on the first Sunday in October, when clocks are put forward one hour. It ends on
the first Sunday in April, when clocks are put back one hour.
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
For daylight saving time, add one hour
Example 9: Solving problems using daylight saving time 11D
Jack, in Sydney, wants to phone his mother in Perth. Sydney is located in UTC (+10) and Perth
is in UTC (+8). Daylight saving time is operating in Sydney. When should Jack ring to reach his
mother at 6:00 p.m. in Perth?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Sydney is in UTC (+10) and 2 hours ahead of Sydney = 6:00 a.m. + 2 hours
Perth (+8) Add the time. = 8:00 p.m.
2 Sydney is in daylight saving, so add one hour. Sydney = 8:00 p.m. + 1 h

= 9:00 p.m.
3 Write answer in words. Jack should ring when it is 9:00 p.m.

in Sydney.
Table of international time zones

The standard time zones and the major places in each zone are shown below. This table does not
take into account time differences as a result of daylight saving time.
Time zone Major places

−12 Eniwetok
−11 Midway Island, Samoa
−10 Cook Is, Honolulu, Tahiti
−9 Alaska
−8 Anchorage, Los Angeles, San Francisco, Seattle, Vancouver
−7 Alberta, Denver, Edmonton, Phoenix, Salt Lake City, Santa Fe
−6 Chicago, Dallas, El Paso, Guatemala, New Orleans, Mexico City
−5 Boston, Kingston, Lima, Miami, Montreal, New York, Quebec
−4 Caracas, Labrador, La Paz, Santiago
−3 Brasilia, Buenos Aires, Georgetown, Montevideo, Rio de Janeiro
−2 Mid-Atlantic
−1 Azores, Cape Verde Is
0 Belfast, Dublin, Edinburgh, Iceland, Lisbon, London, Morocco
+1 Amsterdam, Berlin, Madrid, Prague, Paris, Rome, Vienna
+2 Athens, Cairo, Cape Town, Greece, Harare, Helsinki, Istanbul
+3 Baghdad, Beirut, Kuwait, Moscow, Nairobi, Tehran
+4 Abu Dhabi, Baku, Kabul, Kazan, Muscat, Tehran, Volgograd
+5 Colombo, Islamabad, Kolkata, Madras, New Delhi
+6 Dhaka, Kathmandu, Colombo, Sri Lanka
+7 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta, Phnom Penh
+8 Beijing, Hong Kong, Kuala Lumpur, Manila, Perth, Singapore
+9 Osaka, Seoul, Sapporo, Seoul, Tokyo
+9.5 Adelaide, Darwin, Alice Springs, Broken Hill
+10 Brisbane, Canberra, Hobart, Melbourne, Port Moresby, Sydney
+10.5 Lord Howe Is
+11 Magadan, New Caledonia, Solomon Is, Vanuatu
+12 Auckland, Christchurch, Fiji, Marshall Is, Wellington, Suva
11D Time zones 395
1 Copy and complete this table to show the equivalent times in three Australian time zones.
WST (+8) CST (+9.5) EST (+10)

1:00 p.m.
6:30 a.m.
8:20 p.m.
4:19 a.m.
Midnight
9:12 a.m.
Example 8 2 What is the time in the following places if it is 6:30 p.m. in Sydney EST(+10)?
a Perth (WST + 8) b Darwin (CST + 9.5)
c Adelaide (CST + 9.5) d Melbourne (EST + 10)
3 What is the time in the following places if it is 9:40 a.m. in Alice Springs (CST + 9.5)?
a Fremantle (WST + 8) b Wollongong (EST + 10)
c Port Adelaide (CST + 9.5) d Hobart (EST + 10)
4 What is the time in the following places if it is 2:00 p.m. in Greenwich?

a Athens (UTC + 2)
b Mexico city (UTC − 6)
c Singapore (UTC + 8)
d Santiago (UTC − 4)
5 What is the time in the following places if it is 1:00 a.m.

Sunday in Greenwich?
a Kuwait (UTC + 3)
b Alaska (UTC − 9)
c Brisbane (UTC + 10)
d Cape Verde Is (UTC − 1)
6 Find the time difference between the following cities.

a Vanuatu (UTC + 11) and Kolkata (UTC + 5)
b Denver (UTC − 7) and Montevideo (UTC − 3)
c Bangkok (UTC + 7) and Boston (UTC − 5)
This line and sculpture mark
d Phoenix (UTC − 7) and Madrid (UTC + 1) the Greenwich Meridian.
e Baghdad (UTC + 3) and Christchurch (UTC + 12)
f Chicago (UTC − 6) and Cape Verde Is (UTC − 1)
g Abu Dhabi (UTC + 4) and Edmonton (UTC − 7)
h Samoa (UTC − 11) and Rome (UTC + 1)
LEVEL 2
7 What is the time in the following cities if it is 8:00 a.m. in Cairo (UTC + 2)?
a Abu Dhabi (UTC + 4) b Brasilia (UTC − 3)
c Berlin (UTC + 1) d Edmonton (UTC − 7)
8 What is the time in the following cities if it is 11:00 p.m. Monday in Dallas (UTC − 7)?
a Honolulu (UTC − 10) b Harare (UTC + 2)
c New York (UTC − 7) d Broken Hill (UTC + 9.5)
9 Find the time in the following Australian cities if it is 4:00 p.m. in Sydney (UTC + 10).
a Brisbane (UTC + 10) b Perth (UTC + 8)
c Darwin (UTC + 9.5) d Lord Howe Is (UTC + 10.5)
10 The time in Greenwich on the prime meridian is midnight on Monday 1 November. What is the
time and day in Seattle (UTC − 8)?
11 Newcastle is part of the Eastern Standard Time zone and is 10 hours ahead of UTC. What is the
standard time in Greenwich when it is 5:00 p.m. Friday in Newcastle?
LEVEL 3
12 Sydney is 10 hours ahead of UTC and Seattle is 8 hours behind UTC.

a What is the time difference between the two cities?
b What is the time difference if Sydney is on daylight saving time and Seattle is on
standard time?
Example 9 13 What is the time difference between Tasmania and Sri Lanka if Tasmania is on daylight saving
time and Sri Lanka is on standard time? Tasmania is 10 hours ahead of UTC and Sri Lanka is
5 hours ahead of UTC.
14 People in New South Wales (UTC + 10) turn their clocks forwards one hour for daylight saving.
Western Australia (UTC + 8) does not adjust its clocks for daylight saving.
a In summer, what is the time in New South Wales if it is 3:30 p.m. in Western Australia?
b In summer, what is the time in Western Australia if it is 10:30 a.m. in New South Wales?
15 Daylight saving operates in Victoria but not in the Northern Territory. Melbourne is part of the
Australian Eastern Standard Time (UTC + 10) zone and Darwin is part of the Australian Central
Standard Time (UTC + 9.5) zone.
a In summer, what is the time in the Northern Territory if it is 1:15 a.m. in Victoria?
b In summer, what is the time in Victoria if it is 10:30 p.m. in the Northern Territory?
11E Time difference and local time 397
11E Time difference and local time

The international time zones can be used to calculate the local time in two locations. First, find the
time difference between the two locations by subtracting the time zones. Then draw an east–west time
line and place the locations on the time line. To find the local time you need to add or subtract the time
difference. If the required time is east of the given time then add the time difference. Alternatively, if
the required time is west of the given time then subtract the time difference.
TIME DIFFERENCE AND LOCAL TIME
To calculate the local time:

1 Find the time difference between the two locations.
2 Place the locations on an east–west time line. − West East +
3 Find the local time by adding or subtracting the time difference.
• East of location with the given time (moving west to east). Add the time difference.
• West of location with the given time (moving east to west). Subtract the time difference.
Example 10: Finding the time difference and local time 11E
Patrick is working in Seoul (UTC + 9) and needs to travel to Chicago (UTC − 6).
a What is the time difference between these places?
b What is the local time in Chicago if it is 5:00 p.m. in Seoul?
c A flight leaves Seoul at 5:00 p.m. and flies non-stop to Chicago. The flight takes 14 hours.
What is the time in Chicago when the flight arrives?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Time difference is determined by the a Time difference = +9 − ( −6)
difference in longitude. Add the longitude = 15 h
of Chicago to that of Seoul.
2 Draw an east–west time line. b Chicago Seoul
3 Mark Chicago (UTC − 6) on the left-hand − West East +
side and Seoul (UTC + 9) on the right-hand
side.
4 Require the time in Chicago. It is west of Time in Chicago = 5:00 p.m. − 15 h
the location with the time information. = 2:00 a.m.
Subtract the time difference.
5 Write the answer in words. Time in Chicago is 2:00 a.m.
6 Flight takes 14 hours. Add the time for the c Time in Chicago = 2:00 a.m. + 14 h
flight to the local time of the destination. = 4:00 p.m.
7 Write the answer in words. Time in Chicago is 4:00 p.m.
Example 11: Finding the time difference and local time 11E
Moana is planning a trip from Suva in Fiji

(UTC + 12) to Miami in Florida (UTC − 5).
a What is the time difference between these
cities?
b What is the time and day in Miami if it is
10:10 a.m. on Wednesday 6 January in Suva?
c Moana boards a plane at 2:30 p.m. on 7 April
Suva time and the flight lasts 16 hours. What
is the local time and date in Miami when she
arrives?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Draw an east–west time line. a Miami Suva
2 Mark Miami (−5) on the left-
− West East +
hand side and Suva (+12) on the
right-hand side.
3 Time difference is determined Time difference = 12 + 5
by adding the time ahead of = 17 h
UTC(+12) and the time behind
UTC( −5).
4 Require the time in Miami. It is b Time in Miami = 10:10 a.m. − 17 h
west of the location with the = 5:10 p.m.
time information, so subtract the
time.
5 Subtracting 17 hours from
10:10 p.m. results in it being
the previous day (5 January).
6 Write the answer in words. Miami’s date is Tuesday 5 January and the time
is 5:10 p.m.
7 Subtract the time difference c Time in Miami = 2:30 p.m. − 17 h + 16 h
(17 h) to find the local time in = 1:30 p.m.
Miami.
8 Flight takes 16 hours. Add the
time for the flight to the local time
at the destination.
9 Evaluate. Local time in Miami is 1:30 p.m. on
10 Write the answer in words. 7 April.
11E Time difference and local time 399
Example 10 1 Lucas lives in Strasbourg and his sister Kayla lives in Vancouver.
a Calculate the time difference between Strasbourg (UTC + 1) and Vancouver (UTC − 8).
b What is the time in Strasbourg if it is 3:00 p.m. on a Monday afternoon in Vancouver?
2 It is 9:00 p.m. on Friday 30 March in Greenwich.

a What is the date and local time in New Orleans (UTC − 8)?
b What is the date and local time in Canberra (UTC + 10)?
3 Julia lives in Sydney (UTC + 10) and her son Tyler lives in Los Angeles (UTC − 8).
a What is the time difference between Sydney and Los Angeles?
b Julia would like to telephone Tyler at 00:00 Monday for New Year’s Eve. At what time and
on what day in Sydney should Julia phone?
4 Patrick lives in Melbourne (UTC + 10). He wants to watch a football game being played in
Brazil (UTC − 2) starting at 7:00 p.m. on Saturday. What is the time and day in Melbourne
when the game starts?
5 A One Day International cricket game between Australia and the West Indies starts at 11:00 a.m.
on 26 November, in Brisbane. Blake lives in Kingston, Jamaica, and wants to watch the game on
television. Brisbane is 10 hours ahead of UTC and Kingston is 5 hours behind UTC. At what
time and date should Blake switch on his television to watch the start of the game? Queensland
does not have daylight saving.
6 Jasmine lives in Bathurst (UTC + 11, as Bathurst is on daylight saving time), and wants to
telephone her mother in London (UTC 0) so that she receives the call at 8:00 a.m. on Christmas
Day. On what day and at what time in Bathurst should Jasmine make the call to London?
7 Andrew is in Moscow (UTC + 3) and wants to record the USA Open tennis final. The tennis
match is due to begin at 2:00 p.m. on Sunday in New York (UTC − 5). On what day and at what
time will Andrew need to start recording?
400 Chapter 11 Working with time 11E
LEVEL 2
Example 11 8 A plane leaves Melbourne (UTC + 10) and flies to Paris (UTC + 1). The flight takes 23 hours.
The plane leaves Melbourne at 4:00 p.m. Thursday. On what day and at what time does the
plane arrive in Paris?
9 Na calls a friend in Beijing from Los Angeles. Beijing is 8 hours ahead of UTC and Los
Angeles is 8 hours behind UTC. It is 8:15 p.m. in Los Angeles and they talk for 30 minutes.
What is the time in Beijing at the end of the phone call?
10 Adelaide (UTC + 9.5) is located in the Central Standard Time zone. Melbourne (UTC + 10) is
located in the Australian Eastern Standard Time zone.
a What is the time in Adelaide if it is 5:45 a.m. in Melbourne?

b What is the time in Melbourne if it is 2:10 p.m. in Adelaide?
c At what time will a train arrive in Adelaide if it departs Melbourne at 7:00 a.m. and travel
time is 10 hours?
LEVEL 3
11 Andrew is planning a trip from Townsville (UTC + 9.5) to Hong Kong (UTC + 8).
a What is the time and day in Hong Kong if it is 7:30 a.m. on 5 June in Townsville?
b A flight leaves Townsville at 7:30 a.m. and flies non-stop to Hong Kong. The flight is in the
air for 7 hours. What time and day is it in Hong Kong when the flight arrives?
12 A boat departs Brisbane on Tuesday 12 October at 12:00 p.m. and takes 15 12 days to travel
west to Honolulu. Brisbane is 10 hours ahead of UTC and Honolulu is 10 hours behind UTC.
a What is the local time and day in Honolulu when the boat departs Brisbane?
b What is the local time and day when the boat arrives in Honolulu?
13 A plane leaves Sydney at 2:00 a.m. Tuesday 17 May for an 8 hour flight to Kabul. Sydney is
10 hours ahead of UTC and Kabul is 4 hours ahead of UTC.
a What is the local time and day when the plane arrives in Kabul?
b The return flight leaves Kabul at 2:00 p.m. on the next Friday. What is the time and day
when the plane arrives in Sydney?
Summary
Units of time days
1 min = 60 s × 24 ÷ 24
1h = 60 min hours
× 60 ÷ 60
1 day = 24 h minutes
× 60 ÷ 60
seconds
Timetables A timetable is a list of times at which possible events or actions are

intended to take place.
Latitude Measures the angular distance 45°N

Parallels of
north and south of the equator latitude
(0°) 0° Equator
45°S
Longitude Measures the angular distance Meridians of

east and west of the Greenwich longitude
20°W 20°E
meridian (0°)
0° Greenwich
meridian
Time zones Time zones have the same time irrespective of time differences.
• Positive time zone number – ahead of UTC or GMT
• Negative time zone number – behind of UTC or GMT
Time difference To calculate the local time:

1 Find the time difference between the two locations.
2 Place the locations on an east–west time line.
3 Find the local time by adding or subtracting the time difference.
• East of location with the given time (moving west to east): add the
time difference.
• West of location with the given time (moving east to west):
subtract the time difference.
Daylight The practice of advancing clocks by 1 hour in the warmer months to take
Saving Time (OST) advantage of the longer daylight.
402 Chapter 11 Working with time
Review
1 Violet works on her homework from 3:45 p.m. until 5:08 p.m. each weekday. How much time
does Violet spend doing her homework over the week?
A 1 h 23 min B 5 h 15 min C 6 h 55 min D 9 h 01 min
2 The school bus takes 49 minutes to get from Joseph’s house to the school. If school starts at
8:30 a.m., what is the latest time Joseph can catch the bus to get to school on time?
A 7:19 a.m. B 7:41 a.m. C 7:51 a.m. D 9:19 a.m.
3 A train leaves the station at 7:28 a.m. The journey to its final destination takes 6 hours and
54 minutes. What is the train’s arrival time?
A 1:22 a.m. B 2:22 a.m. C 1:22 p.m. D 2:22 p.m.
4 Use the train timetable below to answer the following question.
How long does the train leaving Museum at 11:12 take to get to Redfern?
A 17 s B 29 s C 11 min 29 s D 17 min
5 The coordinates of Dublin are (53° N, 6° W). What are the coordinates of Hamburg if it is 16°
east of Dublin?
A (53° N, 10°E) B (53° N, 22° W) C (69° N, 6° W) D (37° N, 6° W)
6 What is the time difference between Singapore (UTC + 8) and Canberra (UTC + 10)?
A 2h B 3h C 18 h D 80 h
7 What is the time in St John’s (UTC − 3.5) if it is 4.00 a.m. in Dallas (UTC − 6)?
A 1:30 a.m. B 2:00 a.m. C 6:30 a.m. D 7:00 a.m.
8 The time in Greenwich on the prime meridian is 3:00 p.m. What is the standard time in Kuala
Lumpur (UTC + 8) ?
A 11:00 p.m. B 6:00 a.m. C 11:00 a.m. D 6:00 p.m.
Review
a 120 min = s b 3.5days = h c 7 h = min
d 630 min = h e 24 000 s = min f 120 h = days
g 1032 h = days h 750 min = h i 960 s = min
2 What is the time 7 hours and 10 minutes after the following times?
a 08:00 b 13:25 c 22:50
3 Elizabeth and Hoshi get 1 hour and 24 minutes of homework each weekday. Elizabeth takes
5 minutes less to do her homework on a Tuesday, and 5 minutes less each subsequent day up to
and including Friday.
a How long does Hoshi spend on homework each week?
b How much time does Elizabeth spend doing her homework each week?
c How much more spare time does Elizabeth get than Hoshi each week?
4 The school assembly starts at 9:50 a.m. It lasts for 28 minutes. Then there are sports
announcements for another 8 minutes before the students are dismissed. At what time are the
students dismissed?
5 Luke’s football team starts its game at 10:15 a.m. The team plays two halves that are
25 minutes each and there is a 6-minute break at half time.
a Luke scores a goal 5 minutes after half time. At what time does he score his goal?
b At what time does the game finish?
6 Use the ferry timetable to answer the following

questions.
a How long does it take to travel on the 6: 22 ferry
from Circular Quay to Rose Bay?
b How long does it take to travel on the 6:59 ferry
from Circular Quay to Double Bay?
c Stella is waiting at Circular Quay at 6:30 a.m.
for a ferry to Double Bay. How long does she
need to wait?
7 Karachi is located at (25° N, 67°E) and Salvador is

located at (13°S, 39° W).
a Which city is closer to the Greenwich meridian?
b What is the difference in latitude between Karachi and Salvador?
c What is the difference in longitude between Karachi and Salvador?
404
Review Chapter 11 Working with time
8 Monterrey is located at (26° N, 100° W) and Auckland is located at (37°S, 174°E).

a What is the difference in latitude between Monterrey and Auckland?
b What is the difference in longitude between Monterrey and Auckland?
c What are the coordinates of a point 50° due south of Monterrey?
d What are the coordinates of a point 50° due west of Auckland?
9 What is the time in Boston (UTC − 5) when it is 1: 00 p.m. in Hanoi (UTC + 7)?
10 A flight from Sydney (UTC + 10) to Adelaide (UTC + 9.5) takes two hours, flying time.
a What is the time difference in minutes between Sydney and Adelaide?
b A plane leaves Sydney at 7: 00 a.m. At what time will it arrive in Adelaide, taking into
account the flying time?
11 Perth (UTC + 8) is located in the Western Standard Time zone. Brisbane (UTC + 10) is located
in the Eastern Standard Time zone.
a What is the time difference in hours between Perth and Brisbane?
b What is the time in Perth if it is 5: 00 p.m. in Brisbane?
12 The Gold Coast’s time zone is UTC + 10 and Bali’s time zone is UTC + 8.
a What is the time in Bali if the time in the Gold Coast is 9: 00 a.m.?
b A flight leaves the Gold Coast at 11: 00 a.m. and flies non-stop to Bali. The flight is in the air
for 3 hours. At what time does the flight arrive in Bali?
13 Fremantle (UTC + 8) is located in the Western Standard Time zone. Dubbo (UTC + 10) is
located in the Eastern Standard Time zone.
a Isabella, who is in Dubbo, rang a friend in Fremantle at 8:00 p.m. on a Saturday. What day
and time was it in Fremantle?
b Isabella caught a plane, at 8: 00 p.m. on a Saturday, from Dubbo to Fremantle. The travel
time for the trip was 5 hours. When will Isabella arrive in Fremantle?
14 Molly flew from Sydney (UTC + 10) to Chittagong (UTC + 6). Her plane left Sydney at
8:30 a.m. Thursday (Sydney time), stopped for 4 hours in Singapore and arrived in Chittagong at
1:00 p.m. Thursday (Chittagong time). What was the total flying time?
15 Lucy is sailing across the Pacific Ocean. At 8:30 a.m. on Saturday 9 July her position is
(UTC − 8) and she is heading for Tahiti at (UTC − 10). At 8:30 a.m. on Saturday 9 July, she
rings her sister in Tahiti. What is the local time and date when her sister takes the call?
12 Syllabus topic — F1.3 Budgeting and household expenses
Budgeting and
household
expenses
This topic will allow you to develop an appropriate budget for a given situation and justify
various types of financial decisions.
Outcomes
• Interpret information about the costs from house bills.
• Use a budget to purchase a motor vehicle.
• Plan the purchase of a car.
• Determine the cost of repayments and total amount repaid on a loan.
• Describe the different types of motor vehicle insurance.
• Calculate the cost of stamp duty on a vehicle.
• Calculate the fuel consumption and running costs of a vehicle.
• Prepare a personal budget for a given income, taking into account expenses.


Knowledge check
406 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12A
12A Household bills

Household bills are the costs associated with living in a home. They are a big percentage of the
expenses in a budget. Household bills include council rates, electricity and gas bills, water and
sewerage rates, telephone bills and internet connection.
Example 1: Reading household bills 12A
Answer the following questions using the above telephone account.

a What was the amount of the previous account?
b What is the due date?
c How much GST is charged?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Read ‘Previous Account’. a Previous account is $63.42 .
2 Read the box ‘New charges due’. b Due date is 11 March.
3 Read ‘GST’. c GST charged is $6.13.
12A Household bills 407
Example 1 1 Answer the following questions using this electricity account.
a When was this electricity account issued?

b What is the account number?
c What is the total amount due?
d What is the due date?
e How much GST is charged?
f What is the charge for the peak use of electricity?
g How much was the last account?
h By how much has the bill increased from the last bill?
i Express the increase as a percentage of the last bill. Answer correct to two decimal places.
408 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12A
2 The usage summary of a quarterly gas account is shown below.
a What was the average daily gas usage for the quarter?
b What was the average daily gas usage at the same time last year?
c What is the average cost per day for gas?
d What was the percentage decrease in gas usage?
e Describe the greenhouse gas emissions for this quarter.
3 The graph below is part of an electricity account issued to a customer.

Average daily use
12
10
8
kWh
0 Apr Jul Oct Jan Apr
a How many times per year is the electricity meter read?

b What unit is used to measure electricity?
c What was the average daily use in the October quarter?
d Which quarter had the greatest usage of electricity?
12A Household bills 409
LEVEL 2
4 Lucy received her natural gas account.

Amount used Charges Cost
Next 13900 MJ 1.360 cents per MJ
Supply fee $40.00
a Calculate the cost of the first 5500 MJ. Answer to the nearest cent.
b Calculate the cost of the next 13 900 MJ. Answer to the nearest cent.
c What is the total charge? Answer to the nearest cent.
5 Local council rates increased by 4%. The old rates for a property were $2200. What is the new
rate for this property, correct to the nearest dollar?
6 Amy uses a 1.5 kilowatt hair dryer for a total of 8 hours. She is charged at a rate of 14.81 cents
per kilowatt-hour.
a How many kilowatt-hours were used by the hair dryer?
b What is the cost of using the hair dryer? Answer to the nearest cent.
7 Council rates for a property valued at $374 000 are calculated using the table below.
Council rates Charge
Residential rate 0.004155 cents in the dollar
Garbage rate $202.80
Water and sewerage service $114.99
Water usage charge 94 kL at $1.3390 per kL
Find the amount payable to the nearest cent for:

a residential rate b water usage
c garbage d total rates payable on this property.
LEVEL 3
8 An energy company’s charges for gas over a 3-month period are shown in the table.
Usage charge
Additional MJ over 750 1.3330 cents per MJ
a Lucy used 2250 MJ of gas in this period. What is the cost of this gas? Answer to the nearest cent.
b What percentage of Lucy’s gas usage was charged at the lower rate? Answer correct to two
decimal places.
410 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12B
12B Purchasing a car

The cost of a purchasing a motor vehicle depends on many factors. A motor vehicle is not an
investment. It decreases in value immediately. In the first year of ownership, a new car can lose up
to 20% of its value, and by the fifth year, your car will have decreased in price by over 65%.
The percentage decrease is determined by dividing the price decrease by the purchase price and
multiplying the result by 100.
Example 2: Calculating the percentage decrease 12B
A new vehicle is bought for $25 000 and sold one year later for $19 000. Calculate the percentage
decrease in the value of the new vehicle.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Subtract $19 000 from $25 000 ($6000). Percentage decrease = $6000 × 100
$25 000
2 Divide the price decrease ($6000) by the
= 24%
purchase price ($25 000).
3 Express as a percentage (multiply by 100). Percentage decrease is 24%.
Finance
Using car dealers’ finance, a purchaser pays a deposit and then makes a large number of
repayments. The total cost using finance is greater than the price for cash.
BUYING ON FINANCE
Total cost = Deposit + Total repayments

Total repayments = Repayment × Number of repayments
Interest paid = Total cost − Sale price
Example 3: Calculating the cost of repayments 12B
A four-wheel-drive vehicle is for sale at $45000. Finance is available at $5000 deposit and
monthly repayments of $1470 for 5 years.
a What is the total of the repayments? b What is the total cost of the finance?
c What is the interest paid?
SOLUTI O N:
1 Multiply the monthly repayment by the a Total repayment = 1470 × 12 × 5

number of repayments. = $88 200
2 Add the deposit to the total cost of b Total cost = 5000 + 88 200

the repayments. = $93 200
3 Subtract the sale price from the c Interest paid = 93 200 − 45 000

total cost. = $48 200
12B Purchasing a car 411
Example 2 1 Calculate the percentage decrease in the price of a new vehicle after one year.
a Purchase price is $25 500. Market value after one year is $21 420.
b Purchase price is $36 800. Market value after one year is $27 600.
c Purchase price is $54 250. Market value after one year is $48 825.
d Purchase price is $23 826. Market value after one year is $20 900.
2 Calculate the price of the following cars after the trade-in.

a Sale price is $35 500. Trade-in is worth $6000.
b Sale price is $16 850. Trade-in is worth $2980.
c Sale price is $24 120. Trade-in is worth $9460.
d Sale price is $64 870. Trade-in is worth $11 820.
3 Calculate the amount of the deposit needed to purchase the following cars.
a Sale price is $21 400. Deposit is 25%.
b Sale price is $19 240. Deposit is 15%.
c Sale price is $45 100. Deposit is 35%.
d Sale price is $65 200. Deposit is 40%.
Example 3 4 Calculate the total repayments to purchase the following cars.
a Sale price is $14 800. Monthly repayments of $410 for 5 years.
b Sale price is $19 240. Monthly repayments of $1120 for 2 years.
c Sale price is $45 100. Weekly repayments of $360 for 3 years.
d Sale price is $85 200. Weekly repayments of $610 for 4 years.
5 Charlotte has been offered terms to purchase a car. The price of the car is $24 560 or 50%
deposit and repayments of $90 per week for 200 weeks.
a What is the amount of the deposit?

b Find the total cost of the repayments.
c What is the cost of purchasing the car on terms?
412 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12B
LEVEL 2
6 A utility vehicle is for sale at $42 000. Finance is available at $7500 deposit and monthly
repayments of $1280 for 5 years.
a What is the total cost of the repayments?
b How much will the car cost if you use the finance package?
c What is the interest paid?
7 Musa has seen a used car he would like to buy, priced at $13 400. He has saved $7000 towards
the cost of the car. His parents have offered to lend him the balance to pay for it. Musa agrees
to pay $40 each week to repay his parents.
a How much will Musa need to borrow from his parents?
b How long will it take Musa to repay the loan from his parents?
8 A used car is for sale at $27 000. Finance is available at 10% deposit and monthly repayments
of $630 for 4 years.
a How much deposit is to be paid?
b What is the total cost of the repayments?
c How much will the car cost if you use the finance package?
d What is the interest paid?
9 Emily has two choices of finance packages for a new car.

Package A: Deposit of $3000, $1400 per month over 5 years.
Package B: No deposit, $1540 per month over 6 years.
a Determine the total cost of package A.
b Determine the total cost of package B.
c How much will be saved by selecting the cheaper package?
10 A prestige car is for sale at $65000. Finance from the car dealer is available at a deposit of
40% and weekly repayments of $530 for 4 years. A personal loan of $39 000 is available from
the bank at 15% p.a. simple interest for 4 years.
a How much deposit is required?
b What is the interest paid using the finance from the car dealer?
c What is the interest paid using the finance from the bank?
12B Purchasing a car 413
11 Registration of a motor vehicle involves the payment of a fee. Note: fees may change each year.
Registration fees
Size of vehicle Tare weight Private use Business use
Cars, station wagons and trucks up to 975 kg $218 $321
976 kg to 1154 kg $239 $354
1155 kg to 1504 kg $269 $404
1505 kg to 2504 kg $383 $583
Trailers (including caravans) up to 254 kg $52 $133
255 kg to 764 kg $143 $200
765 kg to 975 kg $218 $321
976 kg to 1154 kg $239 $354
1155 kg to 1504 kg $269 $404
1505 kg to 2499 kg $383 $583
Motor cycle $101 $101
a What is the cost of registering a car for private use, if the weight of the car is 1000 kg?
b What is the cost of registering a truck for business use, if the weight of the truck is 1500 kg?
c What is the cost of registering a car for business use, if the weight of the car is 925 kg?
d What is the cost of registering a motor cycle for private use?
LEVEL 3
12 Ali is buying a used car for $12 000. He is required to pay a transfer fee of $26 and stamp duty
of $360. Finance from the car dealer is available at a deposit of 20% and monthly repayments
of $380 for 4 years. How much above the price is Ali paying the car dealer?
13 Personal loan calculators on lenders’ websites can be

used to determine the monthly repayments.
Use a personal loans calculator with a monthly gross

salary of $5000 and monthly expense details of $2000
to determine the maximum amount to be borrowed.
a Current variable rate of interest and a loan term
of 4 years.
b Current variable rate of interest and a loan term
of 2 years.
c Current fixed rate of interest and a loan term of 4
years.
d Current fixed rate of interest and a loan term of 2 years.
414 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12C
12C Car insurance

Insurance is a major cost of keeping a motor vehicle on the road. There are three main types of
insurance:
• Green slip or Compulsory Third Party
insurance protects vehicle owners and
drivers who are legally liable for personal
injury to any other party in the event of a
personal injury claim made against them
by other road users.
• Third Party Property insurance covers you
for damage caused by your car to property
owned by a third party in the event of an
accident.
• Comprehensive insurance covers you for damage to your own vehicle as well as damage your car
may cause to another person’s vehicle or property.
An insurance premium is the cost of taking out insurance cover. Many insurance
companies offer an online calculator for your vehicle insurance premium. It requires
information on the make and model of car, your age, driving history, finance, modifications or
accessories and location. The cost of insurance is affected by other factors:
• No-claim bonus is a discount on an insurance premium. This discount increases if no-claim is
made on the policy until it reaches the maximum discount level.
• Excess is paid when a claim is made on the policy. The standard excess can be varied; there are
also excesses for younger drivers.
CAR INSURANCE
The cost of insurance is affected by make and model of car, your age and driving history,
finance, modifications or accessories and location. No-claim bonus and excess amount are
major factors.
Example 4: Calculating the insurance premium 12C
Elle has been quoted $960 for comprehensive car insurance. She has a no-claim bonus of 40%.
How much is Elle required to pay?
S OLUTI O N:
1 No-claim discount of 40% requires Premium = 60% of $960
payment of 60%.
2 Calculate 60% of $960. = 0.60 × 960
3 Evaluate.
Elle is required to pay $576.
4 Write the answer in words.
12C Car insurance 415
Example 4 1 What is the cost of comprehensive car insurance for the following premiums?
a Premium of $1080 with a no-claim bonus of 60%
b Premium of $1690 with a no-claim bonus of 30%
c Premium of $880 with a no-claim bonus of 40%
d Premium of $1320 with a no-claim bonus of 70%
e Premium of $2350 with a no-claim bonus of 50%
2 The graph below shows the percentage of claims for each age group.
Insurance claims
70
Percentage making a claim
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Age in years
a What is the percentage of claims for people 50 years old?
b Which age group made the least number of claims?
c Calculate the gross percentage change in claims between the ages of 60 and 70.
d How do insurance companies cater for the large number of claims made by people
20 years old?
3 Dan is 20 years old and has received this quote for comprehensive insurance.
Premium details Excesses Cost

12 month policy Standard $500
$678.00
Male under 21 $1200
30% No-claim bonus
Female under 21 $900
a Calculate the cost of the insurance.

b What is Dan’s excess if he makes a claim?
416 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12C
LEVEL 2
4 Connor has been quoted an insurance premium of $980.60 by his insurance company. The
company has given him a 20% no-claim bonus, as he had not made a claim in the previous
year. What would the insurance premium have been without his no-claim bonus?
5 The sector graph shows the road crash costs according to

categories. The total insurance cost was $1.2 billion.
19.8 21.7
a What is the insurance cost for minor injury?
b What is the insurance cost for serious injury? 8.3
c What is the insurance cost for a fatal accident?
d What is the insurance cost for property damage? 50.2
Fatal Minor injury

Serious injury Property damage
LEVEL 3
6 The premiums quoted below are for clients with a maximum no-claim bonus. The car is owned
outright by a mature-age driver and driven for private use.
Model of Agreed Premium A Premium B

car value Mosman Penrith Mosman Penrith
Brand A $20 100 $540 $605 $600 $760
Brand B $38 890 $810 $899 $770 $1500
Brand C $24 400 $615 $650 $615 $860
a Which suburb has the highest premium? Suggest a reason.

b Do expensive cars have higher premiums?
c What is the best quote for the Brand B?
d What is the best quote for the Brand A?
e Which model has the lowest premium?
f What is the average premium for the Brand B?
g What is the average premium for the Brand C?
h What is the average premium for Mosman?
i What is the average premium for Penrith?
j Premium A is being increased by 3%. What would be the new premium for a
Brand A car at Mosman?
12D Stamp duty 417
12D Stamp duty

Stamp duty is the tax you pay to the government when registering or transferring a motor vehicle.
The amount of stamp duty payable is based on the price of the motor vehicle. For example, a new
passenger car purchased for $40 000 would require a duty of $3 per $100 or $1200 (0.03 × 40 000).
That is, for every $100 you paid for the vehicle, the stamp duty is $3 or a tax of 3%.
STAMP DUTY ON VEHICLES
1 Round up the cost of the vehicle to the nearest $100 (per $100), $200 (per $200) etc.
2 Express the stamp duty as a fraction or decimal. ($3 per $100 is 3/100 or 0.03.)
3 Multiply the answer obtained in step 1 by the fraction or decimal obtained in step 2.
Example 5: Calculating stamp duty on vehicles 12D
A used car is bought for $17 730. Calculate the stamp duty payable if the charge is $3 per
$100 or part $100.
S OLUTI O N:
1 Round $17 730 up to the nearest $100. Value of vehicle = $17 800
2 Express the stamp duty as a fraction. $3 per $100 is the fraction 3 .
100
3 Multiply $17 800 by 3 . Stamp duty = 17 800 × 3

100 100
4 Evaluate. = $534
5 Write the answer in words. Stamp duty payable is $534.
418 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12D
Example 5 1 The table below is used to calculate the stamp duty payable on a vehicle.
Value of vehicle Stamp duty payable
$0–$45 000 $3 per $100
or part $100
More than $45 000 $1350 plus $5 per $100
(or part $100) over $45 000
Calculate the stamp duty payable on the following vehicles.

a $32 600 b $26 500 c $45 000
d $13 790 e $35 521 f $23 802
g $52 700 h $98 435 i $120 080
2 The table below is used to calculate the stamp duty payable on a vehicle.
Value of vehicle Stamp duty payable
$0–$60 000 $5 per $200
or part $200
More than $60 000 $1500 plus $7 per $200
(or part $200) over $60 000
Calculate the stamp duty payable on the following vehicles.

a $13 200 b $29 790 c $45 410
d $73 800 e $61 670 f $88 605
g $57 326 h $79 190 i $91 456
3 The table below is used to calculate the stamp duty payable on a used vehicle.
Value of vehicle Passenger Non-passenger
All prices $5 per $300 $7 per $300
(or part $300) (or part $300)
Calculate the stamp duty payable on the following

vehicles.
a Passenger car $21 300
b Passenger car $69 500
c Non-passenger car $45 880
d Non-passenger car $36 614
12D Stamp duty 419
LEVEL 2
4 Stamp duty is calculated at 3% of the market value of a vehicle up to $45 000, plus 5% of the
value of the vehicle over $45 000. Use the following graph to answer the questions below.
3500
3000
Stamp duty ($)
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0 20 000 40 000 60 000 80 000

Market value ($)
a How much stamp duty is payable on a car whose market value is $20 000?
b How much stamp duty is payable on a car whose market value is $60 000?
c How much stamp duty is payable on a car whose market value is $45 000?
d How much stamp duty is payable on a car whose market value is $70 000?
e What is the market value of a car if the stamp duty paid was $300?
f What is the market value of a car if the stamp duty paid was $2300?
LEVEL 3
5 Construct a line graph to represent the following stamp duty charge. Stamp duty is calculated
at 2.5% of the market value of a vehicle up to $60 000, plus 4% of the value of the vehicle over
$60 000. Use your graph to answer the questions below.
a How much stamp duty is payable on a
car whose market value is $30 000?
b How much stamp duty is payable on a
c How much stamp duty is payable on a
d What is the market value of a car if the
stamp duty paid was $500?
e What is the market value of a car if the
f What is the market value of a car if the
420 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12E
12E Running and maintenance costs

Car running costs
Car running costs are a hidden, irregular cost and depend on the
make, model and age of the car.
• Maintenance – includes oil changes, tune-ups, new tyres and
brakes. Car parts need to be replaced after a certain period of time
or after the car has travelled a specific number of kilometres.
• Repairs – damage to the car as a result of a car accident, scratch
or dent. These costs are very unpredictable.
• Fuel – cost depends on the distance travelled by the car, the price
paid for the fuel, the efficiency of the car and the type of driving.
• Improvements – additional items purchased to improve the car,
such as seat covers.
• Parking – money required to park the car. This can expensive in
the major cities.
• Tolls – fee charges for travelling a tolled motorway.
• Car washes – cost of maintaining a clean car.
• Fines – traffic ticket issued by the police for breaking the law by speeding.
CAR RUNNING COSTS
Car running costs involve maintenance, repairs, fuel, improvements, parking, tolls, car washes
and fines.
Example 6: Calculating the maintenance cost of a car tyre 12E
Julia travels 20 000 km each year in her car. A set of tyres costs $640 and lasts about 40 000 km.
Calculate the cost of tyre wear:
a per kilometre b per year
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the cost of the tyres over the number of a Cost = $640
kilometres in fraction form. 40 000
2 Evaluate. = $0.016
3 Write answer in words. Tyre wear costs $0.016 per kilometre.
4 Divide the length of time the tyres will last by 40 000
b Years = =2
the distance travelled each year. 20 000
5 Divide the tyre cost by the number of years. Cost = $640 ÷ 2
6 Evaluate. = $320
7 Write answer in words. Tyre wear costs $320 per year.
12E Running and maintenance costs 421
Fuel consumption
A motor vehicle’s fuel consumption rate (often referred to just as ‘fuel consumption’) is the
number of litres of fuel it uses to travel 100 kilometres. The fuel consumption is calculated by
filling the motor vehicle with fuel and recording the kilometres travelled from the odometer. When
the motor vehicle is again filled with fuel, record the reading from the odometer and how many
litres of fuel it takes to refill the tank. The distance travelled is the difference between the odometer
readings.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Amount of fuel (L) × 100

Fuel consumption =
Distance travelled (km)
Example 7: Calculating fuel consumption 12E
A medium-size car travelled 750 km using 60 L of petrol.

What was the fuel consumption?
S OLUTI O N:
1 Write the fuel consumption formula. Amount of fuel × 100
Fuel consumption =
2 Substitute 60 for the amount of fuel Distance travelled
and 750 for the distance travelled.
= 60 × 100
750
3 Evaluate. = 8.0 L/100 km
4 Write answer in words. Fuel consumption is 8 L per 100 km.
1 Engine oil costs $60 for 5 litres. A car needs 5 litres of oil changed every 5000 km. Shane
travels 15 000 km each year.
a How many oil changes are required each year?
b How many litres of engine oil are required each year?
c What is the total cost of engine oil per year?
d What is the cost of engine oil per kilometre?
Example 6 2 The table below shows the running costs of a car in cents per kilometre.
Running costs 50 000 km 75 000 km 100 000 km

Fuel 10.4 10.4 10.4
Tyres 2.3 2.8 2.7
Services 7.8 7.5 8.6
a What are the total running costs if the car travels 50 000 km?
b What are the total running costs if the car travels 75 000 km?
c What are the total running costs if the car travels 100 000 km?
Example 7 3 Calculate the fuel consumption (litres per
100 km) for each of the following vehicles.
a Ahmed’s car uses 38.2 litres of petrol to
travel 400 km.
b A sports car travelled 900 km using
79.38 litres of petrol.
c Joel’s sedan uses 30.36 litres of LPG to
travel 600 km.
d A small car uses 41.05 litres of petrol to
travel 500 km.
e Zahra’s car uses 139.8 litres of petrol to
travel 1500 km.
f Max’s motorbike uses 70 litres of LPG to travel 2000 km.
4 Chelsea has bought a used car whose fuel consumption is 10 litres of petrol per 100 kilometres.
She is planning to travel around Australia. Calculate the number of litres of petrol Chelsea’s car
will use on the following distances.
a A trip of 2716 km from Perth to Adelaide
b A trip of 732 km from Adelaide to Melbourne
c A trip of 658 km from Melbourne to Canberra
d A trip of 309 km from Canberra to Sydney
e A trip of 982 km from Sydney to Brisbane
f A trip of 3429 km from Brisbane to Darwin
g A trip of 4049 km from Darwin to Perth
12E Running and maintenance costs 423
LEVEL 2
5 Stephanie travels 37 km to work and 37 km from work each day.

a How many kilometres does she travel to and from work in a 6-day working week?
b Stephanie drives an SUV with a fuel consumption of 8.38 L/100 km. How many litres of
petrol does Stephanie use travelling to and from work in a week? Answer correct to one
decimal place.
c What is Stephanie’s petrol bill for travelling to work if petrol costs $1.35 per litre?
6 A family car uses LPG at a rate of 15 L/100 km and the gas tank holds 72 litres. How far can
the car travel on a tank of LPG?
7 Grace drives a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a petrol consumption of 15.2 L /100 km and a
petrol tank capacity of 95 litres. She is planning a trip from Sydney to Bourke via Dubbo. The
distance from Sydney to Dubbo is 412 km and from Dubbo to Bourke is 360 km. Grace filled
her petrol tank at Sydney. How many times will she need to fill her tank before arriving at
Bourke? Give reasons for your answer.
8 The graph below shows a motor vehicle’s fuel consumption at various speeds.
Petrol used to travel 200 km
50
40
Litres
30
20
10
0 30 50 70 90 110
Speed (km/h)
a How many litres of fuel were used at 70 km/h?

b How many litres of fuel were used at 110 km/h?
c What is the fuel consumption rate at 30 km/h?
d What is the fuel consumption rate at 90 km/h?
e What speed used fuel the most efficiently?
f How many litres of fuel were saved by travelling at 90 km/h instead of 110 km/h?
9 Dylan owns a V8 car with a fuel consumption of 11 L /100 km in the city and 8 L/100 km in the
country. Dylan travels 8000 km per year in the city and 10 000 km per year in the country. The
average cost of petrol is $1.50 per litre in the city and 10 cents higher in the country.
a Determine the cost of petrol to drive in the city for the year.
b Determine the cost of petrol to drive in the country for the year.
c What is the total cost of petrol for Dylan for one year?
d What is the total cost of petrol for Dylan in one year if the average cost of petrol
increased to $1.80 per litre in the city and country prices stayed 10 cents higher?
10 Holly is planning a trip from Sydney to Brisbane using a car with a fuel consumption of
13 litres/100 km. The distance from Sydney to Brisbane via the Pacific Highway is 998 km and
via the New England Highway it is 1027 km. The cost of LPG is 79.2 cents per litre.
a How much will the trip cost via the Pacific Highway?
b How much will the trip cost via the New England Highway?
c How much money is saved by travelling via the Pacific Highway?
LEVEL 3
11 Tyler buys a new car with a fuel consumption of 11.2 litres/100 km. Oscar buys the LPG
version of Tyler’s new car, with a fuel consumption of 15.4 litres/100 km. Both Tyler and Oscar
average 300 km in a week in the same conditions. The average price of ULP is $1.40 cents per
per litre and LPG is $0.79 cents per litre.
a How many litres of fuel are used by Tyler in a week?
b How many litres of fuel are used by Oscar in a week?
c Calculate each car’s yearly consumption of fuel.
d What is Tyler’s yearly fuel bill?
e What is Oscar’s yearly fuel bill?
f Oscar paid an additional $1500 for the LPG version of the car. How many years will it take
for the fuel savings to reach $1500 or the break-even point? Answer correct to the nearest
whole number.
g Research the current fuel prices of ULP and LPG. How long will it take for the fuel saving
to exceed the initial costs?
12 Investigate the costs for two common cars on a family trip in your local area. Calculate the
cost for the return trip in each case. You will need to determine the distance of the trip, fuel
consumption for each car and the average price of fuel in the local area.
12F Personal budget 425
12F Personal budget

Budgeting involves balancing income and expenses. It is planning how to manage your income.
Budgets are created for a specified time, such as weekly, monthly or yearly.
CREATING A BUDGET
1 List all the income categories.

2 List all the expense categories.
3 Calculate the total of the income and expenses categories.
4 Balance the budget by modifying the categories or by entering a balance category.
Example 8: Balancing a budget 12F
Balance the following weekly budget.
Income Expenses
Salary $1726.15 Clothing $73.08
Bonus $20.00 Gifts and Christmas $114.80
Investment $156.78 Groceries $467.31
Part-time work $393.72 Insurance $171.34
Loan repayments $847.55
Motor vehicle costs $105.96
Phone $38.26
Power and heating $51.82
Rates $54.82
Recreation $216.79
Work-related costs $68.76
Balance
Total Total
S OLUTI O N:
1 Add all the income. Income = 1726.15 + … + 393.72
= $2296.65
2 Add the all the expenses excluding the Expenses = 73.08 + … + 68.76
‘balance’. = $2210.49
3 Subtract the total expenses from the total Balance = Income − Expenses
income. = 2296.65 − 2210.49
4 Write the result of step 3 as the balance. = $86.16
426 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12F
Exercise 12F LEVEL 1
1 Oscar and Jill are living in a unit. Part of their budget is shown below. Calculate the total
amount paid over one year for:
a electricity
Item When Cost
b insurance
c food Electricity Quarterly $384
d rent Food Weekly $360
Insurance Biannually $1275
Rent Monthly $1950
2 Sarah earns $67 365 annually. She has budgeted 20% of her salary for rent. How much does
she expect to pay to rent an apartment for one year?
Example 8 3 Adam has constructed a yearly budget as shown below.
Income Expenses
Wage $60 786.22 Clothing $4 634.42
Interest $674.15 Council rates $1543.56
Electricity $1956.87
Entertainment $4 987.80
Food $17 543.90
Gifts and Christmas $5861.20
Insurance $2348.12
Loan repayments $16 789.34
Motor vehicle costs $2 458.91
Telephone $832.98
Work-related costs $812.67
Balance
Total Total
a Calculate the total income.

b Calculate the total expenses.
c Balance the budget.
4 Nathan has a net weekly income of $1700. This table shows his
Item Cost
weekly expenses.
a What are Nathan’s total weekly expenses? Rent $450
b How much can Nathan save each week? Car expenses $300
c What percentage of his income is paid in car expenses? Food $250
d Nathan is planning an overseas holiday for $10 000. For how
Other expenses $200
many weeks does he need to save?
12F Personal budget 427
LEVEL 2
12FQ5
a The formula for cell E5 is ‘ = C5 / $C$7’. It is the formula for relative percentage. Fill down
the contents of E5 to E7 using this formula.
b Enter formulae in E9–E17 to calculate the relative percentages for expenses.
c Edit the amount spent per month on eating out from $200 to $240. Observe the changes.
d Edit the amount of savings per month from $300 to $360. Observe the changes.
e Edit the amount of car expenses per month from $100 to $150. Observe the changes.
6 Bella earns $4000 each fortnight and pays 37% of this in tax and other deductions. This table
shows her major fortnightly expenses.
a What are Bella’s total fortnightly expenses?
Item Cost
b What amount is Bella left with each fortnight after tax
and other deductions? Mortgage $750
c What is the maximum she can save each fortnight? Utilities $250
d Bella’s utilities bill increased by 8%. How much will Groceries $400
she be left with at the end of the fortnight?
Entertainment $100
7 Aiden lives with two friends and they agree to split the household costs evenly. For each week,
rent is $600; utilities are $850 for each quarter; insurance is $350 for each quarter; food is
$500 each fortnight; and cleaning and other expenses are $200 each month.
a Find the household costs for the year.
b How much must Aiden contribute each week? Answer to the nearest dollar.
428 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses 12F
LEVEL 3
8 Patrick has a net annual salary of $95 000. He pays $1350 each month in rent and has regular
bills that amount to $4450 each year. Patrick estimates that, each month, food costs him $625,
entertainment is $375 and other expenses are $3250.
a How much will Patrick save each year?
b Patrick is considering taking out a loan to buy a house. Repayments will be $2750 each
month. Will he be able to afford the repayments? Justify your answer.
9 Hayley prepared a monthly budget as shown in

Income Amount
the table.
a Calculate her total income. Net wage $8750
b What is the difference between the fixed expenses Interest $300
and the variable expenses? Fixed expenses Amount
c How much can Hayley save each month?
Housing $2225
d Hayley has no savings and is planning a trip to
Europe in eight months time. She estimates the Transport $550
trip will cost $30 000. Will Hayley be able to save Utilities $420
enough to pay for the trip? Variable expenses Amount
Clothing $670
Entertainment $320
Food $1125
Personal care $60
10 Dimitri had a total weekly income of $104 made up of a part-time job earning $74 and an
allowance of $30. He decided to budget his expenses in the following way: sport $24,
movies $22, school $16 and food $20.
a Prepare a weekly budget showing income and expenses.
b What is the balance?
11 Ava has a net fortnightly pay of $1896.

a Ava has a mortgage with an annual repayment of $13 676. Calculate the amount that Ava
must budget each fortnight for her mortgage.
b Ava has budgeted $180 per week for groceries, $60 per week for entertainment, $468
per year for medical expenses and $80 per week to run a car. Express these as fortnightly
amounts and calculate their total.
c Ava has an electricity bill of $130 per quarter, telephone bill of $91 per quarter and council
rates of $1118 per annum. Express these amounts annually and convert to fortnightly
amounts. What is the total of these fortnightly amounts?
d Prepare a fortnightly budget showing income and expenses.
Summary
Household bills Household bills are the costs associated with living in a home. They are
a big percentage of the expenses in a budget. Household bills include
council rates, electricity and gas bills, water and sewerage rates, telephone
bills and internet connections.
Purchasing a car Total cost = Deposit + Total repayments

Total repayments = Repayment × Number of repayments
Interest paid = Total cost − Sale price
Car insurance The cost of insurance is affected by make and model of car, your age and
driving history, finance, modifications or accessories and location.
No-claim bonus and excess amount are major factors.
Stamp duty 1 Round the cost of the vehicle up to the nearest $100 (or as required).
2 Express the stamp duty as a fraction or decimal.
3 Multiply the answer in step 1 by the answer in step 2.
Car running costs Car running costs involve maintenance, repairs, fuel, improvements,
parking, tolls, car washes and fines.

Fuel consumption Fuel consumption =
Budgeting Budgeting involves balancing of income and expenses. Budgets are

created for a specified time such as weekly.
Creating a budget 1 List all the income categories.

2 List all the expense categories.
3 Calculate the total of the income and expenses categories.
4 Balance the budget by modifying the categories or by entering a
balance category.
430 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses
Review
1 The usage summary of a quarterly Average cost per day $5.39

electricity account is shown opposite. Average daily usage 21.55 kWh
What was the percentage increase in Same time last year 20.44 kWh
electricity usage?
Your indicative greenhouse gas emissions
A 1.11% B 5.15%
Total for this bill 1.8 tonnes
C 5.43% D 21.55%
Same time last year 1.8 tonnes
Saved with Green Power N/A
2 An electricity bill increased by 6%. The previous bill was $860. What is the new electricity bill,
correct to the nearest dollar?
A $52 B $866 C $911 D $912
3 Adam has the following bills: electricity $250 per quarter, phone $70 per month, rates $1200
per year and rent $300 per week. What is the total amount Adam should budget for the year?
A $358 B $1553 C $1820 D $18 640
4 A motorbike is for sale at $13000. Finance is available at $3000 deposit and monthly
repayments of $520 for 4 years. What is the interest paid?
A $14 960 B $17 960 C $24 960 D $27 960
5 Jake has been quoted $1280 for comprehensive car insurance. He has a no-claim bonus of 60%.
How much is Jake required to pay?
A $512 B $768 C $1220 D $1280
6 A new car is bought for $28 810. Calculate the stamp duty payable if the charge is $3 per $100
or part of $100.
A $840 B $864 C $867 D $870
7 Mia’s car uses 8.25 litres per 100 km. How many litres of petrol will her car use on a trip of
1150 km from Broken Hill to Sydney?
A 94.875 L B 139.73 L C 1397.3 L D 9487.5 L
8 Hunter travels 36 000 km each year in his four-wheel drive. A set of tyres costs $880 and lasts
about 32 000 km. What is the cost of tyre wear per kilometre? Answer to the nearest cent.
A $0.02 B $0.03 C $0.36 D $0.41
Review
1 Amelia earns $90 345 annually. She has budgeted 30% of her salary for a loan repayment.
How much should she expect to pay for the loan repayment for one year?
2 Michael buys a car for $18 000. After one year the market value of the car is $15 000. What is
the percentage decrease in the price? Answer correct to one decimal place.
3 A new car is for sale at $39 000. Finance is available at 20% deposit and monthly repayments
of $900 for 5 years.
a How much will the car cost if you use the finance package?
b What is the interest paid?
4 Lucy is 18 years old and has received this quote for comprehensive insurance.
Premium details Excesses Cost

12-month policy $850.00 Standard $600
10% No-claim bonus Male under 21 $1400
Female under 21 $1000
a Calculate the cost of the insurance.

b What is Lucy’s excess if she makes a claim?
5 Engine oil costs $52 for 5 litres. A car needs 5 litres of oil changed every 6000 km. Victoria
travels 24 000 km each year. What is the cost of oil for four years?
6 Rata’s car uses 11.26 litres per 100 km.

a How many litres of petrol will his car use on a trip of 155 km from Sydney to Newcastle?
b The cost of petrol is $1.60 per litre. How much will the petrol cost for the 155 km trip?
c How many litres of petrol will his car use on a trip of 294 km from Armidale to Taree?
d The cost of petrol is $1.35 per litre. How much will the petrol cost for the 294 km trip?
7 Sienna filled her car with petrol. The odometer reading was 64 080 km at that time. When
she next filled the petrol tank, the odometer reading was 64 605 km. The car required 42 L of
petrol.
a How far has the car travelled between fill ups?
b What was the average fuel consumption in litres per 100 km?
c Sienna next filled the petrol tank at 65 200 with 45 L of petrol. What was the average fuel
consumption in kilometres per litre from the last fill up? Answer correct to one decimal
place.
432 Chapter 12 Budgeting and household expenses
8 Jett has constructed a yearly budget shown below.

Review
Income Expenses
Salary $62 609.80 Christmas $6 037.03
Interest $705.45 Clothing $4 773.45
Council rates $1589.86
Electricity $2 015.57
Entertainment $5137.43
Food $18 070.22
Insurance $2 418.56
Loan repayments $17 293.02
Motor vehicle costs $2 532.67
Telephone $857.97
Work related costs $837.05
Balance
Total Total
a Find the total income. b Find the total expenses. c Balance the budget.
9 Hannah has budgeted $210 per week for groceries, $70 per week for leisure, $23 per fortnight
for medical expenses and $90 per week to run a car. Calculate the monthly expenses. Assume
4 weeks in a month.
10 Blake took out a loan to purchase a car and will make regular monthly payments over 5 years.
However, owning and running a car is not cheap:
• Loan repayments are $680 per month.
• Car registration costs $900 per year.
• Servicing costs $725 twice a year.
• A green slip costs $410 per year.
• Comprehensive insurance costs $190 per month.
• Petrol costs $80 per week.
a How much will Blake eventually pay on the loan?
b What is the cost of the car, given that 40% of the loan repayments cover the interest?
c What is the total annual cost during the purchase period?
Practice Paper 2
Section I
1 A survey required respondents to write down their age last birthday.

Which of the following terms best describes this data?
A Categorical
B Continuous
C Discrete
D Stratified
2 What is the new price when $60 is increased by 20% then decreased by 20%?
A $38.40
B $57.60
C $60.00
D $86.40
3 y
3 m
2
1
x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1
−2
−3
What is the equation of line m?

A y = 3x − 3
B y = x −3
3
C y = −3 x − 3
D y = −x −3
3
4 For the scores 20, 22, 22, 14, 19, 22, 20, 21, 24 and 12 consider the following statements.
i The median is greater than the mean.
ii The mode is less than the median.
A Both statements I and II are true.
B Both statements I and II are false.
C Statement I is false and statement II is true.
D Statement I is true and statement II is false.
5 A car uses, on average, 7 L per 100 km in fuel. How much fuel would be used on a
trip of 382 km?
A 26.74 L
B 34.72 L
C 38. 20 L
D 54.57 L
6 What is the gradient of a line given by the equation y = 2x − 4?

A −4 B −2
C 2 D4
7 What type of data is information collected on the type of motor vehicle?

A Discrete
B Continuous
C Categorical
D Stratified
8 A car mechanic charges a total of $165 to repair a motor vehicle. The Goods and Services Tax
(GST) of 10% was included in this total. Which of the following statements is correct?
A 90% of $165 was the price of the repair before the GST was added.
B The total repair price included $16.50 GST.
C The price before adding the GST is $165 ÷ 1.10.
D The GST cannot be determined without knowing the original repair cost.
9 Two examinations results are displayed in the box plot. A

What is the interquartile range for exam A?
A 25 B
B 40
0 20 40 60 80
C 50
D 80
10 A country has 30% of the population between the ages of 20 and 30. How many people aged
between 20 and 30 should be included in a stratified sample of 250 people?
A 30
B 45
C 60
D 75
11 A car is travelling at a constant speed. It travels 60 km in 3 hours. This situation is described by

the linear equation d = mt. What is the value of m?
A 0.05
B3
C 20
D 60
12 A cruise ship leaves the wharf at 6:48 a.m. The journey to its next port takes 13 hours and
16 minutes. When does the cruise ship arrive at this port?
A 7:32 a.m.
B 8:04 a.m.
C 7:32 p.m.
D 8:04 p.m.
13 Police checked the blood alcohol content of every fifth driver passing an intersection.
What is this method of sampling?
A Census
B Random
C Stratified
D Systematic
14 What is the time difference between Ho Chi Minh (UTC + 7) and Melbourne (UTC + 10)?
A 3h
B 7h
C 17 h
D 70 h
15 Which equation correctly gives the relationship between x and y, from the table?
x 0 2 5 9 10
y –2 10 28 52 58
A y = 5x − 2
B y = 4x + 2
C y = 6x − 2
D y = 10 x + 2
Section II
All necessary working should be shown in every question.

a Nathan is an auto-electrician who is entitled to a 15% trade discount. In addition,
he is given a 10% reduction on the discounted price if he pays cash. Nathan bought
electrical equipment with a full retail price of $480 and was given both discounts.
i How much does Nathan pay for the electrical equipment? 1
ii How much money is saved using the discounts? 1
iii Express the overall savings as a percentage of the retail price. 1
b Jacksonville is located at (30° N, 82° W) and Suva is located at (18°S, 178°E).
i What is the difference in latitude between Jacksonville and Suva? 1
ii What is the difference in longitude between Jacksonville and Suva? 1
iii What are the coordinates of a point 45° due south of Jacksonville? 1
c Raymond has been quoted $1540 for comprehensive car insurance. He has a 2
no-claim bonus of 40%. How much is Raymond required to pay?
d Nina’s car uses 9.25 litres per 100 km.
i How many litres of petrol will this car use on a trip of 185 km from Parramatta 1
to Nowra?
ii The cost of petrol is $1.37 per litre. How much will the petrol cost for the 1
185 km trip?
e Alexis’s parents want to give her $10 000 for her wedding in five years time. They 2
have found an account that will earn 8% p.a. simple interest. What is the amount of
money they need to invest in this account to total $10 000 in 5 years time?
f A new car is purchased for $35 800 . After 6 years its salvage value is $24 160. 2
What is the annual amount of depreciation, if the amount of depreciation is
constant?
g A truck rental company charges $100 for the hire of a truck plus 40 cents for each 1
kilometre travelled. Write an expression for total cost (c) in dollars of hiring the
truck if the truck travelled (x) kilometres.

a y
3
2
1
x
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3
−1
−2
−3
i What is the gradient of this straight line? 1

ii What is the y-intercept of this straight line? 1
iii What is the equation of this straight line? 1
iv What is the x-intercept of this straight line? 1
b Max has completed three tests. His mean mark is 64%. What percentage mark 2
does he have to get in his next test to increase the mean to 65%?
c Sarah conducted a survey of students’ opinions about the school uniform. She 2
selected the first five people who were not in school uniform for the survey.
Why might the results of this survey be biased?
d A Year 11 class is given a short quiz out of 10. Calculate the following measures
of location and spread. (Answer correct to one decimal place.)
Score Number of students

7 4
8 3
9 5
10 6
i Mean 1
ii Median 1
iii Mode 1
iv Range 1
v Interquartile range 1
e David earned $787.50 in interest when he invested $5000 over a period of 2
3 years and 6 months. What is the flat annual rate of interest paid on this
investment?

a The following box-and-whisker plot shows the weights (kg) of 400 people.
50 60 70 80 90 100
i What is the range of weights? 1

ii Determine the median weight. 1
iii Determine the interquartile range of weights. 1
iv How many people weighed less than 83 kg? 2
b Logan records the details of each CD in his music collection. State the type of
data that would be recorded for each of the following.
i Title of the CD 1
ii Number of tracks on the CD 1
iii Playing time for each track 1
c Philip’s water usage in one day was 50 L shower, 44 L toilet, 35 L tap and 2
18 L washing machine. What percentage of water usage is for the tap?
d Oscar invests $100 000 for 8 months in a term deposit. This investment offers 3
a flat rate of 6% per annum interest. What is the interest earned from this
investment?
e The time zone of Dili is UTC + 9 and Napier is UTC + 12.
i What is the time in Dili if the time in Napier is 10:30 a.m.? 1
ii A flight leaves Napier at 12:30 p.m. and flies non-stop to Dili. The flight 1
is in the air for 6 hours. At what time does the flight arrive in Dili?
Formulae and data sheet
This sheet is provided by the author for use with Declining-balance method of depreciation
this year 11 textbook only. Do not use it for S = V 0 (1 − r ) n
examinations. It will be replaced when NESA S is salvage value of asset after n periods
publishes the official version in 2018. Check V 0 is initial value of asset
online for updates. r is depreciation rate per period, expressed as
a decimal
Financial Mathematics n is number of periods
Simple interest Data Analysis

I = Prn
Mean of a sample
P is initial amount
r is interest rate per period, expressed as a x = sum of scores
number of scores
decimal z-score
n is number of periods For any score x,
Compound interest z= x−x
A = P(1 + r ) n s
A is final amount x is mean
P is initial amount s is standard deviation
r is interest rate per period, expressed as a
Outlier(s)
decimal
score(s) less than Q L − 1.5 × IQR or
n is number of compounding periods
score(s) more than QU + 1.5 × IQR
Present value and future value Q L is lower quartile
QU is upper quartile
PV = FV n , FV = PV (1 + r ) n
(1 + r ) IQR is interquartile range
r is interest rate per period, expressed
Least-squares line of best fit
as a decimal
y = gradient × x + y-intercept
n is number of compounding periods
standard deviation of y scores
Straight-line method of depreciation gradient = r ×
standard deviation of x scores
S = V 0 − Dn
y-intercept = y − (gradient × x )
S is salvage value of asset after n periods
r is correlation coefficient
V 0 is initial value of asset
x is mean of x score
D is amount of depreciation per period
y is mean of y scores
n is number of periods
440 Formulae and data sheet
Normal distribution Straight Lines

• Approximately 68% of scores have z-scores
Gradient
between −1 and 1.
vertical change in position
• Approximately 95% of scores have z-scores m=
horizontal change in position
between −2 and 2.
• Approximately 99.7% of scores have Gradient–intercept form
z-scores between −3 and 3. y = mx + c
m is gradient
Area c is y-intercept
Circle Surface Area
A = πr 2
Sphere
r is radius
A = 4π r 2
Sector r is radius
A = θ πr 2
360 Closed cylinder
r is radius A = 2π r 2 + 2π rh
θ is number of degrees in central angle r is radius
h is perpendicular height
Annulus
A = π (R 2 − r 2 ) Cone
R is radius of outer circle A = π r 2 + π rl
r is radius of inner circle r is radius
Trapezium
Volume
A = h (a + b)
2
Prism or cylinder
V = Ah
a and b are the lengths of the parallel sides
r is radius
Area of land and catchment areas h is perpendicular height
unit conversion: 1 ha = 10 000 m 2 Pyramid or cone
Approximation Using Trapezoidal Rule V = 1 Ah

3
A is area of the base
Area
A ∼ h (d f + d l )
2
Sphere
h distance between successive measurements
d f is first measurement V = 4 πr 3
3
d l is last measurement r is radius
Volume and capacity Blood Alcohol Content Estimates

unit conversion: 1m 3 = 1000 L
(10 N − 7.5 H )
BACMale = or
Food and nutrition 6.8 M
1 calorie (cal) ≈ 4.184 kilojoules (kJ) (10 N − 7.5 H )
BACFemale =
5.5 M
Trigonometric Ratios
N is number of standard drinks consumed
H is number of hours of drinking
opposite hypotenuse
side
M is person’s mass in kilograms
θ°
adjacent side Distance, Speed and Time
opposite side D = ST , S = D , T = D
T S
sin θ =
hypotenuse
average speed = total distance travelled
adjacent side total time taken
cos θ =
hypotenuse
reaction-time   braking 
opposite side stopping distance =  +  
tan θ =  distance  distance 
adjacent side
Fuel consumption
Sine rule
In ∆ ABC Fuel consumption =
a = b = c
sin A sin B sin C
Probability of an Event
Area of a triangle The probability of an event where outcomes
In ∆ ABC are equally likely is given by:
A = 1 ab sin C P(event) = number of favourable outcomes

2 total number of outcomes
Cosine rule
In ∆ ABC Relative frequency
c 2 = a 2 + b 2 − 2ab cos C Frequency of a data value
Relative frequency =
or Number of data values
f
cos C = a + b − c
2 2 2
=
2ab n
Heron’s rule Expected frequency

In ∆ ABC Expected frequency = np
n is number of times the experiment is repeated
A = s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) p is the probability of the event
s is the semi-perimeter
s = a+b+c
2
Glossary
Note: The interactive textbook-includes more pop-up definitions and a dictionary.
A Bimodal Data with two modes or peaks.

Blood alcohol content (BAC) A measure of the
Absolute error The difference between the amount of alcohol in your blood.
actual value and the measured value indicated Bonus An extra payment or gift earned as
by an instrument. reward for achieving a goal.
Algebraic expression Mathematical statement Bound A limit to a measurement. See also
built up from numbers and pronumerals upper bound and lower bound.
(variables)and connected by mathematical Box-and-whisker plot A graph that uses a
operations, but containing no equals sign. five-number summary of a numerical data set.
Allowable deduction See tax deduction Box plot See Box-and-whisker plot.
Amount owed The result when the interest of Budget A plan used to manage money
a loan or investment is added to the principal by listing a person’s income and expenditure.
amount (also known as future value).
Angular distance The distance between two C
points on a circle or sphere measured as the angle
Calorie A non-SI unit of heat and energy, once
formed at the centre between radii at the points.
commonly used to measure food energy.
Annual leave loading A payment calculated
Capacity The maximum volume of liquid or gas
as a fixed percentage of the normal pay over a
which a container could hold.
fixed number of weeks. Annual leave loading is
Car running costs Car costs, such as
usually at the rate of 17 1 %.
2 maintenance, repairs, fuel, improvements,
Annulus Area between a large and a small
parking, tolls, car washes and fines.
circle with a common centre.
Casual rate An amount paid for each hour of
Appreciation An increase in value of an item
casual work.
over time. It is often expressed as the rate of
Categorical data Data that is divided into
appreciation.
categories such as hair colour. It uses words not
Area The amount of surface enclosed by the
numbers.
boundaries of the shape.
Census Collecting data from the whole population.
B Central tendency See measure of central tendency.
Circumference The distance around the outside
BAC See blood alcohol content. of a circle; the curved boundary.
Balance The amount of money in an account; Class A group of data.
the total amount an investment is worth at Class centre Median or middle score of a class
a point in time including amount invested in a grouped frequency distribution.
and interest; or the amount still owing on a loan. Closed cylinder A cylinder with both circular
Bias When events are not equally likely. bases. See Open cylinder.
443
Coefficient A numeral placed before a variable Continuous data Numerical data obtained when
to indicate that the variable is multiplied by quantities are measured rather than counted.
that number. Conversion graph A graph used to change a
Commission A payment for services, mostly as quantity from one unit to another unit.
a percentage of the value of the goods sold. Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) See
Common denominator A common denominator Greenwich Mean Time.
is always found by multiplying the denominators Corresponding Matching, for example in two
of two given fractions together. This is required or more similar figures, the sides or angles
before adding or subtracting fractions. which match.
Common factors A number or term that divides Cross-section The intersection of a solid with a
exactly (no remainder) into each of the given plane.
numbers or terms. Cumulative frequency The frequency of the score
Complementary event The outcomes that are plus the frequency of all the scores less than that
not members of the event. score. It is the progressive total of the frequencies.
Composite shape A 2D shape made up of two Cumulative frequency histogram A histogram
or more 2D shapes. with equal intervals of the scores on the horizontal
Composite solid Two or more common solids. axis and the cumulative frequencies associated
Compound interest A type of interest that is with these intervals shown by vertical rectangles.
paid on a loan or earned on an investment, which Cumulative frequency polygon A line graph
is calculated not only on the initial principal, but constructed by joining the top right-hand corner
also on the interest accumulated during the loan/ of the rectangles in a cumulative frequency
investment period. histogram. Also called an ogive.
Compounding annually A form of compound Cylinder A prism right with a circular cross-
interest where the interest is calculated per year. section. See Open cylinder and Closed cylinder.
Compounding time period The compounding
period is the time period for the calculation D
of interest for an investment or loan. Typical
compounding periods are yearly, quarterly, Data Raw scores. Information before it is organised.
monthly or daily. Daylight saving time Advancing clocks one hour
Concentration The amount of an ingredient in during the warmer months of the year so that the
a mixture or solution expressed as a ratio to the increased hours of daylight fall in the evening
amount of the mixture or solution. more than in the early morning.
Cone A solid figure, with a circular base, that Decile Divides an ordered dataset into 10 equal
tapers to a point. groups.
Constant of variation He constant coefficient Deduction A regular amount of money
related to pairs of variables that are in direct subtracted from a person’s wage or salary. See
proportion. also Tax deduction
Constant term The part of an equation or Dependent variable If two variables y and x
expression without any pronumerals. are related in an equation, when a number is
Consumption Of fuel or energy, the rate substituted for one variable, such as x = 2, then
expressed as amount used over time or distance this variable is called the independent variable and
or other variable. the other is called the dependent variable.
444
Deposit An amount put into an account; Equator Imaginary horizontal line that divides
Glossary
an initial amount paid to reserve the goods the Earth into two hemispheres. Latitude of the
or services; the first payment of a series of equator is 0°.
installments. Equivalent fractions Fractions that can be
Depreciation See straight-line depreciation. reduced to the same basic fraction; fractions that
Direct variation The relationship between have the same value but are written differently.
two quantities that increase or decrease at Evaluate Calculate the exact value of an expression.
the same rate. Equation for direct variation: Event In a probability experiment, the outcome or
y = mx where y and x are two variables in direct result. See also multistage event.
proportion to each other and m is the gradient of Expand Remove the grouping symbols.
the graph of y against x. Expanded form An expression with no grouping
Discrete data Data obtained when a quantity symbols; a term shown without indices.
is counted. It can only take exact numerical Expected frequency The number of times that a
values. particular event should occur.
Distributive law A rule for expanding grouping Expression A mathematical statement written in
symbols by multiplying each term inside the numbers and symbols, containing two or more
grouping symbol by the number or term outside numbers or variables connected by operations.
the grouping symbol.
Dose The amount of a medication or drug given F
to a patient; it may refer to the amount of the
active ingredient rather than total amount of Factorise To break up an expression into a
medication itself. product of its factors.
Dot plot A graph that consists of a number line Five-number summary A summary of a data set
with each data point marked by a dot. When consisting of the lower extreme, lower quartile,
several data points have the same value, the median, upper quartile and upper extreme.
points are stacked on top of each other. Flat interest See Simple interest.
Double stem-and-leaf plot A stem-and-leaf Formula A mathematical relationship between
plot that uses two sets of similar data together. two or more variables.
Double-time A penalty rate that pays the Fortnight Two weeks or 14 days.
employee twice the normal hourly rate. Frequency The number of times a certain event
occurs; also the number of times a data value
E occurs in a set.
Frequency distribution The division of a set of
Element of the sample space An outcome or observations into a number of classes, together
data value in probability. with a listing of the number of observations (the
Energy The capacity to do work. frequency) in that class. Frequency distributions
Energy consumption The amount of energy can be displayed in the form of a frequency
consumed per unit of time. table, a two-way-table or in graphical form.
Equally likely outcomes Outcomes of an event Frequency histogram A histogram with equal
that have the same chance of occurring. intervals of the scores on the horizontal axis,
Equation A mathematical statement that says and the frequencies associated with
that two things are equal. these intervals shown by vertical rectangles.
445
Frequency polygon A line graph constructed Grouped frequency table A table with classes
by joining the midpoints at the tops of the listed in the first column in ascending order, a
rectangles of a frequency histogram. class centre column, an (optional) tally column
Frequency table A table that lists the outcomes and a frequency column with total count of
and how often (frequency) each outcome occurs. scores in each class.
If the data is grouped it is a grouped frequency Grouping symbol Symbols used to indicate the
table. order of operations such as parentheses ( ) and
Fuel consumption rate The number of litres of brackets [ ].
fuel a vehicle uses to travel 100 kilometres.
Function (mathematical) A mathematical H
relation where each element of a given set
Histogram A graph using columns to represent
is associated with at most one element of
frequency or cumulative frequency. See
another set.
Frequency histogram and Cumulative frequency
histogram.
G Hypotenuse The side in a right-angled
triangle opposite the right-angle. It is the
General form A linear equation written in the
longest side.
form ax + by + c = 0.
Goods and Services Tax (GST) A tax added I
to the purchase price of each item. The GST
rate in Australia is 10% of the purchase price of Income tax Tax paid on income received.
the item except for basic food items and some Independent variable See dependent variable.
medical expenses. Index form See Index notation.
Gradient The steepness or slope of the line. It Index notation A method to write expressions
is calculated by dividing the vertical rise by the in a shorter way such as a × a = a 2.
horizontal run. Inflation A rise in the price of goods and
Gradient–intercept formula A linear equation services or Consumer Price Index (CPI). It is
written in the form y = mx + b . often expressed as annual percentage.
Greenwich Mean Time Time at the Greenwich Intercept The position where the line cuts
meridian. the axis.
Greenwich meridian Imaginary vertical line that Interest The amount paid for borrowing money
passes through the town of Greenwich (London). or the amount earned for lending money.
Longitude of the Greenwich meridian is 0°. Interest rate The rate at which interest is
Gross income The total amount of money charged or paid. It is usually expressed as a
earned from all sources. It includes interest, percentage.
profits from shares and all payments received International Date Line An imaginary line
throughout the year. through the Pacific Ocean that corresponds to
Gross pay The total of an employee's 180° longitude.
pay including allowances, overtime pay, Interquartile range The difference between the
commissions and bonuses. first quartile and third quartile.
Grouped data Data organised into small groups Interval (data) Describes the boundaries of a
or class intervals rather than as individual scores. group of data.
446
Investment Money deposited into a bank or Lower bound Measurement minus absolute
Glossary
financial institution that grows at a particular error.
interest rate for the time it is kept there. Lower extreme Lowest score in the data set.
Isosceles triangle A triangle where two sides Lower quartile The lowest 25% of the scores in
have equal lengths and two angles are equal. the data set.
The equal angles are the ones joining each Lowest common denominator For two or more
same-length side to the third side. fractions, the lowest common multiple of their
denominators.
J
M
Joule SI unit of energy.
Mass The amount of matter within an object.
K Mean A measure of the centre. It is calculated
Kilojoules SI unit of energy, commonly used by summing all the scores and dividing by the
to measure food and heat energy, equal to 1000 number of scores.
joules accepted measurement for food energy. Measurement Determining the size of a
Kilowatt-hour Non-SI unit energy commonly quantity.
used to measure electrical energy. Measures of central tendency Also known
as measures of location. The most common
L measures are mean, median and mode.
Measures of spread Measures of spread include
Latitude The angle or angular distance north or
range, interquartile range and standard deviation.
south of the equator.
Median The middle score or value. To find the
Like term Terms with exactly the same
median, list all the scores in increasing order
pronumerals, such as 3a and 6a and the same
and select the middle one.
powers.
Medicare levy An additional charge to support
Limit of reading See precision.
Australia’s universal healthcare system.
Linear equation An equation whose variables
Meridians of longitude Great imaginary circles
are raised to the power of 1.
east and west of the Greenwich meridian.
Linear expression A mathematical statement
Modality The number of modes occurring in a
written in numbers and symbols See also Non-
set of data.
linear expression.
Mode The score that occurs the most. It is the
Linear function A function that when
score with the highest frequency.
graphed on a number plane is a straight line.
Multimodal Data with many modes or peaks.
See also Non-linear function and Function
Multistage event Two or more events such as
(mathematical).
tossing a coin and rolling a die.
Linear modelling A mathematical description
of a practical situation using a linear function. N
Loan repayment An amount paid to a bank or
financial institution at regular intervals to repay Negatively skewed Data more on the right side.
a loan with interest included. The long tail is on the left side (negative side).
Longitude The angle or angular distance east or Net of a solid A drawing consisting of plane
west of the Greenwich meridian. shapes that can be folded to form the solid.
447
Net pay The amount remaining after deductions graph. The histogram is plotted in decreasing
have been subtracted from the gross pay. order of relative frequency.
Nominal data Categorical data whose name Pareto principle 20% of the invested input is
does not indicate order. responsible for 80% of the results obtained.
Non-linear An equation or expression which Pay As You Go (PAYG) Tax deducted from a
when graphed does not produce a straight line. person’s wage or salary throughout the year.
Number pattern A sequence of numbers Per annum Calculated or applied each year.
formed using a rule. Each number in the pattern Percentage change The increase or decrease
is called a term. in the quantity as a percentage of the original
Number plane A graph with a vertical y-axis amount of the quantity.
and a horizontal x-axis intersecting at right Percentage error The maximum error
angles at the origin O (0, 0). in a measurement as a percentage of the
Numerator The top number in a fraction measurement given.
Numerical data Data that is measured using Percentile Divides an ordered data set into
numbers. 100 equal groups.
Perpendicular height The height of a 2D shape
O or 3D object when measured at right angles to
the base.
Ogive See Cumulative frequency polygon.
Piecework A fixed payment for work
Open cylinder A cylinder without a circular
completed.
base. It is the curved part of the cylinder.
Population The entire data set.
Order of operations The sequence in which
Population mean µ The mean of all values of a
computations are done.
measure in the entire population.
Ordinal data Categorical data whose name
Population standard deviation A calculation
does indicate order.
for the standard deviation that uses all the data
Outcome A possible result in a probability
or the entire population. (σ n)
experiment.
Positively skewed Data more on the left
Outlier Data values that appear to stand out
side. The long tail is on the right side
from the main body of a data set.
(positive side).
Overtime Extra payment when a person works
Power (Physics) The rate at which energy is
beyond the normal working day.
generated or consumed. (Mathematics) Another
P name for index or exponent; a way to express a
number multiplied by itself one or more times.
Parallel box-and-whisker plot A box-and- Precision The smallest unit on the measuring
whisker plot that uses two sets of similar data instrument, also known as the limit of reading.
together. Prefix The first part of a word. In
Parallelogram A quadrilateral with both pairs measurement, it is used to indicate the size of
of opposite sides parallel. a quantity.
Parallels of latitude Small imaginary circles Principal The initial amount of money
north and south of the equator. borrowed, lent or invested.
Pareto chart A graph that combines a frequency Prism A solid shape that has the same
histogram and a cumulative frequency line cross-section for its entire length or height.
448
Probability The chance of something something happening or the probability of
Glossary
happening. The probability of the event an event.
is calculated by dividing the number of Replacement In the selection of cards (or other
favourable outcomes by the total number of objects) from a set in a probability experiment,
outcomes. ‘with replacement’ means the selected card
Pronumeral A letter or symbol used to is returned to the set before the next card is
represent a number. selected, so the set always contains the original
Pyramid A solid shape with a plane shape as its cards. Selection without replacement means the
base and triangular sides meeting at an apex. set reduces with each selection.
Pythagoras’ theorem The square of Retainer A fixed payment usually paid to a
the hypotenuse is equal to the sum of person receiving a commission.
the squares of the other two sides. Rhombus A quadrilateral with both pairs of
c2 = a2 + b2 opposite sides parallel and all sides equal.
Royalty A payment for the use of intellectual
Q property such as book or song. It is calculated
as a percentage of the revenue or profit received
Quadrant Quarter of a circle. The arc of a
from its use.
quadrant measures 90°.
Quantile A set of values that divide an ordered
dataset into equal groups. S
Quantitative data Numerical data. It is data
Salary A payment for a year’s work, which
that has been measured.
is divided into equal monthly, fortnightly or
Quartile Divides an ordered data set into
weekly payments.
four equal groups. See Upper quartile and
Sample A part of the population.
Lower quartile.
Sample mean x The mean of all values of a
R measure in a particular sample.
Sample space The set of all possible
Random sample A sample that occurs when outcomes.
members of the population have an equal chance Sample standard deviation A calculation for
of being selected. the standard deviation when the data set is a
Range The difference between the highest and sample (σ n −1).
lowest scores. It is a simple way of measuring Scale factor The amount by which a shape is
the spread of the data. enlarged or reduced to get a similar figure of
Rate A comparison of different quantities in different size.
definite order. Scientific notation See Standard form.
Rate of interest See Interest rate. Score A single value from a list of data.
Relative error A measurement calculated by Sector Part of a circle between two radii and
dividing the limit of reading (absolute error) by an arc.
the actual measurement. Self-selected sample Members of the
Relative frequency The frequency of population volunteer themselves.
the event divided by the total number of Semicircle Half a circle. The arc of a semicircle
frequencies. It estimates the chances of measures 180°.
449
Significant figures A statement to specify the Stratified sample A sample using categories
accuracy of a number. It is often used to round a or strata of a population. Members from each
number. category are randomly selected. For example,
Similar figures Figures which are exactly the one student is selected from each year 7, 8, 9,
same shape but different sizes. 10, 11 and 12.
Simple interest A fixed percentage of the Subject of a formula or equation When a
amount invested or borrowed and is calculated formula or equation has a pronumeral with no
on the original amount. numbers on the left-hand side of the equal sign,
Simulation A mathematical model that such as C = 40 n + 75 then C is the subject of the
represents a real experiment or situation. formula.
Skewed data Data that is not symmetrical. See Substitution It involves replacing the
Symmetrical, Positively skewed and Negatively pronumeral in an algebraic expression with one
skewed. or more numbers.
Slant height The shortest distance from the apex Summary statistic A number such as the mode,
to an edge of the base in a pyramid or cone. mean or median that describes the data.
Smoothness Data whose graph has no breaks or Superannuation Type of annuity in which
jagged sections. money is invested for a person’s retirement.
Sphere A perfectly round object such as a ball. Surface area The sum of the area of each
Stamp duty Tax paid to the government when surface of the solid.
registering or transferring a motor vehicle. Symmetrical Data that forms a mirror image
Standard deviation A measure of the of itself when folded in the ‘middle’ along a
spread of data about the mean. It is an average vertical axis.
of the squared deviations of each score from Symmetry Data evenly balanced about the centre.
the mean. Systematic sample A sample that divides
Standard drink Any drink containing 10 grams the population into a structured sample size.
of alcohol. For example, sorting the names of people in
Standard form (also called scientific notation) alphabetical order and selecting every 5th person.
A number between 1 and 10 multiplied by a
power of 10. It is used to write very large or
T
very small numbers more conveniently.
Stem-and-leaf plot A method of displaying Table of values A set of ordered pairs (arranged
data in which the first part of a number is in table format) that can be used to plot the
written in the stem and the second part of the points to draw a graph.
number is written in the leaves. Tally To use simple marks or strokes to track the
Stopping distance The distance a vehicle travels number of times a value occurs; a cross stroke is
from the time a driver sees an event occurring to often used to show groups of 5.
the time the vehicle is brought to a stop. Tax deduction Expenses related to earning
Straight-line depreciation The value of an item an income allowed by the Australian Taxation
decreases by the same amount each period. Office to be deducted from their income for the
Strata A group within a population that reflects purposes of calculating taxable income, such as
the characteristics of the entire population. self-education, travel, car or clothing expenses.
450
Tax payable Tax owed to the taxation U
Glossary
office, such as the amount of tax which an
employee has to pay according to their taxable Unimodal Data with only one mode or peak.
income. Upper bound Measurement plus absolute error.
Tax refund Money returned to an individual by Upper extreme Highest score in the data set.
the Australian Taxation Office when their tax Upper quartile The highest 25% of the scores
return revels that their PAYG tax paid exceeds in the data set.
their tax payable in a year.
V
Tax return A form filled out on paper or
online and submitted to the Australian Value Added Tax (VAT) A tax added to the
Taxation Office which presents details of purchase price of each item. VAT is used in many
an individual’s tax claims, income and tax countries with the rate ranging from 2% to 25%.
deductions. Variable A symbol used to represent a number
Taxable income The gross income minus any or group of numbers.
allowable deductions. Variation A mathematical relationship between
Time 24-hour Time of day written in the form two variables.
hh : mm (hours : minutes). Volume The amount of space occupied by a
Time-and-a-half A penalty rate that pays three-dimensional object.
the employee one and half times the normal
hourly rate. W
Time zone A region of the Earth that has a
Wage A payment for work that is calculated on
uniform standard time or local time.
an hourly basis.
Timetable A list of times at which
Watt SI unit for power.
possible events or actions are intended to
take place. X
Trapezium A quadrilateral with at least one
pair parallel sides. x-intercept The point at which the graph cuts
Trapezoidal rule A formula to estimate the area the x-axis.
of a shape with an irregular boundary. Y
Tree diagram A technique used to list the
outcomes in a probability experiment. It shows y-intercept The point at which the graph cuts
each event as a branch of the tree. the y-axis.
451
Appendix: Scale factors
in similar figures
Similar figures
The pictures of the three pieces of cake are similar. Similar figures are exactly the same shape but
they are different sizes.
When we enlarge or reduce a shape by a scale factor, the original and the image are similar. Similar
shapes have:
• corresponding angles of equal size
• corresponding sides of different size, but in the same ratio or proportion.
40 mm
20 mm
A 5 mm B 10 mm
For example, the above rectangles are similar. All the angles are 90°. The corresponding sides are
( )
in the same ratio 10 = 40 = 2 . The measurements in rectangle B are twice the measurements in
5 20
rectangle A. Rectangle B has been enlarged by a scale factor of 2.
SimilAr figureS
• Similar figures are exactly the same shape but are a different size.
• Corresponding (or matching) angles of similar figures are equal.
• Corresponding (or matching) sides of similar figures are in the same ratio.
• Scale factor is the amount the first shape is enlarged or reduced to get the second shape.
453
Example 1: Calculating the scale factor
What is the scale factor for these two similar rectangles?

12 3
9 A B 4
S OLUTI O N
1 Look carefully at the similar figures. Rectangle B is smaller than rectangle A and
is rotated.
2 Match the corresponding sides (9 matches
Scale factor = 3 or 4
with 3 and 12 matches with 4). 9 12
3 Write the matching sides as a fraction
= 1 (or 1 : 3)
(measurement in rectangle B divided by the 3
matching measurement in rectangle A).
4 Simplify the fraction by dividing both terms ∴ Rectangle B is 1 the size of rectangle A.
3
by the same number. This fraction is the scale
factor.
Example 2: Using a scale factor
What is the length of the unknown side in the following 48

pair of similar triangles? 8
10 x
SOLUTI O N
1 Match the corresponding sides (8 matches with 48).
Scale factor = 48
6
2 Write the matching sides as a fraction (second shape to the = 6 (or 1 : 3)
first shape). This fraction is the scale factor.
x = 10 × 6
3 Match the corresponding side for x (side marked with a 10).
= 60
4 Calculate x by multiplying 10 by 6 (scale factor is 6).
Finding an unknown side in similar figures

The lengths of the corresponding (or matching) sides in similar figures are in the same ratio or
proportion. This property is used to calculate the length of an unknown side
454
Appendix
FINDING AN UNKNOWN SIDE IN SIMILAR FIGURES
1 Determine the corresponding or matching sides in the similar figures

2 Write an equation using two fractions formed from matching sides. A measurement from the
second shape divided by a matching measurement from the first shape. This is the scale factor.
3 Solve the equation.
4 Check that the answer is reasonable and units are correct.
Example 3: Finding an unknown side in similar figures
What are the lengths of the unknown sides in the following pair of similar triangles?
y x
1.5
1.875 12
20
S OLUTI O N
1 Determine the matching sides in the similar triangles x = 12  Second shape 
(x and 1.875, 12 and 1.5, 20 and y). 1.875 1.5  First shape 
2 Write an equation using matching sides involving x.
Use x (second shape) and 1.875 (first shape) equal to 12 x = 12 × 1.875
1.5
(second shape) and 1.5 (first shape). = 15
4 Write an equation using matching sides involving y. 20 = 12  Second shape 
Use 20 (second shape) and y (first shape) equal to 12 y 1.5  First shape 
(second shape) and 1.5 (first shape). 12 y = 20 × 1.5
y = 20 × 1.5
6 Check that the answers are reasonable. 12
= 2.5
Solving a worded problem using similar figures

Similar figures are used to solve problems that require the length of
an object. For example, we can calculate the height of a tree without
physically measuring the height. A similar figure is drawn using a metre
rule and the length of its shadow is measured (see example below). This is
a very useful concept.
455
SOLVING A WORDED PROBLEM USING SIMILAR FIGURES
1 Read the question and underline the key terms.

2 Draw similar figures and label the information from the question.
3 Use a pronumeral (x) to represent an unknown side.
4 Write an equation using two fractions formed from matching sides.
6 Check that the answer is reasonable and units are correct.
Example 4: Solving a problem involving similar figures
A tree casts a shadow on the ground that is 5 m in length. At

the same time a one metre ruler casts a shadow that is 80 cm in
length. What is the height of the tree? Answer in metres correct x
1m
to two decimal place.
5m 80 cm
S OLUTI O N
1 Divide 80 cm by 100 to convert it to metres. Let x be the height of the tree.
2 Determine the matching sides in the similar 80 cm = 0.8 m
triangles (1 and x, 0.8 and 5).
3 Write an equation using matching sides involving x. 1 = 0.82  Second shape 
Use 1 (second shape) and x (first shape) equal to x 5  First shape 
0.82 (second shape) and 5 (first shape).
0.8x = 5
x= 5
5 Write the answer correct to two decimal places. 0.8
= 6.25 m
6 Write answer in words. ∴ The height of the tree is 6.25 m
456
Exercise: Appendix LEVEL 1
Appendix
Example 1 1 What is the scale factor for the following pairs of similar figures?
a b 3
12
4
c 4 d 15 5
1
4
2 12
8
e 2 124° 6 f 4
72° 63°
56° 124° 56° 45°
56° 9 3
124° 3 72°
4 56° 124°
45° 63°
12
Example 2 2 Use the scale factor to find the length of the unknown side in the following pairs of similar
figures.
a 6 3 b
2
6
1
a
b
9
c 101° 10 101° c
d
68° 6 56°
67° d
67° 68° 9
101°
10 56°
101° 15 56° 56°
45
457
3 Find the length of the pronumeral for the following pairs of similar triangles. All measurements
are in centimetres.
a x b 4
9 1.5
8 x
12
c x 7 d 5
21
6 7
10
x
Example 3 4 Find the length of the unknown sides for the following pairs of similar triangles. All
measurements are in centimetres.
a a 8 b 15
3 b
16 y 24
5
10 12
x
c 9 12 d c
d 7
6
p 10 4 20
28
q
Example 4 5 A tree casts a shadow 3.5 m long. At the same time a one metre ruler
casts a shadow 0.5 m long. What is the height of the tree? Answer
1m
3.5 m 0.5 m
6 A building casts a shadow 9 m long. At the same time a one metre

ruler casts a shadow 0.75 m long. What is the height of the building?
Answer correct to the nearest metre.
1m
9m 0.75 m
458
LEVEL 2
Appendix
7 A stick 2 m high throws a shadow 1.5 m long. At the same time a tower throws a shadow 30 m
long. How high is the tower? Answer correct to one decimal place.
8 David is 1.8 m in height. When he is standing out in the sun his shadow is 2.4 m long. At the
same time a block of units casts a shadow of 18 m. How tall is the block of units? Answer
correct to the nearest metre.
9 Jessica found that her shadow was 3 m long when the shadow of a flagpole was 9 m long. If
Jessica’s height is 1.5 m, what is the height of the flagpole? Answer to the nearest metre.
10 Lucas and his younger brother Nathan are standing side by side. Nathan is 1.4 m tall and
casts a shadow 3.5 m long. How tall is Lucas if his shadow is 5 m long? Answer correct to
one decimal place.
11 Wollongong’s lighthouse casts a shadow of length 15 m. At the same time a one metre beach
umbrella casts a shadow whose length is 1.25 m.
a What is the height of the lighthouse? Answer correct to nearest metre.
b A nearby wall casts a shadow 5 m long. Calculate the height of this wall to the nearest
metre.
LEVEL 3
12 Find the value of the pronumeral in the following diagrams.
a b
8 12 7
3
9
x
6 z
3 y
13 A tree and a 1 m vertical stick cast their shadows at a particular time of the day. The shadow of
the tree is 32 m and the shadow of the vertical stick is 4 m.
a Draw two triangles to represent the above information.
b Give a reason why the two triangles are similar.
c Find the height of the tree correct to the nearest metre.
14 A 3.5 m ladder has a support 80 cm long placed 1.5 m from the top of the
ladder. How far apart are the feet of the ladder? Answer in centimetres
correct to the nearest whole number.
80 cm
459
Answers
Chapter 1 9 2x 2 + 4 x x 7y
d − ab e n4 f
10 500 − 6 y 2 − 3 y 6 6
4 5 2
Exercise 1A
11 4 x 2 + x + 6 y g −y h 7d i x
8 e 2y 2
1a 8g b 17 x c d
12a 7 k b 17b c 17r 8a x 12 b s6
d 4x 2 e 9c 2 f −3r 3 12 24 6
c 9y 2 d 64 n 9
g −3m h 8t i 12 v 2 d 39r e 23n 7
f d
70 30 24 e − a 20 b 10 f 625r 8t 4
ddd
2a 7w + 2 b 5q − 8 29 y
g 11a h g a 12 b 11 h 1296e 10 f 31
c 15a + 1 d 3x 2 + 4 y 30 44
i 864 a 11b 18
e 4b + a
2
f −3n 3 + 2m 13a 11m b 21x
12 20 9a 1 b1 c 5
g −12 x 2 − y h 8a 2 − b
42 m = 7m 37 h d 7 e a f 1
i 4z + 9 y
2 c d
30 5 84 g −10 h1 i 7
3a −4u 4 + 6u 2 + 9 b 7q 3 − 3q 2 21 + y
14a b 10 − x 10a 16q 5
b −8u 7
c b2 d 3x 3 + x 2 7 2
57 m 7y c 24 a 8 d 7x 4
e 2p + 2p
2
f 2w 2 − 2w c d
7 9 e 2m 7 f −d 8
g c 2 + 4c + 2 h k3 − k2 +3 14 y − 1
e f 11 x−2 g 125g 12 h c 20 d 8
i −2 y + y − 5
2
3 4 i 64 x 18 y 6 j 20
5+ y
4a b 3− x g 12 a +7 h w − 3
k 1 l 3
7 4 6 20
c 2w + 4 d 8 − 5t 11
5 9 Exercise 1B
2m y × x2 ( −3 x 4 ) 4 xy 3
5a b c 5x
5 7 3 1a 15w b 24 p
2b 2x 2 2x 4 −6 x 6 8x 3 y 3
d e 3d = d f 5n c 120 f d 8 xy
11 3 13 e −9mn f −105kr
11b w ( −5 x 3 y 5 ) −5 x 5 y 5 15 x 7 y 5 −20 x 4 y 8
g
2
h
6 g 36 gh h 21n 2
i 150 a 2 7x 5 y8 7 x 7 y 8 −21x 9 y 8 28 x 6 y 11
3x 5y
6a b
4 8 2a m7 b 3y 8
12
c 21m 3
d r c 8z 5 d 48 y 4
10 8 ÷ ( −2 a 2 ) ab 2 3a 2b 2
e 6a 7 f 8 w 15
e 12 x = 6 x 7
f b
14 7 6 g 14 s 6t 7 h 5 p 3q 5 6a 3 2a 2
6a 4 −3a 2
3h 5p i −12c 8 d 10 b2 b2
g h
20 12 3a 10 a 9 b −12 x 12 3 a 3b 2
(−3 a5 b 2 ) −3a 4 −a 3
10 k = 5k 2
7a b 22 x = 11x c 36 y 9 d m 4n 7
12 6 24 12
4y 2y e 14 a 4 b 5 f 8c 3d 8e 2 12 a 6 b 4 −6a 4 b 4 12a 5b 2 4a 4b 2
c = d 10c = 5c 4a 4w b 9c 2 c −8s 2
10 5 6 3 32 y 2 2 2
8 13a b 12d c 10 w
d 4 e −5h f 3y 3 5 9
2
+ x2 3x 2 −2x x 2 + x g a h 2m i −4 z 2 d 15 e 1 f 10 w
5a y5 b 12b 6
c −3 x 63
2
3x 2 4x 2 6x 2 − 2x 4 x 2 + x d 2m 4 e −3t 9
f −b 4 g 15a h 2m i c
2 d 13 4 q2 2 45 3e
6x x 2+ 6 x 3x 2 + 4 x x 2 + 7 x g h i 3e2
3 3 2 14a 4 m 13 b −14 x 11 c 45 y 10
x 2 − 2 x 2x 2 − 2x 4 x 2 − 4 x 2x 2 − x 6a 6 w 4 b 5 y 10 c 3x 3 15 x
2y
d −14 a 4
e −8c 14
f −28e 6
−2 x x − 2 x 3x − 4 x
2 2
x −x
2 3
7a 2a b 4t c 8 16 15 x
2 461
17a 8 x 4 6 8 9a 7x − 3 b 5y + 8 5a x = 126.00
b 5a c 7v
2 4 c 8a + 22 d 13c − 9 b y = 5.74, x = 8.31
7
d 20 x 4 y e m 3n 2 4
f e4 e 10 s + 34 f 9h + 21 6a x = 3.6 cm, y = 1.7 cm
3f
9 2 3
g 10 x h 2 z + 59 b x = 21.1 cm
g 25a 2 b h m i c d3 i 7c − 41 j 21g + 3
45 7e
k 13u − 18 l −7d + 10 Exercise 1E
18a 15h 2 k 2 2
b u v
4 10 Did not apply the minus 1a 21.6 cm b 41.2 m
a 2b 2 2 sign when multiplying −2 c 59.0 m
c d 18m n
2 by 3. The correct answer is 2 49.2 m
3m 2 1
e f 18 x − 12 − 2 x − 6 = 16 x − 18 3a 40.0 m b 12.4 cm
4 6y 2
3x 4 y 11a 2 x 2 − 3x b 2b 2 + 4 b c 26.5 mm
19a b m 2 np 2
z2 c 2 y2 + 5y d g2 4 43.69 cm
2 2
c 2a 3c 2 d c d e 7 v − 3v
2
f b 2 − 3b 5a 18.8 m b 12.6 cm
2 g 3u 2 + 5u h 3n 2 − 25n c 88.0 mm
e −244 w
2 5
f 16c 2d 5d + 26d j −6e 2 + 65e
2
i 6a 25.1 cm b 119.4 m
u e
k 7 k 2 − 15k l −10t 2 + 19t c 213.6 mm d 157.1 mm
Exercise 1C 12 a b − 5ab
2 2
e 69.1 m f 18.8 cm
13a 2 x 3 + 3x 2 − 2 x − 2 7a 25.7 m b 10.8 m c 41.1 m
1 Did not multiply −2 by 3. The
b a 3 + 2a 2 − 4 a − 12 8a 25.00 m b 10.71 mm
correct answer is 9 x − 6
c 5 y 3 + 2 y 2 − 3 y − 21 c 33.56 cm
2a 3a + 6 b 2d + 2
d −3b 3 − b 2 + 7b 9a 36 m b 16 m c 47 cm
c 7b − 14 d 6x + 8
e z 3 − 2z 2 − z d 22 m e 24 m f 23 m
e 10 x − 14 f 36b + 4
f −2e 3 − 7e 2 + 7e 10 28 cm
g 20 + 8t h 6 − 12 w
g 5x 11a 8.49 cm b 28.97 cm
i 15 + 45d j 40e − 16d
h 3a 3 + 3a
k 20 a + 45b l 14 h + 56 g
i v Exercise 1F
3a −4 x − 12 b −3 y − 15
j a 3 + a 2 b − ab − b 2
c −b − 8 d −7 k + 14 1a 149.5 m2 b 4 cm2
k x 4 + x 2 y − x 2 − 3 xy
e −6 w + 6 f −2 x + 26 c 19.5 mm2 d 72.2 m2
l y 3 + 4 y 2 z − yz 2 − y
g −8 − 4 q h −15 + 20r e 100.8 mm2 f 40.4 m2
14a 5m 6 + m 2
i 14 s − 56 2a 37.2 cm2 b 71.7 m2
b 2x 6 − 6x 5 + 8x 4
4a y 2 + y b v 2 + 4v c 198 m2 d 70 mm2
c a12 − 3a 8 − 2a 4
c n + 10 n
2
d 2 x 2 − 3x e 14 m2 f 21 cm2
15a 21a 6 − 10 a 4 + 7a 3
e 3e 2 + 5e f 6d 2 − 2d 3 42 cm2
b 9 x5 − 35 x2
g 7ez + 3 fz h 2ab − 3ac 4 11 046 m2
c −6n 3 + 3n 2r
i cd + 4ce 4 5 154 cm2
16a 2b 2 b 3r c 1
5a 6 g + 2 b 8s + 14 4 8b 6a 5.8 km2 b 82.8 cm2
c y − 27 d x +8 c 15.0 mm2 d 31.8 cm2
Exercise 1D
e 8z − 2 f −4 q + 35 e 75 mm2 f 120 m2
6a 6 x + 1 b 25 y − 16 1a 10.0 cm b 13.0 cm 7 7 m2
c 9b − 4 d 9r + 2 c 26.0 mm d 22.4 mm 8 49 m2
e 5n − 2 f 4q − 7 e 4.9 cm f 83.1 cm 9 30 tiles
7a 4 y + 12 b 2c + 2 2a 9.00 cm b 14.70 cm 10a 1380 cm2 b 36 cm2
c 5a − 15 d −9e 2 − 12 c 11.53 mm d 21.17 mm c 134 cm2
e −8b + 4
2
f −24 g 2 − 18 e 4.21 cm f 10.42 cm 11 50 cm2
8a k 2 + 3k b 2b 2 − 6b 3a y = 55 mm b a = 55 mm 12 42 cm2
c −3 y + 5 y
2
d 4x 2 − x c x = 23 mm d d = 25 mm 13a 253 m2 b $5060
e − ab − 4 ac f 5 pq − 3 pr e b = 62 mm f m = 14 mm 14a 8 cm b 6 cm
4 9.0 m c 148.5 cm2
462
15 50.27 mm2 Exercise 1I 5
2 Score Tally Freq
16a 5.66 m b 80 m
Answers
1a
17a 32 cm2 b 8 91 |||| 4
Score Tally Freq
c 6.87 cm2
20 ||| 3 92 |||| 5
Exercise 1G 21 |||| || 7 93 ||| 3
1a $5850 b $910 22 |||| | 6 94 |||| 4

c $37 000 d $1134 95 ||| 3
23 |||| 4
e $15 225
24 || 2 96 ||| 3
2a $600 b $1089
c $5020 d $10 005 97 |||| 5
b 21 c 22
e $11 518.75 98 ||| 3
2a
3a 1.2% b 0.4%
Number Tally Freq 6a
c 2.4% d 3.6%
of calls
4a $8 b $144 Score Tally Freq
c $1440 d $900 0 |||| || 7
1 |||| |||| | 11
5 $55 200 1 |||| |||| || 12
6 $69.75 2 |||| |||| 9
2 |||| ||| 8
7a $22 000 b $122 000 3 |||| 5
8 $24 3 |||| 4
4 |||| |||| | 11
9 $5040 4 || 2
10a $7680 b $7560 c $7200 5 |||| | 6
5 | 1
11 Computer application 6 |||| |||| 9
12 $71.75 b1 c 2 d 27
13 $40 000 b 51
3
14 7.5% c 31
Score Tally Freq d 1 and 4
15 3 13 years
0 |||| | 6 e No: Small sample accounts for
16a $51 000 b $2000
the difference in frequencies OR
1 |||| || 7
Yes: There is a notable
Exercise 1H
2 |||| | 6 difference between the
1a $899.89 b $11 578.20 3 |||| 5 frequency of the outcomes.
c $15 577.17 d $27 621.40 7a
4 ||| 3
2a $10 063.79 b $102 028.69 Score Tally Freq
c $1307.84 d $23 509.61 5 || 2
3 $27 209.78 32 |||| | 6
6 | 1
4 $12 107.45 33 |||| 5
5 $2536.50 4
34 |||| |||| 9
6 $6433.75 Score Tally Freq
7a $20 766.90 b $7266.90 35 |||| ||| 8
7 ||| 3
8 $39 604.68 36 |||| ||| 8
9 $53 608.98 8 |||| || 7
37 |||| | 6
10 $49 662.32 9 |||| 4
11 Computer application 38 |||| |||| 9
10 ||| 3
12 $2340.76
b 51 c 20
13 Investment 2 by $80 11 || 2
d 34 and 38 s e 29.41%
12 | 1
463
8a 12 1.96 Chapter 2
Score Tally Freq 13 15
Exercise 2A
1 |||| 4 Review 1
1a $1782 b $3563 c $7721
2 |||| 4 Multiple-choice 2a $1108, $2217
3 |||| |||| | 11 b $1509, $3019
1 D 2 D 3 A 4 B 5 D
4 || 2 c $2073, $4146
6 B 7 B 8 D 9 C 10 C
d $851, $1702
5 |||| ||| 8 Short-answer 3 $1656
6 |||| | 6 1a 6ab3 b 8x2 − 2x 4a $30 160 b $39 520
c 2m + 12m
2 c $39 216 d $125 736
7 |||| 4
3y 5a $3000 b $78 000
8 ||| 3 2a 7 x b 37b c
3 15 4 6 $41 860
9 |||| 5 3a 15m5 b 12 y6 7 $81120
8 Stephanie $49 348.00, Tahlia
10 0 c 3v d 7
2 $45 852.00; Stephanie by
11 0 e x12 f 16 x 4 y 6 $3496.00
12 | 1 4a 2x − 2 y 2 9 Laura $32 110.00, Ebony
b 6 w + 36m $29 508.00; Laura
b 3 letters c −24 a2 + 8b 2 by $2602.00
c Small amount of data indicates d −8a + 3b 10 Tran $98 696.00, Jake
that the conclusions are not e 9 y + 21 $99 960.00; Difference
reliable. However, a word length f c 5 + 4c 3d $1264.00
of 3 occurs significantly more 5a 35.00 b 15.65 11a $892.50 b $943.50
often than any other word length. c 38.47 c $1020.00 d $1071.00
6a 26.2 cm b 69.1 cm 12 $1130.50
Exercise 1J c 40.0 m 13a $444.00 b $351.50
7a 27.0 m2 b 17.5 m2 c $858.40 d $511.71
1a 9 b 28 c8
c 125.4 cm2 d 47.0 cm2 14a $15 787.20 b $31 720.00
d5 e7 f 42
e 28.0 mm2 f 3.0 m2 c $39 062.40 d $24 731.20
g 11 h 14
8 $300 15a 40.50 hours b $911.25
2a 14.0 b 7.0 c 9.5
9a $135 061 b $151 497 16 42 hours
d 9.5 e 11.0 f 2.2
10a 11 b 40 17 9 hours
g 10.2 h 8.8
11a 12 b 16 18a $193.60 b $968.00
3a 1406 b 70.30 c 69.95
c $1936.00 d $50336.00
4a 9 b7 c 34 Extended-response
19 Alyssa $332.10, Connor
d 1100 e2 f 100
12 $64 286 $320.00; Alyssa by $12.10
g1 h 10
13a 20 $635 481.60
5a 7 b 16 c 20.5
Class Freq. 21 $83 790.00
d 12 e 120 f 3
22 Computer application
g 50 h 10.5 4 −8 5
23 $1777.58. Calculations
6 16 9 −13 6 for weekly pay are incorrect
7a 13 b5 c9 d 39
14 −18 8 as not every month has
8a 17 b7 c 26 d 24
4 weeks.
9a 25 b 19 c 22 19 − 23 4
$1640.85
d4 e 22
23 24 18.75 hours
10a 16 b 13 c3 d 14
11a 7.89 b7 c4 b 12 c 21.7%
464
Exercise 2B Exercise 2D e $128
Allowable deduction $736
Answers
1a $1092.00 b $897.75 1a $352.80 b $669.60
c $1862.00 d $966.00 c $1368.80 2 $1591
e $1176.00 2a $9120.00 b $8400.00 3 $4614
2a $1421.00 b $791.00 c $5710.00 d $11 814.00 4 a i $2349.60 ii $844.80
c $784.00 d $1074.85 3 $1620.00 iii $3022.80 iv $1544.40
3 $3564.95 4a $431.00 b $642.00 v $2049.30 vi $3960.00
4 $2326.50 c $1640.00 b i $2610.00 ii $773.40
5a $2901.60 b $2896.20 5 $960.00 iii $3300.00 iv $2400.00
c $2065.80 d $2943.90 6a $512.00 b $500.00 v $48.00 vi $416.40
e $2214.50 f $2055.00 7a $1000, $3250 5 $5107.20
6 $222 b $1000, $4500 6a $24 000 b $48000
7 $5810.95 c $1000, $5750 c $72000 d $96000
8 $542 d $1000, $7000 7 $1890
9 Computer application 8 $50600.00 8a $775.50 b $519.59
10a $1424.00 b $35.60 9a $3400.00 b $4700.00 c $348.12
11a $1400.00 b $980.00 c $5200.00 9 $47160
c $73528.00 10 2% 10a $115.20 b $67.20
d Pay increases by $728; however, 11 $460.00 c $54.72 d $915.20
the holiday loading was $980. 12a $11 600.00 b $41 600.00
c $2260.00 d $1220.00 Exercise 2G
Exercise 2C
1a $78 880 b $74 429
1a $108.00 b $237.00 Exercise 2E c $79 280 d $59 896
c $379.20 d $262.98 1a $2250 b $3870 c $2880 e $75 795 f $66 406
2a $227.94 b $114.30 2 $5140 g $71 480 h $60 110
c $292.68 d $370.74 3 $500 i $49 440
3 $1560.00 4 $4473.60 2 $64 378
4 $135.30 5a $13 096.32 b $36 864.00 3a $3200 b $72 280
5 $1023.40 c $15 712.35 4a $89 164 b $1140
6a 45.5 hours b $1041.60 6a $12 105.60 b $9240.40 c $88 024
7 $9.80 7a $8762.00 b $18 312.84 5a $2210 b $61 410
8 $16.00 c $28 580.76 6a $58 240 b $56 780
9 $1000.68 8a $58.20 b $97.00 7a $64 642 b $60 322
10 $1237.50 c $107.60 d $165.80 8a $72 280 b $301
11a $257.50 b $1287.50 9a $142.80 b $156.40 c $824 d $71 456
12 $820.88 c $154.20 d $103.20 9a $99 580 b $224.40
13 $1761 10a $1005.00 b $595.00 c $1964.40 d $97 615.60
14 $3589.60 11 $358.20
15 $2212 12a 11 240 copies Exercise 2H
16 $3720 b $42 065.70 1a $511.00 b $720.00
17 $451.05 c $37 859.13 c $493.00
18 $680.00 13 $832.00 2a $407.40 b $1419.60
19a $448.00 b $268.80
c $962.73
c 37.5% Exercise 2F 3a $15 892.00 b $32 858.00
20 5.89 hours
1a $165 b $330 4a $1689.95 b $3850.70
21a $453.60 b 4 hours
c $45 d $68 c $4003.61
c $22.68 d $567.00
5 $79485.00
465
6a $464.75 b $343.75 14 Computer application 4a 11 b 56 c 92
7a $9.60 b $310.40 15a $21 660 b $18 297.75 d 0.88 e 25 f 13
c Refund of $3362.25 9 8
c $16 140.80 c −300
5a 16 b 98
8a $1434.00 b $258.12 d 22.2%
d2 e −45 f 14.0625
c $129.06 d $542.18 16a $1275 b $5611.38
g 7 h − 27 i 0.07
e $891.82 17 $59 670 250 128
9a $1120.00 b $168.00 6a 2 b5 c2
c $100.80 d $363.80 Review 2 d3 e1 f 8
e $756.20 g 0.25 h 13 i 1
Multiple-choice 4 25
10a $1976.00 b $177.84
7a 2 b4 c3 d1
c $1769.71 1 B 2 B 3 C 4 A 5 D
8a 485 b −153 c 48
11a $984.40 b 33.0% 6 D 7 A 8 B 9 B
d 11 e 25 f 10
12a $2420.10 b $1210.05 Short-answer 49
c 24.7% d $2400.00 9 150.8 cm2 10 64
13a $2403.00 b $1259.40 1a $1855.20 b $38.65 11 3 12 2.35 13 3.24
c 17% 2 $5371.25 14 8 15 0.008
3a $839.16 b $5634.36 16 9.20 17 6
Exercise 2I 4 $641.25
5a $4725.00 b $235 275.00 Exercise 3B
1a B bA cC 6 $4440
dD eE f C 7a $31 461.46 b $26 742.24 1a 90 km/h b 97 km/h
gC hD i A 8 $1056.00 9 $5.35 c 80 km/h d 84 km/h
2a $532 b $2717 10 $5773 11 $77520 e 96 km/h f 48 km/h
c $15 922 d $32 994 12a $1270.50 b $2579.50 2a 168 km b 392 km
e $76 732 f $17 547 13a $96 720 b $493 c 146 km d 70 km
3 $1862 c $3230 d $93 490 e 196 km f 154 km
4 $28702 14 $37 519.10 3a 2 h b 2.5 h c 2.5 h
5a 19 cents b $3572.33 15 $747.50 d 5h e 6h f 8h
c $19 822.37 4 227.27 km/h
6a $460.00 b $1770.82 Extended-response 5a 70 km b 0.9 h
c $812.00 d $938.12 16a $513 b $102.60 c 77.78 km/h
e $1356.00 f $4011.84 17a $25 480 6a 45 minutes b 64 km/h
g $3406.00 h $315.80 b $27 136.90 7a 25 m b 20 m c 45 m
i $1812.80 c He pays another $1656.90 in tax. 8a 47 m b 49 m
7a $511.10 b $15 585.95 d 25.4% 9a 12 m b 25 m
c $3836.55 d $30 515 c 43 m d 66 m
e $61 625.50 f $8905.25 e 94 m f 126 m
8a $1951.50 refund Chapter 3 10a No. Stopping distance is 15 m.
b $96.16 owing b Sarah would hit the child at a
Exercise 3A
9a $42 540 b $5372.50 greater speed.
c $432.50 1a 19 b 19 c7 11a 89.510 m b 92 m
10a $147 500 d 25 e −96 f 24 12a 81 km/h b 63 km/h
b $42 207 g 48 h2 i 3 c 48 km/h d 115 km/h
c $44 720 2a 25 b 10 c0 13a 34 km b 2 km
d Refund of $2513 d −25 e4 f 7 c 91 km d 272 km
11a $41 535.08 b 28.5% 3a −2 b6 c 97 14a 5 h 29 min b 50 min
12a $1128 b $11 005 d1 e −2 f 1 c 5 h 6 min d 9 h 21 min
13a $2496 b $36 304 g −2 3 h 6.61 i −2 24 e 20 min f 1 h 40 min
4 25
466
15a 1224 km/h b 102 km 2a n = 3 b x=5 10a m = 2 bt=4 c e = −4
c 0.34 km d 48 min c c = −4 d b = 71 d x = −1 1 e d =6 f w = −1
Answers
2 3
16a 169 km/h b 5 h 55 min 1
e m = −5 f b = −4 1 g a = 31 h g = 61 i r=5
17a 4 6 2 5
Speed (km/h) Reaction g s = 16 h y = 30 11a a = 16 b z = 12 1
i a = −77 j g = 24 3
distance (m)
k c = 45 l k = −9 cr=1 d x = −2 5
2 6
10 2.1
3a Error is in the second line. 1
eb=2 f w=−
20 4.2 b 6 y = 2 or y = 1 6
3
40 8.3 4a w = 5 bt=3 c x=4 12a d = 5 b x = −8
80 16.7 d y = −1 e m = −1 f a = 7 c a = −4 d y =1
ge=4 h b =1 i k = −5 e m = −3 4 f c = 15
b Yes. Table shows the reaction j w=3 k d = −1 l z = −6 5 6
gs=− 2 h z = 21
distance doubles when the 7 2
speed doubles. 5a q = 13 = 4 1
3 3 i b =1 j x = −1
18a 25 1 3
br= =6
Speed (km/h) Braking
4 4 k a =1 l w = 21
3 1 2
c x = =1
distance (m) 2 2 13a x = −4 1 bw=7 1
5 5
10 0.60 da= 27 = 63
4 4 c y=− 2 d e = −3 1
20 2.35 11 3
em= 1
40 9.41 5 em=− 2 f b = −1 1
19 14
f k = − 17 = −8 1
80 37.65 2 2 g r = −1 2 h t =1 2
3 13
gc= 13 =6 1
b Yes. Table shows the braking 2 2 i n = −1 8
distance quadruples when the 13
he= 16 =3 1
speed doubles. 5 5 14a 3c + 15 = 261 b Cost is $82
i p= 15 = 21 15 Number is −5
19a t = 18  d − V 
2
5V  170 
6 2 16a v = 12 b a = 14 2
9 1 7
b 0.6 s c 1.8 s d 3.0s j r= =4
2 2 c x = 13 1 d m = 52 1
44 3 2
20a kw= = 14 2
3 3 e b = 84 f g = 96
Reaction time Reaction
l c= 8
(s) distance (m) 9 g y = 33 h c = 2 10
5 13
0.50 8 6a d = 5 b y = 12
12 5 i h = 40 j n = 56
1.00 17 2
ca= d x = 92 k p = −20 l z = 10
3 3 21
1.50 25
1 f n = 36 1
eb=7
5 4 17a x = 1 b a = −5
b Reaction distance increases when 3 6
the reaction time increases. 7a z = 10 bc=4 c y=2 d d = −1
5
c m = 36 d x = 38
9 e c = 11 f m=1
7 2
Exercise 3C e y = 16 4 f a = 20
5 18a b = − 2 b y= 1
1a a=8 b y = 11 a 5 7
8a + 20 = 27 b a = 28
c x = 10 d g=7 4 c y=3 d x = −3
e w = −4 f z = −13 9a g = 16 b y = 36 e c = −1 f m = −5 1
2 2
g b=9 h m = 18 c c = 50 d x = −49
19a 2 x + 6 = x + 2 b x = −4
i c = 21 j q=7 eb=4 f w = 37 1
k h=6 l n = −5
2 20a x + 8 = 2 x − 6 b x = 14
467
21a d = − 3 b r = −18 Exercise 3E
15a m = Bh 2 bh= m
5 B
y
c x = −1 7 d a = 53 1a x = y − 3 bx= c i h = 1.82 m
9 5 5
y−9 ii h = 1.84 m
em=− 2 f y=2 c x = y+7 d x=
5 2  r 
y+7 16 M = FV  
22a a = 1 3 b m = 32 e x=4−y f x=  (1 + r ) n
− 1 
4 3 3
2a x = 8 y b x = 2( y − 1) 17a L = 9.8T 2
c y = −1 d b = −14
c x = 3( y + 1) d x = 6(7 − y) b L = 156.8 metres
e x = −4 f c = 51
18 cos C = a + b − c
2 2 2
2 e x = 5( y − 5) f x = −3( y + 2)
2ab
g n = 91 h k = 83
2 4 3a t = d b s=d 19a r = 3 3V b r = 1.24 m
s t 4π
i p = 36 1 c 64 km/h
2
Z 2 − R2
4a l = A bb= A 20 L = ±
Exercise 3D b l 2π f
21 A = P(r + 1) n
c b = 6.4 cm d l = 2.625 cm
1a A = 113.1 b A = 804.2
5a m = F ba= F
Exercise 3F
c A = 7238.2 a m
2a A = 157.08 b A = 1036.73 ca=4 d m = 4.5 1a 0.09 b 0.07 c 0.10
c A = 75.40 6a b = a − c b b= a+c d 0.10 e 0.28 f 0.17
6
3a I = 6.0 b I = 18.0
d b = a − 2c
2a 0.02 b 0.10 c 0.01
c b=a−c
c I = 50.4 6 d 0.20 e 0.16 f 0.04
4a A = 11.49 b A = 6.75 e b = 4a + c f b = 8a − 3c 3a 0.09 b 0.11
7
c A = 10.13 g b = a + c or b = − a − c c about 6 hours
−2 2
5a S = 20.0 b S = 2.5 + 4a 3 h 44 min b 8 h 12 min
hb= a c i b = a + 4c
6a V = 905 b V = 589 5 9 c 5 h 48 min d 10 h 12 min
y−b
c V = 1499 7a b = y − mx bm= e 6 h 8 min f 11 h 28 min
x
7a z = 2 b z = 4.875 y−b 5a 4 h 56 min b 1 h 56 min
c x= d x=3
8a $1050 b $1112.50 m c 11 h 28 min d 1 h 52 min
c $1500 e m=4 e 3 h 20 min f 20 min
9a 16º C b 27º C c 38º C 8a l = P − b b l = 25 m 6a Body weight 45 kg
2
10 r = 4.14 cm
c b= P −l
0.2
11a 540 000 km b 3780 000 km 2
c 196560 000 km 9a a = w − 1.5b − 2c 0.15
35
12 V = 9 volts
( )
BAC
b b = w − a − 2c ÷ 1.5 0.1
13 n = 60 35
14 h = 4.5 cm 35(
c c = w − a − 1.5b ÷ 2 ) 0.05
15 t = 7.75 d c = 5.25
16 b = 28.72 mm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
17 s = −13.5 10a b = A b b = 2.07 cm

πa b
Drinks
18 n = 2 y−4 Body weight 115 kg

11a x = ± y bx=±
19 R1 = 1.40 3 0.2
5− y
20 FV = $27 160.56 c x=± dx=y 2
4 0.15
21 PV = $5006
y2 ( y − 7) 2
BAC
e x= f x=
22 a = 3 1 49 4 0.1
2
23 h = 20 12 p = ± 4 m − 5n 0.05
2
24 c = 3.6 V V
13a h = br=
25 s = 592.5 w
πr 2 πh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
26 A = 0.7 c r = 1.69 cm Drinks
27 V = 268 cm3 14 r = A 7a 1.4 b 8.0 c 1.5

4π
468 d 0.9 e 0.6
8a 0.075 h b 0.045 h 7 2 495000 m
e y = −1 f a = −4
9a 3 h 5 min b 5 h 45 min 9 8 2.2 kg
Answers
7a c = 6 1 b x =1 1 c u =1
10a 3.2 b 6.8 2 2 9 12 t
11a Male – 4.7, Female – 7.6 8a A = 1.47 b A = 2.34 10 5.625 kg
b Males are larger in size. 11 23.4 g
c A = 4.57
12 10 750 g
9a m = 2.6 kg b v = 3.138 m/s
Exercise 3G 13 3068 kg
10 sin C = 2 A 14 7.25 kg
1 120 mg ab
v 2
− u2 15a 159 km b 19.875 L
2a 50 b 150 11a s =
2a 16 12 km
c 12.5 days
b u = ± v 2 − 2as 17a 4 b 40
3a 5 mg b 40 mg c 1800 mg
12a 0.084 b 5.6 hours 18a 0.005 km, 5000 cm, 500 m,
4a 0.6 mL b 0.8 mL
5 000 000 mm
c 2 mL d 1.6 mL b 5 000 000 mm, 500 m, 5000 cm,
Extended-response
5a 3 mL b 6 mL 0.005 km
c 2 mL d 10 mL 13a 1.5 h 19a 1000 000 b 1000 000
6a 11 mL b 4 mL b Anna – 15 km, Bridget – 18 km c 100 d 0.1
c 2 mL d 7 mL 14a C = 120 + 65h b $380 e 20 f 0.005
7a 187.5 mL/h b 400 mL/h g 39000 h 310 000 000
8a 1.5 tablets b 2.25 tablets Chapter 4 i 4 700 000 j 0.0743
9a 12.5 mL b 12 mL k 65 l 0.4
10a 25 mL b 8 doses Exercise 4A
20a 0.08 b8
c 2 days 1a 50 b 7800 21a 1.5 km b 50
11a 150 mL/h c 2000 d 89000
b 2.5 mL/min e 570 f 600 000 Exercise 4B
c 3000 drops/h g 9.4 h 60
1a A = 10 mm, B = 44 mm,
d 50 drops/min i 81 j 0.49
C = 72 mm, D = 89 mm
k 22 l 5.1 b 1 mm
Review 3 2a 3000 b 45000 c 0.5 mm
c 76000 d 8100 000 d A Lower bound = 9.5
Multiple-choice
e 4 000 000 f 520 A Upper bound = 10.5
1 C 2 C 3 A 4 D g 6.8 h 9.3 B Lower bound = 43.5
5 C 6 B 7 D 8 D i 45 j 0.3 B Upper bound = 44.5
Short-answer k 2.3 l 60 C Lower bound = 71.5
3a 2000 b 12000 C Upper bound = 72.5
1a 44 b 102 c 9000 000 d 7800 000 D Lower bound = 88.5
2 87.96 cm e 50 000 f 300 000 000 D Upper bound = 89.5
3a 510 km b 38.25 L c $58.14 g 6.1 h 0.4 e A ± 0.050
4a 39 m b 29 m i 0.21 j 0.08 B ± 0.011
5a e = 8 b b = 41 k 0.079 l 8 C ± 0.007
2
c w=9 dn=6 4a Centimetre b Metre D ± 0.006
e a=5 f q=4 c Millimetre d Kilometre f A – 5.0%
e Centimetre f Metre
g h = 98 hd= 7 B – 1.1%
10 5a Tonne b Gram
1 C – 0.7%
i y= c Kilogram d Kilogram
2 D – 0.6%
6a p = −8 b s = −1 4 e Tonne f Gram 2a A – 1.82 kg, B – 4.24 kg
5
c p=2 dd=6 6a 19.25 L b 50
7
469
b 0.02 kg c 0.000000163 c Fruit and milk d Fruit
c 0.01 kg d 0.00581 e Milk f 2
d A Lower limit = 1.81 e 0.049 4a 52.8 g
A Upper limit = 1.83 f 0.98 b i 95 kJ
B Lower limit = 4.23 g 0.0000000412 ii 475 kJ
B Upper limit = 4.25 h 0.0000633 iii 4180 kJ
e A ± 0.005,B ± 0.002 i 0.000000003 c i 2090 kJ
f A 0.5%,B 0.2% j 0.000000007134 ii 418 kJ
3a 0.40 kg b 0.008 c 0.80% 7 5.81 × 10 −6 kg iii 20.9 kJ
4a 16 g b 0.068 c 6.81% 8a 1.475 × 1010 b 2.961 × 108 d 16720 kJ e 74
−6
5a 0.29 kg b 0.097 c 9.667% c 2.982 × 10 d 1.86 × 10−8 f 1% g 1.5625%
6a 0.15 m b 0.006 c 0.6% 9a 3.25 × 107 b 1.5 × 1010 h 180 i 16.7%
7a 0.3 m c 1.5 × 101 j 26.4%
b 0.2m 10a 1600 000 b 3678000 5a 21
c Cooper – 0.0053 c 789000 d 3000 000 b Meat
2 servings*
Filip – 0.0036 e 778000 f 3 194 700
Milk
d Cooper – 0.534% g 821100 h 7000 3 servings
Grain
Filip – 0.358% i 49000 9 servings
11a 0.004 b 0.1918 Fruit
3 servings
Exercise 4C c 0.00159 d 0.111222
e 0.00003 f 0.019833
1a 7.6 × 103 b 1.7 × 109 Vegetable
g 0.0081 h 0.0927 4 servings
c 5.9 × 105 d 6.8 × 106
i 0.00042 c 43%
e 3.5 × 104 f 3.1 × 108
12 0.000016 m d 33%
g 7.71 × 107 h 5.23 × 1011
13 270 000 000 cg e 3729 kJ
i 9.54 × 1010 j 5.4 × 102
14 4240 g f 3500 kJ
2a 5.6 ×10−4 b 6.87 × 10−5
15a 2 880 000 b 0.00004802
c 8.12 × 10−7 d 4.3 × 10−3
16 4 × 10 8 Exercise 4E
e 5.8 × 10−5 f 3.12 × 10−6
17a 1.5 × 10 8 b 1.2 × 10 −5
g 2.6 × 10−1 h 9.2 × 10−2 1a 21 Sep b $349.22
18a ± 262 000 b ± 2.43
i 1.67 × 10−10 j 6.0 × 10−5 c 10 Oct d $31.74
19 13 920
3 5.0 × 10 −6 s e $281.11 f $32.54
20 3 × 10 8 m/s
4a 4.10 × 108 b 4 × 108 g 10.28%
21 2 × 10 6
5a 112000 2a $45.01
22 2.76 × 1013
b 534 000 000 b $49.83
23 9.4 × 10 8 km
c 5200 c $54.65
d 86780 000 3a 16 kWh b $3.79
Exercise 4D
e 240 4a 12.6 kWh b $2.85
f 7800 000 000 1a 1883 kJ b 7531 kJ 5a 12 kWh b $2.74
g 3900 000 c 63597 kJ d 1816 Cal 6 $1.03
h 28 e 88 Cal f 299 Cal 7a $137.01 b $208.36
i 64 000 2a 2793 kJ b 3251 kJ c $385.37
j 35000 c 1743 kJ d 2035 kJ 8a 1.5 kWh b 500 Wh
6a 0.00035 e 2549 kJ c 30 h d 12.5 h
b 0.0000079 3a 4 b 3
470
9a $92.72 b $107.53 Chapter 5 d {$10, $10, $10, $10, $20, $50, }
c 5.9% d 3600 MJ { , $50, $50}
Answers
Exercise 5A
e 1930 MJ f $122.32 e {$10, $10, $10, $10, $20, $20, }
1a Certain { b Impossible $20, $50, $50}
Review 4 c Impossible d Certain 15a Even b Impossible
Multiple-choice e Impossible f Certain c Unlikely d Even
g Certain h Impossible 16 False. Not all the outcomes are
1 D 2 A 3 B 4 C 5 B i Certain j Certain equally likely.
6 D 7 D 8 D 9 C 10 B 2a Certain b Even 17a {Laura, Mia, Emma}
c Unlikely d Unlikely b No. Laura has an 80% chance of
Short-answer
e Even f Likely winning.
1 6.246 tonnes g Even h Unlikely c 10%
2a 0.05 i Even j Certain
b 400 000 3a Likely b Unlikely Exercise 5B
c 3000 000 4a Unlikely b Even
1a 1 b 2 c 1
3a 0.1 m c Unlikely 4 7 2
b 1.2 m 5a Even b Certain d 5 e 1 f 1
c 0.299% c Certain d Unlikely 26 6 5
2a 5 b 3 c 5
4a 4800 000 6a {H,T}
8 8 8
b 0.000625 b {R, R,W,W,W} 1 13 3
c 725760 c {A,U, S, S, I, E} 3a b c d 4
5 20 20 5
5a 5.08 × 10 4 d {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} 1
4
b 3.6 × 10 −3 e {B,G} 2
c 3.81 × 10 8 f {Win, Draw, Loss} 5 1
3
6a 1.512 × 1010 7a {B, B, R, B, R} b 5
6a 1 b 4 c 2 d 2
b 2.0 × 10 6 c Unlikely d Likely 3 9 9 3
c 7 × 10 −3 8a {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} b 6 1 1 1
7a b c
7 3.6 × 1012 9a {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J} 52 4 2
8 2.3 × 106 b Unlikely d 3 e 1 f 1
10a {Win, Draw, Loss} 26 13 52
9a 2947 kJ
g 5 h 3 i 1
b 3869 kJ b3
13 13 26
c 2562 kJ c No. Less chance of a draw
8 Disagree. Depends on the
10a 4 11a {Win, Draw, Loss}
location and the season.
b kWh b No. Jacob does not have the same
c 8 kWh chance of winning the match as 9a 1 b 7 c 5
2 8 16
d 12 kWh the Australian champion.
d 1 e 15 f 1
e April 12a Even b Unlikely 4 16 4
f October c Unlikely d Likely 10a 1 b3 c 1
e Likely 8 8 2
g July
13a 0.50 b 0.75 c1 d 1 e1 f 1
4 4
Extended-response d 0.90 e0 f 0.25
14a {$10, $10, $10, $10, $20, $20, 11a 1 b 1
24 } 24
11a 0.6 kWh
b 600 Wh
{ $20, $50, $50, $50} c 23 d 23
b3 24 24
c 40 h
c {$10, $10, $10, $20, $20, $50, 12a} 1 b 1 c 1
17 17 51
{ , $50, $50}
d 4 e 4 f 11
51 17 51
471
6a 14 First card Second card
13a 1 b 3 c 1 d 1 Y1 Y2 Y3 G1
4 4 2 24 K AK
14 False. Not all outcomes are Y1 Y1Y1 Y1Y2 Y1Y3 Y1G1 A Q AQ
equally likely. J AJ
Y2 Y2Y1 Y2Y2 Y2Y3 Y2G1
A KA
Exercise 5C Y3 Y3Y1 Y3Y2 Y3Y3 Y3G1
K Q KQ
1a G1 G1Y1 G1Y2 G1Y3 G1G1 J KJ

Boy Girl
A QA
Boy BB BG bi 1 ii 1 iii 9 Q K QK
16 16 16
Girl GB GG J QJ
7a K J
b4 Q A JA
K KK KQ KJ J K JK
2a QK QQ QJ
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 Q Q JQ
J JK JQ JJ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15a Leader Deputy
bi 1 ii 1 iii 4 B AB
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 9
8a {HH, HT, TH, TT} A C AC
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
bi 1 ii 1 iii 1 D AD
4 4 2 A BA
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9 1st 2nd B C BC
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Y YY D BD
Y
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 N YN A CA
b 36 Y NY
N C B CB
N NN
D CD
3a 10a {TTT, TTF, TFT, TFF, FTT, F
+ M1 M2 M3 M4 A DA
, FTF, FFT, FFF}
D B DB
E1 E1M1 E1M2 E1M3 E1M4 b8 C DC
E2 E2M1 E2M2 E2M3 E2M4 ci 1 ii 3 iii 7
8 8 8 b 1
2
E3 E3M1 E3M2 E3M3 E3M4 11a {12, 13, 21, 23, 31, 32} b 1
6
b 12 12a 1st 2nd
16a Units
Tens
R 3 33
RR
4a R 3 5 35
D E G RG
R GR 7 37
A AD AE G
G GG 3 53
B BD BE 5 5 55
b 1
CD CE 2 7 57
C
13a Coin Spinner 3 73
b6
R HR 5 75
7
5 8 H A HA 7 77
D E F G G HG b 2
R TR 3
X XD XE XF XG 1
T A TA 17a 5 b 75% c 4
13
Y YD YE YF YG G TG
b1
3
472
Exercise 5D 6a 10% b 75%
2a 4 b 0.1
5 c 37.5% d 80%
Answers
3
1a 10 b 7 c0 c 38% d 3: 4 7 Investigation
15
d1 e 7 e 8 f 0.55 8 Investigation
30 11
9 Investigation
7 g 62.5% h 4:7
2a 57 b 2 c 20 10 6.25%
100 25
3a 0.71 b 71 11 0.96
100
3a 5 b3
8 8 4 0.4 5 4 12 71
4a 0.25 b 0.15 15 134
c 0.40 d1 6a 3 b 0.375 c 37.5% 13a 20 times
8
5 15% b Die has nearly twice
6a 1 b 0.7 c 0.6 7a 3 b 9 the outcomes for data values 1
4 11
7a 23 b 7 7 and 6. It appears to be
65 18 c d 40
9 99 biased.
c 11 d 337 e 17 f 259 14 Computer application
30 585 36 396
203 f 869 137 15a 28
e
390 1170 g h 25 73
396 44
b Collecting and using data from
8a 0.51 b 0.49 c 0.50
8a 12 b 25 more than one year.
d 0.47 e 0.26 f 0.53 13 26
16a 4 b 0.25 c 20
9 1 9a 6 b 5 17 Investigation
3 7 7
10a 0.9 b 0.85 18 Investigation
10 33 19 Investigation
56 c 0.09 d1
11 13 e1 f 1
Exercise 5G
20 g 0.25 h 0.75
12a i 3 ii 3 iii 1 11a 92% b 93% 1 18
5 10 5
c 90% d 17% 2 624
iv 3 v 4 vi 1
e 18% f 75%
5 5 5 3 2
bi 2 ii 4 iii 1 12a 13 b6 4a 198 b 27
iv 1 v 2 16 5 117
c Parramatta Exercise 5F 6 21
7a 1 b 80
Exercise 5E 1a 2 b 3 6
7 14
c 1 d 240
1a Selecting a red card from a c 5 d 1 2
14 7
normal pack of cards
2a 0.118 b 0.294 e 2 f 320
b Not winning first prize in Lotto 3
c 0.412 d 0.176
c Throwing an odd number when
3a 10.5% b 21.0% g1 h 160
3
a die is rolled
c 14.5% d 17.0%
d Obtaining a head when a coin is 8a 1 b8
e 21.5% f 15.5% 25
tossed
e Drawing club, diamond or heart
4a 20% b 30% c 1 d8
25
c 10% d 15%
from a normal pack of playing
e 25% e 8 f 64
cards 25
f Choosing a blue or red ball from 5a 1 b5
3 6
a bag containing a blue, red and
c 1 d 1
green ball 2 8
473
9a 1 b 10
Review 5 Extended-response
3
Multiple-choice 17a 19 b 14
c 1 d5 33 19
6
1 B 2 C 3 C
e 2 f 20 Chapter 6
3 4 C 5 A 6 D
10a 192 b 160 7 C 8 B 9 B
Exercise 6A
c 96 d 64
Short-answer 1a 50.3m2 b 63.6cm2
e 96 f 96
11 Computer application c 16.6mm2 d 65.0 mm2
1a Impossible
12a 30 b 90 e 113.1cm2 f 95.0 mm2
b Unlikely
c 90 d 30 c Unlikely
2a 1963.50 mm2 b 28.27cm2
13a 169 b 16 c 314.16m2 d 254.47m2
2a {2, 4, 6, 8, 10}
c 144 d 1024 e 7542.96cm2 f 6.16mm2
b {a, e, i, o, u}
14a 4 b4 c 36 3a 172.8mm2 b 40.8m2
c {W,W,W,B,B,B,B}
c 31.0 m2 d 75.4 cm2
3 132 e 173.6m2 f 31.2mm2
Exercise 5H
4a 1 b 1 c 19 4a 103.67m2 b 84.67cm2
1a i O−, A− ii O−, B− 50 2 50
c 62.83cm2 d 386.42mm2
iii O−, B−, A−, AB− d 2 e 1 f 7 5 680.9cm2
5 5 50
iv O− 6 50 cm2
v O−, O+, A−, A+ 5 1 7a 14.1cm2 b 34.0 cm2
2
vi O−, O+, B−, B+ c 47.1mm2 d 12.6cm2
vii O−, O+, B−, B+,A−, A+, 6a 1 b 1 c1 e 94.4 mm2 f 24.0 m2
4 2
AB−, AB+ 8a 32.95cm2 b 13.62cm2
viii O−, O+ 7a 4 b1 c 7 c 88.51mm2 d 49.31cm2
9 3 9
b O− c O+, B−, A− e 4.13m2 f 164.70 cm2
d AB+ e O− 8a 1 b 1 c0 9 151cm2
8 4
f AB+, B+ 10a 864 mm2 b 491mm2
2a 45–64 d 1 e 1 f 1 11 32.3m2
4 2 2
b 18–24 12 1.3m
c 8% 9a 2 b1 c 1 13 415m2
5 5
d People over 65 are more 14 10 m
10a 0.125 b 0.5
likely to be ill, and in 15a 120 o b 10 o
c 0.875 d 0.125
low-income countries many 16 $6761
e 0.625 f 0.375
people die before 65.
3a 3.33% b 820 000 11a 32 b 3 Exercise 6B
c 256 667 d 175 000 35 35
1a 52cm2 b 864 m2 c 29m2
e 1 417 000 c 2 d 4
7 5 d 138m2 e 14 mm2 f 117 cm2
4a 9265 b 4905
c 1090 d 545 12a 12 b 3 c 25 2 38 m2
13 4 26 3 124 cm2
5a 2.4 b 561 700
c 1 101 372
13a 0.20 b 0.24 4 88 cm2
d 3.9 million. Not believable, c 0.32 d 0.24 5 7.7 cm2
because one patient often needs 14 0.58 6a 1950 m2 b 1200 m2
many donations’ worth of blood 15 2 c 3800 m2 d 7350 m2
products. 16 336 e 7992 m2 f 1767 m2
474
7a 1767 m2 b 37 m 7 1256 m2 c 589 cm2 (or 592 cm2 if
2 2
8a 345 m b 2046 m2 8a 6 faces b 27.04 cm unrounded values are used in
Answers
c 297 m2 d 3350 m2 9 8 cm intermediate calculations)
2
e 6038 m
9a 5 mm b 39.3 mm2 Exercise 6E Exercise 6G
c 99.3 mm2 1a 1659 mm2 b 94 cm2 1a 96 m3 b 4400 m3 c 112 m3
10a 180 cm2 b 78.54 cm2 c 151 m2 2 165 mm3 3 750 m3
c 101.46 cm2 2a 1156.1 mm2 b 458.2 cm2 4a 108 m3 b 5832 cm3
11a 113.10 cm2 b 30.90 cm2 c 2596.5 m 2
c 137344 cm 3
12a 35 m b 8748.5 m2 3a 452.39 m2 b 78.54 mm2 5 307.1 cm3

2
13 53.54 cm c 615.75 cm 2
6a 450 m3 b 240 mm3
14a 128 cm2 b2 c 27.47 cm2 4a 30.41 m2 b 100.53 cm2 c 410 cm3
15a A = lb + π r = 2 xy + 1 π x 2
1 2
c 226.19 mm 2
7 1200 cm3
2 2
b 65 m2 5a 461.81 cm2 b 1140.40 m2 8a 1526 cm3 b 446 cm3
16 30 pavers c 28.86 m 2
c 13357 mm 3
17a 402.1 mm2 b 30 mm 6a 4.5 cm b 395.8 cm2 9a 600 m3 b 48 m2

2
c 882.1 mm c 523.1 cm 2
c 480 m 3
18 2293 m2 7a 0.79 m2 b $18.85 c $75.40 10a 15 m2 b 180 m3

19a A = 1 π x2 8 Computer application 11 38.971 cm 3
8
b A = 1 π x2 − π y 2 12a 280 cm 3 b 376 cm 2
8 Exercise 6F
c 13 m2
Exercise 6H
1a 102.7 mm2 b 84 cm2
2
Exercise 6C c 256 cm d 114.1 cm 2 1a 31 m 3 b 1583 mm3
e 275 m 2 f 160 cm2 c 3079 mm3 d 9640 m 3
1a 408 m2 b 672 m2 2
2a 5760 cm b 11.2 m2 e 2262 m 3 f 226 m 3
c 207 m2 d 200 m2
c 166.4 m2 2 1570.80 cm 3
e 147 m2 f 234 m2
3a 118.44 cm 2 b 81.27 cm 2 3a 524 cm 3 b 2145 mm 3
2a 264 m 3 b 1776 m 3
c 63.92 cm 2 d 408.82 cm2 c 1437 cm 3 d 22 m3
3 288 cm 2 2
4a 7.4 m b 242.5 cm2 e 262 m 3 f 1 526 814 mm 3
4a 18.6 m 2 b 10.2 m 2
c 3939.6 cm 2 4 905 mm 3
5 126 m 2 6 125 m 2
5a 31 m 2 b 404 cm 2 5a 4.7 m3 b 1352.2 cm 3
7 20.5 m 2 8 3400 m 2
c 1009 cm2 c 904.8 cm 3
Exercise 6D 6a 4.2 cm b 55.4 cm2 6a 100π m 2 b 800π m 3
c 92.4 cm2 d 147.8 cm2 7a 502.7 m 3 b 10 472 s
1a 1200 mm 2 b 32 cm 2 7a 396 cm 2
b 267 cm2 8a 6378 km b 1.09 × 10 12 km 3
c 150 m2 d 150 mm 2 8a 20 cm2 b 261 cm2 9 Four times
e 66 cm 2 f 158 m 2 9 62 cm 2
10 160 cm2 10a 3.5 cm b 179.6 cm 3
2a 100 m2 b 408 cm2 11a 9.5 cm b 8.1 cm c 808.2 cm3 d 269.4 cm3
3a 1200 cm2 b 288 mm 2 c 228.5 cm2 e 33.3%
c 2141.6 m2 d 408 m2 12 34.6 cm
e 120 m2 f 360 m2 13a 6.91 cm b 85.22 cm Exercise 6I
4a 1226 cm2 b 240 m2 c 85 cm 1a 327 m3 b 14 m3
c 912 cm 2 d 218 cm2 14a 910 cm2 (or 911 cm2 if c 12 m3 d 270 m3
e 530 m2 f 246 cm2 unrounded values are used in e 560 m3 f 96 m3
5a 15 m2 b $4050 intermediate calculations) 2a 160 m3 b 2000 mm3
6a 720 cm2 b 475.2 cm2 b 728 cm2 3 12 cm3
c 1002.7 cm2
475
4a 236 m 3 b 1139 m3 4 200 mL 9 D 10 B 11 B 12 D
c 235 m3 5 720 000 L 13 B 14 D 15 B
5 296.88 cm3 6 60 mL 16a i $1306.60
6a 48 400 m2 b 1 677 866.67 m3 7 3L ii 1 $681.10 2 $4573.10
7 49.86 cm3 8 421.88 mL b i $59 000 ii $10 722
8a 37.5 cm 2 b 150 cm 3 9a 96 000 000 mL iii $1180 iv $11 902
9 800 m 3 b 0.04 mL v $353 refund
10a 785 m 3 b 6283 m3 c 5.65 mL c i −10 a − 5 ii 5 x 5
c 5498 m3 d 270 000 000 mL 17a i 7 ii 12
13 13
11 44 cm3 e 147 000 000 mL
b 47.71 cm3 c x=4
f 471.24 mL
Exercise 6J d i 1658.8 cm2 ii 7
10a 12.6 m2
e i x = 15 ii x = −0.5
b 31.4 m3
1a SA = 18 cm2 , V = 4 cm3 f 1.08 × 10 9 km
c 31 kL
b SA = 22 cm2 , V = 5 cm 3 g 0.010%
11a 217.5 m3 b 218 kL
c SA = 24 cm2 , V = 6 cm 3
12a 608.5 m 3
18a i r = 3 3V ii 0.78 m
2a SA = 1240 m2 , V = 2394 m3 4π
b 608.5 kL
b SA = 160 m2 , V = 112 m3 b i $3764.48
c 305 550 L
c SA = 5212 cm2 , V = 20 520 cm3 ii Heater C, because the room’s
3a SA = 201 m2 , V = 235 m3 volume is 81.081 m3, too big
Review 6
b SA = 138 mm2 , V = 117 mm3 for heaters A or B.
c SA = 686 cm2 , V = 1593 cm3 Multiple-choice
c i 25.45 m3 ii 25 447 L
4a 137.4 cm2 b 77.0 cm2 y−b
1 C 2 B 3 D 4 A 5 D d 1.23 e x=
c 214.4 cm2 d 153.9 cm3 m
3
6 B 7 B 8 C 9 C 10 B f 0.065
e 89.8 cm
5a SA = 861 cm2 , V = 1960 cm3 Short-answer
b SA = 97 m2 , V = 79 m3 Chapter 7
1a 6.2 mm2 b 22.0 mm2
c SA = 156 m2 , V = 131 m3 c 60.4 m2 Exercise 7A
6a 4072 cm3 b 2714 cm3 2a 628 cm2 b 9425 cm3 1a Sample b Census
7 42 667 cm3 c 9.4 L c Census d Sample
8a 2.36 m3 b 7.5 m2 3a 48 cm2 b 12 cm2 e Sample f Sample
c 27.64 m3 c 36 cm2 g Census h Census
9a First tank is 1.216 m3 4 266 cm2 5 180 m2 i Sample j Census
Second tank is 0.955 m3 6 603.2 cm2 7 263.89 cm2 2a Systematic b Random
b First tank is 7 m2 8a 1257 cm 2
b 4189 cm3 c Self-selected d Stratified
Second tank is 6 m2 9a 144 m3 b 24 mm3 c 1139 m3 e Systematic f Random
10 2 100 000 cm3 10a 240 m 3
b 96 m3 c 144 m3 g Systematic h Random
11 6 L i Stratified j Random
Exercise 6K
3 173 4 6%
1 Four cans with 300 mL Extended-response
5a 4 b 58 c 62
remaining.
12a 140 m2 b 120 m3 c 128 m2 6a 200 b 22 c 28
2a 300 mL b 20 3
13a 88 m 7a 440 b 15 c 18
c 60 d 30
b 17.6 h (17.7 h if unrounded 8 36
3a 4 b2
value in part a is used) 9a 440
c 70 d 34
b i 11 ii 15 iii 13 iv 16
e 900 f 0.5
Practice Paper 1
g 43 h 30 000
i 103 j 7000 1 B 2 B 3 C 4 C
k5 l 8 000 000 5 D 6 A 7 A 8 C
476
10a 23 b 65% 11 Numerical and continuous b Ages for admission is younger
c School population does not 12a Numerical and discrete for males than females. The
Answers
represent the views of the entire b Categorical and ordinal median is 63 for males and 68
population. for females. The admission age
11 56 Exercise 7C for males has a greater spread
12a 13 b 12 than for females.
1a 16 b 13
13a No opportunity to give a reason
c 9 and 16 d 332
or state that part of the policy is 2a
Exercise 7D
good. 10
1a
b Bias, as it states that the boss 8 Class Class centre Freq.
is lazy. This may not be the 6 5–19 12 10
interviewee’s opinion. 4
20–34 27 8
14a Inaccurate. Survey is biased 2
as people at the festival have a 35–49 42 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
liking for country music. 50–64 57 4
b Systematic survey of people of b3 c5
3a Total 28
across NSW. 10
b 10 c 5–19 d 28
8
Exercise 7B 2a
6 Class Class Tally Freq.
4 centre
1a Categorical b Numerical
2
c Numerical d Categorical 3–7 5 |||| 4
e Numerical f Numerical 1 2 3 4 5 6
g Categorical h Numerical 8–12 10 |||| | 6
b5 c5
i Categorical j Numerical 13–17 15 || 2
4a 34 b 24 c 28
k Numerical l Categorical
d 15 e 24 18–22 20 |||| || 7
m Numerical
5a 0 4 23–27 25 | 1
2a Discrete b Discrete
1 79
c Continuous d Discrete 28–32 30 ||| 3
2 0124566778
e Continuous f Discrete
3 00113347 33–37 35 |||| ||| 8
g Discrete h Continuous
4 016
i Continuous j Discrete 38–42 40 |||| 5
b 16 c 27.5
k Continuous b8 c 23–27 d 36
6a 876554433 0 56
3a Continuous b Continuous 75411 1 24479 3
Class Class Tally Freq.
c Categorical d Categorical 1 2 2233689 centre
e Categorical f Discrete 3 2
g Continuous h Discrete b Australian tourists spent fewer 170–174 172 || 2
i Categorical j Discrete nights away from home in the 175–179 177 || 2
k Categorical l Continuous past year than New Zealand
m Continuous n Discrete 180–184 182 |||| |||| || 12
tourists. The median for the
o Continuous p Categorical Australian tourist is 7 and the 185–189 187 |||| ||| 8
4a Numerical b Continuous New Zealand tourist is 22. 190–194 192 |||| | 6
5a Numerical b Discrete New Zealand tourist has
6 Categorical and nominal 4a 0–9, 10–19, 20–29, 30–39 and
a greater spread than the
7 Categorical and ordinal 40–49
Australian tourist.
8 Numerical and discrete b 4.5, 14.5, 24.5, 34.5 and 44.5
7a 9777664 5 58
9 Categorical and nominal 733 6 1456889
10 Numerical and discrete 75221 7 123889
477
c b5 c 22 d 10 e 32
Class Class centre Freq. 64 |||| |||| 9 42
2a
0–9 4.5 3 Number Freq. Cum. 65 || 2 44
of calls freq.
10–19 14.5 11 66 | 1 45
20 4 4
20–29 24.5 29 b See above c 45
21 3 7 d6 e 33
30–39 34.5 46
22 10 17 f 13 g 4.44%
40–49 44.5 1 45
5a 130–139, 140–149, 150–159, 23 12 29 h 93.33%
159, 160–169, 170–179 and 180–189 24 6 35
b 134.5, 144.5, 154.5, 164.5, 174.5 Exercise 7F
25 5 40
and 184.5
b3 c 35 d 11 1a
c 10
Class Class centre Freq. 3a
Score Tally Freq. Cum. freq. 8
Frequency
130–139 134.5 2 6
8 || 2 2 4
140–149 144.5 3
9 |||| 5 7 2
150–159 154.5 9
10 |||| |||| | 11 18 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
160–169 164.5 16 Score
11 |||| | 6 24
170–179 174.5 8 b
12 || 2 26 10
180–189 184.5 2
8
Frequency
13 |||| 4 30
6a 0–9, 10–19, 20–29, 30–39, 6
b 30 c 11 d5 e 10 4
9, 40–49, 50–59 and 60–69
4a 2
b 4.5, 14.5, 24.5, 34.5, 44.5, 54.5 Score Tally Freq Cum. freq.
and 64.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 |||| 4 4
c Score
Class Class centre Freq.
5 |||| 4 8 2a
0–9 4.5 7 Score Tally Freq.
6 |||| 5 13
10–19 14.5 11 1 |||| | 6
7 || 2 15
20–29 24.5 6 2 |||| || 7
8 |||| 5 20
30–39 34.5 3 3 |||| | 6
9 |||| 5 25
40–49 44.5 1 4 |||| 5
10 |||| 5 30
50–59 54.5 1 5 ||| 3
b See above
60–69 64.5 1 c 30 d5 e5 f 22 6 || 2
g 20 h 6, 8, 9 and 10 7 | 1
d 60%
i 7 j 1 k 2 b
15 15
Exercise 7E 7
l 73.33% m 26.67%
6
1a Score Freq Cum. freq. 5a
Score Tally Freq. Cum. 5
Frequency
4 4 4 freq. 4
3
5 6 10 61 |||| | 6 6
2
6 7 17
62 |||| |||| ||| 13 19 1
7 10 27
63 |||| |||| |||| 14 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 5 32 Score
478
c b l
7 5 Score Freq Cum. freq.
Answers
4
Frequency
6 10 10 10
3
5 20 90 100
Frequency
2
4 1
30 50 150
3
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
2 Score
40 50 200
1 c 50 0 200
5
4 60 50 250
Frequency
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Score 3
2
70 0 250
3a
Score Tally Freq. 1 80 150 400
4 |||||| 7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 90 50 450
Score
5 ||||| 6 5a 100 50 500
Score Freq Cum. freq.
6 ||| 3 7a
60 2 2 Score Freq Cum. freq.
7 ||| 3
61 3 5 20 7 7
8 | 1
b 62 3 8 21 6 13
7
63 4 12 22 6 19
6
5 64 2 14 23 4 23
Frequency
4
65 5 19 24 3 26
3
2 66 3 22 25 2 28
1
67 8 30 26 2 30
3 4 5 6 7 8 b b
Score 30 7
6
c
7 20 5
Frequency
6 4
10 3
5
Frequency
2
4
1
3 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Score 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2
Score
1
c c
30 7
3 4 5 6 7 8 6
Score 5
20
Frequency
4a Score Tally Freq.

4
10 3
17 |||| 4 2
1
18 || 2 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Score 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19 ||| 3 Score
d 12 days e 22 days
d
20 ||| 3 6a 10 b 90 c 50 d 50 30
25
21 ||| 3 e0 f 50 g 0 h 150
20
i 50 j 50 k 500
22 || 2 15
10
23 ||| 3 5
24 |||| 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Score
479
e 22 Exercise 7G f Obesity and mental health
f Q 1 = 21, Q 3 = 23 3 Computer investigation
g IQR = 2 1a
Month Freq. Cum. Cum. 4a
8a Suggested classes: freq. per. Sport Freq. Cum. Cum.
38–42, 43–47, 48–52, 53–57
Apr 25 25 50 freq. per.
and 58–62
b May 9 34 68 Swimming
Class Class Freq. Cum. 45 45 44
Mar 8 42 84
centre freq. Football 20 65 63
Feb 5 47 94
38–42 40 5 5 Golf 15 80 78
Jan 3 50 100
43–47 45 6 11 Netball
b5 10 90 87
48–52 50 8 19 c Scale 1 to 30 (or 25) with a Cricket 8 98 95
53–57 55 7 26 major guideline of 5.
d Scale 1 to 100 with a major Tennis 5 103 100
58–62 60 4 30 guideline of 10.
c See above e b 50 100
30 100 45 90
d 90 40 80
Cumulative percentage
8 25
80
7 35 70
70
20
Frequency
60 30 60
6
Orders
25 50
Frequency
15 50
5
40 20 40
4 10 30
15 30
20
3 5
10 10 20
2 0 0 5 10
b
n
pr
ay
ar
1 0 0
Fe
Ja
M
A
is
ot g
Te ket
Cr ball
G l
f April and May
N olf
l
Fo in
nn
ba
ic
m
et
35 40 45 50 55 60 65
im
2a
Class centre
Sw
Health issue Freq. Cum. Cum. c Swimming, football and golf
e
8 freq. per.
7 Obesity Exercise 7H
56 56 56
6 Mental health 13 69 69 1a $4000 b $1000
Frequency
5
Physical 12 81 81 c 2.5 years d 3.5 years
4 e About $1250 f About $2600
activity
3
Smoking 7 88 88 2a 3.88cents per kilometre
2
Alcohol 4 92 92 b Brand A
1
Nutrition c $734.50
4 96 96
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 Injury d $183.00
3 99 99
Class centre e $250.00
Environment 1 100 100
3a 4 L b 11L c $13.05
f b8
30 4a 10 023 b 28.1% c 1786
c Scale 1 to 60 with a major 10 023
25
guideline of 10. d 2005
Frequency
20 e January had the most number of

d Scale 1 to 100 with a major
15 guideline of 10. accidents ( 2814 ). People often
10 e go on holidays in January and
60 100 drive their car.
5
90
50 80
70 5a 44 km h b 30 km h
Frequency
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 40
60
Class centre 30 50 c 37 km h d 36 km h
40
20 30 e 36 km h f 14 km h
10 20
g 50 10 6a 6 hours b 14
0 0
h Q 1 = 45, Q 3 = 55 c 276 d 12.5
En I tion
A king
M ity
nm y
t
y l
o al
ut ol
en
Ph enta
ro r
i IQR = 10
vi nju
Sm sic
N oh
s
e 12.5 f 12
ri
be
lc
O
480
7a g 100 c NSW. Possibly lower use of
Class Class Freq. f×x 90 dual-flush toilets; less use
water (%)
Answers
Available
centre ( f) 80
of water outdoors increases
(x) 70
the percentage for the other
60
20–29 24.5 85 2082.5 50 categories.
Avon
Cataract
Cordeaux
Napean
Prospect
Warragamba
Woronora
d QLD, SA and WA. Less rainfall
30–39 34.5 72 2484
than the other states.
40–49 44.5 71 3159.5 e Kitchen. Water only used in
50–59 54.5 55 2997.5 3a QLD b WA cooking and dishwashing.
c QLD d WA f Outdoors. Many gardens require
60–69 64.5 36 2322
4a 150 L b 54 750 L a large amount of water.
b 319 c 41 c 34% g NSW uses a higher percentage
d 26.65% e 28.53% d 60 Water usage (L/day) of household water in the
8a Mean = 1.2, median = 0 , 50
bathroom and toilet and a lower
mode = 0 40
30 percentage of household water
b It depends. Mean has been
affected by outlier of 6, but even
20 outdoors.
10
without this outlier the average 0
would still be 1.1 accidents/day.
Toilet
Tap
Washing
machine
Other
Shower
Review 7
Median gives a good picture of a
typical day, but conceals the fact Multiple-choice
5a 2017 b 2014
that many days have multiple
c Mean = 73.31mm, median = 73.2 1 D 2 C 3 C 4 B
accidents.
d Range = 118.2 5 B 6 D 7 A 8 A
9a $5120
160
b e
140 Short-answer
Annual rainfall (mm)
Year Current Depreciation Depreciated 120

value value 100 1a Categorical b Categorical
80
c Numerical d Numerical
1 $32 000 $5120 $26 880 60
40 e Numerical f Categorical
2 $26 880 $4301 $22 579 20 g Numerical h Numerical
0
i Numerical
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
3 $22 579 $3613 $18 966

2a 35 b 26 c 25
Year
4 $18 966 $3035 $15 931 3a 18 b8 c 22 d 22
f Student opinion. Lowest rainfall
4a
5 $15 931 $2549 $13 382 occurred in 2014 and 2015. Class Class Freq. Cum.
This could be part of the global centre freq.
c climate change. However,
30000 2017 had the highest rainfall in 4− 8 6 5 5
January for 10 years. 9 −13 11 6 11
Value ($)
20000 6a
60 14 −18 16 8 19
50
10000
40 19 − 23 21 4 23
30
20
Total 23
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
ACT
Bathroom
NSW QLD
Kitchen
SA
Laundry
VIC
Toilet
WA
Outdoors
b 23 c 12 d 48%
Age (years) 5a 60% b 2011
b NSW
Exercise 7I c Single-flush toilets are
decreasing in popularity and
1a 375mm b June Outdoors Bathroom being replaced with dual-flush
c Year 2 d February
Kitchen toilets.
2a Warragamba b Warragamba
c 117 360 ML d 62 457.3ML Toilet d 12.8 million
Laundry
e 2 537 380 ML f 362 483ML
481
Extended-response c y
b y
5 5
6a 4 4
Score Tally Freq Cum. freq. 3 3
2 2
51 ||| 3 3 1 1
52 |||| 5 8 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
x −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
x
53 |||| |||| 9 17 −2 −2
−3 −3
54 |||| |||| 9 26 −4 −4
55 |||| ||| 8 34 −5 −5
56 |||| ||| 8 42 y
y c
57 |||| 5 47 d 5
5
4
4
58 |||| 4 51 3
3
c 26 2
b 51 2
1
d See above e 51 min 1
x
f 53 and 54 g7 x −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
h 54 −2
−2
−3
9 −3
−4
i 8 −4
−5
7 −5
6
Frequency
y
5 d
5
2a
4 x −2 −1 0 1 2 4
3 3
y −4 −2 0 2 4
2 2
1 1
b
x −2 −1 0 1 2 x
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
Score y 4 2 0 −2 −4 −2
j −3
50 c
40 x −2 −1 0 1 2 −4
−5
30 y −1 0 1 2 3
20
d y
10
x e
−2 −1 0 1 2 5
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 4
Score
y −3 −2 −1 0 1 3
2
Chapter 8 e x −2 −1 0 1 2 1
Exercise 8A y −1 1 3 5 7 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
x
−2
1a y f x −2 −1 0 1 2 −3
2
−4
1 y 4 3 2 1 0 −5
x y
−2 −1−10 1 2 3a
5 y
f
−2 4 5
3 4
y 2 3
b
5 1 2
4 x 1
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
3
x
2 −2 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
1 −3 −2
−4 −3
x
−4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 −5 −4
−2 −5
−3
482
4a i a 8a False b True c True f y
−2 −1 0 1 2 5
d True e False f False
Answers
b 4
−2 1 4 7 10 9a y 3
5
ii p
2
−2 −1 0 1 2 4
1
3
q 3 2 1 0 −1 x
2 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
b b 1
−2
x
10 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5 −3
8 −4
6 −2
−5
4 −3
2 −4
0 a −5
−3 −2 −1
−2 1 2 3 Exercise 8B
b y
c q 5 1a 4 b −1 c −12 d4
4
c −1
3 2a 2 b −5
2 3
2
1 2 3a 2 b −1
0 p 1
−3 −2−1
−1 1 2 3
4a Gradient of 2, y-intercept of 2
x
−2 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5 y
−3
−2
−3 10
5a Cost ( c ) b Weight ( w )
−4 8
c Cost of chocolates
−5
6
60 y
c 5 4
50
4 2
Cost ($)
40
3
30 2 x
1 2 3 4
20 1
x b Gradient of –2, y-intercept of –1
10 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
y
−2
1 2 3 4 5 4
−3
Weight (kg)
−4
d $18 2
−5
6a Science experiment
x
y 0
d −2 −1 1 2
8 5 −2
6 4
Time
3 −4
4
2
2 1 c Gradient of 1, y-intercept of –1
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
x y
3 6 9 12 15
Mass −2
b 5.7 6
−3
7a d = 2t 4
−4
b −5
t 0 2 4 6 8 2
d 0 4 8 12 16 y x
e 5
2 4 6 8
d
d Gradient of 1 , y-intercept of 0
4
16
3 3
2 y
14
1
12 4
x 3
10 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5
8
2
−2 1
6 −3 x
0
4 −4 −1 3 6 9 12
−1
2 −5
t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
483
5a Gradient of 1, y-intercept of 3 b Train travel 5a y = 3 x
y
b y
600
6
6 500 5
Distance (km)
5 4
400 3
4
3 300 2
1
2 200 x
1 0
100 −1 1 2
−1
x −2
0
−1 1 2 3
−1 −3
1 2 3 4
Time (h) 6a p = 21h
b Gradient of −1, y-intercept of 1
y c 150 d0 b p
3 7a n 200
0 1 2 3 4
2 150
1 c 0 16 32 48 64
x 100
0
−2−1
−1 1 2 Cost of meat 50
−2
b
h
70 2 4 6 8
c Gradient of 1 , y-intercept of 1 7a d = 50t
2 60
y 50 b d
Cost ($ )
3 40
400
2 30
1 300
x 20
0 200
−1 1 2 3 4
−1 10
100
d Gradient of − 2 , y-intercept 1 2 3 4
3 Weight (kg)
t
of −3 2 4 6 8
y c 16 d0 8a–f yc b a
1 2
0 x
−1 1 2 3
−1 Exercise 8C 1
−2 x
0
−3 1a Gradient is 4, y-intercept is 2 −2 −1 1 2
−4 −1
−5 b Gradient is 3, y-intercept is −7
−2
−6 c Gradient is 5, y-intercept is 0.4
f e d
d Gradient is 1.5, y-intercept is −2
e Gradient of 4, y-intercept of −3 g The graphs for equations a,
y e Gradient is 1 , y-intercept is 3 b and c are parallel with a
2
8 f Gradient is −3, y-intercept is 5
6 positive gradient. The graphs for
4 g Gradient is 1, y-intercept is 0 equations d, e and f are parallel
2 h Gradient is 5, y-intercept is 2
x with a negative gradient.
0
−2 1 2 3
−1 2a y = 3 x + 2 b y = −2 x + 10 9a–f y b a
−4
−6 c y = −4 x − 1 d y = 0.5 x + 1 4 c
3
f Gradient of 2, y-intercept of 0 3a y = x + 1 b y = −2 x − 1 2
1
y c y = 12 x − 1 d y = −3 x + 12 x
0
4 −4 −3 −2 −1
−1 1 2 3 4
2 4a Gradient is 2, y-intercept is 3 −2
0 x b y −3
−2−1
−2 1 2 −4
7
−4 6 f e d
5
6a 4 g The graphs for equations a, b
t 0 1 2 3 4 3
2 and c intersect the y-axis at 1
d 0 150 300 450 600 1
(y-intercept of 1). The graphs for
0 x
−2−1
−1 1 2
−2
equations d, e and f intersect the
y-axis at −2 (y-intercept of −2).
484
10a y Exercise 8D 1
3a y = x bk=4
4 4
Answers
3 1a 500 L b 1500 L c6 d 16
2
1 c 2100 L d 10 minutes 4a a = 1.5b b k = 1.5
0 x e 1900 L c 33 d 24
−2−1
−1 1 2
2a 400 CNY b 250 CNY 5a p = 21.5h b k = 21.5
b y c $236.50 d = $139.75
c 20 AUD d 70 AUD
1 e 17 hours f 35 hours
x e Gradient is 5
0 6a
−1 1 2 3 4
−1 3a $1.50 b $3.50 w 0 1 2 3 4
−2
−3 c $1.50 d $3.00
−4
c 0 2.5 5 7.5 10
4a $40 000 b $90 000
b c Cost of apples
c y c 48 months d v = −2.5t + 120
3 e $115000 f $2500 10
2
1 5a $125 billion b 300 000 8
Cost ($)
x 1
0 c A= N d $87.5 billion 6
−1 1 2 3 4
−1 4
e $250 billion 4
d y
6a $15 b $25 2
1
0 x c 30 calls d C = 0.5n + 15 w
−1 1 2 3
−2 −1 1 2 3 4
−2 7a y Parking fee Weight (kg)
−3
−4 c6
−5 20
7a
t 0 1 2 3 4
Cost ($)
15
e y
5
10 v 30 25 20 15 10
4 5
3 b v Computer value
2 x
1 3 6 9
x Time (h) 30
0
−1 1 2 3 4 5
−1
b $15 c $10 d $15 25
Value ($100)
f y 20
8a Australian dollars to
8 British pounds 15
6 GBP
4 10
2 25
x 5
0 20
−2 1 2
−1 t
15 1 2 3 4
g y
10 Time (years)
2
x 5 c $3000 d $2000 e 3 years
0
−4−2
−2 2
−4 AUD 8a
−6 10 20 30 40 50 d 0 10 20 30 40
y
b 16 GBP c 25 AUD C 3 23 43 63 83
h
d Gradient is 0.4, the vertical Taxi hire
2 b C
1 intercept is 0
x
−2−1
0 e GBP = 0.4 × AUD or y = 0.4 x 80
−1 1 2
Cost ($)
−2 60
Exercise 8E
y 40
i
3 1a y = 3 x b k =3 20
2 c 12 d 5 d
1
x 2a y = 2 x b k=2 10 20 30 40
−2 −1 0 1 2 Distance (km)
−1 c 16 d 6
485
9a b y 8a AUD 0 10 20 30 40
E 0 1 2 3 4 5
J 4 JPY 0 9 18 27 36
10 11 12 13 14 3
2 b AUD converted to JPY
b Age relationship
1 JPY
14 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5 x 40
13 −2
30
Jack’s age (years)
−3
12 −4 20
11 −5
10
10 AUD
9
3a 1 b 3 (or 1.5) c –2 10 20 30 40
2
8 4a y = 2 x − 1 b y = −1x
y
2 Extended-response
5a
1 2 3 4 2 9a $18000
Emily’s age (years) 1
x b $24 000
0
10a AUD 0 10 20 30 40 −2−1
−1 1 2 c v = −0.5t + 30
−2
d $27000
NZD 0 12 24 36 48
Gradient is 1 and y-intercept is 1. e 60 months
b Conversion rate f $500
b y
NZD
5 10a Speed of a rocket
50 4
3 8
Speed (km/s)
40 2 6
1 V = 3– t
30 x 4 2
0
20 −1 1 2 3
−1 2
10 Gradient is –2 and y-intercept 2 4 6
AUD is 5. Time (seconds)
10 20 30 40
c y b 9 km/s
3 c 8 seconds
Review 8 2
1
Multiple-choice 0
x
−2−1
−1 1 2
1 C 2 C 3 C 4 D −2 Chapter 9
−3
5 A 6 C 7 D 8 C Exercise 9A
Gradient is 3 and y-intercept is –2.
Short-answer 1a $11 000 b $165 000
6a π b 2 cm
1a y values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 7a Cost ( c ) b Data ( d ) c $567 000 d $777
b y values are 3, 1, −1, −3, −5 e $18 500
c Internet access plan charges
2a $944.18 b $11 440
2a y
5
50 c $18 912.50 d $6135
4
3 40
e $50 850
Cost ($)
2 3a $33 150 b $203 150

1 30
4 $97.88
20
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1−10 1 2 3 4 5 x 5 $1.67
−2
10
−3
−4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7a 24 b $450 c $93.75
−5 Data (GB) 8a $22 000 b 10.5% p.a.
d 2.5 c $9240 d $650.83
486
c, d Simple interest on $600
b i $500 ii $750
9a $14 000 b $3640 c $735 I at 5% p.a.
iii $1000
Answers
10a $68 000 b $2000
250
11 8.98% p.a. c i $3000 ii $4500
200
12a $7200 iii $6000
150
b $50 256 100 d i 4 months
c $14 256 50 ii about 2.7 months
d 16.5% p.a. n iii 2 months
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
13 24% p.a. 7a Simple interest on
14a $40 650 I $50 000 at 7% p.a.
e $105 f $180
b 7.1% p.a. g 12 years
4000
c $903.33 Simple interest on $1000
4 3000
I at 4% p.a.
Exercise 9B 2000
300 1000
1a I = 20 n
250 n
b 2 4 6 8 10 12
200
n 0 1 2 3 4 b Simple interest on $50 000
150
I at 7.5% p.a.
I 0 20 40 60 80 100
50 4000
c, d I
n 3000
100 1 2 3 4 5 6 2000
80 $240 1000
60
5a I Simple interest on $5000 n
40 2 4 6 8 10 12
9% Simple interest on $50 000
20 2500 c at 8.1% p.a.
I
n 2000 7%
1 2 3 4 5 4000
1500 5%
2a I = 70 n 1000 3000
b n 500 2000
0 1 2 3 4
n 1000
I 0 70 140 210 280 1 2 3 4 5 n
2 4 6 8 10 12
c, d Simple interest on $1000 b i $625 ii $875
I at 7% p.a. Exercise 9C
iii $1125
500 c i $1250 ii $1750 1a $4.80 b $36 c $9.90
400 iii $2250 d $22 e $536 f $70.56
300
d i 4 years g $6.75 h $0.12
200
ii About 2.8 years 2a $22 b $156 c $112
100
iii About 2.2 years d $822 e $3 f $11.52
n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6a I Simple interest on $100 000 g $80 h $0.70
e $175 f $420 g 3 years 12%
3a $24 b $19.80 c $135
6000
3a I = 30 n d $6.60 e $37.2 f $15
5000 9%
b n 4a $49 014.40 b $100 551.60
0 1 2 3 4 5 4000
6% c $131 736.80 d $68 878.80
I 0 30 60 90 120 150 3000
5a $185.25 b $234
2000
c $546 d $68.25
1000
n
1 2 3 4 5 6
487
6a $15 810 b $13 438.50 c Extended-response
7a $96 b $323.40 Year Current Depre- Depre-
13 $139.22
c $20 d $1263.50 value ciation ciated
14a $280 b 31.4%
e $993.60 f $84 value
15a $12 000 b $48 191.55
8 25% 1 $82 000 $8000 $74 000 c $36 191.55
9a $501.60 b $336
2 $74 000 $8000 $66 000
c $510 d $249.60
10a 10% b $198 3 $66 000 $8000 $58 000 Chapter 10
4 $58 000 $8000 $50 000 Exercise 10A
Exercise 9D
d 1a
80000
1a $3.60 b $14.00 c $17.00
Class Class f f×x
d $0.32 e $49.00 f $4.20 60000
centre
g $4.29 h $260 i $37.00
Value ($)
2a $62 b $682 40000 25− 29 27 25 675

3a $78 b $858
20000 30 − 34 32 21 672
4a £26.25 b £14
c £3.50 d £1.40 35− 39 37 35 1295
0 1 2 3 4
5a 8820 b 2940 c 7140 Age (years) 40 − 44 42 21 882
d 5250 e 7560 f 2100
45 − 49 47 26 1222
g 5880 h 2730 Review 9
6a $16 b $22 c $90 50 − 54 52 23 1196
Multiple-choice
d $35 e $14 f $180 55− 59 57 32 1824
7a $540 b $347 1 B 2 B 3 C 4 B 5 D
6 D 7 D 8 D 9 C 10 A 183 7766
9 $329.09 10 $1681.82 Short-answer b 183 people c 42
2 64.9
1 $96000 2 $2600 3 $18
Exercise 9E 3a
4 7% p.a.
1a $3040 b $12 160 5 2 years 3 months Class Class f f×x
c $3040 d $9120 6 16.7% 7 $4.68 centre
e $3040 f $6080 8a I = 50 n 2000 − 2004 2002 9 18 018
2a $6950 b $5250 b 5
n 0 1 2 3 4 2005− 2009 2007 15 30 105
c $3550 d $1850
I 0 50 100 150 200 250 2010 − 2014 2012 18 36 216
3 $33 300
c, d Simple interest on
4a $16 000 b $4000 I $1000 at 5% p.a. 2015 − 2019 2017 10 20 170
c $4000 d After 2 years 2020 − 2024 2022 8 16 176
300
e $2000 f $14 000
200 2025− 2029 2027 6 12 162
5 $49 950
100
6 $21 400 n
2030 − 2034 2032 3 6 096
7a 9 years b 14 years 1 2 3 4 5
2035−2039 2037 1 2 037
8a After 8 years b After 9 years
e $275 70 140 980
9a $6400 b $19 200
9a $7.22 b $4.66
10 $2400 b 70 vehicles
c $13.49 d 7.98
11 $3000 c 2014
10 $110.16
12a $8000
11a $28.60 b $314.60
b $32 000
12a $2322 b $1376
488
4a 41 b 48 13a 14a Charlie is more consistent as he
Plants Frequency Cum.
c Median has a lower interquartile range.
Answers
freq.
5a Mean = 17, median = 16, b Thomas is most likely to make
mode = 16 20 7 7 the higher score as his median is
b All measures increased by 5. 21 6 13 2 less than Charlie’s but he has
c Mean = 22, median = 21, an interquartile range that is 5
22 6 19
mode = 21 higher.
6 14 23 4 23 15 Data test is the better result as
7a 7.6 24 3 26 Amber’s result is more than
b 12 one standard deviation above
25 2 28
8a 20 b 19.5 the class mean. Algebra test is
c Age Frequency Cum. 26 2 30 less than one standard deviation
above the mean.
freq. b
35 16a 16.08 b 1.4
18 2 2 30
25
c Standard deviation measures the
19 5 7 20 spread of data about the mean.
15
10
20 6 13
5 Exercise 10C
21 2 15 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1a 34 b 48 c 16
d 19 Number of plants
d 133 e 53 f 0
9a 10 b 7 c Median is about 22
2a 31 b 56
c Drinks Frequency c 42 d 48
Exercise 10B e6 f Outlier 31
7 5
3a Yes, 1 b Yes, 69 c Yes, 20
8 7 1a 28 b 11 c 16 d No e No f Yes, 0
d 21 e 32 f 10 4a No b Yes, 36 c No
9 4
2a 5 b8 c5 d8 d No e No f Yes, 59
10 2 3a 10 b 6.5 c 10.5 d 4 5a 27 b 37 c 10 d 76
d8 e No 4a 11 b 10 c5 6 96 is not an outlier.
10 64.4 km d 27 e 21 f 9 Upper limit = Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR
11a 0 b 50 c 250 d 25 5a 110 b 122 = 69 + 1.5 × 20
12a–c f c 185 d 63 = 99
Class x f ×x
6a 2.4 b 49.9 c 0 d 10.2 7 31 is an outlier
65− 69 67 4 268 7a 3.6 b 3.8 c 3.4 d 44.9 Upper limit = Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR
70 −74 72 6 432 8a 3.92 b 7.10 = 21 + 1.5 × 5.5
9a 2.3 b 1.7 c 2.0 = 29.25
75−79 77 7 539
10a 18.4 b 18.7 8a 16 b5 c 20
80− 84 82 11 902 11a 120 b 41.48 c 70 d The outlier is the highest score
85−89 87 6 522 12 Mean will be increased and the and directly affects the range.
sample standard deviation will It has a smaller effect on the
90 − 94 92 6 552 interquartile range.
decrease.
40 3215 13a Molly: x = 12.1 and σ x = 4.7 9a Mean = 20, median 13
d 40 pieces of data b Harry: x = 14.0 and σ x = 3.0 b Mean is drastically reduced from
e 80.4 c Harry’s results were more 20 to 12.375.
f 79.9 consistent as he has a lower Median is unaltered at 13.
standard deviation.
489
10a i Mean = 28.9, median = 26, d No skew e Sample A is symmetrical and
mode = 26 e Negatively skewed unimodal. Sample B is not
ii Mean = 41.3, median = 34, f Positively skewed symmetrical and bimodal
mode = 27 & 34 g Negatively skewed f Sample A is not skewed. Sample
iii Mean = 83.3, median = 88, h No skew B is positively skewed.
mode = 88 3a Mean = 31.1, median = 32,
iv Mean = 61.3, median = 65, modal class = 30–34 Exercise 10E
mode = 62 b Mean has increased to 31.7 and 1a 18
b i Mean = 24.2, median = 24.5, the median has stayed at 32. b Mean = 8.7, median = 9
mode = 26 c c Mean = 9.2, median = 9
20
ii Mean = 32, median = 31.5, 18 d Range = 2, IQR = 2
mode = 27 & 34 16
14 e Range = 3, IQR = 1
iii Mean = 90.2, median = 89.5, Frequency 12 f 1.1
mode = 88 10
8 g 0.9
iv Mean = 66.4, median = 66.5, 6 h Class B. Measures of the location
mode = 62 4
2 are higher and measures of spread
11a Mean = 21.4 , median = 18 are smaller (ignore outlier).
0 7 12 17 22 27 32 37
b Mean = 17.1, median = 18 i Both classes have performed
Class centre
Removing the outlier has d Not symmetrical and unimodal well, with the measures of
affected the mean. e Negatively skewed location close to 9 out of a
12a Yes. Outlier is $990 4a Mean = 84.1, median = 94.5, possible 10. Class B is more
Upper limit = Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR mode = 95 consistent, with only one student
= 670 + 1.5 × 170 b True but misleading. Lily’s result scoring less than 8.
= $925 is above the mean but below the 2a Mean = 22.6, median = 24
b The dataset is translated by 50 median and mode. The mean has b Mean = 23.4, median = 25
in the positive direction but the been affected by the outlier (11) c Range = 28.0, IQR = 14.0
standard deviation remains the as measure of the centre. d Range = 26.0, IQR = 14.0
same. 5a i 4 ii 4 e 7.8
13a 1.3 b1 c0 iii 4 iv 1.7 f 7.9
d Mean = 1.1, median = 1, mode = 0 ii 3.6
bi 3 g The two sets of data have similar
iii 2 and 3 iv 1.6 measures for location and
Exercise 10D c
10
measures for spread. Number
1a Not smooth, not symmetrical, 9 of females retiring is slightly
8
unimodal 7
higher on average than the
Frequency
b Smooth, not symmetrical, 6 number of males (compare mean

5
unimodal 4
and median).
c Smooth, symmetrical, multimodal 3 3 Computer application
2
d Smooth, symmetrical, unimodal 1
4a Sydney:
e Smooth, not symmetrical, 0 Mean = 7.7, median = 7.4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
unimodal Melbourne:
Score
f Not smooth, not symmetrical, d Mean = 8.7, median = 6
10
unimodal 9 b Median is the better measure.
g Smooth, not symmetrical, 8 Mean in Melbourne has been
7
Frequency
unimodal 6
distorted by an outlier (25.2).
h Smooth, not symmetrical, 5 c Sydney:
4
bimodal 3
Range = 5.9, IQR = 2.25
2a Positively skewed 2 Melbourne:
1
b No skew 0
Range = 23.2, IQR = 8.7
c Negatively skewed 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
490 Score
d Interquartile range is the better 8 Part 1
h Jade is the more popular
measure. Range in Melbourne politician. Her data has a larger
Answers
has been distorted by an Part 2 measure of centre (median)
outlier (25.2). and the spread is smaller
10 15 20 25 30
e Area of the Sydney suburbs 9 (interquartile range).
Aaron
is more than the area of the 13a Min = 18, Q 1 = 30, med = 47.5,
Melbourne suburbs. There is a Eliza Q 3 = 61, max = 63
greater spread in the area of the b Min = 12, Q 1 = 20, med = 23.5,
15 20 25 30 35
suburbs in Melbourne compared Q 3 = 37, max = 63
to the area of the suburbs in 10a Min = 6, Q 1 = 15, med = 25, c
Female
Sydney. Q 3 = 30, max = 32
b Min = 9, Q 1 = 17, med = 26, Male
Exercise 10F Q 3 = 32, max = 35

c 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
A
1a 20 b 100 c 60 d Female: Range = 45, IQR = 31
d 35 e 90 B Male: Range = 51, IQR = 17
2a Min = 44, Q 1 = 48.5, med = 53.5, e Female data has a greater lower
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Q 3 = 58, max = 61 extreme but has the same upper
b Min = 8, Q 1 = 12, med = 20.5, d 15 e 15 extreme as the male data. In
Q 3 = 30, max = 42 11a 63 b 74 c 77 addition, the female data has a
d 74 e 71 f 77 larger interquartile range but a
3a
g smaller range. Female data has a
Ryan
higher median than the male data.
3 4 5 6 7
Tane f Age of the females is higher than
b
60 65 70 75 80
the age of the males attending
the conference. There is a larger
60 65 70 75 80 h Ryan: Range = 18, IQR = 6
Tane: Range = 9, IQR = 4.5 spread in the ages of the females
4a i 2 ii 19 iii17 attending the conference.
iv 5 v 17 vi 12 i Tane is the better student even
b though they have the same Review 10
median. Tane’s results are more
Multiple-choice
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 consistent (less spread).
12a 30 b 94 c 73.5 1 C 2 D 3 C 4 B
5a i 32 ii 51 iii19
d 67 e 77.5 5 A 6 B 7 A
iv 34.5 v 48 vi 40
b f Jade Short-answer
Ruby 1a 15 b4 c8
30 35 40 45 50 55
2a
6a 123 b 180 c 154 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Score ( x ) f f ×x
d 141.5 e 161.5
41 3 123
f g Ruby’s data has a greater upper
extreme and a smaller lower 42 5 210
120 130 140 150 160 170 180 extreme than Jade’s data. This 43 9 387
g Data is not skewed, has a median results in a larger range and 44 9 396
of 154 and an interquartile interquartile range. Jade’s 45 8 360
range of 20. data has a higher median than
7a 25 b 13 c 21 d 16 46 8 368
Ruby’s.
e 14 f 22.5 g 5.5 h 10.5 47 5 235
48 4 192
Total 51 2271
491
b 51 Chapter 11 18
c See part a Program Time settings
d 44.5 Exercise 11A (12 - h) (24 - h)
3 68% 1a 150 min b 120 s c 480 h, a 6:00 a.m. to 06:00 to 07:38
4a 4 b 5.5 c5 d 2400 s e 108 h f 600 min 7:38 a.m.
d 27 e 21 f 9 g 12 h h 800 min i 4 d
b 10:25 a.m. to 10:25 to 12:35
5a 10 b 5.5 c 9.5 d4 j 45 d k 6.5 h l 13 min
6a Brand A: Mean = 75 hours, 12:35 p.m.
2a Minute b Minute
S x = 13.8 hours c Year d Week c 3:20 p.m. to 15:20 to 16:54
Brand B: Mean = 76 hours, e Second f Hour 4:54 p.m.
S x = 25.0 hours 3a 3600 s b 86400 s d 6:30 p.m. to 18:30 to 20:05
b Brand A has a more consistent c 31536000 s 8:05 p.m.
lifetime as the standard deviation 4a 9:30 p.m. b 6:00 a.m.
is smaller than for Brand B. e 7:50 a.m. to 07:50 to 10:00
c 7:00 p.m. d 5:00 p.m.
7a Week 1 10:00 a.m.
e 4:30 p.m. f 1:45 a.m.
5a 6:09 a.m. b 10:09 a.m. f 12:45 p.m. to 12:45 to 14:10
Week 2
c 9:29 p.m. d 11:43 a.m. 2:10 p.m.
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 e 6:53 p.m. f 1:09 a.m. g 0:20 a.m. to 00:20 to 15:49
b 35 c 38 d8 e9 g 5:05 p.m. h 12:00 noon 3:49 p.m.
f Week 1 is positively skewed. 6a 4 h 38 min b 5 h 50 min
h 11:10 p.m. to 23:10 to 02:07
8a 19 b 15 c5 c 9h d 13 h 31 min
2:07 a.m.
d Positively skewed e 18 h 24 min f 13 h 8 min
e Negatively skewed 7a 8 h 25 min b 3 h 12 min 19a 3 h 32 min b 15:34
f Upper limit = Q 3 + 1.5 × IQR c 1 h 12 min d 3 h 50 min c 18:07 d 07:38
= 13 + 1.5 × 10 = 28 e 3 h 16 min f 2 h 50 min 20a 4:32 p.m. b 2 h 55 min
As 20 < 28, 20 is not an outlier. 8a 3 h b 7 h 10 min c 1 h 40 min d 3 h 40 min
c 1 h 3 min d 1 h 30 min 21a 17 h b 32%
Extended-response e 10 h 30 min f 11 h 2 min
9a Not listening 9a 3:00 p.m. Exercise 11B
b 12:00 a.m. (midnight)
Listening
c 8:00 a.m. d 1:10 p.m. 1a i 23:11 ii 23:19
e 5:56 p.m. f 7:13 p.m. iii 23:22
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
10a 8 h 32 min b 1 h 25 min 20 s b i 6 min ii 8 min
b The statement is not reasonable. iii13 min
c 1h 28 min
The ‘not listening’ group not c 24 min d 15 min e 8
only has a lower minimum 11a 02:00 b 22:30 c 20:41
d 23:12 e 01:59 f 00:00 f 22:45 g 23:03
and maximum than the
‘listening’ group, every other g 21:09 h 16:39 i 05:15 2a Sydney, Circular Quay, Wharf 4
summary statistic is lower 12a 3:18 a.m. b 10:40 a.m. b Mosman, Taronga Zoo Wharf
as well. Although the range c Midday or 12:00 noon c 11:12 d 12 min
of the ‘not listening’ group 3a 04:18 b5 c 05:40
d 5:56 p.m. e 9:11 a.m.
is slightly higher, its smaller d 06:32 e 51 min
interquartile range indicates f 11:00 p.m. g 6:45 p.m.
h 3:20 a.m. i 8:50 p.m. 4a 40 min b 44 min c 8:15
that the scores are more
consistent. Significantly, the 13a 12:29 b 18:48 c 04:10 d 17:52 e 17 min
maximum score of the ‘not 14a 09:25 b 08:36 c 20:10 5a 3:10 p.m.
listening’ group is significantly 15 4 h 20 min 16 1 h 47 min b Departs from Sydney and arrives
lower that the upper quartile of at Phuket.
17 19:14
the ‘listening’ group. c 5 h 10 min
492
6a 5:35 p.m. f Athens and Sofia 14a 6:30 p.m. b 7:30 a.m.
b Departs from Sydney and arrives g Birmingham and Warsaw 15a 11:45 p.m.
Answers
at Singapore. h Adelaide and Montevideo b 12:00 (midnight)
c 5 h 20 min 8a Hobart and Port Moresby are
7a Departs from Tokyo and arrives located on the 147°E meridian Exercise 11E
at Singapore. of longitude. Hobart (42°S)
is further south than Port 1a 9 h
b 6 h 40 min c 6 h 40 min
Moresby (9°S) . b 12:00 a.m. (midnight)
d 6 h 5 min
b (25.5°S, 147°E) 2a 1:00 p.m. on Friday 30 March
e Departs Tokyo and arrives at
9a 23° b 182° or 178° b 7:00 a.m. on Saturday
Sydney.
c (3°S, 76° W) d (6°S, 174° W) 31 March
f 11 h 35 min
3a 18 h
8a Departs from Sydney and arrives
Exercise 11D b 6:00 p.m. Sunday
at London.
4 7:00 a.m. Sunday
b 7 h 55 min c 5 h 10 min
1 5 8:00 p.m. 25 November
d 1h e 13 h 5 min
WST(+8) CST(+9.5) EST( + 10) 6 7:00 p.m. 25 December
9a 11 b 5 h 35 min
1:00 p.m. 2:30 p.m. 3:00 p.m. 7 10:00 p.m. Sunday
c 23:28 d 3 h 55 min
8 6:00 a.m. Friday
e 3h f 09:43 5:00 a.m. 6:30 a.m. 7:00 a.m.
9 12:45 p.m.
10 Investigation 6:20 p.m. 7:50 p.m. 8:20 p.m. 10a 5:15 a.m. b 2:40 p.m.
4:19 a.m. 5:49 a.m. 6:19 a.m. c 4:30 p.m.
Exercise 11C
10:30 p.m. Midnight 12:30 a.m. 11a 6:00 a.m. on 5 June
1a (60° N, 0°) b (0°, 70° E) 7:12 a.m. 8:42 a.m. 9:12 a.m. b 1:00 p.m. on 5 June
c North Pole 90° N and South Pole 12a 4 p.m. Monday 11 October
90°S 2a 4:30 p.m. b 6:00 p.m.
b 4 a.m. 27 October
2a Lima b 62° c 81° c 6:00 p.m. d 6:30 p.m.
13a 4:00 a.m. Tuesday 17 May
3a Teheran b 76° c 123° 3a 8:10 a.m. b 10:10 a.m.
b 4:00 a.m. Saturday 21 May
c 9:40 a.m. d 10:10 a.m.
4a (15° N, 136° E) b (55° N, 136°E)
c (35° N, 116° E) d (35° N, 156°E) 4a 4:00 p.m. b 8:00 a.m.
c 10:00 p.m. d 10:00 a.m.
Review 11
5a (4° N, 20° E) b (84° N, 20°E)
5a 4:00 a.m. Sunday Multiple-choice
c (44° N, 20° W) d (44° N, 60°E)
b 4:00 p.m. Saturday
6a Latitude of 48° N b 11°E 1 C 2 B 3 D 4 D
c 11:00 a.m. Sunday
a Munich b (48° N, 82°E) 5 A 6 A 7 C 8 A
d 12:00 Midnight
7a i Kuala Lumpur
6a 6 h b 4h c 12 h Short-answer
ii Rio de Janeiro
d 8h e 9h f 5h
iii Kuala Lumpur 1a 7200 s b 84 h c 420 min
g 11 h h 12 h
iv Sofia d 10.5 h e 400 min f 5 days
7a 10:00 a.m. b 3:00 a.m.
b i Adelaide g 43 days h 12.5 h i 16 min
c 7:00 a.m. d 11:00 p.m.
ii Montevideo 2a 15:10 b 20:35 c 06:00
iii Birmingham 8a 8:00 p.m. Monday
3a 7 h b 6 h 10 min c 50 min
iv Athens b 8:00 a.m. Tuesday
4 10:26 am
c Athens, Birmingham, Cairo, c 11:00 p.m. Monday
5a 10:51 am b 11:11 am
Sofia, Warsaw and Kuala d 3:30 p.m. Tuesday
6a 0 h 13 min b 0 h 15 min
Lumpur 9a 4:00 p.m. b 2:00 p.m.
c 29 min
d Birmingham, Montevideo and c 3:30 p.m. d 4:30 p.m.
7a Salvador b 38°
Rio de Janeiro 10 4:00 p.m. Sunday 31 October
c 106°
e Adelaide and Montevideo; 11 7:00 a.m. Friday
8a 63° b 274° or 86°
Birmingham and Warsaw 12a 18 h b 19 h
c 24°S, 100° W d 37°S, 124°E
13 6 h
9 1:00 a.m.
493
10a 30 min b 8:30 a.m. 8a $2700 b $30 240 a $750 b $1500
11a 2 h b 3:00 p.m. c $32940 d $5940 c $2300 d $20 000
12a 7:00 a.m. b 12:00 noon 9a $87000 b $110 880 e $40 000 f $97 500
c $23880
Extended-response 10a $26000 b $71 240 Exercise 12E
c $23400
13a 6:00 p.m. Saturday 1a 3 b 15 L
11a $239 b $404
b 11:00 p.m. Saturday
c $321 d $101 c $180 d $0.012
14 4.5 h
12 $9026 2a $10 250 b $15 525 c $21 700
15 6:30 a.m. Saturday 9 July
13 Investigation 3a 9.55 b 8.82 c 5.06
d 8.21 e 9.32 f 3.5
Chapter 12 Exercise 12C 4a 271.6 L b 73.2 L c 65.8 L
d 30.9 L e 98.2 L f 342.9 L
Exercise 12A 1a $432 b $1183 c $528 g 404.9 L
d $396 e $1175 5a 444 km b 37.2 L c $50.23
1a 21 Sep b 7034 8751 3763
2a 40% 6 480 km
c $349.22 d 10 Oct
b 40 and 60 age groups 7 Once. Distance required is
e $31.74 f $281.11
c 10% 772 km. Distance travelled on
g $316.68 h $32.54
d Charge a higher excess. one tank of petrol is 625 km.
i 10.28%
3a $474.60 b $1200 8a 35 L b 55 L c 45 L
2a 77.69 MJ b 248.92 MJ
4 $1225.75 d 50 L e 70 km/h f 5 L
c $2.50 d 68.79%
5a $602400 000 b $99600 000 9a $1320 b $1280
e Greenhouse gas emissions have
c $260 400 000 d $237600 000 c $2600 d $3104
decreased from 1.4 tonnes to
6a Penrith b Yes 10a $102.75 b $105.74 c $2.99
0.5 tonnes.
c $770 d $540 11a 33.6 L b 46.2 L
3a 4 b kWh
e Brand A f $994.75 c Tyler 1747.2 L, Oscar 2402.4 L
c 9 kWh d July
g $685.00 h $658.33 d $2446.08 e $1897.90
4a $80.14 b $189.04
i $879 j $556.20 f 3 g Investigation
c $309.18
5 $2288 12 Investigation
Exercise 12D
6a 12 kW b $1.78
7a $15.54 b $125.87 1a $978 b $795 c $1350 Exercise 12F
c $202.80 d $459.20 d $414 e $1068 f $717 1a $1536 b $2550
8a $30.44 b 33.33% g $1735 h $4025 i $5105 c $18 720 d $23 400
2a $330 b $745 c $1140
2 $13 473.00
Exercise 12B d $1983 e $1563 f $2508
3a $61 460.37 b $59 769.77
g $1435 h $2172 i $2606
1a 16% b 25% c $1690.60
3a $355 b $1160
c 10% d 12.3% 4a $1200 b $500
c $1071 d $861
2a $29 500 b $13 870 c 17.6% d 20 weeks
4a $600 b $2100
c $14 660 d $53 050 c $1350 d $2600 5 Computer application
3a $5350 b $2886 e $10 000 f $64 000 6a $1500 b $2520
c $15 785 d $26 080 5 c $1020 d $1000
4a $24 600 b $26 880 7a $51400 b $329
3500
c $56 160 d $126 880 3000
8a $23 350
5a $12 280 b $18 000 b Yes. Extra amount is $16 800
Stamp duty
2500
c $30 280 2000 after subtracting rent.

1500
6a $76 800 b $84 300 9a $9050 b $1020
1000
c $42 300 500
c $3680
7a $6400 b 160 weeks 0
d Hayley requires another $560
20000 40000 60000 80000 100000
494 Market value for her trip.
10a 4a $765 b $1000 e 4.5%
Income Expenses 5 $832 18a i 45 kg ii 76 kg
Answers
Job $74 Sport $24 6a 17.453 L b $27.92 iii19 kg iv 300
c 33.104 L d $44.69 b i Qualitative categorical data
Allow $30 Movies $22 7a 525 km b 8 L/100 km ii Quantitative discrete data
School $16 c 7.6 L/100 km iii Quantitative continuous data
Food $20 8a $63 315.25 b $61 562.83 c 23.8% d $4000
c $1752.42 e i 7:30 a.m.
Balance $22
9 $1526 ii 3:30 p.m.
$104 $104
Extended-response Exercise: Appendix
b $22
11a $526 b $658 total 10a $40800 b $24 480 c $17360 1a 2 b1 c4 d 1 e 1.5 f 1
4 3 3
c $77 total
2a 2 b3 c 15 d 30
d Practice Paper 2
3a x=6 b x = 16
Income Expenses 1 C 2 B 3 A 4 D 5 A c x = 4.2 d x = 29.4
Job $1896 Mortgage $526 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 A 10 D 4a a = 4, b = 6 b x = 10, y = 8
11 C 12 D 13 D 14 A 15 C c p = 7.2, q = 15 d c = 16, d = 5
Groceries $360
16a i $367.20 ii $112.80 5 Height of the tree is 7 m
Entertain $120
iii 23.5% 6 Height of the building is 12 m
Medical $18 b i 48° 7 The tower is 40 m in height.
Car $160 ii 260° or 100°
8 Block of units is 14 m in height.
iii (15°S, 82° W)
Electricity $20 9 Flagpole has a height of 5 m.
c $924
Telephone $14 d i 17.1125 L ii $23.44 10 Lucas is 2 m tall.
Rates $43 e $7142.86 11a Height of the lighthouse is 12 m.
f $1940 b Height of the wall is 4 m
Balance $635
g c = 0.40 x + 100 12a x = 1.5, y = 2 b z = 21
$1896 $1896 17a i −3 ii 2 13a
2
iii y = −3 x + 2 iv
3 1m
Review 12 b 68%
c The sample has not been 4m
Multiple-choice picked at random. The five 32 m
1 C 2 D 3 D 4 A students selected are not in
b Three angles of one triangle
5 A 6 C 7 A 8 B school uniform and may not
equal three angles of the second
be representative of the school.
Short-answer triangle.
It is possible that these students
c Height of the tree is 8 m.
1 $27 103.50 do not like the school uniform.
14 Feet of the ladder are 187 cm
2 16.7% d i 8.7 ii 9 iii10
apart.
3a $61 800 b $22 800 iv 3 v2
495

Cambridge: Maths

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge: Maths

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

11

About the author vii

1 Preliminary preparation 1 Syllabus prerequisite

2 Earning and managing money 47 F1.2

3 Formulae and equations 89 MS–A1

4 Measurement and energy 127 M1.1, M1.3

5 Relative frequency and probability 155 MS–S2

6 Perimeter, area and volume 193 M1.2

Practice Paper 1 245

7 Classifying and representing data 251 S1.1

8 Linear relationships 293 MS–A2

9 Interest and depreciation 319 F1.1

11 Working with time 375 MS–M2

12 Budgeting and household expenses 405 F1.3

Practice Paper 2 433

Formulae and data sheet 439

Greg Powers is currently the Head of Mathematics at Cabramatta High School

10 Pop-up definitions 9 Quick quizzes

Content features of the textbook

Digital Resources for this chapter

In the Online Teaching Suite:

1A Simplifying algebraic expressions

ADDING AND SUBTRACTING LIKE TERMS

Example 1: Adding and subtracting like terms 1A

ADDING AND SUBTRACTING ALGEBRAIC FRACTIONS

An algebraic fraction contains pronumerals.

Example 2: Adding and subtracting algebraic fractions 1A

Write 2a − a as a single fraction.

1 Simplify by collecting like terms.

3 Simplify by collecting like terms.

8 Copy and add like terms where

12 Add or subtract these algebraic fractions.

13 Add or subtract these algebraic fractions.

14 Add or subtract these algebraic fractions.

4 a0 = 1 – A term in index form raised to the power of zero is one.

Multiplying and dividing using the index laws

MULTIPLYING AND DIVIDING ALGEBRAIC TERMS

1 Write in expanded form.

Example 3: Multiplying algebraic terms using the index laws 1B

Simplify the following.

Example 4: Dividing algebraic terms using index laws 1B

Simplify the following.

Example 5: Applying the index laws 1B

Simplify the following.

5 Raise each term to the power of 2. Use the = 62 × p2 × q6

Example 6: Simplifying algebraic terms with fractions 1B

1 Multiply these algebraic terms.

3 Find the product of these terms.

Example 4a 4 Divide these algebraic terms.

5 Simplify each of the following using the index laws.

Example 5a 9 Express in simplest index form.

10 Simplify each of the following using the index laws.

11 Copy and multiply the algebraic terms to complete the table.

12 Copy and divide the algebraic terms to complete the table.

14 Simplify each of the following using the index laws.

19 Simplify these algebraic expressions.

1C Expanding algebraic expressions

EXPANDING ALGEBRAIC EXPRESSIONS

1 Multiply the number or term outside the grouping symbol by the

Example 7: Expanding algebraic expressions 1C

Expand 5(2 y − 3).

Example 8: Expanding algebraic expressions 1C

Expand −(m − 5).